Home

Waveforms - Artisan Technology Group

image

Contents

1. Keyword Parameter Form Default 3152A HS Standard Waveforms Commands SOURce SHAPe SINusoid TRlangle SQUare PULSe RAMP SINC SIN v 0600A GAUSsian EXPonential NOISe DC SINusoid PHASe 0 to 360 0 v 0700A POWer 1to9 1 v 0701A TRlangle PHASe 0 to 360 0 v 0710A POWer 1to9 1 v 0711A SQUare DCYCIe 0 to 99 9 50 v 0720A PULSe DELay 0 to 99 9 10 v 0730A WIDth 0 to 99 9 10 v 0731A TRANssition LEADing 0 to 99 9 10 v 0732A TRAiling 0 to 99 9 10 v 0733A RAMP DELay 0 to 99 9 10 v 0740A TRANssition LEADing 0 to 99 9 10 v 0741A TRAiling 0 to 99 9 10 v 0742A SINC NCYCIe 4 to 100 10 v 0790A GAUSsian EXPonent 1 to 200 10 v 0750A EXPonential EXPonent 100 to 100 10 v 0760A DC VOLTage 100 to 100 100 v 0770A 5 10 Programming Reference EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A Table 5 1 3152B SCPI Command Summary for 3152A Emulation continued 3152B User Manual Keyword Parameter Form Default 3152A HS Arbitrary Waveforms Commands FORMat WAVE NORMal USER Error not supported v 0100A RESolution 12BIT 16BIT 12BIT INSTrument
2. MODulation DPULse HALFcycle COUNter Keyword Parameter Form Default 3152A HS Output Control Commands OUTPut SHUNt OFF ON 0 1 Error not 0250A supported ECLTrg lt n gt lt n gt 0 to 1 0 STATe OFF ON 0 1 0 0 v 0210B FILTer v LPASs v FREQuency rectal ee 60MHz 120 MHz 20M v 0201A STATe OFF ON 0 1 0 v 0202A LOAD 50 to 1e6 50 0012A STATe OFF ON 0 1 0 v 0200A SYNC v STATe OFF ON 0 1 0 v 0241A POSition v POINt 0 to 1e6 1 0 to 2 4e6 1 with option 1 2 0 v 0242A SOURce BIT LCOMplete SSYNc HCLock PULSe ZEROcross BIT v 0240A WIDTh 4 to n 8 4 v 0243A TRIGger v SOURce BIT LCOMPIete INTernal EXTernal BIT v 0220A TTLTrg lt n gt lt n gt 0to7 0 v STATe OFF ON 0 1 0 0 v 0230B SOURCce ROSCillator SOURce INTernal EXTernal CLK10 INT CLK10 0028A FREQuency v EXTernal v 042008 CW 10e 3 to 100e6 MINimum MAXimum 1e6 v 0400A RASTer 10e 6 to 250e6 MINimum MAXimum 1e6 v 0410A SOURce INTernal EXTernal ECLTrg0 LBUS INT v 0411A VOLTage v LEVel v AMPLitude 10e 3 to 16 MINimum MAXimum 5 v 0500A OFFSet 7 992 to 7 992 0 v 0501A PHASe OFFSet 0 to 1e6 1 0 to 2e6 1 with option 2 0 0027A FUNG tion MODE FlXed USER SEQuence SWEep calculated FIX v 0610A Legacy Mode defaults to CLK10 Modern Mode defaults to INT EADS North America Test and Services
3. Keyword Parameter Form Default 3152A HS Output Control Commands OUTPut SHUNt OFF ON 0 1 Error not supported v 0250A ECLTrg lt n gt lt n gt 0 to 1 STATe OFF ON 0 1 0 0 v 0210B FILTer LPASs FREQuency 20MHz 25MHz 50MHz 20MHz 25MHz 25M 20MHz 0201A STATe OFF ON 0 1 0 0202A STATe OFF ON 0 1 0 v 0200A SYNC STATe OFF ON 0 1 0 v 0241A POSition POINt 2 to 523288 even numbers 2 v 0242A SOURce BIT LCOMplete SSYNc HCLock PULSe BIT 0240A WIDTh 2 to 500 2 0243A TRIGger SOURce BIT LCOMPIete INTernal EXTernal BIT v 0220A TTLTrg lt n gt lt n gt 0to7 STATe OFF ON 0 1 0 0 v 0230B SOURCce FREQuency EXTernal v 042008 CW 100e 6 to 100e6 MINimum MAXimum 166 v 0400A RASTer 100e 3 to 250e6 MINimum MAXimum 166 v 0410A SOURce INTernal EXTernal ECLTrg0 INT v 0411A VOLTage LEVel AMPLitude 10e 3 to 16 MINimum MAXimum v 0500A OFFSet 7 992 to 7 992 0 v 0501A FUNGtion MODE FlXed USER SEQuence SWEep calculated FIX v 0610A EADS North America Test and Services Programming Reference 5 9 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A Table 5 1 3152B SCPI Command Summary for 3152A Emulation continued
4. Keyword Parameter Form Default 3152A HS HALFoycle DELay 200e 9 to 20 1e 6 0139A DCYCle 0 to 99 99 50 0138A FREQuency 10e 3 to 1e6 1e6 0140A PHASe 0 to 360 0 0141A SHAPe SINusoid TRlangle SQUare SIN 0142A HALFcycle DELay lt delay gt HS Syntax 0139A lt float gt Description Programs the interval of which the output idles between half cycles The idle level is normally 0 V except if programmed otherwise with the VOLT OFFS command Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt delay gt 200e 9 to 20 Numeric 1e 6 Sets the delay time interval between half cycles in units of seconds Response The 3152B returns the half cycle delay value in units of seconds HALFcycle DCYCle lt duty cycle gt HS Syntax 0138A lt float gt Description Programs the duty cycle of the square waveform when the half cycle square shape is selected Note that this command has no effect on the standard square wave duty cycle Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt duty cycle gt 0 to 99 99 Numeric 50 Sets the delay time interval between half cycles in units of seconds Response The 3152B returns the square wave duty cycle value in units of percent 5 98 Programming Reference EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual H
5. Triggered FM Equipment Oscilloscope function generator EADS North America Test and Services Performance Checks 6 25 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A Standard Waveforms preparation 1 Configure the oscilloscope as follows Time Base 0 2 ms Sampling Rate 50 MS s at least Trace A View Jitter Type FREQ CLK Trigger source Channel 2 positive slope Amplitude 1 V div Connect the 3152B output to the oscilloscope input channel 1 Connect the 3152B SYNC to the oscilloscope input channel 2 Configure the function generator as follows Frequency 1 kHz Run Mode Continuous Waveform Square wave Amplitude 2V 5 Connect the function generator output connector to the 3152B TRIG IN connector 6 Configure model 3152B controls as follows Waveform Modulated Modulation FM Mod Run Mode Triggered Carrier Freq 1 MHz Mod Frequency 10 kHz 0 9 Deviation 500 kHz Sync On Output On Test Procedure 1 Verify triggered FM standard waveforms operation on the oscilloscope as follows Waveform Triggered sine waves Mod Frequency 10 kHz Trigger Period 1 ms Max Deviation 1 25 MHz Min Deviation 750 kHz Test Results Pass Fail FM Burst Standard Equipment Oscilloscope function generator Waveforms Preparation 1 Configure the
6. 2 Run the resource manager 3 Launch the firmware updater utility as shown in Figure 7 4 Resource Name Select the resource name of device w Firmware Details File Figure 7 4 Firmware Updater Opening Screen 7 32 Adjustments and Firmware Update EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual 4 Use the Resource Name list box to select the instrument to be updated as shown in Figure 7 5 updater Resource Name Firmware Details File Browse Figure 7 5 Browsing for a Resource 5 Click the Browse button to select the firmware data file When the file is located the updater window will look like Figure 7 6 updater Resource Name VXIO 2 INSTR v Update Firmware Details File C Worklri3100 v1 0 bin Figure 7 6 Ready to Click the Update Button 6 Click on the Update button to initiate downloading of the firmware file to the instrument Progress of the download will be shown as in Figure 7 7 Be sure to keep the VXI chassis powered on during the entire download process EADS North America Test and Services Adjustments and Firmware Update 7 33 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A updater Resource Name
7. Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual 4 14 ArbConnection Publication No 980935 Rev A Memory Partition Table x SegmNo Segment Size Append 1000 ES 2000 SS 436 Delete 64 Clear All a ON 3 m Data Save Download Close Figure 4 9 Memory Partition Table The two main fields in the segment table are Segm No segment number and Segment Size Segm No is an index field that can have values from 1 to 16 k The segment size is always associated with the segment number You may program any segment size from 16 10 in legacy mode to the capacity of the memory Click on the Append button to add a segment at the end of the segment list If you click a segment it will highlight and the Append button becomes an Insert button Use the Insert button to insert a segment before the highlighted segment Use Delete button to delete the highlighted segment The Clear All button removes all segments from the table and lets you start a new segment table Click on the Close button discard of the contents of the dialog box without saving your last actions and to remove the Segment Table from the screen The Save button saves the current session so that you may continue to configure the Memory Partition table from the same point later on The Download button updates the 3152B with the present segment table settings Q TIP The Memory Partition table d
8. Sr Time units ms el Level Units M sl Limit Increments og See Pulse currently not specified EADS North America Test and Services Figure 4 49 Selecting Pulse Editor Options Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com ArbConnection 4 63 3152B User Manual Using the Pulse Editor 4 64 ArbConnection Publication No 980935 Rev A Design Units As you design your pulse pattern it is easiest to design it using the same engineering units as are used in your pulse specification Time Units Select between us ms and s for the pulse interval Level Units Select between mV or V for the amplitude level The ms and V units will be used in the example to follow Memory management There are two options in the memory management group Do Not Override Loaded Segments makes sure that Pulse Composer does not overwrite waveforms already stored in memory Allow Pulse Design With No Limitations allows Pulse Composer to overwrite waveforms already stored in memory Pulse Transition management The pulse transition management parameter defines for the program how many waveform points will be used to step from one amplitude level to another amplitude level The longer the transition time the more steps the program will need to smooth the transition Allow System Control Lets the 3152B decide how to make the transitions efficient in terms o
9. We can also be reached at helpdesk eads nadefense com i Use the original packing material when returning the instrument Reshipment to EADS North America Test and Services for calibration or Instructions servicing The original shipping container and associated packaging material will provide the necessary protection for safe reshipment If the original packing material is unavailable contact EADS North America Test and Services Customer Support for information EADS North America Test and Services Adjustments and Firmware Update 8 1 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A This page was left intentionally blank 8 2 Product Support EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual Appendix A 3152B Specifications Outputs Main Output Channels Connector Protection Standby Amplitude Resolution Accuracy measured at 1kHz into 500 DC Offset Range Resolution Accuracy Square Wave Pulse Performance Rise Fall Time 10 90 Aberration Sync Output Connector Level Sync Type Width Position Filters Description EADS North America Test and Services 1 Front panel BNC Impedance 50 Q 1 Short Circuit to Case Ground 10 s max Output On or
10. 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual Chapter 7 Adjustments and Firmware Update What s in Thi This chapter provides adjustment information and the firmware update at s gt procedure for the 3152B VXIbus Arbitrary Waveform generator Chapter A A WARNING The procedures described in this section are for use only RISK OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK A by qualified service personnel Many of the steps covered munn in this section may expose the individual to potentially lethal voltages that could result in personal injury or death if normal safety precautions are not observed A CAUTION ALWAYS PERFORM DISASSEMBLY REPAIR AND CAUTION CLEANING AT A STATIC SAFE WORKSTATION SENSITIVE ELECTRONIC DEVICES DO NOT SHIP OR STORE NEAR ATIC ELECTROMAGNETIC MAGNETIC OR RADIOACTIVE FIELDS Performance Do not attempt to calibrate the instrument before verifying first that the instrument is in working order A complete set of specifications is Checks listed in Appendix A If the instrument fails to perform within the specified limits the instrument must be tested to find the source of the problem If there is a reasonable suspicion that an electrical problem exists within the 3152B perform a complete performance check as given in Chapter 6 to verify the instrument EADS North America Test and Services Adjustments and Firmware Update 7 1 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation
11. Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Re Triggered Run Mode Gated Run Mode 3 8 Operation Publication No 980935 Rev A Re triggered mode is a special case of Triggered mode where after a valid trigger event the generator automatically self issues triggers separated by a programmable delay The delay interval is measured from the end point of the waveform to the start point of the next waveform cycle Use the following commands to place the instrument in re triggered mode and to program the delay between events init cont off Turns Continuous mode off changing to an interrupted mode If you have not selected a specific interrupted run mode since power up the generator will automatically be placed in Triggered mode trig retr 1 Turns on Re triggered mode trig retr del lt value gt Sets the re trigger delay time The re trigger delay is measured from the last point of the waveform cycle to the first point of the next waveform cycle lt trigger event gt Starts the re trigger generator You may select the source of trigger events from a number of inputs such as software trigger front panel input or VXIbus backplane trigger lines The waveform will continue to re trigger unless you change the run mode or turn off power Use the following commands to restore continuous run mode trig retr 0 This turns off Re triggered mode
12. 2 designates the number of digits that follow 12 is the number of bytes to follow This number must divide by 4 The generator accepts binary data as 32 bit integers which are sent in two byte words Therefore the total number of bytes is always 4 times the number of segments For example 36 bytes are required to download 9 segments to the segment table The IEEE STD 488 2 definition of Definite Length Arbitrary Block Data format is demonstrated in Figure 5 1 The transfer of definite length arbitrary block data must terminate with the EOI bit set This way carriage return CR OdH and line feed LF 0aH characters can be used as segment table data points and will not cause unexpected termination of the arbitrary block data Figure 5 4 shows the organization of the 32 bit word for the segment start address and size There are a number of points you should be aware of before you organize the data 32 19 15 7 0 sze x vous TRUNCATE Figure 5 4 Segment Address and Size Example ech The minimum number of segments is 1 and the maximum number of segments is 16k 2 Maximum segment size depends on your installed option With the basic 3152B you can program a segment of up to 1 Meg points 3 Segment table data has 32 bit values of which are used for segment size Therefore data for each segment must have 4 bytes 4 The number of bytes in a complete segment table must divide by 4 The 3152B has no control over d
13. 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual 4 66 ArbConnection Publication No 980935 Rev A Index 4 Level 0 Time interval 0 1 Cumulative Time 0 6 Index 5 Level 0 Time interval 0 4 Cumulative Time 1 0 Note that as you build the segments that the pulse is being drawn on the screen as you type in the parameters and the specified point is marked with a red dot Also note that the Cumulative Time column is updated automatically with the cumulative time lapse from the start of the pulse Section Structure The term Section Structure is used to define the pulse train s common properties There are four parameters that can be programmed in this group Index Level Time Interval and Cumulative Time Index Is added automatically as you program pulse segments The index line is highlighted as you point and click on pulse segments on the Pulse Editor screen Level Specifies that peak level of the programmed segment As you build the pulse the level window is expended automatically to fit the required amplitude range Time Interval Specifies the time that will lapse for the current index level You can program the time interval and the cumulative time will be adjusted accordingly Cumulative Time Specifies the time that will lapse from the start of the current pulse section You can program the cumulative time and the time interval will be adjusted accordingly Section Properties T
14. A rtisan Artisan Technology Group is your source for quality TecmologyGrap new and certified used pre owned equipment FAST SHIPPING AND SERVICE CENTER REPAIRS WE BUY USED EQUIPMENT DELIVERY Experienced engineers and technicians on staff Sell your excess underutilized and idle used equipment TENS OF THOUSANDS OF at our full service in house repair center We also offer credit for buy backs and trade ins IN STOCK ITEMS www artisantg com WeBuyEquipment 7 EQUIPMENT DEMOS HUNDREDS OF Instra zer REMOTE INSPECTION LOOKING FOR MORE INFORMATION MANUFACTURERS Remotely inspect equipment before purchasing with Visit us on the web at www artisantg com 7 for more our interactive website at www instraview com information on price quotations drivers technical LEASING MONTHLY specifications manuals and documentation RENTALS ITAR CERTIFIED EE Contact us 888 88 SOURCE sales artisantg com www artisantg com Racal Instruments 3152B VXIbus Arbitrary Waveform Generator User Manual Also including the 3151B 3100M and 3100R Publication No 980935 Rev A EADS North America Test and Services a division of EADS North America Inc 4 Goodyear Irvine CA 92618 Tel 800 722 2528 949 859 8999 Fax 949 859 7139 info eads nadefense com sales eads nadefense com helpdesk eads nadefense com http www eads nadefense com EADS _ NORTH AMERICA PUBLICATION DATE 1 22 2009 Copyright 2009 by EADS North
15. Configure the Oscilloscope as follows Termination 50 20 dB feedthrough attenuator at the oscilloscope input Setup As required for the test Connect the 3152B output to the oscilloscope input Configure the function generator as follows Frequency 10 kHz Run Mode Triggered Waveform Square wave Amplitude Adjust for TTL level on 50 Q Connect the function generator output to the 3152B TRIG IN connector Connect the 3152B to the Oscilloscope input Configure the 3152B as follows SCLK 100 MS s Waveform Sequence Seq Advance Step Amplitude 2V Trigger Source External Output On Performance Checks 6 17 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A 7 Using ArbConnection prepare and download the following waveform Segment 1 Sine 1000 points Segment 2 Triangle 1000 points Segment 3 Square 1000 points Segment 4 Sinc 1000 points Segment 5 Gaussian Pulse 1000 points 8 Using ArbConnection build and download the following sequence table Step 1 Segment 1 loop 1 Step 2 Segment 2 loop 1 Step 3 Segment 3 loop 1 Step 4 Segment 4 loop 1 Step 5 Segment 5 loop 1 Test Procedure 1 From ArbConnection click on the Manual Trigger and observe that the waveforms advance through the sequence table repeatedly Test Results Pass Fail Di Note Le
16. ESB on User Request ESE128 ESB Power on In general whenever the 3152B receives an invalid SCPI command it automatically generates an error Errors are stored ina special error queue and may be retrieved from this buffer one at a time Errors are retrieved in first in first out FIFO order The first error returned is the first error that was stored When you have read all errors from the queue the generator responds with a 0 No error message If more than 30 errors have occurred the last error stored in the queue is replaced with 350 Queue Overflow No additional errors are stored until you remove errors from the queue If no errors have occurred when you read the error queue the generator responds with 0 No error The error queue is cleared when power has been shut off or after a CLS command has been executed The RST command does not clear the error queue Use the following command to read the error queue SYSTem ERRor EADS North America Test and Services Programming Reference 5 121 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A Errors have the following format the error string may contain up to 80 characters 102 Syntax error A complete listing of the errors that can be detected by the generator is given below 100 Command error When the generator cannot detect more specifi
17. Factory defaults after RST are shown in the Default column Parameter range and low and high limits are listed where applicable EADS North America Test and Services Programming Reference 5 43 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A Table 5 5 Standard Waveforms Control Commands Summary Keyword Parameter Form Default 3152A HS SOURce SHAPe SINusoid TRlangle SQUare PULSe RAMP SINC SIN v 0600A GAUSsian EXPonential NOISe DC SINusoid PHASe 0 to 360 0 v 0700A POWer 1109 1 v 0701A TRlangle PHASe 0 to 360 0 v 0710A POWer 1to9 1 M 0711A SQUare v DCYCle 0 to 99 99 50 v 0720A PULSe DELay 0 to 99 999 10 v 0730A WIDth 0 to 99 999 10 v 0731A TRANsition LEADing 0 to 99 999 10 v 0732A TRAiling 0 to 99 999 10 v 0733A RAMP v DELay 0 to 99 99 10 v 0740A TRANsition LEADing 0 to 99 99 10 v 0741A TRAiling 0 to 99 99 10 v 0742A SINC NCYCle 4 to 100 10 v 0790A GAUSsian v EXPonent 1 to 200 10 M 0750A EXPonential EXPonent 100 to 100 10 v 0760A DC VOLTage 100 to 100 100 v 0770A AMPLitude 8 to 8 5 0046A FUNCtion SHAPe SINusoid TRlangle SQUare PULSe RAMP SINC GAUSsian EXPonential DC NOISe HS Syntax 0600A lt 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 gt
18. Frequency As required by the test Wave Square Amplitude 500 mV 2 Connect the function generator to the 3152B TRIG IN connector 3 Configure the 3152B as follows Auxiliary Function Counter Timer Function Period Trigger Level 0V Test Procedure 1 Perform Period Accuracy tests using Table 6 29 Table 6 29 Period Measurement Accuracy Function 3152B Generator Setting Error Limits Counter Reading 10kHz 100 0us 100ns J 100kHz 10 00us 100ns 6 36 Performance Checks EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual 2 Change the counter timer function to Period Averaged 3 With the last function generator setting in Table 31 verify that the period reading is 10 00000 us 50 ps Test Results Pass Fail Pulse Width Equipment Function Generator with at least 1 ppm accuracy Preparation 1 Configure the function generator as follows Frequency As required by the test Wave Square Duty Cycle As required by the test Amplitude 500 mV 2 Connect the function generator to the 3152B TRIG IN connector 3 Configure the 3152B as follows Auxiliary Function Counter Timer Function Pulse Width Trigger Level OV Test Procedure 1 Perform Pulse Width Accuracy tests using Table 6 30 Table 6 30 Pulse Width Measurement Accur
19. Function ACV Range 10 V 2 Connect the 3152B output to the DMM input Terminate the 3152B output at the DMM input with the 50 Q feedthrough termination 3 Configure the 3152B as follows Frequency 1 kHz Output On Amplitude 10 V Mode Modulation Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETUP 26 for a DMM reading of 3 535 V 35 mV Setup 43 5 V Amplitude Amplifier In Modulation Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50 Q feedthrough termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function ACV Range 10 V 2 Connect the 3152B output to the DMM input Terminate the 3152B output at the DMM input with the 50 Q feedthrough termination 3 Configure the 3152B as follows Frequency 1 kHz Output On Amplitude 5V Mode Modulation Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETUP 27 for a DMM reading of 1 767 V 20 mV EADS North America Test and Services Adjustments and Firmware Update 7 23 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A Setup 44 1 V Amplitude Amplifier In Modulation Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50 Q feedthrough termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function ACV Range 1V 2 Connect the 3152B output to the DMM input Terminate the 3152B output at the DMM input with the 50 feedthrough termination 3 Configure the 3152B a
20. Programming Reference 5 15 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No Table 5 2 3152B SCPI Command Summary continued 980935 Rev A Keyword Parameter Form Default 3152A HS Standard Waveforms Commands SOURCce v SHAPe SINusoid TRlangle SQUare PULSe RAMP SINC SIN v 0600A GAUSsian EXPonential NOISe DC SINusoid v PHASe 0 to 360 0 M 0700A POWer 1to9 1 v 0701A TRlangle v PHASe 0 to 360 0 v 0710A POWer 1to9 1 v 0711A SQUare v DCYCle 0 to 99 99 50 v 0720A PULSe v DELay 0 to 99 999 10 M 0730A WIDth 0 to 99 999 10 M 0731A TRANssition M LEADing 0 to 99 999 10 v 0732A TRAiling 0 to 99 999 10 v 0733A RAMP v DELay 0 to 99 99 10 v 0740A TRANssition v LEAD ing 0 to 99 99 10 v 0741A TRAiling 0 to 99 99 10 v 0742A SING NCYCIe 4 to 100 10 v 0790A GAUSsian v EXPonent 1 to 200 10 v 0750A EXPonential EXPonent 100 to 100 10 v 0760A DC v VOLTage 100 to 100 100 v 0770A AMPLitude 8 to 8 5 0046A Arbitrary Waveforms Commands FORMat v WAVE NORMal USER Error not supported v 0100A RESolution 16BIT 12BIT 16BIT 0102A BORDer NORMal SWAPped NORM v 0101A INSTrument LEGacy MODern LEG MOD 0189A TRACe v
21. if you create a sine waveform the 3152B will generate frequency modulated signal that will follow the sine pattern The resolution and accuracy of the modulated waveform is unsurpassed and can only be duplicated by mathematical simulation The FM composer is loaded with many features and options so use the following paragraphs to learn how to create and download modulating waveforms to the 3152B using the FM Composer Invoke the FM Composer from Panels bar The Wave Composer has three sections Commands bar Toolbar and Waveform screen Refer to Figure 4 53 throughout the description of these parts fa FM Wave Composer gt C Program Files Tabor Electronics ArbConnection 4 0 1MP_Mot FmDem loj x File Edit View Wave Download About Oe MM S SEM ZTE LL NS watenonf 1024 Devisienf 750000 EC Es obion The Menu Bar EADS North America Test and Services ArbConnection 4 73 L Anchor 0 R Anchor 1023 Vertical Scale 150e3Hz 18750HzDiv Horizontal Scale 1kPts 0 1kPts Div Figure 4 57 FM Composer Opening Screen The FM Composer menu bar is an exact duplication of the menu bar of the Wave composer It provides access to standard Windows commands such as File and View Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual File Menu Wave Commands 4 74 ArbConnection Publication No 980935 Rev A The File menu has 4
22. j Mode of Operation C Freely Select Mode of Operation e Force Pulse Train to Single EH Arbitrary Waveform Model Farce Pulse Sections to de Segments Sequenced Waveform Mode gt Design Units Time units ms v Level Units M m Memory Management C Do not Override Loaded Segments Allow Pulse Design with no Limitation r Pulse Transition Management amp Allow System Control Limthorements Cancel Figure 4 45 Pulse Editor Options 4 60 ArbConnection Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation EADS North America Test and Services Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual Tools Menu The Tools menu lets you download pulse trains You can also clear the entire pulse waveform memory using the Clear memory command I Note The Clear Memory command affects the entire waveform memory of the 3152B Be careful not to erase memory segments that you need to use and that haven t already been backed up The Pulse Composer The Pulse Composer toolbar Figure 4 46 contains icons for editing Toolbar the waveform graph icons for saving and loading waveforms fields for selecting an active channel and more The Toolbar is shown in the figure below The icons from left to right operate the following functions New waveform Open an existing waveform file Save pulse train Save pulse train As Print the screen and o
23. 16 is the number of bytes to follow This number must divide by 8 The generator accepts binary data as 64 bit integers which are sent in two byte words Therefore the total number of bytes is always eight times the number of sequence steps For example 16 bytes are required to download 2 sequence steps to the sequence table The IEEE STD 488 2 definition of Definite Length Arbitrary Block Data format is demonstrated in Figure 5 1 The transfer of definite length arbitrary block data must terminate with the EOI bit set This way carriage return CR OdH and line feed LF 0aH characters can be used as sequence data and will not cause unexpected termination of the arbitrary block data Figure 5 5 shows how to prepare the 64 bit word for the sequence step repeat mixed mode and sync bit Figure 5 6 shows how to organize the 64 bit word for the sequence step repeat and mixed mode flag There are a number of points you should be aware of before you start preparing the data 1 The minimum number of sequencer steps is 1 and the maximum number is 4096 5 66 Programming Reference EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual 2 The number of bytes in a complete sequence table must divide by 8 The 3152B has no control over data sent to its sequence table during data transfer Therefore wrong
24. 980935 Rev A 1 Perform Square Wave Characteristics tests using Table 6 11 Table 6 11 Square Wave Characteristics at 6 V Parameter Tested Error Limits Oscilloscope Reading Rise FallTime lt Sns pp lt 6 10mV CE Over undershoot __ lt 6 10mV TI Sine Wave This tests the characteristics of the sine waveform including distortion ae spectral purity and flatness Tests are done for both the DAC route Characteristics arbitrary and standard waveforms and the DDS route CW and modulated waveforms Sine Wave Equipment Distortion Analyzer Spectrum Analyzer and Distortion DAC Ree Output Preparation 1 Connect 3152B output to the distortion analyzer input Configure the 3152B as follows SCLK As required by the test Waveform Arbitrary Amplitude 5V Output On 2 Using ArbConnection prepare and download the following waveform Wavelength As required by the test Waveform Sine wave Test Procedure 1 Perform sine wave distortion tests using Table 6 12 Table 6 12 Sine Wave Distortion DAC Output Tests 3152B SCLK Sine Wave 3152B Reading Settings Points Frequenc Limits Distortion Reading 4 MS s 1 000 kHz 40 Ms s 10 00 kHz 100 Ms s 50 00 kHz 100 Ms s 100 00 kHz Sine Wave Spectral Equipment Spectrum Analyzer Purity DAC Output Preparation 1 Connect 3152B output to the spectrum analyzer input Use a 50Q and 20dB feedthrough termination at the spectrum analyzer inp
25. 980935 Rev A 25 MHz Bessel 50 MHz Bessel 60 MHz Elliptic 120 MHz Elliptic Define how waveforms start and stop Run modes description applies to all waveform types and functions except where noted otherwise Continuously free run output of a waveform Waveform generation can be enabled and disabled from a remote interface only Upon trigger outputs one waveform cycle Last cycle always completed Trigger can be internal or external Upon trigger outputs a single or multiple pre programmed number of waveform cycles Does not apply to Sequence Mode Burst is programmable from 1 through 1M cycles Bust triggering can be internal or external Transition or level enables or disables generator output Last cycle always completed Asynchronous timer generates triggers repeatedly 1 us to 20 s External trigger input is enabled Front panel BNC 10 kQ 10 V 10 mV 100 mVrms 30 Vrms DC to 5 MHz Positive Negative transitions selectable 210 ns Trigger commands from a remote controller only TTLTRGO 7 inputs or outputs programmable 6 sample clock cycles 150 ns 0 100 ns to 20 s system delay 20 ns 6 sample clock cycles 150 ns 100 ns to 20s 20 ns 3 sample clock cycles 20 ns 1 sample clock period EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A Frequency Time Accuracy
26. 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual Chapter 1 Introduction In e This manual contains information for operating and servicing the What s in This Racal Instruments 3151B 3152B 3100M 3152B and 3100R Manual 3152B VXIbus Arbitrary Waveform Generators Generally what is applicable to the 3152B is the same for the other three models except where otherwise stated Throughout this manual we will refer to all four units as the 3152B When there are differences in the specific models the differences are described in detail More specific information on the four models is included in the section Carrier Configuration Different Model Numbers later in this chapter Legacy mode information can be found in Chapters 3 and 5 The manual is divided into functional chapters which guide you through the various operations that are necessary to install and to prepare the instrument for its intended operation The following lists the chapters that are included in this manual e Chapter 1 provides general description of the instrument and identifies key controls and features It also describes briefly all functions and features that are available for the user e Chapter 2 describes hardware and software installation e Chapter 3 provides descriptions of all functions features run modes and operating modes It also describes in detail how to operate the instrument e Chapter 4 demonstrates the capability of ArbConnection to control t
27. Arbitrary Waveform Memory Operation ENNEN 6 24 Wavetormn Memory ERE EEE EE ee eee ere 6 24 Modulated Waveform Operation Lumacneinemnteinmiseundeaennvsvnvida EENS 6 24 FM KREE WE sviende d 6 25 Triggered FM Standard Wavetoms nenne 6 25 FM Burst Standard WAVGOINS vcccescs desse ammetateatariereenstieemenenens 6 26 EADS North America Test and Services vii Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A Gated FM Standard Waveforms AAA 6 27 Re triggered FM Bursts Standard WaveformS sssseesssseresesrreerertetsstrrnsrrrnnnrrnnnssererneet 6 28 FM Arbitrary ES RR TE RE 6 29 MN 6 29 FSK tege 6 30 PSK ET EE EEE NE EE EE 6 31 FEE TE ADEN STE EE AE ER EE 6 31 Variable Dwell Time Frequency Hopping 2 ccceeesseeeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeesesesseeneeseeeeeees 6 32 Fix Dwell Time Frequency EEN dees 6 33 Amplitude HOPPIN e BEE 6 33 ENE er EE EE EN EE 6 34 Auxiliary Counter Timer Operation rrrrrannnvrnnnnnnnvnnnrnnnrrrnnnnnnrrnnnnennrrrnnsrnnnnnnnnnnnnennerrnnrnnnsernnn 6 35 2 WE 6 36 Period Period ANAL E 6 36 Pulse Narve 6 37 Toaze Innes 6 37 Chapter 7 Adjustments and Firmware Update rrrrrnnnnnnnvvvvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnvvvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnen 7 1 Whats in This VAST se sas cartes RE TR EEE 7 1 Performance GMOS sidsiececnacticadtianncceeancten SES DEE nde EEN 7 1 Sg ue ene e S esserne r N R e EEA EE a Nt 7 2 W
28. Download Summary 4 72 ArbConnection It is important to understand that when you download a pulse waveform from the Pulse Composer the parameters and mode of operation of the 3152B might be altered The download summary shows what the new mode of operation will be so that you can reject the new settings if you do not agree to the changes Once you press the Accept button the waveform will be downloaded to the generator and the modes and parameters will be updated as shown in the dialog box If you are already familiar with the changes and do not wish to see the download summary every time you download a pulse waveform you can check the box and it will not be shown on future downloads You can restore this summary by selecting the View gt gt Download Summary menu item Mode of Operation This describes mode of operation setting to be used after completion of the pulse download This field could display one of two options Arbitrary or Sequenced Pay attention to the note that says Select from the menu View gt gt Options Since for this example we checked the Force Pulse Train to Single Segment see Figure 4 49 so that the generator forces the waveform mode to be Arbitrary and thus only one segment can be loaded with the pulse train Memory Management By selecting the arbitrary mode of operation the pulse train is forced to a single segment This summary shows which segment has been populated and how much memory is
29. Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Environmental Conditions Warm up Period Recommended Test Equipment Publication No 980935 Rev A The 3152B can operate from 0 C to 50 C Adjustments should be performed under laboratory conditions having an ambient temperature of 25 C 5 C and at relative humidity of less than 80 Turn on the power to the 3152B and allow it to warm up for at least 30 minutes before beginning the adjustment procedure If the instrument has been subjected to conditions outside these ranges allow at least one additional hour for the instrument to stabilize before beginning the adjustment procedure Most equipment is subject to a small amount of drift when it is first turned on To ensure accuracy turn on the power to the Model 3152B and allow it to warm up for at least 30 minutes before beginning the performance test procedure Recommended equipment for adjustments is listed in Table 7 1 Test instruments other than those listed may be used only if their specifications equal or exceed the required characteristics Also listed below are accessories required for calibration Table 7 1 Recommended Calibration for Adjustments Equipment Model No Manufacturer Oscilloscope with jitter package LC684D LeCroy Digital Multimeter 2000 Keithley Frequency Counter Rubidium reference 2202R Racal Instruments Function Generator with manual trigger WW2571A
30. Keyword Parameter Form Default 3152A HS Instrument Control Commands INSTrument MODE NORMal FAST NORM v 0150A SELect 1 2 1 0008A COUPIe MODE MASTer SLAVe MAST 0002A DELay 0 to 20 0 0003A PATH ADJacent ECLT LBUS ADJ 0191A SLAVe DELete lt LAN IP address gt 0040 INSert lt 3152B gt lt LAN IP address gt 00051 STATe OFF ON 0 1 0 0006A Run Mode Commands INITiate v IMMediately v CONTinuous OFFJON 0 1 1 v 1110A TRIGger v IMMediate v 11000 BURSt v STATe OFF ON 0 1 0 v 1120A COUNt 1 to 1000000 1 v 1121A DELay 0 10 to 2e6 even numbers 0 0 OFF M 1131A STATe OFF ON 0 1 0 0188A TIMe 100e 9 to 20 100 0156A GATE v MODe LEVel TRANsition LEV 0157A STATe OFF ON 0 1 0 v 1150A LEVel 10 to 10 0 1 6 v 1180A SOURce vi ADVance EXTernal INTernal TTLTrg lt n gt ECLTrg1 BUS EXT v 1140A SLOPe POSitive NEGative POS v 1160A RETRigger STATe OFF ON 0 1 0 0187A TIMe 100e 9 to 20 100 0161A TIMer 1e 6 to 20 15e 6 v 1170A Legacy Mode defaults to 0 V Modern Mode defaults to 1 6 V 5 14 Programming Reference EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A Table 5 2 3152B SCPI Command Summary continued 3152B User Manual
31. OFF ON O0 1 1 v 1110A EADS North America Test and Services Programming Reference 5 37 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A Keyword Parameter Form Default 3152A HS TRIGger IMMediate M 11000 BURSt STATe OFF ON 0 1 0 M 1120A COUNt 1 to 1000000 1 M 1121A DELay 0 10 to 2e6 points even numbers 0 0 OFF M 1131A STATe OFF ON 0 1 0 0188A TlMe 100e 9 to 20 100 0156A GATE MODe LEVel TRANsition LEV 0157A STATe OFF ON 0 1 0 vi 1150A LEVel 10 to 10 1 6 v 1180A SOURce ADVance EXTernal INTernal TTLTrg lt n gt BUS EXT 1140A SLOPe POSitive NEGative POS M 1160A RETRigger STATe OFF ON 0 1 0 0187A TlMe 100e 9 to 20 100 0161A TiMer 1e 6 to 20 15e 6 M 1170A INITiate CONTinuous 1 0 ON OFF HS Syntax 1110A lt 1 0 gt Description Toggles the 3152B to operate in either continuous mode INIT CONT ON 1 or in interrupted run mode INIT CONT OFF 0 Trigger subsystem commands affect the 3152B only after it is set for interrupted run mode Parameters Range Type Default Description 1 0 Discrete 1 1 selects continuous run mode 0 selects interrupted run mode In INIT CONT 0 mode you can program the 3152B to operate in triggered gated or co
32. Pass Fail 50 kHz 5 5 3 90 90 3 169 169 3 500 kHz 5 355 3 90 270 3 169 191 3 PM Operation This tests the operation of the PM function After the 3152B locks to an external trigger source the start phase of the 3152B can be modified in reference to the external signal using dc levels The dc levels are applied to the PM input and control phase shifts of 20 V Note that this test is not applicable for the 3100M 3152B and the 3100R 3152B versions PM Checks Equipment Counter DC supply source function generator Preparation 1 Configure the function generator as follows Waveform Square Amplitude 2V Output On Frequency 1 kHz 2 Using a T adapter connect the function generator output to the 3152B TRIG PLL IN connector and the other cable to the counter input Channel A Use a 50 Q feedthrough terminator at the 3152B trigger input side 3 Configure the counter as follows Function gt A gt B Input 50 Q both channels 4 Connect the 3152B output to the counter input Channel B 5 Configure the DC source as follows Amplitude As required by the test 6 Connect the DC source to the PM input 7 Configure the model 3152B as follows Function Mode Arbitrary Waveform Square Wavelength 36 points Output On PLL On Test Procedure 1 Modify the DC source settings and verify readings as specified by the tests in Tabl
33. Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual APPLy SQUare lt freq gt lt ampl gt lt offs gt lt dcycle gt HS Syntax 0303D lt float gt lt float lt float gt lt float gt Description This command changes the waveform function to standard square and programs the frequency amplitude offset and duty cycle simultaneously This command affects the output regardless of the current output function For example if the 3152B is in FM mode the 3152B will stop generating FM and will revert to the standard square waveform with parametric values as specified by this command Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt freq gt 10e 3 to Numeric 1e6 Programs the frequency of the standard square 100e6 waveform in units of Hz lt ampl gt 10e 3 to Numeric 5 Programs the amplitude of the standard square 16 waveform in units of Volts lt offs gt 7 992 to Numeric 0 Programs the offset of the standard square waveform in 7 992 units of Volts lt dcycle gt 0 to 99 99 Numeric 50 Programs the duty cycle of the standard square waveform in units of percent Response The 3152B returns the current frequency amplitude offset and duty cycle settings as in the following example 166 5 0 50 APPLy PULSe lt freq gt lt ampl gt lt offs gt lt del gt lt wid gt lt lee gt lt tre gt HS Syntax 0304G lt float gt lt float lt float gt l
34. Sequence This tests the operation of the sequence generators This also checks E the various sequence advance options operation Automatic Advance Equipment Counter Preparation 1 Configure the Counter as follows Function TOTB Measurement 2 Connect the counter channel B to the 3152B output 3 Configure the 3152B as follows 6 16 Performance Checks EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual SCLK 100 MS s Waveform Sequence Run Mode Trigger Trigger Source BUS Amplitude 2V Output On Using ArbConnection prepare and download the following waveform Segments 1to5 Wavelength 128 points Waveform 1 cycle square Using ArbConnection build and download the following sequence table Step 1 Segment 1 loop 100 000 Step 2 Segment 2 loop 100 000 Step 3 Segment 3 loop 100 000 Step 4 Segment 4 loop 100 000 Step 5 Segment 5 loop 100 000 Test Procedure 1 From ArbConnection click on the Manual Trigger button and observe that counter reading is 500 000 counts Reset counter and repeat the test a few times Every time the counter reading should be 500 000 counts exactly Test Results Pass Fail Step Advance EADS North America Test and Services Equipment Oscilloscope function generator Preparation 1
35. Single and Mixed Refer to Chapter 3 for details about these advanced modes Memory Management The Memory Management group provides access to the Memory Partition and Waveform Studio Screens The Waveform Partition button opens a screen as shown in Figure 4 9 The Waveform Studio button opens the screen shown in Figure 4 10 Instructions for using these screens are given in the following paragraphs Refer to Chapter 3 for more information about waveform memory and segment control In general the 3152B generates arbitrary waveforms but they must first be downloaded from the host computer to the 3152B waveform memory You do not have to use the entire memory when you download a waveform Model 3152B allows memory segmentation so that up to 16 k smaller waveforms may be stored in this memory There are two ways to divide the waveform memory into segments e Define a segment and load it with waveform data define the next segment and load with data etc e In ArbConnection make up one long waveform that contains many smaller segments download it to the instrument in one operation and then download a memory partition table that splits the entire waveform memory into the required segment sizes To use ArbConnection to download one long waveform and then segment it into smaller sections follow this procedure e Click Memory Partition The dialog box shown in Figure 4 9 appears Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation
36. Sync Source HCL Test Procedure 1 Observe that the SYNC output has a 50 duty cycle Test Results Pass Fail SYNC Output Pulse Equipment Oscilloscope Preparation 1 Configure the oscilloscope as follows Time Base As required by the test Amplitude 2 V div 2 Connect the 3152B output to the oscilloscope input 1 3 Connect the 3152B SYNC to the oscilloscope input 2 4 Configure model 3152B channel as follows Waveform Sine Output On Sync Output On Sync Source Pulse Sync Width 8 Sync Position 48 Test Procedure 1 Observe that the SYNC output has a width of 8 sample clock cycles and that its position is shifted by 48 sample clock periods Test Results Pass Fail 6 20 Performance Checks EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual SYNC Output Zero Equipment Oscilloscope Preparation 1 Configure the oscilloscope as follows Time Base As required by the test Amplitude 2 V div 2 Connect the 3152B output to the oscilloscope input 1 3 Connect the 3152B SYNC to the oscilloscope input 2 4 Configure model 3152B channel as follows Waveform Sinc 0 Crossing 10 Output On Sync Output On Sync Source Zero Test Procedure 1 Observe that the SYNC output has 10 sinc cy
37. T connector on the output terminal of the function generator Connect one side of the T to the 3152B TRIG IN connector and the other side of the T to the channel A input of the counter 3 Connect the 3152B output to channel B input of the counter 4 Configure the counter to TI A to B measurements 5 Using ArbConnection prepare and download the following waveform Wavelength 100 points Waveform Pulse Delay 0 1 Rise Fall 0 High Time 99 99 6 Configure the 3152B channel 1 only as follows SCLK 100 MS s Waveform Arbitrary Run Mode Triggered Trigger Level OV Trigger Delay On Delay As required for the test Amplitude 5V Trigger Source External Output On Test Procedure 1 Perform trigger delay tests using Table 6 22 Table 6 22 Trigger Delay Tests 3152B Delay Setting Error Limits Counter Reading ps 1ps230ns gt JG ims nemme LL Pp Cts issoms PP J 1 10s500ms CT Re trigger Equipment Counter ArbConnection Characteristics Preparation 1 Configure the counter as follows Function Pulse Width Measurement ChA Slope Negative 2 Connect the counter channel A to the 3152B output EADS North America Test and Services Performance Checks 6 13 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A 3 Using ArbConnection prepare and download the following waveform Wa
38. The internal oscillator determines the accuracy and stability of the entire generator The accuracy of the frequency depends on the 10 MHz reference oscillator The 3152B defaults to CLK10 which has 100 ppm accuracy and the 3100M R 3152B defaults to the internal TCXO which provides an accuracy of 1 ppm The accuracy of the output frequency tests the internal TCXO because its accuracy is much higher than the backplane CLK10 If both the internal TCXO and the backplane CLK10 are insufficient for accuracy purposes an external 10 MHz reference clock can be applied to the 3100M R 3152B or 3151B The 10 MHz external reference input is not available for the legacy 3152B Equipment Counter Preparation 1 Configure the counter as follows Termination 50 DC coupled 2 Connect the 3152B output to the counter input channel A 3 Configure the 3152B as follows Waveform Square wave Amplitude 2V Output On Frequency As specified in Table 6 2 Test Procedure 1 Perform frequency Accuracy tests using Table 6 2 Table 6 2 Frequency Accuracy 21528 Setting Error Limits_ Counter Reading tass Fail 10 0000000 Hz 1opaz PP E 100 000000 Hz ams 100000000 khz imiz PG 10 0000000 kHz 1omiz IT 100 000000 kHz 100mHz PP 1 00000000MHz_ TI tHz PP 10 0000000MHz ops 100 0000000 MHz 21008 CT d EADS North America Test and Services Performance Checks 6 3 Artisan Technology Group
39. and 1 which define when the output generates the various phases The size of the data word depends on the PSK function Below you can see how a PSK data table is constructed The PSK data table sample below shows a list of 10 shifts The 3152B will step through this list outputting either start or shifted phases depending on the data list Zero will generate start phase and One will generate shifted phase Note that the output waveform is always sinewave and that the last cycle is always completed The Sample PSK Data Array 0111010001 Parameters Name Type Description lt psk_data gt ASCII Block of ASCII data that contains information for the generator when to step from one phase setting to another PSK MARKer lt index gt HS Syntax 0090A lt integer gt Description Programs where on the data stream the 3152B will generate a pulse designated as PSK marker or index point The marker pulse is generated at the SYNC output connector Note that if you intend to program marker position you must do it before you load the PSK data list The PSK MARK command is common to all PSK modulation functions Parameters Name Range Type Default Description Zindex 1 to 4000 Numeric 1 Programs a marker pulse at an index bit position integer only Response The 3152B returns the current marker position EADS North America Test and Services Programming Reference 5 87 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guarante
40. either on or off Response For ECLTRGO the 3152B returns 0 1 if the output is on or 0 0 if the output is off For ECLTRG1 the 3152B returns 1 1 if the output is on or 1 0 if the output is off OUTPut FILTer 25M 50M 60M 120M HS Syntax 0201A lt 1 2 3 4 gt Description This command selects which filter is connected in series with the 3152B output signal Observe the following restrictions when using this command 1 Filter selection is not available when the instrument is set to output the standard sine waveform 2 The 3152A originally had three filters 20MHz 25MHz and 50MHz The 3152B has four filters 25MHz 50MHz 60MHz and 120MHz In legacy mode when you select a 3152A filter the corresponding 3152B filter is automatically selected For example for the 3152A command OUTP FILT 20M translates to OUTP FILT 25M because this is the closest cutoff frequency available In any case 3152A filter commands are accepted and filters are applied without issuing errors although the selected filter will have a slightly different cutoff frequency than the legacy model had Parameters Name Type Default Description 25M Discrete Connects a 25MHz Bessel filter into the output path 50M Discrete Connects a 50MHz Bessel filter into the output path 65M Discrete Connects a 25MHz Elliptic filter into the output path 120M Discrete Connects a 120MHz Elliptic filter into the output path Response The 3152B returns NONE 25M 50M 60M or 120
41. the sequence will generate an infinite number of 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 waveforms Each sequence step can be programmed with its own number of repeats TRIGgered Discrete In triggered advance mode the generator idles between steps until a valid trigger signal is sensed at which time its advances to the next step This mode is available only when INIT CONT is set to OFF An attempt to select the TRIG advance mode when the 3152B is in EADS North America Test and Services Programming Reference 5 67 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual STEP Discrete MIXed Discrete Response Publication No 980935 Rev A continuous operating mode will generate an error After a trigger the generator outputs one waveform cycle Then the output level idles at a DC level equal to the last point of the last generated waveform If loops repeats were programmed the output will repeat this segment every time a trigger is received Only after executing all of the programmed loops will the sequencer advance to the next sequence step in the list In stepped advance mode the sequence is advanced to the next waveform only when a valid trigger is received The output of the 3152B generates the first segment continuously until a trigger signal advances the sequencer to the next sequence step Mixed mode is a special mode that combines automatic sequence advance with stepped s
42. the 3152B output with this waveform shape Parameters The parameters group contains buttons that control the output frequency and the 10 MHz reference source The Frequency control lets you set the output frequency of the selected waveform shape When this control is selected and highlighted you may modify it using the dial keyboard or 1 H keys to adjust the readout to the required setting After you modify the reading click on the Modify Execute knob to update the 3152B with the new value EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual Arbitrary Sequence 10 MHz Ref The 10 MHz group contains buttons that control the source of the 10 MHz reference for standard waveforms The 10 MHz clock is the reference that feeds the sample clock and the DDS clock and therefore determines accuracy and stability The internal 10 MHz source has 1 PPM stability over the operating temperature range and a time stability of 1 PPM per year The accuracy of the internal source is adjustable but will shift with time and temperature When better accuracy or stability is required or when clock synchronization to other devices is necessary you may select another source The 10 MHz source options are e Internal from the built in source e External applied to the front panel 10 MHz input connector e
43. the steps get smaller and harder to see without magnification Equations are always computed as a function of the vertical Amplitude axis therefore the left side of your equation will always look as Amplitude p where p is the equation variables in units of waveform points You can write equations with up to 256 characters If the equation is too long to fit in the visible field parts to the left or right will scroll off the ends Equations are written in conventional mathematical notation You may only enter the right part of the equation The only limitation is that the equation must be of a single variable that is directly related to the current horizontal axis setting Case is not important and spaces are ignored Numbers are entered in scientific notation All calculations are done with double precision For trigonometric functions all angles are expressed in radians A number of constants are provided e which is the base of the natural logarithm pi which is the circumference of a unit diameter circle per which equals the programmed horizontal range f which equals 1 per omg which equals 2 pi f and numbers in the range of 1E120 to 1E 20 There are three classes of precedence raise to power has the highest precedence multiply and divide come second and have the lowest precedence Parentheses may be used to change the order of precedence The following table summarizes the mathematical expres
44. to master and channel 1 to servant Slot shows the slot number where ArbConnection found a specific module The location of the module is extremely important because it defines how it may be synchronized as explained in the Path description below Path defines the connection between synchronized modules This field has three options ADJ LBUS and ECLT ADJ defines a connection between two adjacent 3152B in a single 3100 carrier Notice Figure 4 23 it shows the model 3100 3152B 3152B in slot 3 After grouping in group 1 the two instruments are automatically assigned the ADJ path This can not be changed because of the nature of synchronization of two instruments in a single slot Also note that Channel 1 is now master and channel 2 is the servant LBUS defines a connection between adjacent slots using the VXI backplane local bus lines In this case the master is always on the left and the servant units are adjacent to the master on the right side It is not allowed to break the chain of instruments because local bus lines connect instruments in a daisy chained link Note in Figure 4 24 that slots 7 8 and 9 are daisy chained through the local bus The instrument in slot 7 is the master unit and the others are servants ECLT defines a connection between any slot using the VXI backplane ECLTrg lines In this case the master can be assigned to any instrument in the chassis regardless if it is on the left right or mix
45. 0 5 V amplitude 10 ms high time 1 ms rise time and 1 ms fall time From this point you may change one or more of the pulse parameters while the signal is being output Since the pulse is EADS North America Test and Services Operation 3 31 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A generated digitally the pulse shape will be computed again each time you change a parameter This may be visible as a glitch on the pulse train as the new waveform is loaded into the waveform memory You can adjust the pulse characteristics only if all of its parameters can be adjusted both in the time and amplitude domain The 3152B provides the necessary controls to do that However note that the pulse is generated digitally and therefore has some limitations to observe These limitations are discussed later in this chapter Below is a list of commands that control pulse parameters dpul per lt value gt dpul high lt value gt dpul del lt value gt dpul rise lt value gt dpul fall lt value gt dpu lev high lt value gt dpu lev low lt value gt 3 32 Operation Defines the repetition rate of the pulse The period is programmable starting at 80 ns Sets the high time which is defined as the amount of time the signal is at the high point This is not the same as pulse width which is measured at 50 of the ampl
46. 00 FREO 5 180000000e6 INIT CONT OFF TRIG SOUR BUS TRIG LEV 1 000 TRIG RETR ON TRIG RETR TIME 2 000000000e 4 Figure 4 66 Log File Example EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual Chapter 5 Programming Reference What s in This Chapter Introduction to SCPI This Chapter lists and describes the set of SCPI compatible Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments remote commands used to operate the 3152B To provide familiar formatting for users who have previously used the SCPI reference documentation the command descriptions are dealt with in a similar manner In particular each sub system s documentation starts with a short description followed by a table showing the complete set of commands in the sub system finally the effects of individual keywords and parameters are described A complete listing of all commands used for programming the 3152B as a legacy replacement is given in Table 5 1 A complete listing of all commands used for programming the 3152B in modern mode or the 3100M models in default mode is given in Table 5 2 In addition High Speed HS commands have been defined corresponding to each of the 3152A SCPI commands These commands can be used as alternatives to the SCPI command set in cases where raw speed is more important than software readab
47. 10e 3 to 10066 100e3 0082A BAUD 1 to 1066 10e3 0080A MARKer 1 to 4000 1 0083A DATA lt data array gt 008114 EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Programming Reference 5 73 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A Table 5 10 Modulated Waveform Control Commands continued Keyword Parameter Form Default 3152A HS ASK AMPLitude STARt 0 to 16 5 0064A SHIFted 0 to 16 1 0065A BAUD 1 to 10e6 10e3 0066A MARKer 1 to 1000 1 0068A DATA lt data array gt 0067 14 PSK PHASe STARt 0 to 360 0 0091A SHIFted 0 to 360 180 0092A RATE 1 to 10e6 1063 0093A DATA lt data array gt 008914 MARKer 1 to 4000 1 0090A FHOPping DWELI MODe FlXed VARiable FIX 0069A TIMe 200e 9 to 20 200e 9 0070A FlXed DATA lt data array gt 007114 VARiable DATA lt data array gt 007314 MARKer 1 to 5000 1 0072A AHOPping DWELI MODe FlXed VARiable FIX 0061A TIMe 200e 9 to 20 200e 9 0062A FIXed DATA lt data array gt 005914 VARiable DATA lt data array gt 006314 MARKer 1 to 5000 1 0060A 3D DATA lt data array gt 005214 MARKer 1 to 30000 0053A RASTer 1 to 2 5e6 1e6 0054A 5 74 Programming Reference Artisan Technology Group Qual
48. 3 The sum of all pulse parameters must not exceed the pulse period setting On or Off On generates pulse output Off generates 0 Vdc Single or double programmable Normal inverted or complemented 80 ns minimum programmed with 4 ns increments 0 ns min 1e6 s max 2e6 s max with option 1 4 ns minimum 1e3 s max 0 ns minimum 1e3 s max 0 ns minimum 163 s max actual min lt 5 ns 0 ns minimum 10 mVp p to 16 Vp p EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual Low Level 8 V to 7 992 V High Level 7 992 V to 8 V Half Cycle Waveform Generator Characteristics Description Half Cycle waveforms are the same as the standard functions except waveforms are generated as a sequence of half cycles The delay between the half cycles is programmable Function Shape Sine Triangle Square Frequency Range 0 01 Hz to 1 MHz Phase Start Range 0 to 360 0 Sine and triangle only Start Phase Resolution 0 1 Duty Cycle Range 0 to 99 99 Square only Duty Cycle Resolution 0 1 Run Modes Continuous Triggered Delay Between Half Cycles 200 ns to 20 s Applies to continuous run mode only Resolution 20 ns Counter Timer Characteristics Operation The 3152B has a special mode where the instrument type is transformed to operate as a counter timer When this mode is selected the operatio
49. 3152B User Manual Environmental Conditions Warm up Period Initial Instrument Setting Recommended Test Equipment Publication No 980935 Rev A Tests should be performed under laboratory conditions having an ambient temperature of 25 C 5 C and at relative humidity of less than 80 If the instrument has been subjected to conditions outside these ranges allow at least one additional hour for the instrument to stabilize before beginning the adjustment procedure Specifications are valid within an ambient temperature of 25 C 5 C and at relative humidity of less than 80 Below 20 C and above 30 C the specifications are degraded by 0 1 for every 1 C change Most equipment is subject to a small amount of drift when it is first turned on To ensure accuracy turn on the power to the Model 3152B and allow it to warm up for at least 30 minutes before beginning the performance test procedure To avoid confusion as to which initial setting is to be used for each test it is required that the instrument be reset to factory default values prior to each test To reset the Model 3152B to factory defaults use the factory Reset option in the System gt General Filters Panel See Figure 4 16 in Chapter 4 Recommended test equipment for troubleshooting calibration and performance checking is listed in Table 6 1 below Test instruments other than those listed may be used only if their specifications equal or exceed the required charac
50. 3152B User Manual Nine standard waveform shapes are available e Sine e Triangle e Square e Pulse Ramp e Sine x x e Pulse e Gaussian Pulse e Rising decaying Exponential Pulse e Noise e DC Each waveform has parameters for modifying it to suit your requirements The waveform memory can store one or more arbitrary or user defined waveforms The regular 3152B configuration is supplied with 1 mega sample M sample A 4 M sample waveform memory option is available on the 3100M R 3152B models You may allocate the entire memory for a single waveform or you may divide the memory into smaller segments and load each segment with a different waveform By dividing the memory into multiple segments you may program the instrument to output the waveform one segment at a time using a simple command each time you want to select a different memory segment There are no limitations on the shape of the arbitrary waveform as long as it meets certain criteria such as minimum and maximum lengths and does not exceed the dynamic range of the DAC 65 535 counts The sequence generator lets you link and loop segments in any order For a simple example of a sequenced waveform see Figures 1 7 through 1 10 The waveforms in figures 1 7 through 1 9 are placed in memory segments 1 2 and 3 respectively The sequence generator links and loops these waveforms in a predefined order to generate the waveform shown in Figure 1 10 The sequence cir
51. 35 Waveform Screen Notice that on the left top and right top there are two triangles pointing to the center of the screen These are the anchors The anchors are used as the start and end pointers for waveform creation For example if you want to create a sine waveform between point 100 and point 500 you place the left anchor at point 100 and the right at point 500 and then generate the sine from the built in library There are two ways to control anchor placements 1 Drag the left anchor triangle to the desired left position Do the same for the right anchor Notice that the anchor coordinates appear at the top of the waveform screen and that they change to correspond with your anchor placements 2 You can also place your anchors in a more precise manner from the waveform library by programming the start and end points for the waveform An example of anchor placement using the sine dialog box is shown in Figure 4 33 Finally when you are done creating and editing your waveform you can save your work to a directory of your choice The name of the EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev Generating Waveforms Using Equation Editor A 3152B User Manual waveform file will be displayed in Wave Composer s title bar including the path A more general purpose way to create waveforms using ArbCon
52. 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com FOR YOUR SAFETY Before undertaking any troubleshooting maintenance or exploratory procedure read carefully the WARNINGS and CAUTION notices CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK DO NOT OPEN If this instrument is to be powered from the AC line mains through an autotransformer ensure the common connector is connected to the neutral earth pole of the power supply This equipment contains voltage hazardous to human life and safety and is capable of inflicting personal injury Before operating the unit ensure the conductor green wire is connected to the ground earth conductor of the power outlet Do not use a two conductor extension cord or a three prong two prong adapter This will defeat the protective feature of the third conductor in the power cord i Maintenance and calibration procedures sometimes call for operation of the unit with power applied and protective covers removed Read the procedures and heed wn un warnings to avoid live circuit points Before operating this instrument 1 Ensure the proper fuse is in place for the power source to operate 2 Ensure all other devices connected to or in proximity to this instrument are properly grounded or connected to the protective third wire earth ground If the instrument fails to operate satisfactorily shows visible damage has been stored under unfavorable conditions has sustained stress Do no
53. A lt tre gt 0 to 99 99 Numeric 10 Programs the trailing edge transition time of the standard pulse waveform in units of percent Response The 3152B returns the current frequency amplitude offset delay time pulse width and leading and trailing edges settings similar to the following example 166 5 0 10 10 10 10 APPLy RAMP lt freq gt lt ampl gt lt offs gt lt del gt lt lee gt lt tre gt HS Syntax 0305F lt float gt lt float lt float gt lt float lt float gt lt float gt Description This command changes the waveform function to standard ramp and programs the frequency amplitude offset delay time pulse width and leading and trailing edges simultaneously This command affects the output regardless of the current output function For example if the 3152B is in FM mode the 3152B will stop generating FM and will revert to the standard ramp waveform with parametric values as specified by this command Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt freq gt 10e 3 to Numeric 1e6 Programs the frequency of the standard ramp waveform 100e6 in units of Hz lt ampl gt 10e 3 to Numeric 5 Programs the amplitude of the standard ramp waveform 16 in units of Volts lt offs gt 7 992 to Numeric 0 Programs the offset of the standard ramp waveform in 7 992 units of Volts lt del gt 0 to 99 99 Numeric 10 Programs the delay time of the standard ramp waveform in units of percent lt lee gt 0 to 99 99 Numeric 10 Progra
54. AUTOmatic TRIGgered STEP MIX AUTO v 1300A SELect 1t0 10 1 0107A DEFine lt step gt lt seg i gt lt repeat gt lt adv mode x gt lt sync bit x gt x 3152B only v 13103 DELete v NAME 1 to 4096 v 13201 ALL v 13210 SYNC TYPe LCOMplete BIT LCOM 0108A Modulated Waveforms Commands SOURce MODulation TYPE OFF AM FM SWE FSK ASK PSK FHOPping OFF 0051A AHOPping 3D CARRier FREQuency 10 to 100e6 1e6 0049A BASeline CARRier DC CARR 0048A EADS North America Test and Services Programming Reference 5 17 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A Table 5 2 3152B SCPI Command Summary continued Keyword Parameter Form Default 3152A HS Modulated Waveforms Commands continued SOURce AM v FUNGtion SHAPe SINusoid TRlangle SQUare RAMP SIN 0057A INTernal v FREQuency 10e 3 to 1e6 100 v 0781A DEPTh 0 to 100 50 v 0780A EXEcute MOD TYPE AM v 07820 FM DEViation 10 0e 3 to 100e6 100e3 0075A FUNGtion SHAPe SINusoid TRlangle SQUare RAMP ARB SIN 0078A FREQuency 10e 3 to 350e3 10e3 0076A RASTer 1 to 2 5e6 166 0077A MARKer FREQuency 10e 3 to 100e6 1e6 0079A DATA lt data_array gt 00741 SWEep v FREQuency
55. CLK10 Available on the VXI backplane The CLK10 source has the least accuracy and stability of the three options but is useful for synchronization with other VXI modules The Arbitrary Sequence panel Figure 4 8 is invoked by clicking the Arbitrary Sequence button on the Panels bar Note that if you invoke the Arbitrary Sequence Panel from the Panels menu the 3152B will not change its output type On the other hand if you select the Arbitrary or Sequenced option from the Main Panel the 3152B will immediately change its output to the selected waveform type The functional groups in the Arbitrary Waveforms Panel are described below General Parameters The General Parameters group contains two parameters Amplitude and Offset The values in this group may be duplicated on other panels When you change amplitude or offset in the Parameters group the other panels are updated automatically SCLK The SCLK Sample Clock controls let you select the source of the sample clock and set the sample clock frequency The sample clock setting affects the 3152B in Arbitrary mode only It is programmed in units of samples per second S s and will affect the instrument only when it is programmed to output arbitrary or sequenced waveforms The SCLK parameter has no effect on the frequency of standard waveforms The three switches in the SCLK group set the sample clock input to Internal External or ECLTO The default is Internal When you select Ex
56. Chapter 3 under the pulse function description 222 Data out of range Parameter data which followed a specific header could not be used because its value is outside the valid range defined by the generator 224 Illegal parameter value A discrete parameter was received which was not a valid choice for the command An invalid parameter choice may have been used 300 Device specific error This is the generic device dependent error for the instrument when it cannot detect more specific errors A device specific error as defined in IEEE 488 2 has occurred 311 Memory error Indicates that an error was detected in the instrument s memory 350 Queue Overflow The error queue is full because more than 30 errors have occurred No additional errors are stored until the errors from the queue are removed The error queue is cleared when power has been shut off or after a CLS command has been executed 410 Query INTERRUPTED A command was received which sends data to the output buffer but the output buffer contained data from a previous command the previous data is not overwritten The output buffer is cleared when power is shut off or after a device clear has been executed EADS North America Test and Services Programming Reference 5 123 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A This page
57. Default SIN Description Selects the built in sine waveform Selects the built in triangular waveform Description Defines the standard waveform shape to be output by the 3152B Parameters Name Type SINusoid Discrete TRlangle Discrete SQUare Discrete 5 44 Programming Reference Selects the built in square waveform EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual SPULse Discrete Selects the built in pulse waveform RAMP Discrete Selects the built in ramp waveform SINC Discrete Selects the built in sinc waveform EXPonential Discrete Selects the built in exponential waveform GAUSsian Discrete Selects the built in gaussian waveform DC Discrete Selects the built in DC waveform NOISe Discrete Selects the built in noise waveform Response The 3152B returns SIN TRI SQU SPUL RAMP SING GAUS EXP DC or NOIS depending on the current 3152B setting SINusoid PHASe lt phase gt HS Syntax 0700A lt float gt Description Programs the start phase for the standard sine waveform This command has no affect on modulated waveforms Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt phase gt Oto 360 Numeric 0 Programs the start phase parameter in units of degrees Response The 3152B returns the current start phase value SINusoid POWer lt power gt HS Synta
58. Discrete Selects the half cycle square waveform Response The 3152B returns SIN TRI or SQU depending on the current 3152B setting EADS North America Test and Services Programming Reference 5 99 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Counter Control Publication No 980935 Rev A Use the following commands for programming the counter timer measuring function and its associated parameters The counter timer Commands function is created digitally however it closely simulates a stand alone instrument so its functions are programmed just as they would be programmed on a dedicated instrument The specifications and limitations of the counter timer are specified in Appendix A The counter commands are summarized in Table 5 13 Table 5 13 Counter Commands Summary Keyword Parameter Form Default 3152A HS COUNter FUNG tion FREQuency PERiod APERiod PULSe TOTalize FREQ 0135A DISPlay MODE NORMal HOLD NORM 0133A GATE TIME 100e 6 to 1 1 0134A RESet 01370 READ 01368 COUNter FUNCtion FREQuency PERiod APERiod PULSe ITOTalize GTOTalize HS Syntax 0135A lt 0 1 2 3 4 5 gt Description Programs the measurement function for the counter timer Each measurement can be set up with its gate time where applicable and display mode Parameters Name Type Default FREQu
59. EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A Generating Sequenced Waveforms 3152B User Manual Sequences are comprised of waveform segments that reside in the waveform memory The sequence generator lets you link and loop segments in a user defined order To avoid unexpected results it is essential that waveform segments are pre loaded into waveform memory before a sequence table is used To create a waveform sequence you will create a sequence table that provides instructions to the sequencer for assembling the waveform from the segments in the waveform memory Figure 3 2 shows an example of a sequence table created using ArbConnection The sequence table has five fields for each step Link This defines the step number The sequence will advance through the links in the same order in which they are entered There are no pauses or transitions between links Seg This defines the waveform segment number that will be linked to form the next part of the sequence The order of waveform segments in waveform memory is irrelevent You may link them in any order Loops This defines the number of times the segment will repeat itself before advancing to the next link or step The number of loops may range from 1 through 1 048 576 Adv Defines the advance bit which tells the generator whether to m
60. EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual Chapter 3 Operation Overview This chapter explains how to operate the 3152B Unlike a bench top instrument the 3152B requires a computer to turn on functions change parameters and configure various operating modes Two software applications are available to control the instrument VXIplug amp play soft front panels SFPs and ArbConnection For the experienced programmer VXIplug amp play drivers and a set of SCPI commands are available Legacy to When operation is converted from Legacy to Modern mode and vice versa the instrument automatically issues an internal Modern Mode hardware reset command which modifies its settings to factory defaults The power on and reset defaults for Legacy Mode are as follows Model Default 3151B Legacy 3152B Legacy 3100M 3152B Modern 3100R 3152B Modern Using the Reset command to restore factory defaults however has no effect on the selection of Legacy or Modern mode If you switched to one mode or another the only way to restore the original default is either by using an appropriate command or by cycling power Example 1 Model 3152B default instrument format is Legacy e form inst mod modifies the commands set from Legacy to Modern rst is automatically forced and the 3
61. EE aa deed Eege ies 4 29 ETNE ee 4 29 TESE pe EE NE EET HE EE ET 4 30 MUNG UP ONIN SVG ENE EEE EE EE ERE OE 4 31 let 4 36 General Filters EE EE EE 4 36 ee EE EE EN EE 4 38 The Composers E 4 38 The Wave Penne 4 39 The Wave Composer Menu Bat icisisciccicicsorticacersositens aaeee sates snteeasatnrdcenstimecteeasiicaneedeenreeen ene 4 39 File Men ua 4 40 Edit ME ee 4 41 View CA ve 4 42 LAE NE EE EE ERE RR a ee er 4 43 ee 4 45 et 4 45 Generating Waveforms Using Equation Editor sssssseeessserssserrrrrerenetrsrnrrserrnnnrrnnenesene 4 47 Writing EE 4 49 ERENNERT 4 49 TENNE 4 50 o GEL ed REE EN EE 4 51 Combining Et uussaaa mseeesduaeateemdknsumanam da 4 55 The Pulse COMPOS EE 4 57 The Pulse Composer Menu b r umusessasmmmdueenesenddn dere sv bad 4 57 FEN ve 4 57 Edit Mensen 4 59 VIEW NE ee 4 59 TOLE MENU eee 4 61 The Pulse Composer Toolbar ueamsudsasmsyennarabesebeasetnbddmmevnestkap 4 61 woo EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual Creating PUISSS 3 2edasceacizce asecascycecescanghonctans acces Mees oncue wiecnanameseicna leeds sedensaseaaenesensacneeecesascteast 4 61 Setting the Pulse Editor Options aueegeieeeigeeekeendgEA degen 4 63 Using the Pulse EN avse 4 64 Pulse Example Section RE EE RE EEG 4 67 Pulse Example ZEHREN AE 4 68 Pulse Example Section KEE 4 69 Pulse Exa
62. Event register group to record various instrument conditions Figure 5 Registers 7 shows the SCPI status system An Event Register is a read only register that reports defined conditions within the generator Bits in an event register are latched When an event bit is set subsequent state changes are ignored Bits in an event register are automatically cleared by a query of that register or by sending the CLS command The RST command or device clear does not clear bits in an event register Querying an event register returns a decimal value which corresponds to the binary weighted sum of all bits set in the register An Event Register defines which bits in the corresponding event register are logically ORed together to form a single summary bit The user can read from and write to an Enable Register Querying an Enable Register will not clear it The CLS command does not clear Enable Registers but it does clear bits in the event registers To enable bits in an enable register write a decimal value that corresponds to the binary weighted sum of the bits required to enable in the register he Status Byte summary register contains conditions from the other The Status Byte registers Query data waiting in the generator s output buffer is e immediately reported through the Message Available bit bit 4 Bits in Register STB the summary register are not latched Clearing an event register will 5 116 Programming Reference EADS North Americ
63. Freq Hop Panel Variable Hold The Variable Hold parameter determines how long each step of amplitude dwells before stepping to the next amplitude setting By selecting Variable Hold the hold time changes automatically from one step to the next depending on the hold time value that is affixed to the hop step The values can be programmed in the HOP Data table Dwell Time The Dwell Time parameter programs the period of time that must elapse before the output amplitude hops to the next amplitude setting Dwell Time is associated with the Fixed Dwell option only Marker Index The marker index programs a step in the hop data string to output a pulse at the SYNC output connector The SYNC State button must be turned on to generate the hop marker output Frequency Hop The Frequency Hop group contains parameters that control the frequency hop function These are hop data dwell control dwell time and marker position Hop Data The hop data button in the frequency hop group provides access to the data string that controls the sequence of frequency hops The hop data table contains a list of frequencies and the output will step from one frequency level to another in the same order as programmed in the hop data table To access the required parameter click on the button below the parameters sub group until the LED next to the required parameter turns on The value that is associated with the lit LED is displayed on the digital dis
64. General IMMOMMAUON E A 10 ET EE EE ENE ORRE EN A 11 Appendix B 3201A 3202A Module SpecificatiOnS rrnnnnnvvvvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnvvnnnnnnnnnnnnn B 1 Input Character E B 1 Output Characteristics E B 1 ET EE EE E TN A TAS B 1 Square Wave Charachertstice ek B 1 Sine Wave Characteristics B 1 OTTA E B 2 Sidler B 2 EADS North America Test and Services xi Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A This page was intentionally left blank xii EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual List of Figures Figure 1 1 Racal Instruments 3152B E 1 3 Figure 1 2 AroConnection Control Panels si cdeccocccsedeenesveecieseeesieetessaeteexeesecssesenss inntateiidnanesecentonans 1 4 Figure 1 3 AroConnection Wave Composer Example ANNE 1 5 Figure 1 4 ArbConnection Pulse Composer Example AA 1 5 Figure 1 5 ArbConnection Serial Data Composer Example ssessssensssssrnneeenerssrerrsserrnrnrrnnnensnne 1 6 Figure 1 6 Configurations 3151B 3152B 3100R 3152B and 3100M 3152B rrrrrrrrrrrrnnnvnnnn 1 11 Figure 1 7 Segment 1 Sine x X Wavetom EEN 1 16 Figure 1 8 Segment 2 Sine E tu E 1 16 Figure 1 9 Segment 3 Pulse WAS Oust atenerne 1 16 Figure 1 10 Sequenced Wavefor
65. Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A would be 100e 3 VOLTage OFFSet lt offs gt HS Syntax 0501A lt float gt Description Programs the amplitude offset of the output waveform The offset is calibrated when the source impedance is 509 Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt offs gt 7 992 to Numeric 0 Sets the offset of the output waveform in units of Volts 7 992 Offset and amplitude settings are independent providing that the offset amplitude do not exceed the specified window Response The 3152B returns the current offset value The returned value will be in scientific notation e g 100 mV would be 100e 3 PHASe OFFSet lt phase_offs gt HS Syntax 0027A lt float gt Description This command will affect a slave instrument only when it is synchronized to another module in the chassis It programs the start phase offset with respect to an adjacent master module Phase offset resolution when using this command is 1 point Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt phase_offs gt Oto1e6 1 Numeric 0 Sets the phase offset in reference to a master Integer instrument Slave instruments trail the master only instrument edge The range is extended 4 Meg 1 when the 4 Meg memory option is installed 1 Meg is standard Response The 3152B returns the current phase offset value FUNCTion MODE FlXed USER SEQuen
66. LEGacy MODern LEG BORDer NORMal SWAPped NORM v 0101A TRACe DATA lt data_array gt 10001 DEFine lt 1 to 4096 gt lt 10 to 523288 gt lt segment_ gt lt size gt 1 10102 DELete NAME 1 to 4096 09201 ALL 10210 SELect 1 to 4096 1 1030A SEGMent DATA lt data array gt 105014 Apply Commands SOURCce APPLy FREQ AMPL OFFS v 0300C SINusoid FREQ AMPL OFFS PHAS POW v 0301E TRlangle FREQ AMPL OFFS PHAS POW v 0302E SQUare SQU FREQ AMPL OFFS DCY v 0303D PULSe FREQ AMPL OFFS DEL WID LEE TRE v 0304G RAMP FREQ AMPL OFFS DEL LEE TRE v 0305F SINC FREQ AMPL OFFS CYC v 0310D GAUssian FREQ AMPL OFFS EXP v 0306D EXPonential FREQ AMPL OFFS EXP v 0307D DC DC AMPL v 0308A USER SEG lt n gt SCLK AMPL OFFS v 0309D Sequence Commands SOURce SEQuence DATA lt data array gt 134014 ADVance AUTOmatic TRIGgered STEP AUTO 1300A DEFine lt step gt lt seg_ gt lt repeat gt 13103 DELete NAME 1 to 4096 13201 ALL 13210 EADS North America Test and Services Programming Reference 5 11 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Table 5 1 3152B SCPI Command Summary for 3152A Emulation continued Publication No 980935 Rev A Keyword Parameter Form Default 3152A HS Modula
67. Manual Output On Test Procedure 1 Toggle 3152B trigger slope from positive to negative visa versa 2 Verify on the oscilloscope that the 3152B transitions are synchronized with the slope of the trigger Test Results Pass Fail Trigger Level Equipment Oscilloscope function generator Preparation 1 Configure the Oscilloscope as follows Termination 50 20 dB feedthrough attenuator at the oscilloscope input Setup As required for the test 2 Connect 3152B output to the oscilloscope input 3 Configure the function generator as follows Frequency 10 kHz Run Mode Continuous Waveform Square wave Amplitude 1V 4 Connect the function generator output to the 3152B TRIG IN connector 5 Configure the 3152B as follows Frequency 1 MHz Waveform Sine wave Run Mode Triggered Trigger level OV Ch1 Output On Test Procedure 1 Verify that the 3152B outputs triggered waveforms spaced at 0 1 ms 2 Modify the function generator offset to 2 V and change the 3152B trigger level to 4 V Verify that the 3152B triggered waveforms are spaced 0 1 ms apart 3 Modify the function generator offset to 2 V and change the 3152B trigger level to 4 V Verify that the 3152B triggered waveforms are spaced 0 1 ms apart Test Results Pass Fail Backplane Trigger Equipment Oscilloscope auxiliary 3152B in an adjacent slot Source Preparation EADS North America
68. Master Summary Status MSS Request Service RQS Bit This bit indicates if the device has at least one condition to request service The MSS bit is not part of the IEEE STD 488 1 status byte and will not be sent in response to a serial poll However the RQS bit if set will be sent in response to a serial poll Bit 7 Decimal value 128 Not used always set to 0 The Status Byte summary register can be read with the STB common query The STB common query causes the generator to send the contents of the Status Byte register and the MSS Master Summary Status summary message as a single lt NR1 Numeric Response Message gt element The response represents the sum of the binary weighted values of the Status Byte Register The STB common query does not alter the status byte Removing the reasons for service from Auxiliary Status registers can clear the entire Status Byte register Sending the CLS command to the device after a SCPI command terminator and before a Query clears the Standard Event Status Register and clears the output queue of any unread messages With the output queue empty the MAV summary message is set to FALSE Methods of clearing other auxiliary status registers are discussed in the following paragraphs The Service Request enable register is an 8 bit register that enables corresponding summary messages in the Status Byte Register Thus EADS North America Test and Services Programming Reference 5 117 Artisan Tec
69. Modulating Sampling Clock Number of profile indexes 2 to 4000 Sine wave 10 Hz to 100 MHz 0 V to 16 Vp p Maximum amplitude 4096 1bits sec to 2 5 Mbits sec 2 to 4000 Operated from an external utility only such as ArbConnection the carrier waveform can be programmed to freely sweep in three dimensions amplitude frequency and phase Sine 10 Hz to 100 MHz 1 S s to 2 5 MS s 2 to 30000 Pulse Generator Waveform Characteristics Operation Programmability Pulse State Pulse Mode Polarity Period Delay Pulse Width Double Pulse Delay Rise Fall Times High Time Amplitude Window A 8 3152B Specifications The 3152B has a special mode where the instrument type is transformed to operate as a digital pulse generator When this mode is selected the operation of the arbitrary waveform and its outputs are disabled and possibly arbitrary waveforms are overwritten 1 All pulse parameters except rise and fall times may be freely programmed within the selected pulse period provided that the ratio between the period and the smallest incremental unit does not exceed the ratio of 1 000 000 to 1 4 000 000 to 1 with the memory option thus the specifications below do not show the maximum limit as each must be computed from the above relationship 2 Rise and fall times may be freely programmed provided that the ratio between the rise fall time and the smallest incremental unit does not exceed the ratio of 100 000 to 1
70. ON 0 1 HS Syntax 0144A lt 0 1 gt Description This command turns the double pulse mode on and off The double pulse mode duplicates the first pulse parameters at a delayed interval set by the double pulse delay value Parameters Range Type Default Description 0 1 Discrete 0 Sets the double pulse mode on and off Response The 3152B returns 0 or 1 depending on the current double mode setting 5 94 Programming Reference EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual DPULse DOUBle DELay lt d delay gt HS Syntax 0145A lt float gt Description Programs the delay between two adjacent pulses when double pulse mode is selected Otherwise the double pulse delay has no effect on the pulse structure Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt d delay gt Oto1e3 Numeric 1e 3 Sets the delay between two adjacent pulses for the double pulse mode in units of seconds Note that the sum of all parameters including the pulse delay time must not exceed the programmed pulse period and therefore it is recommended that the pulse period be programmed before all other pulse parameters Response The 3152B returns the current double pulse delay value in units of seconds DPULse LEVel HIGH lt high gt HS Syntax 0147A lt float gt Description Programs the high level
71. Off Output Disconnected 20 mV to 32 Vp p output open circuit 10 mV to 16 Vp p into 50 Q 4 digits 1 6 V to 16 Vp p 1 50 mV 160 mV to 1 599 Vp p 1 20 mV 10 mV to 159 9 mVp p 1 5 mV 0 to 7 995V 1 mv 1 1 from Amplitude 5 mV 5ns 10 mV to12V 6ns 12 Vto 16 V lt 6 10 mV to 12 V 8 12 V to 16 V Front panel BNC TTLTRGO 7 TTL Pulse with Arbitrary and Standard Waves LCOM in Sequence and Burst Modes including Burst Modulation Marker with Modulation Mode only programmable position 4 to n 8 Point 0 to maximum segment size programmable with 4 point resolution Filters can be switched in and out freely except in standard waveform shape where the filters are automatically used by the instrument to reconstruct the sine shape 3152B Specifications A 1 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Type General Run Modes Description Continuous Triggered Burst Gated Trigger Characteristics Sources Internal Timer Range External Input Impedance Range Resolution Sensitivity Damage Level Frequency Range Slope Minimum Pulse Width BUS VXI Backplane System Delay Trigger input to waveform output Trigger Delay Trigger input to waveform output Resolution Error Re trigger Delay Waveform end to waveform restart Resolution Error Trigger Jitter A 2 3152B Specifications Publication No
72. Offset Output Amplifier In Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50 Q feedthrough termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function DCV Range 10 V 2 Connect the 3152B output to the DMM input Terminate the EADS North America Test and Services Adjustments and Firmware Update 7 13 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B output at the DMM input with the 50 feedthrough termination 3 Configure the 3152B as follows Amplitude 20 mV Offset 3 V Output On Adjustment 1 CAL SETUP 47 for a DMM reading of 3 V 15 mV Setup 20 5 V Offset Output Amplifier In Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50 Q feedthrough termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function DCV Range 10 V 2 Connect the 3152B output to the DMM input Terminate the 3152B output at the DMM input with the 50 Q feedthrough termination 3 Configure the 3152B as follows Amplitude 20 mV Offset 5 V Output On Adjustment 1 CAL SETUP 48 for a DMM reading of 5 V 25 mV Setup 21 7 V Offset Output Amplifier In Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50 Q feedthrough termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function DCV Range 10 V 2 Connect the 3152B output to the DMM input Terminate the
73. Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual SEQuence DEFine lt step gt lt seg_ gt lt repeat gt lt adv_mode gt lt sync_bit gt HS Syntax 13103 lt integer long long 0 1 0 1 gt Description This command builds a step in a sequence table It defines all of the parameters that are associated with the sequence step such as segment number link loop advance mode and sync mode Parameters Name Range Type lt step gt 1 to 4096 Numeric integer only lt seg_ gt 1 to 10k Numeric integer only lt repeat gt 1to 1M Numeric integer only lt adv_mode gt 0 1 Boolean lt sync_bit gt 0 1 Boolean Description Programs the step in the sequence table Steps are indexed from 1 to 4096 and must be programmed in an ascending order Empty step locations in a sequence table are not permitted Assigns a segment to a specific step number When encountered in the sequence table the segment number that is associated with the step will be generated Programs the number of repeat loops that a specific step will play before advancing to the next step in a sequence This parameter is not compatible with legacy 3152A code For 3152B programming only a 0 programs automatic advance and a 1 programs a triggered advance Steps with a 0 bit assigned to them advance automatically to the next step If a 1 is assigned to a step the instrument generates this step continuously and only a valid trigger si
74. Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Run Mode 4 8 ArbConnection Publication No 980935 Rev A To work with the Run Mode Control Panel Figure 4 6 click on the Run Mode button on the Panels toolbar Note that when you invoke the Run Mode Control Panel the trigger mode does not change To change the run mode use the Output panel The trigger parameters and settings in the Run Mode Control Panel take effect only if you have selected an appropriate run mode The Run Mode Control Panel has its controls divided into the following groups Trigger Modifier The Trigger Modifier group provides control over the retrigger interval and delay time To change the trigger delay or the re trigger interval click on one of these parameters The digital display then shows the current value which you may adjust using the dial keyboard or the TT and HI keys After you adjust the value click on the Modify Execute knob to update the 3152B Figure 4 6 Run Mode Control Panel Trigger Source The 3152B accepts triggers from a number of sources Bus VXI Backplane TTL Trigger 0 through 7 and ECL Trigger 1 External and Internal The VXI backplane trigger lines can synchronize operation with other devices residing in the VXlbus chassis The various trigger source options are Bus Disables all trigger inputs and allows software triggers only External Enables the front
75. Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A Frequency Equipment 10MHz reference at least 0 1ppm Counter Accuracy External Preparation 10MHz Reference 1 Leave counter setting and 3152B connections as in last test 2 Connect the 10MHz reference oscillator to the 3152B 10 MHz reference input 3 Configure the 3152B as follows 10 MHz External not applicable for the 3152B version Waveform Square wave Amplitude 2V Output On Frequency As specified in Table 6 3 Test Procedure 1 Perform frequency Accuracy tests using Table 6 3 Table 6 3 Frequency Accuracy Using External 10 MHz Reference Counter Reading ra g Error Limits 10 000000000 MHz ttHz f 50 000000000 MHz tSHz TI Amplitude Amplitude accuracy checks tests the accuracy of the output amplifier p and attenuators Amplitude path is checked for both the DAC route Accuracy arbitrary and standard waveforms and the DDS route CW and modulated waveforms Amplitude Accuracy Equipment DMM DAC Output Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Termination 50 Q feedthrough at the DMM input Function ACV 2 Connect 3152B Channel to the DMM input 3 Configure the 3152B as follows Frequency 1 kHz Output On Amplitude As specified in Table 6 4 Test Procedure 1 Perform amplitude accuracy tests using Table 6 4 6 4 Performance Checks EADS North America Test and Ser
76. Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual Frequency 1 kHz Output On Amplitude 50 mV Offset 250 mV Mode Modulation Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETUP 35 for a DMM reading of 17 67 mV 0 5 mV Setup 52 3 V Amplitude Post Attenuators Modulation Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50 Q feedthrough termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function ACV Range 10 V 2 Connect the 3152B output to the DMM input Terminate the 3152B output at the DMM input with the 50 feedthrough termination 3 Configure the 3152B as follows Frequency 1 kHz Output On Amplitude 3V Mode Modulation Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETUP 36 for a DMM reading of 1 0606 V 10 mV Setup 53 500 mV Amplitude Post Attenuators Modulation Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50 Q feedthrough termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function ACV Range 1V 2 Connect the 3152B output to the DMM input Terminate the 3152B output at the DMM input with the 50 Q feedthrough termination 3 Configure the 3152B as follows Frequency 1 kHz Output On Amplitude 500 mV Mode Modulation Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETUP 37 for a DMM reading of 176 7 mV 2 mV EADS North America Test and Services Adjustments and Firmware Update 7 27
77. Swept Waveform Sweep Step Sweep Direction Sweep Range Sweep Time FM Modulated Waveform Modulating Waveforms Carrier Frequency Range Modulating Frequency Range A 6 3152B Specifications 20 ns 3 sample clock cycles 20 ns All trigger parameters such as level slope jitter etc apply Marks the crossing of a specific frequency and step setting The marker pulse is generated through the SYNC connector Marker placement is available for all modulation modes except AM SYNC connector TTLTRG 0 7 TTL Single pulse at the specified frequency Programmable for a specific frequency setting Sine square or triangle Linear or log Up or Down 10 Hz to 100 MHz 1 4usto40s Sine wave Sine square triangle Ramp 10 Hz to 100 MHz 10 mHz to 350 kHz EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A Peak Deviation Arbitrary FM Description Modulated Waveform Carrier Frequency Range Modulating Waveform Modulating Waveform Sampling Clock Number of frequencies AM Modulated Waveform Carrier Frequency Range Envelop Waveform Envelop Frequency Modulation Depth Frequency Hopping Hopped Waveform Hop Frequency Range Resolution Hop Table Size Dwell Time Mode Dwell Time Dwell Time Resolution Amplitude Hopping Hopped Waveform Frequency Range Resolution Hop Amplitude Range
78. TRlangle FREQ AMPL OFFS PHAS POW v 0302E SQUare FREQ AMPL OFFS DCY v 0303D PULSe FREQ AMPL OFFS DEL WID LEE TRE M 0304G RAMP FREQ AMPL OFFS DEL LEE TRE v 0305F SINC FREQ AMPL OFFS CYC v 0310D GAUssian FREQ AMPL OFFS EXP v 0306D EXPonential FREQ AMPL OFFS EXP M 0307D DC DC AMPL vi 0308A USER SEG lt n gt SCLK AMPL OFFS v 0309D APPLy lt freq gt lt ampl gt lt offs gt HS Syntax 0300C lt float gt lt float lt float gt Description This command changes the waveform function to standard and programs the frequency amplitude and offset for the selected standard waveform This command affects the output regardless of the current output function For example if the 3152B is in FM mode the 3152B will stop generating FM and will revert to the currently selected standard waveform with values of frequency amplitude and offset as specified by this command Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt freq gt 10e 3 to Numeric 1e6 Programs the frequency of the standard waveform in 100e6 units of Hz lt ampl gt 10e 3 to Numeric 5 Programs the amplitude of the standard waveform in 16 units of Volts lt offs gt 7 992 to Numeric 0 Programs the offset of the standard waveform in units of 7 992 Volts Response The 3152B returns the current frequency amplitude and offset setting as in the following example 1e6 5 0 APPLy SINusoid lt freq gt lt ampl gt lt offs gt lt phas gt lt power gt HS Synta
79. Test and Services ArbConnection 4 9 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A Phase deg n Parameters group the other panels update automatically To access the required parameter click on the parameter name The indicator next to the required parameter highlights The digital display then shows the value associated with the highlighted indicator Use the dial keyboard or the 1 H keys to adjust the reading to the required setting After you modify the reading click on the Modify Execute knob to update the 3152B with the new reading KE Ch n Ba an B Ae GE E i 4 10 ArbConnection Figure 4 7 Standard Waveforms Panel Waveforms The Waveforms group provides access to a library of built in standard waveforms The library includes Sine Triangle Square Pulse Ramp Sinc Exponential Gaussian and DC waveforms Each waveform has one or more parameters to adjust the required characteristics of the output For example phase start can be adjusted for the sine and triangle waveforms and duty cycle can be adjusted for the square waveform For the pulse waveform you may adjust the rise and fall time as well as the width and delay Parameters associated with each waveform are automatically displayed when you select the waveform Note that by clicking a button in this group you immediately update
80. The generator will revert to the Triggered run mode init cont on This removes the 3152B from interrupted run mode and reverts to Continuous mode In Gated mode the output remains at a specific DC level until a valid event opens the gate Only triggers from hardware sources can open and close the gate Use VXIbus backplane trigger lines or the front panel trigger input as the gating control You may set the edge sensitivity of the trigger signal for either the rising or falling edge of the signal At the end of the last output cycle the output assumes a DC level equal to the amplitude of the last point of the waveform There are two selectable conditions for opening the gate e Two transitions in the same direction toggle the gate on and EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A Burst Run Mode 3152B User Manual off e The gate remains closed as long as the trigger signal is below the trigger level setting and opens when the trigger signal exceeds the trigger level setting Use the following commands to turn the gate function on and to select the condition that will open the gate init cont off Selects the interrupted run mode If you did not select a specific interrupted run mode since power up the generator will automatically be placed in Triggered mode trig gate 1 Turns the Gated mo
81. a continuous waveform If only one link is specified and the 3152B is placed in Triggered advance mode then the output will behave as it would in Burst mode where the repeat number replaces the burst count parameter The easiest way to create a sequence table is with ArbConnection Using this application you can define create and download waveform segments to the waveform memory without using low level commands You may also use Waveform Studio to develop sequences Use the following commands to write sequence tables seq sel lt 1 10 gt The 3152B can store ten separate sequences and this command selects the active sequence Once selected the active sequence is generated at the output connector Note that by selecting an active sequence you do not automatically change the output to sequenced mode seq def 1 1 10 0 1 This command defines a link The parameters are from left to right link 3 26 Operation EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual number segment number loop counter advance flag and sync flag These parameters are explained in the Generating Sequenced Waveforms section Using the Sequence Define command repetitively you may program a complete definition of your sequence When entering a large number of links efficiency can be improved by using an alter
82. amplitude increments 12 bits automatically shifts legacy data to 16 bit format Permits division of the waveform memory into smaller segments 1 to 16k 2 point size increments from 10 to 1M points 2 4M optional ArbConnection software allows instrument control and creation of custom waveforms Sequenced Waveforms Generator Characteristics Description Sample Clock Range Continuous Run Mode All Other Run Modes Resolution Accuracy and Stability Advance Modes Automatic Sequence Advance Stepped Sequence Advance Single Sequence Advance Mixed Sequence Advance Sequencer Steps Segment Loops Minimum Segment Duration EADS North America Test and Services Segments may be linked and repeated in a user selectable order Segments are advanced using either a command or a trigger 100 mS s to 250 MS s 300 MS s typically at 25 C 100 mS s to 225 MS s 240 MS s typically at 25 C 11 digits Same as reference No trigger required to step from one segment to the next Sequence is repeated continuously per a pre programmed sequence table Current segment is sampled continuously until a trigger advances the sequence to the next programmed segment and sample clock rate Current segment is sampled the specified number of repetitions and then idles at the end of the segment Next trigger samples the next segment the specified repeat count and so on Each step of a sequence can be programmed to advance either a automatica
83. and performs a single measurement when triggered by a read operation The next measurement cycle may be performed after you clear the counter buffer using the following command coun res Resets the counter clears the output queue and arms the counter for its next measurement event Chapter 5 contains programming references that will allow you to program all of the counter timer parameters Counter Timer A summary of counter timer limitations is given below Limitations 1 Measurement speed The rate at which the counter performs its measurements depends upon the display mode setting The Normal setting simulates the display of a bench top instrument where the user sees the result of each measurement as it completes The display time is roughly 300 ms allowing enough time to check the result after each gate time cycle The maximum rate is three measurements per second when using low period gate times The Hold display mode allows one reading at a time The reading starts when the input senses a EADS North America Test and Services Operation 3 35 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A valid trigger signal and ends after the gate has closed Processing time for the reading and the display is roughly 100 ms In this mode the counter can take a maximum of ten readings per second 2 Gate time period must be higher than t
84. and verify oscilloscope exponential down waveform with properties as in 3 above Test Results Pass Fail Auxiliary This tests the operation of the auxiliary counter timer function Note that when you select the counter timer function all other 3152B Counter Timer waveform generation is automatically purged and the instrument Operation operational mode is transformed to a stand alone counter timer Waveform generation is resumed as soon as the counter timer function is turned off EADS North America Test and Services Performance Checks 6 35 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A Frequency Equipment Function Generator with at least 1 ppm accuracy Preparation 1 Configure the function generator as follows Frequency As required by the test Wave Square Amplitude 500 mV 2 Connect the function generator to the 3152B TRIG IN connector 3 Configure the 3152B as follows Auxiliary Function Counter Timer Function Frequency Trigger Level OV Test Procedure 1 Perform Frequency Measurement Accuracy tests using Table 6 28 Table 6 28 Frequency Measurement Accuracy Function 3152B Generator Setting Error Limits Counter Reading Period Period Equipment Function Generator with at least 1 ppm accuracy Averaged Preparation 1 Configure the function generator as follows
85. arb fm freqg gt 1 to 2 5e6Numeric 1e6 Programs the sample clock frequency of the arbitrary modulating waveform in units of S s Response The 3152B returns the current sample clock of the arbitrary modulation waveform The returned value will be in scientific notation for example 100mHz would be returned as 100e 3 EADS North America Test and Services Programming Reference 5 77 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A FM MARKer lt frequency gt HS Syntax 0079A lt float gt Description This function programs marker frequency position The FM marker can be placed within the following range carrier frequency deviation frequency 2 The marker pulse is output from the SYNC output connector Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt frequency gt 10e 3to Numeric 1e6 Programs the marker frequency position in units of Hz 100e6 Response The 3152B returns the current marker frequency value FM DATA lt header gt lt binary_block gt HS Syntax 0074 1 lt string gt Description This command downloads an FM modulation waveform to the arbitrary FM memory Arbitrary modulation waveform table data is downloaded to the 3152B using binary block transfer Binary block transfer allows any 8 bit bytes including extended ASCII code to be transmitted in a message Downloading data to the arbitrary FM wave
86. arbitrary 250e6 waveform in units of S s lt ampl gt 10e 3 to Numeric 5 Programs the amplitude of the arbitrary waveform in 16 units of Volts lt offs gt 7 992 to Numeric 0 Programs the offset of the arbitrary waveform in units of 7 992 Volts Response The 3152B returns the current segment number sample clock amplitude and offset settings as in the following example 1 1e6 5 0 5 64 Programming Reference EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual This group is used to control sequenced waveforms and their Sequenced respective parameters This will allow you to create multiple sequence p p y p q Waveforms tables and to modify segment loops and links Also use these commands to add or delete sequences from your instrument Control Factory defaults after RST are shown in the Default column Commands Parameter range and low and high limits are listed where applicable Generating Sequenced Waveforms Sequenced waveforms are made of a number of arbitrary waveforms which can be linked and looped in user programmable order Sequenced waveforms are generated from waveforms stored in the 3152B as memory segments Therefore before a sequence can be used download waveform segments to the arbitrary memory using TRAC or block transfer methods Information on how to partition the memory an
87. avl Bb sin way Mapped C4 Wav 1 6bit Complex way Download All Waveform Shape lt segment 4 gt AA Export Hz Figure 4 11 Sequence Table Example The Sequence Table is highlighted in Figure 4 11 To access the Sequence table click anywhere on the Sequence Table area If it was not yet it will turn white as opposed to the Segment Table area that turns gray There are five major elements that you should consider while programming a sequence table They are Link Seg Loops Adv and Sync These terms are explained below Link This parameter defines an index array for the sequence EADS North America Test and Services ArbConnection 4 17 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual 4 18 ArbConnection Publication No 980935 Rev A generator When generating sequences the instrument steps though the links in descending order therefore make sure that you enter your waveform segments in exactly the order you would like them at the output Seg This parameter associates waveform segments with links You can use different segments for different links or you can use the same segment for a number of links There are no limitations to how you associate links to segments except that you cannot program assign segments to the sequence table that were not defined previously Loops This par
88. colon and the semicolon are not used OUTP STATE ON TRI G BURS ON _ _ _ _ _ Substitute MINimum or MAXimum in place of a parameter for some The MIN and MAX commanas For example consider the following command 5 2 Programming Reference EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual Parameters FREQuency lt frequency gt MINimum MAXimum Instead of selecting a specific frequency substitute MIN to set the frequency to its minimum value or MAX to set the frequency to its maximum value z Query the current value of most parameters by adding a question Querying mark to the command For example the following command sets Parameter Setting the output function to square SOUR FUNC SHAP SQR Query the output function by executing SOUR FUNC SHAP The response to a query depends on the format of the command In Query Response general a response to a query contains current values or settings of Format the generator Commands that set values can be queried for their current value Commands that set modes of operation can be queried for their current mode IEEE STD 488 2 common queries generate responses which are common to all IEEE STD 488 2 compatible instruments pn A OMMAN string sent to the function generator must termina
89. cross the trigger level threshold to trigger a response EADS North America Test and Services Operation 3 11 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Using Trigger Delay Activating the Backplane TTLTrg Lines 3 12 Operation Publication No 980935 Rev A The trigger delay value designates the time that will elapse from a trigger event to the start of the waveform at the output connector The trigger delay adds to the system delay time see the definition of System Delay in Appendix A Therefore when delaying the trigger always consider the added factor of the system delay Use the following command to turn on trigger delay and to program the delay time value trig del lt value gt This command is available for compatibility with legacy 3152A code A value of 0 provides no trigger delay and values in the range of 10 to 2M set delays in units of sample clock periods trig del stat 1 This command turns on the trigger delay function When turned on the minimum delay time is 100 ns plus system delay trig de stat 0 This command turns off the trigger delay function When turned off the minimum delay time is equal to the system delay trig del tim lt value gt This sets the delay in units of time an alternative to the legacy compatible method above which uses units of sample clock points You may set the delay time in the range of 100
90. cycle Note that when the counter function is turned on all other waveform generation features of the 3152B are purged Measurement Function The measurement function group has control to select the measurement function for the counter timer operation The 3152B can measure the following function Frequency Period Period Averaged Pulse Width and Totalize The totalize function has two options If Totalize Infinite function is selected the input will count every legal pulse at the counter input for an indefinite period of time and displays the total number of pulses until the counter has been reset If Totalize Gated function is selected the input will count every legal pulse at the trigger input for a period of time that is defined with the Gate Time parameter Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Trig Level V n Pulse Generator 4 30 ArbConnection Publication No 980935 Rev A Display Figure 4 20 Counter Timer Panel Display The Display Group has controls to select the display mode and to select if the display shows measurement or gate time readings In normal mode the counter is armed to receive signal at the trigger input When signal is sensed the gate to the counter opens for duration as programmed with the Gate Time parameter processes the result displays the reading and continues with the same process as long as the si
91. delay value in units of seconds INSTrument COUPIe PATH ADJacent ECLT LBUS HS Syntax 0191A lt 0 1 2 gt Description This command will select the source path for multi instrument synchronization Parameters Name Type ADJacent Discrete ECLT Discrete LBUS Discrete 5 26 Programming Reference Default ADJ Description Selects the adjacent source path Adjacent path is automatically configured between two instruments in the same carrier in the following configurations only 3100M 3152B 3152B and 3100R 3152B 3152B Selects the backplane ECLT lines as the synchronization path In this case the ECL trigger lines are turned on and connected between slots to provide the synchronization signals Note that VXI backplane ECL trigger lines are limited to clock frequencies below 66 MHz Selects the backplane LBUS lines as the synchronization path In this case the master instrument must be plugged on the left and the slave instrument must be adjacent to the master instrument Note that although VXI backplane LBUS lines are not specified in terms of maximum frequency experimentation shows that the 3152B operates throughout its entire frequency range in this mode EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual Response The 3152B will return ADJ ECLT or LBUS depending on the curr
92. down the parameters list 3 Only single pulse and double pulse trains can be designed The 3152B allows generation of single or double pulse patterns having fixed high and low amplitude values If you need to design complex trains of pulse waveforms you may do so using the Pulse Composer in ArbConnection The pulse composer allows creation of complex pulse trains with varying amplitude shape and number of pulses The Half Cycle function is a special case of standard waveforms except that the waveforms are generated a half cycle at a time and displaced by a programmable delay time In continuous mode the half cycles are generated continuously In triggered mode one half at a time is generated only after a valid trigger event is received There are three half cycle waveforms that can be generated Sine Triangle and Square Use the commands below to select the half cycle function and program the parameters func mod half Selects the half cycle function If you have not changed parameters then the output will EADS North America Test and Services Operation 3 33 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Using the Counter Timer 3 34 Operation Publication No 980935 Rev A generate half cycle sine waveforms where the halves are separated by 1 us delay intervals From this point you can change one or more of the half cycle parameters just as th
93. downloaded as 16 bit 3100 OxFFFF binary block Data is sent in byte high byte models low order 12BIT Discrete 12BIT Arbitrary waveforms are downloaded as 16 bit 3151B OxFFFF binary block Data is sent in byte high byte and low order however the four least significant digits are 3152B ignored and therefore data is shifted to the left For compatibility issues with the 3152A the default setting for this model is 12BIT Response The 3152B returns 16BIT or 12BIT depending on the current format setting FORMat INSTrument LEGacy MODern HS Syntax 0189A lt 0 1 gt Description Toggles between legacy and modern operation of the 3152B Legacy implies that the 3152B behaves exactly like the 3152A for backward compatibility This automatically modifies certain parameters to duplicate the 3152A limits For example maximum sample clock frequency is limited to 100 MS s waveform interlace is changed to 2 and waveform vertical resolution is changed to 12 bits The Modern option removes all limitations and full performance is available Note In FORM INST LEG mode if the external sample clock is used the resultant frequency will be 50 of what would be expected using a legacy 3152A To eliminate this problem switch to FORM INST MOD mode Parameters Name Type Default Description LEGacy Discrete LEG This is the default setting if you ordered the 3152B You 3152B may still modify the format to modern to restore full performan
94. dwell time Min Amp 1V Max Amp 16V Period 250 us Test Results Pass Fail Sweep Equipment Oscilloscope Preparation 1 Configure the oscilloscope as follows Time Base 0 2 ms Sampling Rate 50 MS s at least Trace A View Jitter Type FREQ CLK Trigger source Channel 2 positive slope Amplitude 1 V div 2 Connect the 3152B output to the oscilloscope input channel 1 3 Connect the 3152B SYNC to the oscilloscope input channel 2 4 Configure model 3152B controls as follows Waveform Modulated Modulation Sweep Start Frequency 1 MHz Stop Frequency 2 MHz Sweep Time 1ms Sweep Type Linear Sync On 6 34 Performance Checks EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual Output On Test Procedure 1 Verify Sweep operation on the oscilloscope as follows Waveform Ramp up Frequency 1 kHz Max Freq 2 MHz Min Freq 1 MHz Test Results Pass Fail 2 Move 3152B sweep marker position to 1 5 MHz and verify marker position at the middle of the ramp Test Results Pass Fail 3 Reverse between Start and Stop frequencies and verify oscilloscope reading as before except the ramp is down Test Results Pass Fail 4 Change sweep step to logarithmic
95. eer eee eee 7 23 SJEL EEE EE 7 24 SEP AS EE a cig Sac ie Rate cic pte atc T R 7 24 Eege 7 24 EE e EE 7 25 Eeer RS ee 7 25 STUD EE 7 26 Setup SO EE 7 26 SEIP SI NE RE EN NE EEE 7 26 I ebe eege Ehe 7 27 ETT oj Geen eee ee A EE eg 7 27 SEP vase 7 28 AP EEE 7 28 Pulse Response Adjustments E 7 29 EM eo EE ee ee eee ee ee 7 29 EADS North America Test and Services ix Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A SU EE RE st cc ca veces tcc mt EE EE AR 7 29 Updating the Firmware TREE 7 30 Updating Registered Based un TE 7 30 Updating Message Ban UE 7 32 Gh pter 8 Product Supporkuauaaaunkammanusinuindantins uninimnsinvit 8 1 Product SEI EE NE EEE 8 1 Waranty RE OE EEE EE ER a 8 1 FP 8 1 PesShipmed IMSIMUCTIONS ssis inea aean Mica Gen ienaa AAEN Ea A a doesn aa Taa AEE 8 1 Appendix A 3152B Specifications wicieiiscsicicsecciaincensistesecsiuiaunneiansuersieicuinsindadoustateunesann A 1 Eege A 1 Ree Eeer A 1 Square Wave Pulse Performance ssssenessoerrneerererestttresrrrnnrtttttntsrrrnnerrnn rest nnrseerrnnrere nnt A 1 SN OUPU RE EE EE EEE EE RE RE A 1 eebe A 1 General Run WE A 2 Trigger seo so EEE EE eee ee ER A 2 ET oa EEE EEE RE R A 2 Frequency Time AN aent A 3 PLL Characteristics EE ET EE A 3 Ober A 3 Function Generator TNS E A 3 TREE AEEEgeE A 4 SINE Wave eu A 4 TE A 4 Eeer ee A 4 EE A 4 SE A 4 Gaussian PUISE
96. end of the programming sequence rst Restores factory defaults appl squ 10 7e6 2 1 30 Selects the standard square wave as the active function and simultaneously EADS North America Test and Services Operation 3 13 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Generating Standard Waveforms 3 14 Operation Publication No 980935 Rev A sets the frequency to 10 7 MHz 10 7e6 amplitude to 2V offset to 1 V and duty cycle to 30 outp 1 Turns on the output The above is an example of a full utilization of the Apply command including the frequency amplitude offset and duty cycle parameters for a standard square wave You may use the Apply command in a similar manner for other standard or arbitrary waveforms You may use the Apply command on a partial set of the available parameters of a waveform To leave out a parameter place no characters between the corresponding comma separators For example you may specify the frequency and duty cycle of a square wave while leaving the amplitude and offset at the default values as follows rst Restores factory defaults appl squ 12 7e6 45 Selects the standard square wave as the active function and simultaneously sets the frequency to 12 7 MHz leaves the amplitude at the default value leaves offset at the default value and sets the duty cycle to 45 outp 1 Turns on the output In a sim
97. for the ramp function Ramp TRANsition lt rise gt HS Syntax 0741A lt float gt Description Programs the ramp transition from low to high for the standard ramp waveform Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt rise gt 0 to 99 99 Numeric 60 Programs the ramp rise time parameter in units of percent Response The 3152B returns the current rise time value for the ramp function RAMP TRANSsition TRAiling lt fall gt HS Syntax 0742A lt float gt Description Programs the ramp transition from high to low for the standard ramp waveform Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt fall gt 0 to 99 99 Numeric 30 Programs the ramp fall time parameter in units of percent Response The 3152B returns the current fall time value 5 48 Programming Reference EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual SINC NCYCle lt N cycles gt HS Syntax 0790A lt integer gt Description Programs the number of 0 crossings of the standard SINC pulse waveform Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt N_cycle gt 4to100 Numeric 10 Programs the number of zero crossings parameter Integer only Response The 3152B returns the current number of zero crossings value GAUSsian EXPonent lt exp gt HS Syntax 0750A lt integer gt Des
98. gt command to partition the memory into segments in one operation See Chapter 5 for information on preparing and downloading waveform sample data The 3152B handles waveform data in 16 bit words In most cases this high resolution is an advantage because it minimizes quantization noise and enhances signal integrity However some applications such as those using the older 3152A instrument use only 12 bit data For compatibility The 3152B automatically converts 12 bit data from legacy applications without the need to re write the application program or data files The default data resolution for the 3151B and 3152B is 12 bits Other configurations such as 3100M 3152B and 3100R 3152B default to 16 bits Regardless of the model number you may set the waveform resolution to either 12 bits or 16 bits using the following commands form wave res 12bit Sets the resolution to 12 bits Instructions for preparing the 12 bit data are given in Chapter 5 form wave res 16bit Sets the resolution to 16 bits Instructions for preparing the 16 bit data are given in Chapter 5 For applications written for the legacy 3152A you may use The 3152B in Legacy Compatibility mode Legacy Compatibility mode when enabled affects the performance specifications in the following ways e Maximum sample clock frequency is reduced to 100 MS s 3152B can reach 250 MS s EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrume
99. in trigger generators One repeats itself at pre programmed intervals from 100 ns to 20 seconds The other has a programmable delay The re trigger delay is measured from the end of a signal to the start of the next signal You may program the re trigger delay from 100 ns to 20 seconds in increments of 20 ns EADS North America Test and Services Introduction 1 19 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Continuous Mode Triggered Mode Gated Mode Burst Mode Trigger Sources 1 20 Introduction Publication No 980935 Rev A In Continuous mode the 3152B generates the selected waveform continuously at the selected frequency amplitude and offset The generator will begin waveform generation as soon as the waveform and its parameters have been programmed and will stop only when turned off or placed in one of the interrupted run modes In Triggered mode you may program the trigger circuit to respond to positive or negative transitions of the trigger input signal When triggered the generator outputs one waveform cycle and then remains idle at an amplitude level equal to the voltage of the first point of the waveform You may set the instrument to receive triggers from the front panel connector backplane or the trigger command in your software A Re trigger circuit requires only one trigger event after which it automatically generates a
100. is in an interrupted run mode which can be selected using the INIT CONT OFF command Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt time gt 100e 9 to20 Numeric 100e 9 Programs the re trigger period Programming resolution is 20 ns across the range Response The 3152B returns the current re trigger period value TRIGger TiMer lt timer gt HS Syntax 1170A lt float gt Description Specifies the period of the internal trigger generator TRIG TIM is used with the internally triggered run mode only and has no affect on other trigger modes The internal trigger generator is a free running oscillator which is asynchronous to the frequency of the output waveform The timer intervals are measured from waveform start to waveform start Note that this differs from the re triggered mode where there the delay time setting is measured from waveform cycle end to the triggering of a new waveform cycle Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt time gt 1e 6 to 20 Numeric 15e 6 Programs the internal trigger generator period Response The 3152B returns the current internal trigger period value Standard This group is used to control the standard waveforms and their respective parameters There is an array of standard waveforms that Waveform Control could be used without the need to download waveform values to the instrument You can also modify the parameters for each waveform to Commands a shape suitable to your application
101. memory segments and clears the entire waveform memory This command is useful for the memory management of arbitrary waveforms EADS North America Test and Services Programming Reference 5 55 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A Y TIP The TRAC DEL ALL command does not re write the memory so whatever waveforms were downloaded to the memory are still there for recovery The TRAC DEL ALL command removes all stop bits and clears the segment table You can recover memory segments using the TRAC DEF command You can also use this technique to re size or to combine waveform segments TRACe SELect lt segment_number gt HS Syntax 1030A lt integer gt Description This command selects the active waveform segment to be output By selecting the active segment you are performing two function 1 The TRACe DEF command applies to the selected segment 2 The SYNC output is assigned to the selected segment This is critical wnen using sequenced mode where multiple segments form a large sequence TRACE SEL allows you to synchronize external devices to the segment of interest Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt segment_ 1to16k Numeric 1 Selects the active segment number number gt integer only Response The 3152B returns the active segment number SEGment lt header gt lt binary_block gt HS Syntax 10
102. one of the interrupted modes Triggered Gated or Burst There is no additional panel for Continuous mode but if you click one of the other run mode options then you may adjust the trigger parameters from the Trigger panel PLL The PLL group is used for turning the PLL function on selecting the reference source and for adjusting the PLL offset SYNC Output SYNC Output group has buttons that control the state of the SYNC output and the position and width of the sync pulse relative to the waveform It also has buttons to control the VXIbus backplane TTLTrg0 7 and ECLTrg1 outputs and the sync validation source Click on the State buttons to toggle the outputs on and off The operation of the SYNC output is explained in Chapter 3 Note that the position parameter affects the output only when placed in BIT LCOM or Pulse mode and the width affects the output only when Pulse mode is selected Output The Output Control group controls the state of the main output only Click on the State buttons to toggle the outputs on and off The load impedance button allows you to calibrate the output amplitude to compensate for the actual load impedance value The default impedance is 50 Q and the output level is adjusted in reference to this value If the actual load impedance is higher than 50 Q make sure the impedance setting matches the actual load impedance EADS North America Test and Services ArbConnection 4 7 Artisan Technology Group
103. original left position The waveform is trimmed and the point at the left anchor becomes the first point of the waveform Trim Right The trim right command lets you trim waveforms to the right of the anchor point This command is grayed out if the right anchor was not moved from its original right position The waveform is trimmed and the point at the right anchor becomes the last point of the waveform Unmark The Unmark operation removes the anchors from the waveform screen and resets anchor positions to point 0 and to the last waveform point Undo The Undo command undoes the last editing operation The View menu includes operations that let you view various sections of the waveform graph View operations include Zoom In Zoom Out Hide Show Toolbars and Channel selection for dual channel units only Descriptions of the view operations are given EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual Osea lt L Anchor 584 t Ne NO TT 2a DS d Wavelenath 1024 Active sea 1 eon SF Vertical Scale 64kPts 8kPts Div Horizontal Scale 65Pts 6 5Pts Div below Zoom In The Zoom In operation operates between anchors Anchors are shown as left pointing and right pointing triangles The default position of the anchors is the start and the end of the waveform To m
104. outputs the modulated waveform When that waveform has completed the instrument resumes outputting a DC level A single or dual waveform generator in a single slot no matter how advanced may become a limiting factor for applications requiring multiple simultaneous waveforms Various techniques exist to synchronize the outputs of multiple waveform generators but none are simple because real synchronization requires sharing of the reference and sample clocks as well as signals that control the starting phase of the waveform The 3152B uses the VXlbus Local Bus LBUSO 7 to synchronize adjacent modules The Local Bus lines are short and can tolerate high frequency signals but modules must be placed in the VXIbus chassis in a fixed master slave configuration Alternatively the ECLTrgO and ECLTrg1 lines may be used to synchronize multiple modules if position independence or legacy 3152A compatibility is required In either case the slave instrument s are locked to the frequency and starting phase of the master module After lock has been achieved the starting phase of the slave modules may be shifted with respect to the master module to create a multi phase system The starting phase is programmable from 0 to 360 PLL synchronization is another technique for synchronizing multiple waveform generators In this case synchronization is not between pairs of 3152B modules but between the 3152B and an external device which could be anyth
105. panel Figure 4 28 provides access to remote calibration To access the remote calibration panel you will need to have a valid User Name and Password Proper training is required to perform calibration Information on how to access the calibration panel and how to perform the calibration is provided in Chapter 7 The picture below is just for reference Amplitude Figure 4 28 Calibration Panel The Composers tab provides access to a group of composers that allow the generation and modification of arbitrary waveforms pulse shapes arbitrary frequency modulation and 3D profiling There are four waveform composers built into ArbConnection Wave for generating arbitrary waveforms Arbitrary waveforms can be generated from standard libraries from an equation editor or imported into the composer from external utilities such as MatLAB The waveforms can be edited and stored to disk for future use Pulse for generating complex pulse trains Unlike a standard pulse generator you can design and edit multiple pulse trains with linear transitions and variable amplitudes FM for generating arbitrary frequency modulation profiles without being limited by the standard sine triangle and square modulating shapes and 3D for generating chirps and simultaneous variations of amplitude frequency and phase on each channel separately EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation G
106. panel trigger input and disables all other sources Internal Enables an internal non synchronized trigger generator EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual Standard but will not allow triggers from any other sources TTLTO 7 Enables one or more backplane trigger lines Note that the 3152B can receive triggers from more than one TTLTrg line but will not accept triggers from bus external or internal trigger sources ECLT1 Enables the ECLTrg1 input and will allow trigger events from this backplane line Trigger Parameters Gated Mode There are two modes that define how the 3152B will gate The standard mode is Level in which a trigger signal below the threshold level disables the output and a trigger signal above the threshold level enables the output The other mode is Transition in which each transition toggles the gate on or off The transition direction is programmable using the Slope options Slope If you click on Pos the instrument triggers on the positive going rising edge of the trigger signal Similarly if you click on Neg the instrument will trigger on the negative going falling edge of the trigger signal Note that this affects only the signals that are accepted from the front panel trigger input Burst Programs the burst counter
107. provide sufficient range for the backwards peak deviation range 3152B User Manual ArbConnection 4 75 3152B User Manual The 3D Composer 4 76 ArbConnection Publication No 980935 Rev A Cycles The Cycles parameter defines how many sine cycles will be created within the specified start and end anchor points The example below shows three sine cycles Start Phase The start phase parameter defines the angle at which the sine will start The example shows 0 start phase Power Sine to the power of 1 will generate a perfect sine Power range is from 1 through 9 Y Tip The functionality of the FM composer is similar to the Wave composer If you need more information on the FM Composer functions and Equation Editor refer to the Wave Composer section in this manual The 3D Composer was specifically designed for simultaneous profiling of amplitude frequency and phase Amplitude profiles can be designed separately for channels 1 and 2 but frequency and phase profiles are shared by both channels The following paragraphs will describe the various sections of the 3D composer and will guide you through some 3D programming examples The opening screen of the 3D composer is shown in Figure 4 55 As you can see it does not at all look like any of the other composers that were described previously discussed however generating waveforms and programming profiles is very similar to other composer so you will be up and runni
108. pulse generator function is enabled all other waveform generation features of the 3152B are disabled Pulse Mode The Pulse Mode group has controls to toggle between single and double pulse modes Polarity The Polarity group has controls to select the pulse polarity from one of the Normal Complemented and Inverted options Pulse Parameters All parameters that control the pulse timing are available in the Pulse Parameters group These include Period Rise High and Fall Times High and Low levels and single or double pulse Delays To display and modify parameters click on the LED next to the required parameter change and modify the time as required The range of each parameter is specified in Appendix A The X Instruments Synchronization table provides a fast and easy method of synchronizing modules that reside within a single VXI mainframe ArbConnection finds 3152Bs which may be synchronized and allows the selection of groups and synchronization paths and allows the setting of phase offsets between modules Figure 4 22 shows a list of modules that were detected by ArbConnection and listed in the Instruments Pool This list can now be manipulated to form one or more groups of synchronized Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A instruments Use the procedure below to set up groups and to activate the synchronizat
109. see how a hop table is constructed The file sample below shows a list of 10 amplitudes and their associated dwell times The 3152B will hop through this list outputting the next amplitude each time it hops Note that the carrier waveform is always sinewave and that the last cycle is always completed even if EADS North America Test and Services Programming Reference 5 91 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A the dwell time is shorter than the period of the waveform For example if you program dwell time of 1ms and the amplitude step has frequency of 1Hz 1s period the amplitude step will last 1 second although the dwell time is 1ms Sample Amplitude Hops Data Array 1e0 100 Ze 2000 3e0 3000 Ae 4000 5e0 5000 6e0 6000 Ze 7000 Ge 8000 9e0 9000 1060 10000 In the above example the first number is the amplitude value and the second number is its dwell time Therefore only even number of sets can be located in this table Parameters Name Type Description lt var_hop_data gt Double Block of binary data that contains information of amplitude hop values and their respective dwell time AHOP MARKer lt index gt HS Syntax 0060A lt integer gt Description Programs where on the amplitude list the 3152B will generate a pulse designated as Hop marker or index point The marker pulse is generated at the SYNC output connec
110. series of triggers In this case the re trigger delay parameter determines the time between waveform cycles The trigger signal whether it comes from the front panel VXlbus trigger line or a software command has to pass through electrical circuits These circuits cause a small delay known as system delay This delay determines the amount of time it will take from a valid trigger edge to the moment that the output reacts System delay cannot be eliminated completely and must be accounted for when using a trigger signal In Gated mode the 3152B circuits will generate an output waveform as long as a gating signal is present The instrument can be programmed to gate on two different signal types The normal mode is level sensitive where the output is enabled only while the trigger signal is above the trigger level threshold voltage The second mode is transition edge sensitive where the gate opens on the first transition and closes on a subsequent transition Regardless of the selected gating mode the generator always completes the waveform at the end of the gate and then idles ata DC level The Burst mode is an extension of the Triggered mode where the generator is programmed to output a pre determined number of waveforms The sources to trigger a burst are the same as for the Triggered mode The 3152B responds to a variety of trigger sources such as the TRIG PLL connector backplane trigger lines TTLTrg0 7 and a software trigge
111. the amplitude of the 3152B output waveform Four standard modulating waveforms are available sine triangle square and ramp AM can be used in Continuous Triggered and Gated modes Modulation depth is programmable from 0 to 100 and up to 200 in some cases The Frequency Hopping function causes the output frequency to hop through a sequence of frequencies The amount of time the 3152B dwells on each frequency is programmable You may opt to set the dwell time uniformly over the entire hop list The frequency hop table can contain up to 1 000 frequency values ranging from 10 Hz to 100 MHz The amplitude hopping function causes the output amplitude to hop through an amplitude list The amount of time the 3152B dwells on an amplitude level is programmable for each hop You may also set the dwell time uniformly over the entire hop list The amplitude hop table contains up to 5 000 different amplitude values ranging from 0 V to 16 V FSK frequency shift keying shifts the output between two frequencies The logic level of the TRIG PLL input determines the instantaneous frequency value When the trigger slope is set to positive and the TRIG PLL is false the output is at the base frequency When TRIG PLL is true the output frequency is shifted by an offset To reverse the trigger polarity select the negative trigger slope PSK phase shift keying shifts the phase of the output between 0 and 180 The logic level of the TRIG PLL de
112. the built in 50 Q input termination Also note the interaction between amplitude and the offset as described below Amplitude Offset Amplitude and offset may be programmed freely as long as the following relationship is observed Interaction EADS North America Test and Services Operation 3 5 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Selecting an Output Function Selecting a Run Mode 3 6 Operation Publication No 980935 Rev A Amplitude Offset lt 16Vp p 8V to 8V peaks Amplitude offset combinations outside the above limits will generate settings conflict errors The 3152B has four basic output function types Use the following commands to select the waveform type func mode fix The 3152B outputs the standard waveform currently selected by the FUNC SHAP command default sine 1 MHz 5Vp p func mode user The 3152B outputs the arbitrary waveform currently selected by the TRAC SEL command default trace is 1 func mode seq Selects the Sequenced Waveform function Waveform segments must be downloaded to the instrument before it can sequenced generate waveforms In addition the SEQ DEF command must be used to define the sequence When programming a waveform function you must consider the run mode since combinations of waveform types that are legal in one mode may not be legal in a different mode For example arbi
113. the current start phase value PSK PHASe SHIFted lt shift phase gt HS Syntax 0092A lt float gt Description This programs the shifted phase The phase shifts when the pointer in the data array points to 1 Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt shift phase gt 010360 Numeric 180 Programs the shift phase for the carrier waveform in units of degrees Response The 3152B returns the current shift phase value PSK RATE lt rate gt HS Syntax 0093A lt float gt Description This allows the user to select PSK word rate The word rate is the interval of which the bit streams in the PSK data array are clocked causing the output phase to hop from start to shifted phase values and vice versa Note that this command is dedicated for programming the PSK modulation function only Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt baud gt 1 to 10e6 Numeric 10e3 Programs the rate of which the phase shifts from start to shifted frequency in units of Hz Response The 3152B returns the current baud value 5 86 Programming Reference EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual PSK DATA lt psk_data gt HS Syntax 0891 lt string gt Description Loads the data stream that will cause the 3152B to hop from phase to phase Data format is a string of 0
114. to the 3152B from the Command field Instrument responses to queries automatically appear in the Response field The command editor is a useful troubleshooting tool This way you can be sure of command syntax and functionality before you use it in your application The complete list of 3152B SCPI commands is available in Chapter 5 The Log File is very useful for programmers that do not wish to spend a lot of time on manuals When you use ArbConnection every time you click on a button or change parameter the command is logged in the same format as should be used in external applications Figure 4 62 shows an example of a log file and a set of SCPI commands as resulted from some changes made on ArbConnection panels You can set up the 3152B from ArbConnection to the desired configuration log the commands in the log file and then copy and paste to your application without any modifications Of course this is true for simple commands that do not involve file download but on the other hand this is a great tool to get you started with SCPI programming Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual 4 84 ArbConnection Publication No 980935 Rev A Show Full Log Save s J Commands amp Responses Inst Sel 1 0UTP ON Inst Sel 2 OUTP ON DUTP SYNC ON Inst Sel 1 VOLT 1 000e0 Inst Sel 2 VOLT 8 000e0 Inst Sel 1 FUNC SHAP SOU SQU DCYC 15
115. trac del lt value gt Deletes a segment specified by lt value gt from the available segment list but does not erase the contents of the segment Note that if you delete a segment the memory portion that belonged to this segment is no longer accessible The next segment defined is placed at the end of the partition table If you delete the last segment that you defined then the next downloaded data will overwrite the memory of the deleted segment If you delete segments often large portions of the memory will become inaccessible Therefore it is suggested that you periodically clear the entire memory and reload the waveforms that you intend to use To delete the entire memory partition table use the following command trac del all Removes the entire partition table allowing definition of a new segment table P Tip The trac del all command deletes the partition table but leaves the data in the arbitrary memory intact Therefore if you made a mistake and want to restore the segments just re load the partition table The waveform memory is overwritten Every time you download new waveform data the waveform memory data for that segment is overwritten The easiest way to download waveforms to the 3152B is with ArbConnection Using this application you may define create and EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publicati
116. v STARt 10 to 100 0e6 10e3 v 1610A STOP 10 to 10066 1e6 v 1611A RASTer 10e 6 to 250e6 MINimum MAXimum 166 v 1612A FUNGC tion SINusoidal TRlangle SQUare SIN Computed v 1604A TIME 1 4e 6 to 40 0 1e 3 v 1600A DIRection UP DOWN UP v 1601A SPACing LiNear LOGarithmic LIN v 1602A STEP 10 to 2000 20 v 1603A MARKer v FREQuency 10 to 100e6 505e3 v 1613A FSK FREQuency SHIFted 10e 3 to 100e6 100e3 0082A BAUD 1 to 1066 1063 0080A MARKer 1 to 4000 1 0083A DATA lt data_array gt 00811 5 18 Programming Reference EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual Table 5 2 3152B SCPI Command Summary continued Keyword Parameter Form Default 3152A HS Modulated Waveforms Commands continued SOURce ASK AMPLitude STARt 0 to 16 5 0064A SHIFted 0 to 16 1 0065A BAUD 1 to 1066 1063 0066A MARKer 1 to 1000 1 0068A DATA lt data array gt 0067 14 PSK PHASe STARt 0 to 360 0 0091A SHIFted 0 to 360 180 0092A DATE 1 to 10e6 10e3 0093A DATA lt data_array gt 00891 MARKer 1 to 4000 1 0090A FHOPping DWELI MODe FlXed VARiable FIX 0069A TIMe 200e 9 to 20 200e 9 0070A FIXed DATA lt
117. were previously stored in a file You can write mathematical expressions that contain waveforms simple operands and trigonometric functions similar to the example given below If you want to use stored waveforms in your equations you must first generate these and store them in files If you have stored files named Sine wav and Noise wav in the Wav12bit folder you can enter them into your equation as shown Amplitude p Sine wav sin omg p 10 Noise wav 1000 The above equation generates an amplitude modulated waveform with added noise Note You can also browse for wav files stored in any folder using the Insert Wave button in the Equation Editor dialog box The following steps demonstrate how to create store and combine waveforms using this example Step 1 Create and store Sine wav Invoke the Wave command and generate a sine waveform Press OK and then select the Save Waveform As from the File command Save this file into the default folder using the name Sine wav in the default folder Step 2 Create and store Noise wav From the Wave command select Noise Click OK and watch your waveform screen draw a EADS North America Test and Services ArbConnection 4 55 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A noise signal From the File menu select Save Waveform As and save this waveform into the default folder usin
118. 0 1 APPLy TRlangle lt freq gt lt amplI gt lt offs gt lt phas gt lt power gt HS Syntax 0302E lt float gt lt float lt float gt lt float gt lt integer gt Description This command changes the waveform function to standard triangle and programs the frequency amplitude offset start phase and power exponent simultaneously This command affects the output regardless of the current output function For example if the 3152B is in FM mode the 3152B will stop generating FM and will revert to the currently selected standard waveform with parametric values as specified by this command Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt freq gt 10e 3 to Numeric 1e6 Programs the frequency of the standard triangle 100e6 waveform in units of Hz lt ampl gt 10e 3 to Numeric 5 Programs the amplitude of the standard triangle 16 waveform in units of Volts lt offs gt 7 992 to Numeric 0 Programs the offset of the standard triangle waveform 7 992 in units of Volts lt phas gt Oto 360 Numeric 0 Programs the phase start of the standard triangle waveform in units of percent lt power gt 1 to 9 Numeric integer 0 Programs the power exponent of the standard triangle only waveform Response The 3152B returns the current frequency amplitude offset phase and power exponent settings similar to the following example 166 5 0 0 1 5 60 Programming Reference EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group
119. 1 which define when the output generates carrier frequency and when it shifts frequency to the FSK value 0 defines carrier frequency 1 defines shifted frequency Note that if you intend to program marker position you must do it before you load the FSK data list Below you can see how an FSK data table is constructed The sample below shows a list of 10 shifts The EADS North America Test and Services Programming Reference 5 83 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B will step through this list outputting either carrier or shifted frequencies depending on the data list A Zero will generate the carrier frequency and a One will generate shifted frequency Note that the waveform is always a sine wave and that the last cycle is always completed Sample FSK Data Array 0111010001 Parameters Name Type Description lt fsk_data gt ASCII Block of ASCII data that contains information for the generator about when to shift from carrier to shifted frequency and vice versa i Use the following commands for programming the ASK parameters ASK Modulation Ask control is internal The amplitude will toggle between two Programming amplitude settings at a rate determined by the baud value and controlled by a sequence of bits in the ASK data table The commands for programming the amplitude shift keying function are described belo
120. 10 MHz Reference Source Internal External Connector Impedance and Level External Sample Clock Source Connector Frequency Impedance and Level PLL Characteristics Description PLL Input Characteristics External Lock Frequency Range Phase Control Phase Control Accuracy PM Characteristics Description PM Input Bandwidth External Lock Frequency Range PM Input PM Accuracy 3152B User Manual Internal External VXI backplane CLK10 20 0001 1 ppm TCXO initial tolerance from 19 C to 29 C 1ppm C below 19 C and above 29 C 1 ppm year aging rate Front panel BNC 10 KQ 5 TTL 50 2 duty cycle or 50 Q 5 0 dBm manually selectable using internal jumpers External ECLTRGO Front panel BNC From DC to 250 MHz external DC to 66MHz ECLTRGO 50 Q 5 NECL Automatically locks 3152B output to external signal applied to trigger port Same as trigger input Standard Waveforms 500 Hz to 10 MHz Arbitrary Waveforms 500 Hz to 100M points per cycle Coarse 180 Fine 36 with 0 01 resolution 2 sample clock period External signal offsets phase Available in PLL mode when unit is locked to an external signal 100 Hz 10 kHz Standard Waveforms 500 Hz to 10 MHz Arbitrary Waveforms 500 Hz to 100M points per cycle Impedance 100 kQ 5 Sensitivity 20 V Range 130 10 Function Generator Characteristics Description Standard Functions Frequency Range Sin
121. 100 31528 Vtt 1 a LBUS 2048 Clear Al Assignments Figure 4 24 LBUS Synchronization between Adjacent Slots 4 34 ArbConnection EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual X Instrument Synchronization i E 3 x Instruments Pool Group State Model T Address Chan Sit Pan Se _MoveUp 1 Master 3100 3152B 3152B VXID 13 1 3 ADJ 0 0 He 1 Slave 3100 3152B 3152B VxI0 13 2 3 ADJ 1024 KE 2 Master 31528 VXID 5 1 7 LBUS 00 2 Slave 31528 Val E 1 8 LBUS 1024 2 Slave 3100 31528 VXID 7 1 g LBUS 2048 Clear All Assignments Figure 4 25 ECLT Synchronization Example So far the X Instruments Synchronization fields were discussed and described The following describes the functions of the buttons Clear All Assignments used to completely reset the table Note that only editable fields are affected by this action Once pressed the table will look as shown in Figure 4 22 Move Up used to change the position of a module to place it toward the top of the group and master status Note that this operation affects the line that is currently highlighted Move Down used to change the position of a module so it is placed below its current position in the group and can be used to demote a master to a servant Note that this operation affects a line that is curren
122. 152B parameters are modified to accept the defaults of the Modern mode e rstrestores factory defaults for Modern operation e After shut down the 3152B powers up again in Legacy EADS North America Test and Services Operation 3 1 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Output Termination Input Output Protection Power On Reset Defaults 3 2 Operation Publication No 980935 Rev A configuration Example 2 Model 3100M R 3152B default instrument format is Modern e form inst leg modifies the commands set from Modern to Legacy rst is automatically forced and the 3152B parameters are modified to accept the defaults of the Legacy mode e rstrestores factory defaults for Legacy operation e After shut down the 3152B powers up again in Modern configuration Output signals must be properly terminated to minimize signal reflection or power loss due to an impedance mismatch Proper termination is also required for an accurate amplitude level at the main output connector Use 50 Q cables and terminate the main and SYNC cables with terminating resistors Use a 50 termination at the far end of the cable if needed to improve impedance matching The accuracy of the amplitude setting depends upon the load impedance The amplitude of the output signal will not match the amplitude setting for loads that differ from 50 Q To correct for t
123. 166 5 0 100 APPLy DC lt ampl gt HS Syntax 0308A lt float gt Description This command changes the waveform function to standard DC and programs the amplitude This command affects the output regardless of the current output function For example if the 3152B is in FM mode the 3152B will stop generating FM and will revert to the standard DC waveform with parametric values as specified by this command Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt dc_ampl gt 100 to Numeric 100 Programs the amplitude of the standard dc waveform in 100 units of percent Response The 3152B returns the current amplitude setting of DC as in the following example 100 APPLy USER lt seg_ gt lt sclk gt lt ampl gt lt offs gt HS Syntax 0309D lt integer gt lt float gt lt float lt float gt Description This command changes the waveform function to arbitrary and programs the active segment sample clock amplitude and offset simultaneously This command affects the output regardless of the current output function For example if the 3152B is in standard waveform mode the 3152B automatically switches to arbitrary waveform mode and updates the arbitrary waveform parameters as specified by this command Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt seg_ gt 1to 10k Integer 1 Selects the segment number of the active arbitrary waveform lt sclk gt 10e 6 to Numeric 1e6 Programs the sample clock frequency of the
124. 2 MOAN se 1 2 3152B Feature HON Sars 1 3 ALS CONNECTION Feature ele La le 1 4 General Description EE 1 6 Output WaveformS EE EE EE 1 6 PINE ee eee eee eer ee ee e eee Se ee 1 7 Frequency Control and Accuracy eege 1 7 Pinase Lock Loop PUL Keeseren ege eben aa A N Aaaa 1 7 Signal Integrity needed 1 8 Fever FN area Sadat 1 8 ME 1 8 Remote Control EE ME ETE EE EEE 1 8 Carrier Configuration Different Model Number 1 9 lee ee 1 10 Safety GOMSIG ST e 1 11 KREE 1 12 S pplied EE 1 12 Se gi Mace EE dee 1 12 OUTPUT OUT Luse Gen 1 13 SYNC eh AR d 1 13 TAG PLEN TRE PL Luse 1 13 EF 1 14 EXT UN 1 14 STE SJENERT EE 1 14 Standard ie KRAN 1 14 Arbitrary User Waveforms E 1 15 Sequenced Waveforms sedan sage 1 15 MENN 1 17 EE 1 17 NN teas a iy eet een A eR 1 17 EE EE EE 1 18 Frequency Hver ene 1 18 ATP PP arr 1 18 OE ENE EE 1 18 PSK EE EEN 1 18 Eege Eege 1 18 DEE cro a E EE RE 1 19 EADS North America Test and Services i Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Chapter 2 Installation Digital Pulse VWavetomms AA Half Cycle Waveforms rrrnnrnnnrnnnrrnnnrrrrrrnnnnennnn oe NESS General Run Modes Ae Continuous Mode E tie Ge Gated Mode E GET Trigger SourceS ssseeeeeseneesorreneeeeeereseernnerrene ereen Modulation Run Modes ssec Synchronization of Multiple 3152B Modules PLL Synchronization eannnvrnnnnnnnvrnnnnnnnrnnn
125. 3 29 VE saranin iiis raia a teenstoem ence ca stuae toe eater besa te ee eenatan ened 3 29 Modulation as 62 EE 3 30 Controlling the Carrier FEqUENG LA sasssenaNNuGAkSENGAaaaeuasGusunaie 3 31 Controlling the Carrier Base Line vesissecessie havea teceodences viseecnsansannecsdued hacen eieenhehentedoudedenenaeenentad 3 31 Using the Digital Pulse Generator ENEE 3 31 Pulse Design Bundle Tu 3 33 Generating Half Cycle EE e 3 33 Using the oe IP uses hansen 3 34 Counter Timer En ue 3 35 Chapter 4 ArbConnection ee 4 1 What s in This Chapter EE 4 1 Mal PRG NS UAE Pee 4 1 System SUS E 4 1 Installing ArboConnection EE 4 1 Startup A Communication Opttons 4 2 ArbConnection Features snc cac ceccth sand cecansdacwieexuntnnderoudatennasadactcaheds as teienawesetasaupniensensenetbancacnanacees 4 2 EADS North America Test and Services iii Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A Main WINGOW ENE EE ETE ceeds ANE NE 4 3 Control AIMS REE EE NE 4 3 MENN PS 4 5 MUNN 4 6 RUN le E 4 8 standard EE EE EN NE 4 9 Arbitrary Sequence E 4 11 Using the Memory Partition Tab Lu dsen cecerecectsaieectciciereciseeatrarqniiceuemnaniomeieeiaseiceses 4 13 Using Waveform Studio NE REE 4 15 Halt Cycles EE NE 4 19 The Modulation d season eee 4 19 EE EE EE EE EE RE ER EEE 4 20 EE RE EE E NE 4 22 STE EEE NE EN EE EEE ON 4 23 FN PRS 4 24 AP Fe HOD DEE 4 27 Auxili ry
126. 3 mV Setup 31 500 mV Amplitude Amplifier In Arbitrary Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50 Q feedthrough termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function ACV Range 1V 2 Connect the 3152B output to the DMM input Terminate the 3152B output at the DMM input with the 50 feedthrough termination 3 Configure the 3152B as follows Frequency 1 kHz Output On Amplitude 500 mV Offset 1V Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETUP 15 for a DMM reading of 176 7 mV 2 mV Setup 32 100 mV Amplitude Amplifier In Arbitrary Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50 Q feedthrough termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function ACV Range 100 mV 2 Connect the 3152B output to the DMM input Terminate the 3152B output at the DMM input with the 50 feedthrough termination 3 Configure the 3152B as follows 7 18 Adjustments and Firmware Update EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual Frequency 1 kHz Output On Amplitude 100 mV Offset 1V Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETUP 16 for a DMM reading of 35 35 mV 0 5 mV Setup 33 50 mV Amplitude Amplifier In Arbitrary Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50 Q feedthrough termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configur
127. 3152B output at the DMM input with the 50 Q feedthrough termination 3 Configure the 3152B as follows Amplitude 20 mV Offset 7 V Output On Adjustment 1 CAL SETUP 49 for a DMM reading of 7 V 35 mV Setup 22 1 V Offset Output Amplifier In Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50Q feedthrough termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows 7 14 Adjustments and Firmware Update EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual Function DCV Range 1V 2 Connect the 3152B output to the DMM input Terminate the 3152B output at the DMM input with the 50 feedthrough termination 3 Configure the 3152B as follows Amplitude 20 mV Offset 1V Output On Adjustment 1 CAL SETUP 45 for a DMM reading of 1 V 5 mV Setup 23 3 V Offset Output Amplifier In Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50 Q feedthrough termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function DCV Range 10 V 2 Connect the 3152B output to the DMM input Terminate the 3152B output at the DMM input with the 50 Q feedthrough termination 3 Configure the 3152B as follows Amplitude 20 mV Offset 3 V Output On Adjustment 1 CAL SETUP 44 for a DMM reading of 3 V 15 mV Setup 24 5 V Offset Output Amplifier In Equipment
128. 3278 bh Auto Defaut L Anchor 0 Equation d Amplitudefp Remove Store Browse Operands Ess Vertical Scale 64kPts 8kPts Div Horizontal Scale 1kPts 0 1kPts Div Figure 4 39 Using Equation Editor to Add Second Harmonic Distortion In Figure 4 40 we created 10 cycles of sinewave made to decay exponentially The original expression for a standard sinewave is multiplied by the term e p 250 Increasing the value of the divisor 200 in this case will slow down the rate of decay Use the following equation Amplitude p 12000 sin omg p 10 e p 250 Press Preview and Accept and the waveform graph should look like Figure 4 40 EADS North America Test and Services ArbConnection 4 53 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A r Anchor m Waveform Amplitude Level Adjuster 1 J G Start pts fo Max 32767 Cycles Manual Scale Sa F o om End pts 1023 Min 32768 1 C Auto _Defauit_ L Anchor 0 Equation a y P Amplitudefp Remove Store Browse Operands ess 12000 sinformg p 10J e p 250 v OK Vertical Scale 64kPts 8kPts Div Horizontal Scale 1kPts 0 1kPts Div Figure 4 40 Using the Equation Editor to Generate Exponentially Decaying Sinewave The last example as shown in Figure 4 41 is the most complex to be discus
129. 4 35 shows an example of a waveform created using the equation editor and the anchors to limit generation of the waveform to between points 100 and 900 The various elements of the waveform graph are described below The waveform graph has two axes vertical and horizontal Both axes are divided into points The vertical axis represents 12 bits 4k levels of resolution with 3152B legacy mode selected or 16 bits 64k levels of vertical resolution when modern mode operation is selected The horizontal axis by default has 1024 points from point O to 1023 This number can be changed using the Wave Length field in the Toolbar The maximum length depends on the memory installed ArbConnection 4 45 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A in your instrument The wave composer will let you define the horizontal axis to a maximum of 1 Meg words with standard 1MB memory and 4 Meg words with the 4MB memory expansion option where available ls Anchor Start pts H Waveform Amplitude 1 r Level Adjuster Max 2047 Cycles I Auto Scaling _Preview End pts 1023 Min 2048 1 tes omn eet Equation History E d Amplitude p Insert Wave Clear Open co Cancel OK amp sin 1 O omg p p t 0 3 D Aliases gt gt 4 46 ArbConnection Figure 4
130. 50 us Sync On Output On 5 Using ArbConnection prepare open the Hop Table composer and download the following table Pen Frequency 1 0e6 1 2e6 1 4e6 1 6e6 1 8e6 2 0e6 2 2e6 2 4e6 2 6e6 2 8e6 Test Procedure 1 Verify Hop operation on the oscilloscope as follows Waveform Frequency steps fixed dwell time of 50 us Max Hop Freq 2 8 MHz Min Hop Freq 1 0 MHz Period 500 us Test Results Pass Fail Amplitude Hopping Equipment Oscilloscope Preparation 1 Configure the oscilloscope as follows Time Base 50 us EADS North America Test and Services Performance Checks 6 33 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A Sampling Rate 50 MS s at least Trigger source Channel 2 positive slope Amplitude 5 V div Connect the 3152B output to the oscilloscope input channel 1 Connect the 3152B SYNC to the oscilloscope input channel 2 Configure the 3152B controls as follows Waveform Modulated Modulation Amplitude Hopping Hop Mode Fix Dwell Time 50 us Sync On Output On 5 Using ArbConnection open and prepare the Hop Table composer and download the following table AON Amplitude 1 2 4 8 16 Test Procedure 1 Verify 5 Hop operation on the oscilloscope as follows Waveform Amplitude steps 50 us fixed
131. 501 lt string gt Description This command partitions the waveform memory into smaller segments The principle is the same as when using the TRACE DEF command but this is a more efficient implementation for when a large number of segments need to be defined The idea is that waveform segments can be built as one long waveform and then split into the required number of segments by using this command to download a binary table of segment sizes When using this method there is no need to define and download waveforms to individual segments Using this command segment table data is loaded to the 3152B using binary transfer like when downloading waveform data using the trace command Binary transfer allows any 8 bit byte including extended ASCII code to be transmitted in a message This command is particularly useful when a large number of segments are required As an example the next command generates three segments with 12 bytes of data containing segment size information SEGment 212 lt binary_block gt This command causes the transfer of 12 bytes of data 3 segment definitions into the segment table buffer The lt header gt is interpreted this way 5 56 Programming Reference EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual The ASCII tt 23 designates the start of the binary data block
132. 52A Publication No 980935 Rev A employing the latest technology and component improvements Although 100 backwards compatibility was the basis for the new 3152B design some of the 3152A functionality could not be duplicated exactly Table 5 1 lists all of the 3152B SCPI commands and highlights the areas where it differs from the original 3152A design Expect that commands that are not compatible with the old 3152A will generate errors Keyword Parameter Form Default 3152A HS Instrument Control Commands INSTrument MODE NORMal FAST NORM v 0150A Run Mode Commands INITiate IMMediately CONTinuous OFFJON 0 1 1 1110A TRIGger IMMediate v 11000 BURG STATe OFF ON 0 1 0 1120A COUNt 1 to 1000000 1 1121A DELay 0 10 to 2e6 even numbers 0 0 OFF 1131A GATE STATe OFF ON 0 1 0 1150A LEVel 10 to 10 0 1180A SOURce ADVance EXTernal INTernal TTLTrg lt n gt ECLTrg1 EXT 1140A SLOPe POSitive NEGative POS 1160A TIMer 1e 6 to 20 15e 6 1170A 5 8 Programming Reference Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com EADS North America Test and Services Publication No 980935 Rev A Table 5 1 3152B SCPI Command Summary for 3152A Emulation continued 3152B User Manual
133. 52B SYNC to the oscilloscope input channel 2 4 Configure model 3152B controls as follows Waveform Modulated Modulation FM Run Mode Burst Burst Count 5 Carrier Freq 1 MHz Mod Freq 10 kHz Deviation 500 kHz Sync On Re trigger On Re trig Delay 200 us Output On Test Procedure 1 Verify re triggered FM burst standard waveform operation on the oscilloscope as follows Waveform Repetitive burst of 5 cycle sine waveforms Mod Frequency 10 kHz Re trigger delay 200 us 6 28 Performance Checks EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual Max Deviation 1 25 MHz Min Deviation 750 kHz Test Results Pass Fail FM Arbitrary Equipment Oscilloscope Waveforms Preparation 1 Configure the oscilloscope as follows Time Base 0 2 ms Sampling Rate 50 MS s at least Trace A View Jitter Type FREQ CLK Trigger source Channel 2 positive slope Amplitude 1 V div Connect the 3152B output to the oscilloscope input channel 1 Connect the 3152B SYNC to the oscilloscope input channel 2 Configure model 3152B controls as follows Waveform Modulated Modulation FM Mod Waveform Arbitrary Carrier Freq 1 MHz FM SCLK 2 5 MS s Sync On Output On 5 Using ArbConnection open the FM Composer and download the following waveform Wave
134. 7 6 5 4 3 2 i o ER re up Output Queue Service i read by Serial Poll Request esmay 3 2 1 0 Status Byte Register Generation read by STB og BP 20 OG Logical OR e 16 Service Request TT Enable Register peau RE Fvalue gt Figure 5 7 The SCPI Status Model EADS North America Test and Services Programming Reference 5 119 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A SREO Clears all bits in the register SRE1 Not used SRE2 Not used SRE4 Not used SRE8 Not used SRE16 Service request on MAV SRE32 Service request on ESB summary bit SRE128 Not used The Standard Event Status Register reports status for special Standard Event applications The 8 bits of the ESR have been defined by the IEEE Status Register STD 488 2 as specific conditions which can be monitored and ESR reported back to the user upon request The Standard Event Status Register is destructively read with the ESR common query The Standard Event Status Register is cleared with a CLS common command with a power on and when read by ESR The arrangement of the various bits within the register is firm and is required by all GPIB instruments that implement the IEEE STD 488 2 Description of the various bits is given in the following Bit 0 Operation Complete Generat
135. 80935 Rev A Base Line Offset Adjustments Setup 12 Setup 13 Setup 14 3152B User Manual The base line offset adjustments assure that the AC signal is symmetrical around the OV line Use this procedure if you suspect that there is a base line accuracy issue Amplifier Offset Amplifier In Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50 Q feedthrough termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function DCV Range 100 mV 2 Connect the 3152B output to the DMM input Terminate the 3152B output at the DMM input with the 50 feedthrough termination 3 Configure the 3152B as follows Function Standard Waveform Sine Amplitude OV Frequency 1 MHz Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETUP 2 for a DMM reading of 0 V 20 mV Pre Amplifier Offset Amplifier Out Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50 Q feedthrough termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function DCV Range 100 mV 2 Connect the 3152B output to the DMM input Terminate the 3152B output at the DMM input with the 50 feedthrough termination 3 Configure the 3152B as follows Function Standard Waveform Sine Amplitude OV Frequency 1 MHz Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETUP 3 for a DMM reading of 0 V 5 mV Base Line Offset Amplifier In Modulation Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50 Q feedthrough termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as fol
136. 80935 Rev A open a dialog box An example of the Sine waveform dialog box is shown in Figure 4 33 This dialog box is similar to the rest of the waveforms so the other waveform dialog boxes will not be described here Creating Sine Waveforms Use the following procedure to create sine waveforms from the built in library Click on Wave then sine and the dialog box as shown in Figure 4 33 appears You can now start programming parameters that are available in this box Start Point Defines the first point where the created wave will start Note that if you change the start point the left anchor will automatically adjust itself to the selected start point The example shows start point set at point 0 End Point Defines where the created waveform will end Note that as you change the end point the right anchor will automatically adjust itself to the selected end point The example shows end point set at point 499 Cycles The Cycles parameter defines how many sine cycles will be created within the specified start and end points The example below shows five sine cycles Amplitude 12 bit resolution waveforms have 4096 levels and 16 bit resolution waveforms have 65 536 levels The Amplitude parameter defines how many of these steps are used for generating the sine The example is showing a sine waveform with maximum peak to peak amplitude for a 12 bit waveform Any number range below the maximum and minimum values generate
137. A 3152B User Manual DDS Output Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Termination 50 Q feedthrough at the DMM input Function DCV 2 Connect 3152B output to the DMM input 3 Configure the 3152B as follows Waveform Modulated Modulation OFF CW Frequency 1 MHz Amplitude 6V Output On Test Procedure 1 Perform Offset Accuracy tests using Table 6 9 Table 6 9 Offset Accuracy DDS Output at 6 V 3152B Offset Setting Error Limits DMM Reading 0000V 08m 1 1 Modify 3152B Amplitude setting to 1 V and offset setting to 0 V 2 Continue the Offset tests using Table 6 10 Table 6 10 Offset Accuracy DDS Output at 1 V 3152B Offset Setting Error Limits DMM Reading 0000V vos This tests the characteristics of the square waveform including ee transition times ringing and overshoot Square Wave Equipment Oscilloscope 50 20 dB attenuator feed through Checks Preparation 1 Configure the Oscilloscope follows Termination 50 20 dB attenuator feed through at the oscilloscope input Setup As required for the test 2 Connect 3152B output to the oscilloscope input 3 Configure the 3152B as follows Frequency 1 MHz Waveform Square wave Amplitude 6V Output On Test Procedure EADS North America Test and Services Performance Checks 6 7 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No
138. ALFcycle FREQuency lt freq gt HS Syntax 0140A lt float gt Description Programs the frequency of the half cycle waveforms in units of hertz Hz It has no affect on the frequency of other waveform functions Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt freq gt 10e 3 to Numeric 1e6 Sets the frequency of the half cycle waveform in units 1e6 of Hz This parameter does not affect the frequency of other waveform functions Response The 3152B returns the current half cycle frequency value HALFcycle PHASe lt phase gt HS Syntax 0141A lt float gt Description Programs the start phase of the half cycle sine and triangle waveform This command has no affect on other waveform functions Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt phase gt Oto 360 Numeric 0 Programs the start phase parameter for the half cycle sine and triangle waveforms in units of degrees The phase can be programmable with resolution of 0 05 throughout the entire frequency range of the half cycle function Response The 3152B returns the current start phase value HALFcycle SHAPe SINusoid TRlangle SQUare HS Syntax 0142A lt float gt Description This command defines the type of half cycle waveform that will be available at the output connector Parameters Name Type Default Description SINusoid Discrete SIN Selects the half cycle sine waveform TRlangle Discrete Selects the half cycle triangular waveform SQUare
139. ALL v 140007 5 110 Programming Reference EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual RESet or RST HS Syntax 14200 Description This command will reset the 3152B to its factory defaults SYSTem ERRor HS Syntax 1430 Description Query only This query will interrogate the 3152B for programming errors Response The 3152B returns error code Error messages are listed later in this manual SYSTem VERSion HS Syntax 1440 Description Query only This query will interrogate the 3152B for its current firmware version The firmware version is automatically programmed to a secure location in the flash memory and cannot be modified by the user except when performing firmware update Response The 3152B returns the current firmware version code in a format similar to the following 1 35 SYSTem INFormation CALibration HS Syntax 0175A Description Query only This query will interrogate the instrument for its last calibration date Response The generator will return the last calibration date in a format similar to the following 24 Oct 2006 10 characters maximum SYSTem INFormation MODel HS Syntax 0176 Description Query only This query will interrogate the instrument for its model number in a format similar to the following 3152B The model number is pro
140. America Test and Services a division of EADS North America Inc Printed in the United States of America All rights reserved This book or parts thereof may not be reproduced in any form without written permission of the publisher Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com THANK YOU FOR PURCHASING THIS EADS NORTH AMERICA TEST AND SERVICES PRODUCT For this product or any other EADS North America Test and Services a division of EADS North America Inc EADS North America Test and Services product that incorporates software drivers you may access our web site to verify and or download the latest driver versions The web address for driver downloads is http www eads nadefense com downloads If you have any questions about software driver downloads or our privacy policy please contact us at info eads nadefense com WARRANTY STATEMENT All EADS North America Test and Services products are designed and manufactured to exacting standards and in full conformance to EADS ISO 9001 2000 processes This warranty does not apply to defects resulting from any modification s of any product or part without EADS North America Test and Services express written consent or misuse of any product or part The warranty also does not apply to fuses software non rechargeable batteries damage from battery leakage or problems arising from normal wear such as mechanical relay life or f
141. Amplitude Post Attenuators Arbitrary Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50 Q feedthrough termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function ACV Range 10 V 2 Connect the 3152B output to the DMM input Terminate the 3152B output at the DMM input with the 50 feedthrough termination 3 Configure the 3152B as follows Frequency 1 kHz Output On Amplitude 3V Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETUP 22 for a DMM reading of 1 0606 mV 10 mV Setup 39 500 mV Amplitude Post Attenuators Arbitrary Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50 Q feedthrough termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function ACV Range 1V 2 Connect the 3152B output to the DMM input Terminate the 3152B output at the DMM input with the 50 feedthrough termination 3 Configure the 3152B as follows Frequency 1 kHz Output On Amplitude 500 mV Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETUP 23 for a DMM reading of 176 7 mV 2 mV Setup 40 100 mV Amplitude Post Attenuators Arbitrary Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50 Q feedthrough termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function ACV Range 100 mV 2 Connect the 3152B output to the DMM input Terminate the 3152B output at the DMM input with the 50 feedthrough EADS North America Test and Services Adjustments and Firmware Update 7 21 Artisan Technology Group
142. An error query allows these errors to be monitored Clear Queue clears the error queue The error queue can buffer up to 35 errors and then generate a queue overflow message while ignoring new errors This command clears the error queue and allows fresh errors to be captured General Information This general information group of buttons is used for displaying or monitoring parameters stored in flash memory These are Instrument serial number Last calibration data 3152B installed options and the installed firmware revision Filters The Filters group has a set of selectors that select the filter characteristics Filters can be turned on and off freely as long as you are not generating a standard sine waveform The following filter options are available All Off no filter is applied to the output path 20MHz a Bessel type filter that has a 20 MHz cutoff frequency 25MHz a Bessel type filter that has a 25 MHz cutoff frequency 50MHz a Bessel type filter that has a 50 MHz cutoff frequency 60MHz an Elliptic type filter that has a 60 MHz cutoff frequency 120MHz an Elliptic type filter that has a 120 MHz cutoff frequency EADS North America Test and Services ArbConnection 4 37 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Calibration The Composers Panels 4 38 ArbConnection Publication No 980935 Rev A The Calibration
143. Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A Setup 54 100 mV Amplitude Post Attenuators Modulation Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50 Q feedthrough termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function ACV Range 100 mV 2 Connect the 3152B output to the DMM input Terminate the 3152B output at the DMM input with the 50 feedthrough termination 3 Configure the 3152B as follows Frequency 1 kHz Output On Amplitude 100 mV Mode Modulation Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETUP 38 for a DMM reading of 35 35 mV 0 5 mV Setup 55 50 mV Amplitude Post Attenuators Modulation Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50 Q feedthrough termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function ACV Range 100 mV 2 Connect the 3152B output to the DMM input Terminate the 3152B output at the DMM input with the 50 feedthrough termination 3 Configure the 3152B as follows Frequency 1 kHz Output On Amplitude 50 mV Mode Modulation Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETUP 39 for a DMM reading of 17 67 mV 0 5 mV 7 28 Adjustments and Firmware Update EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A Pulse Response Adjustm
144. B output at the DMM input with the 50 feedthrough termination 3 Configure the 3152B as follows Frequency 1 kHz Output On Amplitude 10 V Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETUP12 for a DMM reading of 3 535 V 35 mV Setup 29 5 V Amplitude Amplifier In Arbitrary Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50 Q feedthrough termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function ACV Range 10 V 2 Connect the 3152B output to the DMM input Terminate the 3152B output at the DMM input with the 50 Q feedthrough termination 3 Configure the 3152B as follows Frequency 1 kHz Output On Amplitude 5V Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETUP 13 for a DMM reading of 1 767 V 20 mV EADS North America Test and Services Adjustments and Firmware Update 7 17 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A Setup 30 1 V Amplitude Amplifier In Arbitrary Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50 Q feedthrough termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function ACV Range 1V 2 Connect the 3152B output to the DMM input Terminate the 3152B output at the DMM input with the 50 feedthrough termination 3 Configure the 3152B as follows Frequency 1 kHz Output On Amplitude 1V Offset 1V Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETUP 14 for a DMM reading of 353 5 mV
145. B returns the current SYNC position value 5 30 Programming Reference EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual OUTPut SYNC SOURce BIT LCOMplete SSYNc HCLock PULSe ZEROcross HS Syntax 0240A lt 1 2 3 4 5 gt Description Selects the source characteristic of the 3152B SYNC output Parameters Name BIT LCOMplete SSYNc HCLock PULSe ZEROcross Response Type Discrete Discrete Discrete Discrete Discrete Discrete Default BIT Description Outputs a narrow sync pulse at a selected position along a standard or arbitrary waveform For modulated modes the sync output is automatically used as a marker The fixed width of the sync pulse in this mode is 4 points in modern mode and 2 points in legacy mode Use PULSe mode instead of BIT if the width of the pulse needs to be changed The LCOM sync pulse starts at the beginning of the selected segment of a sequence and ends at the end of the sequence You may change the start position within the segment by using the outp sync pos command You may change the segment using the trace sel command In either case the LCOM pulse will start at the specified position but will always end at the end of the sequence Similar to the bit option except that it for triggered or gated modes it eliminates the 1 c
146. CE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual Chapter 2 Installation Preparation for Use Logical Address Selection Installation Preparation for use includes selecting the required logical address and installing the module in a VXIbus chassis The VXlbus Chassis Resource Manager identifies a module in the system by the module s address VXIbus logical addresses can range from 0 to 255 However logical address 0 is reserved for the Resource Manager Addresses 1 to 254 are reserved for VXIbus modules Logical address 255 permits the Resource Manager to dynamically configure the module logical address To change the 3152B logical address use the 8 segment DIP switch S1 accessible from the side of the module near the rear of the case Figure 2 1 shows the logical address switch The switch segments are marked with numbers 1 to 8 Each switch segment represents a binary digit of the 8 bit binary logical address The segment marked 1 represents the least significant digit A switch is active equal to 1 when it is moved downward to the ON position EADS North America Test and Services ships the 3152B with the logical address set to 2 as shown in Figure 2 1 nn Figure 2 1 Switch S1 Set to Logical Address 2 The 3152B may be installed into any slot of the VXlbus mainframe except slot 0 When inserting the instrument into the mainframe gently rock it back and forth to seat the co
147. CLK Input or PM Input internally selectable 10 MHz Reference input EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual General Power Requirements 25W maximum EMC Certification CE marked Operating temperature 0 C to 55 C Storage Temperature 40 C to 70 C Safety Designed to meet IEC 1010 1 UL 3111 1 CSA 22 2 1010 Workmanship Standards Conform to IPC A 610D EADS North America Test and Services 3152B Specifications A 11 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A This page was intentionally left blank A 12 3152B Specifications EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual Appendix B 3201 A 3202A Module Specifications Input Characteristics Number of Channels Single channel 3201A or dual channel 3202A Inputs 2 each channel Connectors BNC SMB channel 1 2 x SMB channel 2 Impedance 50 Q 75 Q or 1 MQ can be special ordered with different impedance setting Coupling DC Damage Level 12 Vp p 6 V to 6 V peaks Frequency Range DC to 15 MHz full power bandwidth DC coupled 50 input output impedance Output Charac
148. Command Mode Luvasnsesmsnnengtemmnmenainrikeineadtudneisitemai 5 6 Legacy vs Modern Command Get AAA 5 7 3152B Legacy CommandS eessen Eed 5 8 EADS North America Test and Services v Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A 3100R M 3152B el ue EE 5 13 Instrument amp Output Control Commande A 5 23 R n Mode AER 5 37 Standard Waveform Control Air ue EE 5 43 Arbitrary Waveforms Control Gommands suassaunesmmeanm ml meinundamikmd eiere 5 50 The Apply Control Commands eege eege ege 5 58 Using the Apply COMMANOS E 5 58 Sequenced Waveforms Control Commande AAA 5 65 Modulated Waveform Global Control Commande nnet 5 71 Modulation Control CommandS EE 5 73 AM FET ae 5 75 FM Modulation Eegen e zeetzgzeed stees Neen ce ctedcnndedavaceuc snescuarssunessdanpsena oieesiawateners 5 76 Sweep Programming E 5 79 FSK Modulation Edel eru te DE 5 82 ASK Modulation Erop 5 84 PSK Modulation Programming ssncgesisse s skene 5 86 Frequency Hopping Modulation Programming errnnnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnvnrnnnnrnnannnnnerennnnrrrrrnenennennnn 5 88 Amplitude Hopping Modulation Programming eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaaaeeeeeeeeeneee 5 90 3D Modulation Programming mentee ener ene ere deeg 5 92 Digital Pulse Programming EE 5 93 Half Cycle Control Commands vujnsoranetsnaanteu eigu EE Eeer EE den 5 98 Counter Control Commande uk 5 100 Synchronization COMMENTS eege
149. DELete lt file name gt LOAD TRACe lt label gt lt file_name gt System Commands RESet v 14200 SYSTem v ERRor v 14300 VERSion v 14400 INFOrmation CALibration 0175A MODel 01768 SERial 0177A SMEMory v MODe READ WRITe WRIT v 1200A STATe OFF ON 0 1 0 v 1210A TEST v ALL v 14008 EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Programming Reference 5 21 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A Table 5 2 3152B SCPI Command Summary continued Keyword Parameter Form Default 3152A HS System Commands continued CLS v 15000 ESE 1 to 255 1 v 1501A OPC v 15020 RST v 14200 SRE 1 to 255 1 v 150308 TRG v 11000 ESE v 150187 ESR v 15048 IDN v 15068 OPC v 150287 OPT 3152A 0 64k 1 256k 2 512k OPT 3152B 0 1Meg 1 2Meg 2 4Meg STB v 15088 TST v 15000 5 22 Programming Reference EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual Instrument amp This group is used to control the output channels and their respective state amplitude and offset settings as well as the waveform mode Output Control You can also syn
150. DMM BNC to BNC cable 50 Q feedthrough termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function DCV Range 10 V 2 Connect the 3152B output to the DMM input Terminate the 3152B output at the DMM input with the 50 Q feedthrough termination 3 Configure the 3152B as follows Amplitude 20 mV Offset 5 V Output On Adjustment 1 CAL SETUP 43 for a DMM reading of 5 V 25 mV Setup 25 7 V Offset Output Amplifier In Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50 Q feedthrough termination EADS North America Test and Services Adjustments and Firmware Update 7 15 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 4 Configure the DMM as follows Function DCV Range 10 V 5 Connect the 3152B output to the DMM input Terminate the 3152B output at the DMM input with the 50 feedthrough termination 6 Configure the 3152B as follows Amplitude 20 mV Offset 7V Output On Adjustment 2 CAL SETUP 42 for a DMM reading of 7 V 35 mV Setup 26 1 V Offset Output Amplifier Out Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50 Q feedthrough termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function DCV Range 1V 2 Connect the 3152B output to the DMM input Terminate the 3152B output at the DMM input with the 50 feedt
151. E ArbConnection File View System Help Link 31528 offline vil De RM Control Panels Figure 4 2 ArbConnection Menu and Link Bar Operation Modulation Figure 4 3 Main Panels Toolbar Each control panel replicates the look and feel of a bench top instrument s front panel Refer to the Output panel in Figure 4 4 Other panels are similar so the following description of the Output panel serves as guide for controlling the rest of the panels Looking at Figure 4 5 identify the following controls and indicators e Pushbuttons e LEDs e Radio buttons e Dial EADS North America Test and Services ArbConnection 4 3 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual 4 4 ArbConnection Publication No 980935 Rev A e Digital display The functions of these are as follows Pushbuttons Clicking the mouse on a pushbutton toggles an option on and off For example clicking the State button in the Output section turns the 3152B output on To help indicate this the button then appears as though pushed in and a red bar at the center of the button appears to be illuminated Clicking the Output button a second time turns off the output and then the button no longer appears pushed in or illuminated LEDs LEDs indicate which of the parameters are displayed on the digital display A red LED indicates that the parameter name next to this LED is se
152. EE 5 103 LXI System Configuration Commande 5 107 System COANE ERE EE 5 110 IEEE STD 488 2 Common Commands and Queries rrnnnnnnnvrrnnnnnnnvvnnnnnnnvnnnrnrnrrrnnrrrrrrrenrennnn 5 113 ae GE Ee EC 5 116 The Status Byte Register STB and 5 116 Reading the Status Byte Register nmm mmemmemmemmemmnmmnmnenmnenmnennnmnmmmimmn 5 117 Clearing the Status Byte Register i 5 117 Service Request Enable Register PE 5 117 Standard Event Status Register ESR EE 5 120 Standard Event Status Enable Register ESE AEN 5 121 Ero Nerve ee ee ee Eaa 5 121 Chapter 6 Performance Checks sisccciiiicscstsccssnnsdesansscsntennatainncssinesannadannnasadenscssstntenanaaden 6 1 What s in This e Ee 6 1 Performance eegene eebe 6 1 Environmental Conditions 6 2 Warm up Period DEE 6 2 initial Instrument Settings E 6 2 Recommended Test Equipment enrrnnnnonornnnnvvvvnennrnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnenennennnnnnnen 6 2 TEPPE 6 2 Initial Instrument Setting EE EE EN ee eee ee re 6 3 vi EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual Frequency ACCUraCy EE 6 3 Frequency Accuracy Internal Reference mrrrrnannnnnnnvnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnvnnnennnennnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnrernnnnne 6 3 Frequency Accuracy External 10MHz Reference AAR 6 4 APIE FUN ee 6 4 Amplitude Accuracy DAG Output scorti E Ea
153. EVel The trig slop command defines the polarity of both modes Select the source as either the front panel TRIG IN connector or from one of the backplane trigger lines Note that if you want to control the trigger level threshold you can only do it if you are using the front panel input This command affects the 3152B only after it is set to INIT CONT OFF mode Parameters Name Type Default Description LEVel Discrete LEV Selects a level with a programmable threshold at the external trigger input as the gating source 5 40 Programming Reference EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual TRANsition Discrete Selects a transition pulse with a programmable threshold and slope to first turn the gate on and then to turn it off Response The 3152B returns LEV or TRAN depending on the selected option TRIGger GATE OFF ON 0 1 HS Syntax 1150A lt 0 1 gt Description Toggle gated run mode on or off Affect the 3152B only after it is set to INIT CONT OFF mode Parameters Range Type Default Description 0 1 Discrete 0 Turns gate run mode off or on Response The 3152B returns 0 or 1 depending on the selected option TRIGger LEVel lt level gt HS Syntax 1180A lt float gt Description The trigger level command sets the threshold level at the trigger input connector The tri
154. However after you use the controls to specify the pulse waveform the 3152B creates it digitally in the arbitrary waveform memory e Half cycle waveforms Half cycle waveforms are similar to standard waveforms but a programmed delay interval separates the half cycles e Phase Lock Loop PLL mode This special function allows phase locking to an external signal regardless of the wave shape and frequency of that signal While locked to the external signal the 3152B can generate any of the above functions with the added control that is attributed to the external signal e Counter timer The 3152B also performs counter timer measurements The 3152B has two run modes that determine when it will output a waveform Continuous Run is the basic mode for generating a waveform that does not stop This mode is appropriate except when the application requires synchronization to external events In Interrupted Run mode the output is either triggered or gated by external signals The 3152B accepts a trigger event from the front panel connector a backplane trigger line or a software command from your computer The Run mode and triggering are discussed later in this chapter An internal reference determines the frequency accuracy of the output waveform The internal reference provides 1 PPM accuracy and stability over time and temperature For applications that require better accuracy and stability or just clock synchronization to external dev
155. IN 0142A Counter Commands COUNtter FUNG tion FREQuency PERiod APERiod PULSe TOTalize FREQ 0135A DISPIay MODE NORMal HOLD NORM 0133A GATE TIME 100e 6 to 1 1 0134A RESet 01370 READ 01368 Synchronization Commands SOURce v PHASe v LOCK v STATe OFF ON 0 1 0 v 0820A ADJust 0 to 360 0 v 0810A NULL Error not supported v 08500 SOURce MASTer SLAVe MAST v 0800A 5 20 Programming Reference EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A Table 5 2 3152B SCPI Command Summary continued 3152B User Manual Keyword Parameter Form Default 3152A HS Synchronization Commands continued SOURce v PHASe2 PLL v LOCK v STATe OFF ON 0 1 0 v 0920A SOURce EXTernal TTLTrg lt n gt ECLTrg 0 EXT v 0930A ADJust 180 to 180 0 v 0900A FINe 36 to 36 0 v 0910A LXI Configuration Commands SYSTem v IP ADDRess lt IP address gt 0167A MASK lt mask gt 0171A GATeway lt gate way gt 0169A BOOTp OFF ON 0 1 0 0168A HOSTname lt host_name gt 0170A KEEPalive STATe OFF ON 0 1 1 0173A TIMEout 2 to 300 45 0174A PROBes 2 to 10 2 0172A USB Mass Memory Commands MMEMory CATalog CDIRectory lt directory name gt
156. Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Pulse Example Section 2 4 68 ArbConnection Vertical Scale 10 1 25V Div Horizontal Scale 23ms 2 3ms Div Publication No 980935 Rev A The first pulse section is complete We are ready now to start building the second section of the pulse as shown in Figure 4 48 Use the Pulse Composer s Edit menu to select the Append Section operation new section number will appear but its fields will be initially empty to the right of the section identifier Before you start entering values in this section note that there are linear transitions required for this section Therefore select the Time Level Points option in the Pulse Train Design Format group You are now ready to start programming values If you try to switch design formats after you have already typed in some values the Pulse Editor will display a warning box alerting you that the design format can only be changed for an empty section In this case the only way to recover is to delete all entries and start from an empty index list Type the section entries as shown in the figure iol xd Seen Ful train 3 SG Z cnt ote W Pulse Editor Section 2 lt Points gt r Section Structure Get Time Cumulative eve Interval Time 1 0 0 2 i 1 Pulse Train Design Format H DC Intervals SES Time Level Points Ah Append Insert Delete De
157. M depending on the filter currently connected in series with the output signal 5 28 Programming Reference EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual OUTPut FILTer OFF ON 0 1 HS Syntax 0202A lt 0 1 gt Description This command toggles selection of the filter selected by the OUTP FILT command Note that the filters are not accessible during standard sine waveform output In order to control filters change the output waveform function to another waveform type to allow this command to execute Parameters Range Type Default Description 0 1 Discrete 0 Toggles selection of the selected output filter Response The 3152B returns 1 if a filter is enabled or 0 if a filter is disabled OUTPut LOAD lt load gt HS Syntax 0012A lt integer gt Description This command specifies the load impedance to be applied to the 3152B main output Parameters Name Type Default Description lt load gt Numeric integer50 Specifies the load impedance that will be applied to the only 3152B outputs in units of Q The default setting is 50 Q The range of load impedance is 50 Q to 1 MQ Accurate specification of the load impedance is required to automatically apply the programmed amplitude level at the load OUTPut OFF ON 0 1 HS Syntax 0200A lt 0 1 gt Description This comma
158. Numeric 1 Programs a marker pulse at an index frequency hop integer only position Response The 3152B returns the current marker position Use the following commands for programming the amplitude hop Amplitude parameters Hop control is internal The amplitude will hop from Hopping amplitude level to amplitude level at a rate determined by the dwell e time value and controlled by a sequence of amplitudes in the HOP Programming There are two hop modes Fixed Dwell where the rate of which the generator hops from amplitude level to amplitude level is constant and Variable Dwell where the rate of which the generator hops from amplitude level to amplitude level is programmable for each hop The commands for programming the amplitude hopping function are described below Note that the carrier waveform frequency CW setting is common to all modulation schemes AHOP DWELI MODe FlXed VARiable HS Syntax 0061A lt 0 1 gt Description This selects between fixed or variable dwell time for the amplitude hops Select the fixed option if you want each amplitude level to dwell equally on each step The variable option lets you program different dwell times for each amplitude hop The 3152B output level hops from one amplitude level to the next according to a sequence given in a hop table The variable dwell time table contains dwell time data for each step however the fixed dwell time table does not contain any dwell time information and
159. Numeric Selects the segment number to be defined integer only lt length gt 16 10 for Numeric Programs the size of the selected segment Minimum FORM integer only segment length is 16 points 10 points minimum for INST LEG FORM INST LEG in 12 bit format the maximum is to max limited by the total amount of installed memory size of memory TRACe DELete lt segment_number gt HS Syntax 09201 lt integer gt Description This command deletes a waveform memory segment The memory space that is being freed will be available for new waveforms as long as the new waveform is equal to or smaller than the size to the deleted segment If the deleted segment is the last segment then the size of another waveform written to the same segment is not limited For example consider two segments the first with1000 points and the second with 100 points If you delete segment 1 you can load another waveform into segment 1 with 1000 points If you load segment 1 with 1004 points the instrument will generate an error and will not accept this waveform On the other hand if you delete segment 2 then you can re load this segment with a waveform having length limited only by the size of the entire memory space Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt segment gt 1to10k Numeric 1 Selects the segment number of which will be deleted number gt integer only TRACe DELete ALL HS Syntax 10210 Description This command deletes all waveform
160. Phase Fine 0 Equipment Counter Function Generator T Connector BNC to BNC cables Preparation 1 Configure the counter as follows Termination 50Q DC Function TI A gt B 2 Connect the 3152B output to counter input A 3 Connect an external function generator to counter input B and to the TRG PLL input of 3152B 4 Prepare the external function generator waveform as follows Amplitude TTL Waveform Square Frequency 10 kHz 5 Configure the 3152B as follows Function Mode Arbitrary Wavelength 1000 points Waveform Square Run Mode PLL Fine Phase Offset 30 Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETUP 61 for a counter reading of 8 33 us 500ns 2 Repeat Setup 10 and Setup 11 until the errors are balanced between the steps Oscillator Use this procedure to adjust the reference oscillator and gated S oscillator These oscillators determine the accuracy of the output Adjustments frequency and timing functions so if you suspect that there is an accuracy issue proceed with the calibration of the oscillators Note that Setup 50MHz is marked as a factory adjustment and therefore it is not normally required during normal calibration cycles except when the gated oscillator accuracy does not meet the published specification limit or after a repair has been executed on this circuit EADS North America Test and Services Adjustments and Firmware Update 7 9 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www art
161. Q and the amplitude accuracy is calibrated for a connection to a 50Q load The amplitude is doubled for high impedance loads greater than 100 kQ The SYNC OUT connector outputs a single TTL level pulse for synchronizing other instruments such as an oscilloscope to the output waveform The SYNC signal always appears at a fixed point relative to the waveform The location of the SYNC signal relative to the waveform is programmable as is the pulse width When the sweep or any other modulation function is enabled the SYNC connector is also useful as a marker output The TRIG PLL IN connector accepts signals that stimulate the generation of output waveforms The 3152B ignores this input when operating in Continuous mode When placed in Trigger Gated or Burst mode the trigger input is active and the 3152B waits for the proper condition to trigger the instrument In Trigger and Burst modes the TRIG PLL input is edge sensitive so that a signal transition will trigger the 3152B The direction of the transition is programmable In gated mode the TRIG PLL signal is level sensitive The output waveform is enabled when the TRIG PLL signal voltage is beyond a threshold voltage The threshold voltage and direction are programmable within the range of 10 V to 10 V When the PLL function is selected this input feeds the reference signal to the PLL circuit The PLL input must be stable and repeatedly cross the trigger level threshold setting Sig
162. Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A termination 3 Configure the 3152B as follows Frequency 1 kHz Output On Amplitude 100 mV Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETUP 24 for a DMM reading of 35 35 mV 0 5 mV Setup 41 50 mV Amplitude Post Attenuators Arbitrary Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50 Q feedthrough termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function ACV Range 100 mV 2 Connect the 3152B output to the DMM input Terminate the 3152B output at the DMM input with the 50 feedthrough termination 3 Configure the 3152B as follows Frequency 1 kHz Output On Amplitude 50 mV Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETUP 25 for a DMM reading of 17 67 mV 0 5 mV 7 22 Adjustments and Firmware Update EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual Amplitude The amplitude adjustments modulation ensure that AC levels are g within the specified range Use this procedure if you suspect that the Adjustments amplitude accuracy is an issue for the CW modes Modulation Setup 42 10 V Amplitude Amplifier In Modulation Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50 Q feedthrough termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows
163. RE tas pocca lads E E E E EEEE A 4 STG PUISE ipsae E eege A 4 Exponential PUISE rsrsrsrs eieae Erea TAENSA aA EAE aa ATRE teenerveuassateomsateesarduane A 4 DC Ee ti TL EE A 4 Arbitrary Waveform Generator Characteristics rrrnnrrnnronnrrrnnnnvnrrrrnnnnnvrrnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnennnnnnrnnnennr A 5 Sequenced Waveforms Generator Characteristics 0 ccccccsescseeceeeeeeeessnneeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeneeeeeeeeeess A 5 Modulated Waveform Generator Characteristics rrrrrnnrrrnnnoonrrrnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnrnnnrnnnnnnnnnrrnrrnnnerennn A 6 General stat dace cence EEE EE EE ET A 6 Marker Vee A 6 VAN A 6 ad EEE EET EN NE ERE A 6 Arbitrary EE A 7 TE RE EE EE NE SE A 7 Frequency e ee Un EE A 7 x EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual gt el E A 7 PE EE ENE AT EEE NE A 7 EEE EE EEE EE EE A 7 ASK EE ET EE NE EE ee EE A 8 RE A 8 Pulse Generator Waveform Characteristics rrrannvrrnnnrnnnrnnnnnnnnrnnnrernrrnnnnrrnrrnnenennnrrensnnnnnnne A 8 Half Cycle Waveform Generator Charactertsics A 9 Counter Timer Characteristics EE A 9 Frequency Period Averaged E A 9 P riod Puls WIG sss Sege EE EE EE A 9 TOLANIZ TEEN A 9 G neral ET ect cate tian EE EEE TE NN EE A 9 Backplane Multiple Instrument Gvpnchronzatton nee A 10 Leading Edge GE ee ene re er mek rte Ramen eR re ene eee ee A 10 ED A 10 VAIDUS
164. ROcross INTernal EXTernal TTLTrg lt n gt lt n gt 0to7 STATe OFF ON 0 1 0 0 v 0230B EADS North America Test and Services Programming Reference 5 23 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A Table 5 3 Instrument amp Output Control Commands Summary Continued Keyword Parameter Form Default 3152A HS SOURce ROSCillator SOURce INTernal EXTernal CLK10 INT 0028A FREQuency EXTernal M 0420 CW 10e 3 to 100e6 MINimum MAXimum 1e6 v 0400A RASTer 10e 6 to 250e6 MINimum MAXimum 166 v 0410A SOURce INTernal EXTernal ECLTrg0 LBUS INT 0411A VOLTage LEVel AMPLitude 10e 3 to 16 MINimum MAXimum 5 v 0500A OFFSet 7 992 to 7 992 0 v 0501A PHASe OFFSet 0 to 1e6 1 0 to 2 4e6 1 with option 1 2 0 0027A FUNG tion MODE FlXed USER SEQuence SWEep calculated FIX 0610A MODulation DPULse HALFcycle COUNter 5 24 Programming Reference EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual INSTrument MODE NORMal FAST HS Syntax 0150A0 Description Use this command to modify the 3152B to accept HS commands Use INST MODE FAST to program the ins
165. Resolution Hop Table Size Dwell Time Mode Dwell Time Dwell Time Resolution FSK Shifted Waveform Carrier Shifted Frequency Range Baud Range FSK Data Bits Length PSK Shifted Waveform Carrier Frequency Range Phase Shift Range Baud Range EADS North America Test and Services 3152B User Manual Up to 50 MHz Operated from an external utility only such as ArbConnection The modulating waveform can be designed as an arbitrary waveform Sine wave 10 Hz to 100 MHz Arbitrary waveform 1 S s to 2 5 MS s 2 to 10 000 Sine wave 10 Hz to 100 MHz Sine square triangle Ramp 10 mHz to 100 kHz 0 to 200 software above 100 Sine wave 10 Hz to 100 MHz 11 digits 2 to 1000 Fixed or Programmable for each step 100 ns to 20s 20 ns Sine wave 10 Hz to 100 MHz 11 digits 0 to 16 Vp p Maximum amplitude 4096 2 to 5000 Fixed or Programmable for each step 100 ns to 20s 20 ns Sine wave 10 Hz to 100 MHz 1 bit sec to 10 Mbits sec 2 to 4000 Sine wave 10 Hz to 100 MHz 0 to 360 1 bits sec to 10 Mbits sec 3152B Specifications A 7 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A PSK Data Bits Length ASK Shifted Waveform Carrier Frequency Range Amplitude Shift Range Resolution Baud Range ASK Data Bits Length 3D Operation Modulated Waveform Carrier Frequency Range
166. TIP To find out the network settings for your computer perform the following steps e For Windows 98 Me 2000 XP 1 Open a DOS prompt 2 Type IPCONFIG 3 Press lt Enter gt If you need more information you can run ipconfig with the all option by typing IPCONFIG all at the DOS prompt This shows you all of the settings for the computer Make sure you use the settings for the LAN adapter you are using to communicate with the LAN device e For Windows 95 1 Open a DOS prompt 2 Type WINIPCFG 3 Press lt Enter gt Select the Ethernet adapters you are using to communicate with the Ethernet device from the drop down list The 3100M 3152B has a front panel USB connector that allows Connecting to the connection to a USB memory device This USB port has only one USB Port purpose to allow the downloading of waveform data directly from a USB memory device without going through the VXI controller The waveform data has to be stored on the USB memory device in a special format The negotiation between the USB memory device and the instrument is automatic The application program can then select the loaded memory segment for use in an application EADS North America Test and Services Inatallation 2 5 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A This page was intentionally left blank 2 6 Installation
167. Tabor Electronics Accessories BNC to BNC cables T BNC adapter Dual banana to BNC adapter 50Q feedthrough termination 7 2 Adjustments and Firmware Update EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A i Use the following procedures to calibrate the Model 3152B The Adjustment following paragraphs show how to set up the instrument for calibration Procedures and what the acceptable calibration limits are Calibration is done with the covers closed and the 3152B installed ina VXI chassis Register based or message based interfaces can be used and the procedure is the same for both options The calibration procedure requires that the ArbConnection utility be installed and interfaced to the instrument Calibration is performed from the Calibration Panel in ArbConnection To invoke this panel one requires a password that is available to service centers only Contact EADS North America Test and Services Customer Support to obtain your calibration password Use the following procedure to calibrate the generator 1 Invoke ArbConnection 2 Click on the Calibration tab on the Panels bar 3 When the Enter Password dialog box appears Figure 7 1 type your User Name and Password and then click OK The Calibration Panel shown in Figure 7 2 will appear x User Password Pas
168. Test and Services ArbConnection 4 19 Figure 4 12 Half Cycle Panel State The State button turns on and off the half cycle waveforms function The half cycle function can also be selected from the Output panel Shape The Shape group has controls that select the shape of the half cycle function Parameters The Parameters group has controls for programming the amplitude offset start phase and duty cycle Each channel can have an independent set of these parameters The Modulation functions were designed over seven separate panels as shown in Figures 4 13 through 4 18 The panels are invoked by pressing the Modulation header and then one of the modulation panels that appear below it These panels provide access to all modulation functions and their respective parameters The modulation functions that are available on these panels are FM frequency modulation AM amplitude modulation Sweep ASK amplitude shift keying FSK frequency shift keying and PSK phase shift keying and Amplitude and Frequency Hopping When modulation run modes other than continuous are selected there are two options that control the idle state between triggers 1 Carrier baseline and 2 DC baseline When the first option is Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual FM 4 20 ArbConnection Publication No 980935 Rev A selected the instrument generates the unmodu
169. Test and Services Performance Checks 6 15 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A 1 Configure the Oscilloscope as follows Termination 50 20 dB feedthrough attenuator at the oscilloscope input Setup As required for the test 2 Connect the 3152B output to the oscilloscope input 3 Configure the 3152B as follows Frequency 1 MHz Run Mode Triggered Run Mode Src As specified in Table 6 26 Waveform Sine wave Amplitude 2V Output On 4 Configure the auxiliary 3152B as follows Frequency 2 MHz Waveform Sine wave Run Mode Continuous Trigger Output As specified in Table 6 24 Output On Test Procedure 1 Set up the trigger output and trigger source as specified in Table 6 24 and verify that the 3152B generates a single cycle 2 MHz sine wave every 1 us with every matched output trigger and source settings Table 6 24 Trigger Source Tests Auxiliary 3152B 3152B Trigger Oscilloscope Trigger Output Setting Source Setting Reading Pass Fail TTLTO OFF TTLT1 ON TTLT1 1 us trig intervals TTLT1 OFF TTLT2 ON TTLT2 1 us trig intervals TTLT2 OFF TTLT3 ON TTLT3 1 us trig intervals TTLT3 OFF TTLT4 ON TTLT4 1 us trig intervals TTLT4 OFF TTLT5 ON TTLT5 1 us trig intervals TTLT5 OFF TTLT6 ON TTLT6 1 us trig intervals TTLT6 OFF TTLT7 ON TTLT7 1 us trig intervals
170. Trigger source Channel 2 positive slope Amplitude 1 V div 2 Connect the 3152B output to the oscilloscope input channel 1 3 Connect the 3152B SYNC to the oscilloscope input channel 2 4 Configure the function generator as follows Frequency 1 kHz Run Mode Continuous Waveform Square wave Amplitude 2V 5 Connect the function generator output connector to the 3152B TRIG IN connector 6 Configure model 3152B controls as follows Waveform Modulated Modulation FM EADS North America Test and Services Performance Checks 6 27 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A Mod Run Mode Gated Carrier Freq 1 MHz Mod Frequency 10 kHz Deviation 500 kHz Sync On Output On Test Procedure 1 Verify Gated FM standard waveform operation on the oscilloscope as follows Waveform Gated sine waveforms Mod Frequency 10 kHz Gated Period 1 ms Max Deviation 1 25 MHz Min Deviation 750 kHz Test Results Pass Fail Re triggered FM Equipment Oscilloscope Bursts Standard Preparation Waveforms 1 Configure the oscilloscope as follows Time Base 0 2 ms Sampling Rate 50 MS s at least Trace A View Jitter Type FREQ CLK Trigger source Channel 2 positive slope Amplitude 1 V div 2 Connect the 3152B output to the oscilloscope input channel 1 3 Connect the 31
171. User Manual RAMP Discrete Selects the ramp shape as the modulating waveform ARB Discrete Selects an arbitrary waveform as the modulating shape The waveform must be designed and downloaded to the FM arbitrary modulation waveform memory before one can use this option Information on how to create and download arbitrary FM waveforms is given later in this chapter Response The 3152B returns SIN TRI SQU RAMP or ARB depending on the selected function shape setting FM FREQuency lt fm_freq gt HS Syntax 0076A lt float gt Description This command sets the modulating wave frequency for the built in standard modulating waveform library Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt fm_freq gt 10e 3 to Numeric 10e3 Programs the frequency of the modulating waveform in 350e3 units of Hz The frequency of the built in standard modulating waveform only is affected Response The 3152B returns the current modulating waveform frequency value The returned value will be in scientific notation for example 100mHz would be returned as 100e 3 FM FREQuency RASTer lt arb fm freq gt HS Syntax 0077A lt float gt Description This command sets the sample clock frequency for the arbitrary modulation waveform Arbitrary modulation waveforms must be created with an external utility and downloaded to the arbitrary FM waveform memory before this function can be used Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt
172. VXIO 2 INSTR vi Update Firmware Details File C Worklri3100 v1 0 bin Figure 7 7 Download Process 7 When the download is complete a success message will appear updater Resource Name I Updater information Firmware File 4 Figure 7 8 Successful Firmware Update 8 Cycle power on the VXI chassis Check the instrument to make sure that it operates properly and that it has the desired firmware revision 7 34 Adjustments and Firmware Update EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual Chapter 8 Product Support EADS North America Test and Services has a complete Product Support Service and Parts Department If you need technical assistance require spare parts for repair or have to return your product for repair or calibration call 1 800 722 3262 or 1 949 859 8999 For worldwide support and the office closest to your facility refer to the website for the most complete information http www eads nadefense com Warranty See the first section of this manual for warranty information Return of Product Authorization is required from EADS North America Test and Services before you send us your product for service or calibration Call or contact the Customer Support Department at 1 800 722 3262 or 1 949 859 8999 or via fax at 1 949 859 7139
173. a TRAC DATA 564000 lt binary_block gt Binary block parameters are used for loading segment and sequence tables into the generator s memory Information on the binary block parameters is given later in this manual Where possible the syntax and styles used in this section follow those defined by the SCPI consortium The commands on the following pages are broken into three columns the Keyword the Parameter Form Default and HS command equivalent The Keyword column provides the name of the command The actual command consists of one or more keywords since SCPI commands are based on a hierarchical structure also known as the tree system Square brackets are used to enclose a keyword that is optional when programming the command that is the 3152B will process the command to have the same effect whether the optional node is omitted by the programmer or not Letter case in tables is used to differentiate between the accepted short form upper case and the EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual long form upper and lower case The Parameter Form column indicates the number and order of parameter in a command and their legal value Parameter types are distinguished by enclosing the type in angle brackets lt gt If parameter form is enclosed by square brackets t
174. a ER REEE 6 4 Amplitude Accuracy DDS Output vi sxicecscdscescctseces gege ENEE degen 6 5 BEE ACCUrACY JOE EE NE EE EN 6 5 Offset Accuracy DAC OVE neern nenene 6 5 Offset Accuracy DDS Output se 6 6 Square ee EE 6 7 Square Wave Checks scsicsinesstcassxcaeiassssaisasaccecsveaiaathavtasasansasiveadscaiducesadderss Gelenaaviaaasiaaeiniadss 6 7 Sine Wave Charactertetce AAA 6 8 sine Wave Distortion DAG Output buede gsegkeebt be deest uk be erdereg de EESREEAGEREEEEKEEE eebe de 6 8 Sine Wave Spectral Purity DAG Output suu recsmenmentestnunssnjmnedij viddene 6 8 Sine Wave Spectral Purity DDS Output uissossciscacintaveescarenctueedaenndavencenitaadeiieaveasianduenseurenwaess 6 9 Sine Wave Flatness DAG QOuUlpulunsmssnsmsarassnuaenandmnnispaenmmiien uante 6 10 Sine Wave Flatness DDS Out 6 11 Trigger Operational Gh racteristics nunuerc smenanseisseeuuumusmemvvv vev vadet n n 6 12 Trigger Gate and Burst Characteristics ssssssesertteeeeeeeetttttttteteerttttnnnnnnnnrtnrnn nnne nnne 6 12 Delayed Trigger Characteristics ENEE 6 13 Re trigger Ee le 6 13 Trigger e 6 14 Tr 6 15 Backplane eet EE 6 15 SSCS CSO DS MOM EE EE Hoe aaa 6 16 Automatic DETRESSE 6 16 Step PC INC EE EE EE 6 17 MOINS EE 6 18 SYNC Output PE AO 6 19 SYNC MN 6 19 SEVEN 6 19 SYNC DP HE EE 6 20 SYNC Output ET 6 20 SYNC Output FE ass 6 21 ANN 6 21 PLL Checks Frequency LocK vvs enka 6 21 PLL Checks Phase OTSET EES 6 22 PM PE Sead 6 23 FEE eee 6 23
175. a Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual Reading the Status Byte Register Clearing the Status Byte Register Service Request clear the corresponding bits in the Status Byte summary register Description of the various bits within the Status Byte summary register is given in the following Bit 0 Decimal value 1 Not used always set to 0 Bit 1 Decimal value 2 Not used always set to 0 Bit 2 Decimal value 4 Not used always set to 0 Bit 3 Decimal value 8 Not used always set to 0 Bit 4 Decimal value 16 Message Available Queue Summary Message MAV The state of this bit indicates whether or not the output queue is empty The MAV summary message is true when the output queue is not empty This message is used to synchronize information exchange with the controller The controller can for example send a query command to the device and then wait for MAV to become true If an application program begins a read operation of the output queue without first checking for MAV all system bus activity is held up until the device responds Bit 5 Decimal value 32 Standard Event Status Bit ESB Summary Message This bit indicates whether or not one or more of the enabled ESB events have occurred since the last reading or clearing of the Standard Event Status Register Bit 6 Decimal value 64
176. a new waveform for the next part of the sequence Depending upon your application you may be able to change waveform parameters even more quickly without downloading new data After you download a waveform you may change the sample clock frequency amplitude offset and run modes without disturbing the downloaded data The 3152B can divide its memory into smaller segments and then use these segments to create complex sequences of waveforms The 3152B can generate and even measure the following functions e Standard waveforms The 3152B computes these automatically from its built in equations for sine square triangle and other common waveforms e Arbitrary waveforms Download these to the instrument EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A Run Modes Frequency Control and Accuracy Phase Lock Loop PLL 3152B User Manual whenever you need to change from one arbitrary waveform to another e Waveform sequences The 3152B builds sequenced waveforms from memory segmenis that are loaded with the waveforms and are referenced in the sequence table in advance e Modulated signals A direct digital synthesis DDS circuit creates these signals without downloading a waveform e Pulses The ArbConnection controls for pulse waveforms have the look and feel of a standard pulse generator
177. acy Function Generator Setting 3152B Frequency Duty Cycle Error Limits Counter Reading 100 kHz 50 5 000us 100ns 100 kHz 70 7 07us 100ns gt o O 2 Change the counter timer slope to Negative 3 With the last function generator setting in Table 30 change the function generator duty cycle to 70 4 Verify that the pulse width reading is 3 0 us 100 ns Test Results Pass Fail Totalize Infinite Equipment Function Generator with at least 1 ppm accuracy Preparation 1 Configure the function generator as follows Frequency 100 MHz Wave Square Amplitude 500 mV Counted Burst 1 000 000 EADS North America Test and Services Performance Checks 6 37 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A 2 Connect the function generator to the 3152B TRIG IN connector 3 Configure the 3152B as follows Auxiliary Function Counter Timer Function Totalize Infinite Trigger Level 0V Test Procedure 1 Press the Reset Arm button on the 3152B to reset and arm the totalize function 2 Manually trigger the function generator and verify that the 3152B counter reading is 1 000 000 2 Test Results Pass Fail 6 38 Performance Checks EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed
178. ailure to follow instructions This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties expressed or implied including any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular use The remedies provided herein are buyer s sole and exclusive remedies For the specific terms of your standard warranty or optional extended warranty or service agreement contact your EADS North America Test and Services customer service advisor Please have the following information available to facilitate service 1 Product serial number 2 Product model number 3 Your company and contact information You may contact your customer service advisor by E Mail Helpdesk eads nadefense com Telephone 1 800 722 3262 USA Fax 1 949 859 7309 USA Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com RETURN of PRODUCT Authorization is required from EADS North America Test and Services before you send us your product for service or calibration Call or contact the Customer Support Department at 1 800 722 3262 or 1 949 859 8999 or via fax at 1 949 859 7139 We can be reached at helpdesk eads nadefense com PROPRIETARY NOTICE This document and the technical data herein disclosed are proprietary to EADS North America Test and Services and shall not without express written permission of EADS North America Test and Services be used in whole or in part to solicit quotations from a competitive source
179. al Hardware shift of the start phase is accomplished using the PM input where dc to 10 KHz voltage levels can phase modulate the locked instrument The synchronization commands are summarized in Table 5 14 Phase offset resolution depends on the number of waveform samples For instance if you have 1000 waveform samples there is no problem with adjusting the phase offset in 10 increments 8600 1000 lt 1 As another example if you have only 10 waveform samples the best phase offset increments are only 360 3600 10 360 There is a special fine adjustment for phase offset with a 360 range This adjustment is useful in places where a 360 gap is too wide The fine phase adjustment improves phase offset settings to 0 010 and can be used in conjunction with the coarse phase offset adjustment at any phase offset setting point EADS North America Test and Services Programming Reference 5 103 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A Table 5 14 Synchronization Commands Summary Keyword Parameter Form Default 3152A HS SOURce PHASe1 LOCK STATe OFF ON 0 1 0 M 0820A ADJust 0 to 360 0 M 0810A NULL Error not supported M 08500 SOURce MASTer SLAVe MAST M 0800A PHASe2 PLL LOCK STATe OFF ON 0 1 0 M 0920A SOURce EXTernal TTLTr
180. ality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Waveform Studio Publication No 980935 Rev A m Segment table Aa Sequence table Append roses MA Seg State File name Length Seg Loops Adv Sync 1 Mapped Ch Wav 16bit pulse way 1024 inser 1 2 50 0 0 2 Mapped Ch M i ac Bbit sin3 way 1024 Delete 12 3 1 0 0 3 Mapped Ch Wav16bit sinc wav 1024 S 3 1 1200 0 0 4 Ch Wav Bbit Complex way U2 5 Free IF Download LIN 4 16 ArbConnection Figure 4 10 Waveform Studio a TIP Point and click on one of the segments to show its shape in the Waveform Shape window Description of the various buttons in the Segment Table is given below Append adds segment number at the end of the table Insert adds a segment above a highlighted segment line Delete removes a highlighted segment Download Selection downloads a highlighted segment only to the 3152B memory Download All downloads the complete table to the 3152B memory Export This allows exportation of Waveform Studio settings to another session Import This allows importation of Waveform Studio settings from another session Save saves current table settings Clear Mem wipes out the entire memory and clears the table for fresh settings Close removes the Waveform Studio from the scre
181. ameter define how many times the segment will loop for the selected link For example if you program 2 the waveform will cycle twice through the same segment before transitioning to the next link Adv This parameter flags the advance mode for the a givensegment This flag is active when the advance mode is Stepped When set to 0 the sequence will advance through the list automatically until a segment that is flagged 1 is encountered When 1 is encountered the generator will idle on this segment until an external trigger is applied Learn more about the sequence advance modes in Chapter 3 Figure 4 11 shows an example of a 4 step sequence of which the first waveform is made of segment 2 which will loop 50 times segment 3 looping once segment 1 looping 1200 times and segment 4 looping once The Adv bits on links 2 and 4 are set to 1 and therefore external triggers are required for the sequencer to step through these links Sync This parameter flags if a bit marker will occur on the selected segment Normal sync output is LCOM for the sequence mode however if you want to use shortened and or multiple sync pulses change the sync output selection in the Arbitrary Sequence Panel to BIT and the output will generate a pulse every time the sequence steps through a segment that has been flagged The control buttons on the left of the Sequence Table have the same functionality as for the Segment Table Use the Append key to add a s
182. ameters for individual modulation Modulation schemes Control parameters are available for AM FM Sweep FSK Control ASK PSK Amplitude and Frequency hopping and 3D The modulation control commands are summarized in Table 5 10 Factory Commands defaults after RST are shown in the Default column Parameter range and low and high limits are listed where applicable Table 5 10 Modulated Waveform Control Commands Keyword Parameter Form Default 3152A HS AM FUNG tion SHAPe SINusoid TRlangle SQUare RAMP SIN Computed 0057A INTernal v FREQuency 10e 3 to 1e6 100 v 0781A DEPTh 0 to 100 50 v 0780A EXEcute MOD TYPE AM v 07820 FM DEViation 10 0e 3 to 100e6 100e3 0075A FUNG tion SHAPe SINusoid TRlangle SQUare RAMP ARB SIN 0078A FREQuency 10e 3 to 350e3 10e3 0076A RASTer 1 to 2 5e6 1e6 0077A MARKer FREQuency 10e 3 to 100e6 1e6 0079A DATA lt data array gt 007414 SWEep FREQuency STARt 10 to 100 0e6 10e3 v 1610A STOP 10 to 100e6 1e6 v 1611A RASTer 10e 6 to 25066 MINimum MAXimum 166 v 1612A FUNGC tion SINusoidal TRlangle SQUare SIN Computed v 1604A TIME 1 4e 6 to 40 0 1e 3 v 1600A DIRection UP DOWN UP v 1601A SPACing LiNear LOGarithmic LIN v 1602A STEP 10 to 2000 20 v 1603A MARKer FREQuency 10 to 100e6 505e3 v 1613A FSK FREQuency SHIFted
183. ammed as required Parameters Name Type Default Description FlXed Discrete FIX Selects the fixed dwell time frequency hops mode VARiable Discrete Select the variable dwell time frequency hops mode Response The 3152B returns FIX or VAR depending on the selected dwell setting FHOP DWELI lt dwell time gt HS Syntax 0070A lt float gt Description This selects the dwell time for frequency hops when the selected mode is Fixed dwell time hops The dwell time table in this case does not contain the dwell time per step parameters and therefore the value which is programmed with this command remains constant for the entire hop sequence Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt dwell time gt 200e 9 to Numeric 200e 9 Programs dwell time for the fixed dwell time frequency 20 hop function The same dwell time will be valid for each frequency hop Dwell time is programmed in units of s Response The 3152B returns the current dwell time value 5 88 Programming Reference EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual FHOP FIX DATA lt fix_hop_data gt HS Syntax 0071 1 lt string gt Description This command will download the data array that will cause the instrument to hop through the frequency list The dwell time for each frequency list item is fixed and can be programm
184. ance mode Note that this mode requires that the run mode be set to Continuous In this mode advancing to the next link is controlled by the Advance bit in the link definition O will cause the link to advance automatically to the next link 1 will cause the link to repeat itself continuously until a valid trigger event has been received and then the generator will begin executing the next link Note that this mode requires that the run mode be set to Continuous EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A Generating Modulated Waveforms 3152B User Manual The modulation generator is a separate instrument within the 3152B Based on DDS technology it has a wide dynamic range and high linearity throughout the modulation range The 3152B can modulate in the frequency amplitude and phase domains When the modulation output is selected but modulation is turned off the instrument generates a continuous wave CW signal or steady state sine wave The following commands control the modulation of the carrier wave mod type off mod type am moa type fm mod type swe mod type fsk mod type ask mod type psk EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation This disables modulation so that the output generates a CW signal CW is the sine
185. and 3D The modulated waveform global control commands are summarized in Table 5 9 Factory defaults after RST are shown in the Default column Parameter range and low and high limits are listed where applicable Table 5 9 Modulated Waveforms Global Commands Keyword Parameter Form Default 3152A HS SOURce MODulation TYPE OFF AM FM SWE FSK ASK PSK FHOPping OFF 0051A AHOPping 3D CARRier FREQuency 10 to 100e6 1e6 0049A BASeline CARRier DC CARR 0048A MODulation TYPE OFF AM FM SWEeep FSK ASK PSK FHOPping AHOPping 3D HS Syntax 0051A lt 0 1 2 3 41516 7 8 9 gt Description This command selects the modulation type to be used All modulation types are internal thus external signals are not required for the production of modulation Parameters Name OFF AM FM SWEep FSK ASK PSK FHOPping EADS North America Test and Services Type Discrete Discrete Discrete Discrete Discrete Discrete Discrete Discrete Default OFF Description Modulation off is a special mode where the output generates a continuous unmodulated sinusoidal carrier waveform CW This turns on the AM function Program the AM parameters to fine tune the function for your application This turns on the FM function Program the FM parameters to fine tune the function for your application This turns on the sweep function Program the sweep parameters to fine tu
186. and generates modulation when a trigger is accepted The CW is similar except the signal idles on the pre trigger CW frequency setting executes the modulation upon receipt of a legal trigger signal and returns to continuous CW frequency output EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual Figure 4 14 FM Panel Standard FM Parameters These parameters are active only when one of the built in waveforms is selected as the modulating signal These are Sine Triangle Square or Ramp The modulation frequency deviation and marker frequency control the standard FM modulation scheme Modulating Wave Defines the shape of the modulating waveform There are two basic options Standard built in waveforms and Arbitrary waveforms If you do not need exotic waveforms you can use one of the built in standard wave shapes Sine Triangle Square or Ramp These waveforms can be adjusted for their frequency and deviation range On the other hand you can select the arbitrary modulating wave option where you can use any shape although you must load the modulating waveform from an external application such as the FM composer in ArbConnection Information on the standard and arbitrary FM functions is given in Chapter 3 Click on the button next to the required modulating waveform shape to select it Ar
187. and reverts to Continuous run mode Interrupted run modes require trigger signals of which there are three types e External trigger For synchronizing with external events connect the external trigger signal to one of the trigger inputs e Internal trigger generator For applications not requiring synchronization to external signals the 3152B has an internal trigger generator with a free running clock This clock is asynchronous to the sample clock generator e Software trigger Your software may generate an interrupt condition by executing a trigger command You may select arm only one trigger source at a time The 3152B responds only to the selected trigger source and ignores other sources Use one of the following commands to select a trigger source trig sour ext This selects the front panel TRIG IN connector as the active source for trigger events trig sour int This selects the internal trigger generator EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A Selecting the Trigger Level Selecting the 3152B User Manual as the active source for trigger events trig tim lt value gt This sets the period of the built in trigger generator Unlike the Re trigger run mode the internal trigger period defines actual trigger events Therefore the period of the internal trigger generator must be larg
188. ands given below to select the counter timer mode and set up a measurement function func mod coun Selects the Counter Timer allowing frequency and time measurements on external signals Once you have selected the Counter Timer mode you may select the specific measurement function Available functions include e Frequency e Period e Period averaged EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual e Pulse Width e Totalize counts the number of trigger events Use one of the following commands to select the measurement function coun func freq Selects the frequency measurement function The 3152B takes readings continuously and places them in the output queue waiting for a read operation to clear the queue for the next reading coun func per Selects the period measurement function coun func aper Selects the averaged period measurement function coun func puls Selects the pulse width measurement function coun func tot Selects the totalize function The counter will detect and count all trigger events from the trigger input You may adjust the gate time and display mode If you want to take continuous counter readings use the default display mode as follows coun disp mod norm Enables continuous measurements and read cycles coun disp mod hold Stops the measurement cycle
189. ange Type Default Description lt frequency gt 10 to Numeric 505e3 Programs the marker frequency position in units of Hz 100e6 Response The 3152B returns the current marker frequency value The returned value will be in scientific notation for example 100mHz would be returned as 100e 3 positive numbers are unsigned Use the following commands for programming the FSK parameters FSK Modulation FSk control is internal The frequency will shift from carrier to shifted Programming frequency setting at a rate determined by the baud value and controlled by a sequence of bits in the FSK data table The commands for programming the frequency shift keying function are described below Note that the carrier waveform frequency CW setting is common to all modulation schemes FSK FREQuency SHIFted lt shift_freq gt HS Syntax 0082A lt float gt Description This programs the shifted frequency The frequency shifts when the pointer in the data array points to 1 5 82 Programming Reference EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt shift_freq gt 10e 3to Numeric 100e3 Programs the shifted frequency value in units of Hz 100e6 Response The 3152B returns the current shifted frequency value The returned value will be in scien
190. annel 3202A Signal Amplifier module The description in this manual ignores specific configurations and provides details of the 3152B only The configuration chosen can have a significant impact on the way that one programs the instrument Register based commands are parsed and executed using an external dll 3100R but message based commands are parsed and executed by the internal CPU 3100M The supplied drivers provide access to all functions for both versions LES Appendix A lists the instrument specifications Specifications apply Specifications under the following conditions e Output terminated into 50Q e 30 minute warm up period e Ambient temperature range of 20 C to 30 C e For temperatures outside the above temperature range specifications degrade by 0 1 per C 1 10 Introduction EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual SYNTHESIZER SYNTHESIZER Cran Cran access EY PLLOM Figure 1 6 Configurations 3151B 3152B 3100R 3152B and 3100M 3152B Safet The 3152B has been manufactured according to international CE y i safety standards EN 61010 Adjustments maintenance or repair Considerations of the unit while the covers are removed and power is applied must be carried out only by skilled authorized personnel Removal of the covers without authorization shal
191. ard square wave You may use the Apply command in a similar manner for other standard or arbitrary waveforms You may use the Apply command on a partial set of the available parameters of a waveform To leave out a parameter place no characters between the corresponding comma separators For example you may specify the frequency and duty cycle of a square wave while leaving the amplitude and offset at the default values as follows rst Restores factory defaults appl squ 12 7e6 45 Selects the standard square wave as the active function and simultaneously sets the frequency to 12 7 MHz leaves the amplitude at the default value leaves offset at the default value and sets the duty cycle to 45 outp 1 Turns on the output In a similar manner you may use the Apply command with other standard waveforms to set some parameters while leaving others at their default values Generating Before the 3152B can generate arbitrary waveforms you must first Arbit download them to its waveform memory This section describes the rbitrary arbitrary waveform function and explains how to download Waveforms waveforms EADS North America Test and Services Operation 3 17 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual What Are Arbitrary Waveforms Managing Arbitrary Waveform Memory 3 18 Operation Publication No 980935 Rev A Arbitrary waveforms are gen
192. arm up PA OT vade ean 7 2 Recommended Test e te keine 7 2 elen ge WT 7 3 TN eee mere eee erate ee eee ne ee ee ee eee er 7 5 ETE EE Eet 7 5 Es E EE E ER EE 7 5 ES sje EE REE ENE VA 7 6 ST EE A E 7 6 100 E EE EEE EE ERE EE eee 7 6 S72 00 EE 7 7 SET EE 7 7 AST oe ae ete dest EE NE EE EP 7 7 PL el an E 7 8 MN E 7 8 Setup EE RE EE EEE 7 8 Setup NEE 7 9 Oscillator AUSTENG ansees Seegen 7 9 SET EG E 7 10 Setup TOXO Pepe ne eee EE EE ET EE EE AEE 7 10 Base Line Offset EC 7 11 Setup KEE 7 11 SGUD ee 7 11 EE EEE EEE EE EE KE 7 11 SUDI EE EEE TE RT EN EET 7 12 viii EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual AP NA 7 12 Te 7 13 ELSE US Sy EE RE EE RE ee rere 7 13 Eed 7 13 SETUPS 19 vaskes NAKNE Aase 7 13 SJ 10 REE EE EE EE EE EE 7 14 gre EE EE EE ET EE EE NE EE 7 14 0 EE EEE EE EN EE EE ee ee eee ee ee 7 14 SGUD EEE ee ee ee eer ete ere 7 15 SG UP 24 EE 7 15 UP NE 7 15 SGUD RET EEE EE 7 16 AP ee 7 16 Amplitude AdjUStMEN S E 7 17 S P e 7 17 le eee E a a a a a 7 17 SEP use 7 18 le ER EE EE EE EN AE 7 18 EE 7 18 STE Vee GE EEE ER ER ee ee ee NE ne ee 7 19 le EE 7 19 SUP Fuad EEE 7 19 EN E 7 20 SGUD TE EN EE ER NN NN EE 7 20 UNS gt EE EN EE ee eee ee 7 21 le e E 7 21 SPT ee 7 21 APT 7 22 Amplitude Adjustments Modulapon AAA 7 23 SE 7 23 5 0 ERR REN enter Dee EE
193. artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A Standard Event Status Enable Register ESE Error Messages 3152B User Manual The Standard Event Status Enable Register allows one or more events in the Standard Event Status Register to be reflected in the ESB summary message bit The Standard Event Status Enable Register is an 8 bit register that enables corresponding summary messages in the Standard Event Status Register Thus the application programmer can select reasons for the generator to issue an ESB summary message bit by altering the contents of the ESE Register The Standard Event Status Enable Register is read with the ESE Common query The response to this query is a number that represents the sum of the binary weighted value of the Standard Event Status Enable Register The Standard Event Status Enable Register is written using the ESE command followed by a decimal value representing the bit values of the Register A bit value one indicates an enabled condition Consequently a bit value of zero indicates a disabled condition The Standard Event Status Enable Register is cleared by setting ESEO Summary of ESE messages is given in the following ESEO No mask Clears all bits in the register ESE1 ESB on Operation Complete ESE2 ESB on Request Control ESE4 ESB on Query Error ESE8 ESB on Device Dependent Error ESE16 ESB on Execution Error ESE32 ESB on Command Error ESE64
194. as follows Frequency 1 kHz Output On Amplitude 500 mV Offset 250 mV Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETUP 19 for a DMM reading of 176 7 mV 2 mV Setup 36 100 mV Amplitude Amplifier Out Arbitrary Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50 Q feedthrough termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function ACV Range 100 mV 2 Connect the 3152B output to the DMM input Terminate the 3152B output at the DMM input with the 50 feedthrough termination 3 Configure the 3152B as follows Frequency 1 kHz Output On Amplitude 100 mV Offset 250 mV Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETUP 20 for a DMM reading of 35 35 mV 0 5 mV Setup 37 50 mV Amplitude Amplifier Out Arbitrary Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50 Q feedthrough termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function ACV Range 100 mV 2 Connect the 3152B output to the DMM input Terminate the 3152B output at the DMM input with the 50 feedthrough termination 3 Configure the 3152B as follows Frequency 1 kHz Output On Amplitude 50 mV Offset 250 mV 7 20 Adjustments and Firmware Update EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETUP 21 for a DMM reading of 17 67 mV 0 5 mV Setup 38 3 V
195. ase letters The uppercase letters indicate the abbreviated spelling for the command For shorter program lines send the abbreviated form For better program readability use the long form For example in the above syntax statement FREQ and FREQUENCY are both acceptable forms Use upper or lowercase letters Therefore FREQ FREQUENCY freq and Freq are all acceptable Other forms such as FRE and FREQUEN will generate an error The above syntax statement shows the frequency parameter enclosed in triangular brackets The brackets are not sent with the command string A value for the frequency parameter such as FREQ 50e 6 must be specified Some parameters are enclosed in square brackets The brackets indicate that the parameter is optional and can be omitted The brackets are not sent with the command string A colon is used to separate a command keyword from a lower Command level keyword as shown below Separator SOUR FUNC SHAP SI N A semicolon is used to separate commands within the same subsystem and can also minimize typing For example sending the following command string TRIG SLOP NEG COUN 10 TIM 5e 3 is the same as sending the following three commands TRIG SLOP NEG TRIG COUN 10 TRIG TIM 5e 3 Use the colon and semicolon to link commands from different subsystems For example in the following command string an error is generated if both the
196. ata sent to its segment table during data transfer Therefore wrong data and or incorrect number of bytes will cause erroneous memory partitioning Parameters Name Type Description lt binary_block gt Binary Block of binary data that contains information on the segment table EADS North America Test and Services Programming Reference 5 57 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual The Apply Control Commands Using the Apply Commands 5 58 Programming Reference Publication No 980935 Rev A The APPLy commands combine popular commands into a macro command that contains control of all parameters of a specific standard waveform function For example to program a sine waveform that has a certain frequency amplitude and offset you have to use five different commands FUNC MODE FIX FUNC SHAP SIN FREQ lt FREQ gt AMPL lt AMPL gt OFFS lt OFFS gt Alternatively you can select the sine function and immediately assign all of the required parameters when using the apply command The five lines above will be replaced by a simple line as follows APPL SIN lt FREQ gt lt AMPL gt lt OFFS gt There are certain rules you must follow when using the apply commands and these are summarized below The apply commands provide a high level method of programming pre defined standard and arbitrary waveforms Selection can be made for function frequen
197. ate lower frequencies Such dividers can increase phase noise and jitter Some applications require better stability and phase noise making a single tone sample clock source the most desired source The 3152B does not have a single tone sample clock source but it provides a front panel input SCLK IN that can accept a clock from an external source When this input is in use the internal clock generator is disabled and the 3152B waveforms are clocked at a rate defined by the external signal Using an external clock source can improve phase noise and jitter to approximately 20 dB Hz at 10 kHz offset from the carrier Apply the external sample clock signal to the front panel SCLK IN connector Make sure your signal level is within the levels specified in Appendix A The following commands select the source of the sample clock input freq rast sour int This is the default selection where the 3152B self generates its sample clock signal All other inputs are disabled freq rast sourext This selects the front panel SCLK IN connector as the source of the sample clock signal Observe the signal range and levels as specified in Appendix A freq rast sour echt This selects the backplane ECLTrg0 line as the sample clock source This is a special mode that allows synchronization between adjacent 3152B modules Note that the VXI specifications limit the ECLTrg0 frequency to 62 5 MHz Backplane synchronization is covered in a separate section
198. ature 0 C to 50 C RH 80 non condensing Storage Temperature 30 C to 80 C B 2 3201 3202A Module Specifications EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com A rtisan Artisan Technology Group is your source for quality TecmologyGrap new and certified used pre owned equipment FAST SHIPPING AND SERVICE CENTER REPAIRS WE BUY USED EQUIPMENT DELIVERY Experienced engineers and technicians on staff Sell your excess underutilized and idle used equipment TENS OF THOUSANDS OF at our full service in house repair center We also offer credit for buy backs and trade ins IN STOCK ITEMS www artisantg com WeBuyEquipment 7 EQUIPMENT DEMOS HUNDREDS OF Instra zer REMOTE INSPECTION LOOKING FOR MORE INFORMATION MANUFACTURERS Remotely inspect equipment before purchasing with Visit us on the web at www artisantg com 7 for more our interactive website at www instraview com information on price quotations drivers technical LEASING MONTHLY specifications manuals and documentation RENTALS ITAR CERTIFIED EE Contact us 888 88 SOURCE sales artisantg com www artisantg com
199. ave the same setup for the next test Single Advance Equipment Oscilloscope function generator Preparation Same preparation as for previous step except change mode to single sequence advance 1 Change Oscilloscope configuration to single Test Procedure 1 From ArbConnection click on the Manual Trigger and observe that one waveform cycle advances through the sequence table repeatedly with each external trigger signal Note that you might need to reset single shot capture mode on the oscilloscope for each trigger advance Test Results Pass Fail 6 18 Performance Checks EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual This tests the operation of the SYNC output There are two SYNC Output synchronous output are being tested Bit and LCOM Bit normally Operation operates with standard and arbitrary waveforms and LCOM is associated with sequenced and burst outputs The sync output has a fixed TTL level amplitude into an open circuit SYNC Output Bit Equipment Oscilloscope Preparation 1 Configure the oscilloscope as follows Time Base As required by the test Amplitude 2 Vidiv 2 Connect 3152B SYNC to the oscilloscope input 3 Configure model 3152B as follows Waveform Sine Output On Sync Output On Test Procedure 1 Verify that
200. aveform graph The standard printer dialog box will appear and will let you setup the printer and print the waveform graph Cancel 4 Binary Fav ASCII space delimited asc Comma delimited csv LeCroy format 0 LeCroy format trc Space delimited prn xi Comma delimitedf txt Figure 4 31 Open Waveform Dialog Box Exit Ends the current Wave Composer session and takes you back to the Panels screen If you made changes to your waveform since it was last saved Wave Composer will prompt you to Save or Abandon these changes The Edit menu is used for manipulating the waveform that is drawn on the graph The edit operations are explained below Autoline Autoline mode lets you draw one or more connected line segments To draw a line in Autoline mode click the left mouse button at the start point Click again at the next point to complete the line segment repeating this way until finished creating connected line segments Click on the right mouse button to terminate Autoline mode Sketch Sketch mode lets you draw freehand segments To draw in sketch mode on the waveform graph drag the cursor using the left mouse button Release the mouse button when you want to stop Use the right mouse button to terminate Sketch mode Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual View Commands 4 42 ArbConnection P
201. b to update the 3152B with the new setting 4 12 ArbConnection Figure 4 8 Arbitrary amp Sequence Panel 10MHz Ref The 10 MHz group contains buttons that select the source of the 10 MHz reference for standard waveform The 10 MHz clock is the reference that feeds the sample clock and the DDS clock and therefore determines accuracy and stability The internal 10 MHz source has 1 PPM stability over the operating temperature range and time stability of 1 PPM per year The accuracy of the internal source is adjustable but will shift with time and ambient temperature When better accuracy or stability is required or when clock synchronization to other devices is necessary you may select another source The 10 MHz source options are e Internal from the built in source EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual Using the Memory Partition Table EADS North America Test and Services ArbConnection 4 13 e External applied to the front panel 10 MHz input connector e CLK10 Available on the VXI backplane The CLK10 source has the least accuracy and stability of the three options but is useful for synchronization with other VXI modules Sequence The Sequence Advance Mode group provides control over advanced modes for the sequence generator Advanced options include Auto Stepped
202. bConnection 4 61 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A pulse trains the full train can be divided to smaller sections with each section designed separately Figure 4 47 shows a complex pulse train which was made from five simpler sections and Figure 4 48 shows the design of the fifth section only of the pulse train 15 x File Edit Yiew Tools Help D g BB SB furan Las om oe Vertical Scale 10 1 25 V Div Horizontal Scale 80ms 8ms Diy Figure 4 47 Complete Pulse Train Design 23 Pulse Composer gt Untitled Cht ll x File Edit View Tools Help Depgpgep ye ferns L om oe Vertical Scale 10V 1 25V Div Horizontal Scale 35 2ms 3 52ms Div Figure 4 48 Section 5 of the Pulse Train Design Now that we somewhat understand the Pulse Composer 4 62 ArbConnection EADS North America Test and Services Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual Setting the Pulse Editor Options terminology we can start with an example of how to design a pulse train like the one shown in Figure 4 48 If you already have some pulses shown on your Pulse Composer graph click on New to start with a fresh page Another initial step is to set the design parameters in the options menu to determine the way that the pulse will be stored in the 3152B waveform memory Click on View Optio
203. bitrary FM Parameters Allow adjustment of the sample clock of the modulating waveform These parameters are active only when arbitrary modulating waveform option is selected The modulating waveform must be downloaded from an external utility such as ArbConnection and the sample clock is programmed from this location To access the required parameter click on the parameter s name and observe that the LED next to the required parameter turns on The value that is associated with the lit LED is displayed on the digital display You can use the dial keyboard or the 1 V keys to adjust the readout to the required setting After you modify the reading click on the Modify Execute knob to update the 3152B with the new setting EADS North America Test and Services ArbConnection 4 21 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual AM Publication No 980935 Rev A The AM panel Figure 4 15 contains parameters for controlling the amplitude modulation function To turn the AM function on and off click on the AM button in the State group The various groups in the AM panel are described below State The State button turns on and off the AM function AM Parameters This group contains parameters that allow complete control over the AM function These are CW Frequency The CW Frequency is the frequency of the carrier waveform Baseline The Baseli
204. ble 5 1 3152B SCPI Command Summary for 3152A Emulation rrerrnnnrvnnnrnnnrrnnnnvrrrnnnnrnnnnn 5 8 Table 5 2 3152B SCPI Command Summary EEN 5 14 Table 5 3 Instrument amp Output Control Commands Summary rrnrrvnnnvnrrrrnnnnnrrrrnnnnnnrrnnnnnnnnrnnennr 5 23 Table 5 4 Run Mode Commande 5 37 Table 5 5 Standard Waveforms Control Commands Gummanm rrrvnnnnnrrrnnnnornvrrnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 5 44 Table 5 6 Arbitrary Waveforms Commands Summary errrnnvvnnnnnnnvrnnnnnnvrrnnnnnnnrrrnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnennn 5 51 Table 5 7 Apply Control Comrie EE 5 59 Table 5 8 Sequence Control Commande 5 66 Table 5 9 Modulated Waveforms Global Commande 5 71 Table 5 10 Modulated Waveform Control Commande 5 73 Table 5 11 Digital Pulse Commands Summary rrrnnnvvrvnnnnnnvvnnnnnnnvrnnnrnnnrrrnnnrrnrrrennnnrrrennnnnnnennnn 5 94 Table 5 12 Half Cycle Commands Gummarm ek 5 98 Table 5 13 Counter Commands Summary uxesCEEEREEEEEEEERREEEEESREEENESEEEEEEEENESEEEEEEEESEEENEEEEEENen 5 100 Table 5 14 Synchronization Commands Gummanm nnne 5 104 Table 5 15 System Commands Summary siiceiccscscsseseicctcceecesessgtnecrstuanncevreicontnnensaccehoesaseeeeseueunnte 5 110 Table 5 16 Common Commands Gummanm nne 5 113 Table 6 1 Recommended Test Equipment 2 vevumene rmanssrseseuimesieeevvn svanen 6 2 Table 6 2 Frequency ACCUIAGCY E 6 3 Table 6 3 Frequency Accuracy Using External 10 MHz Heierence AAA 6 4 Table 6 4 Amplitude Accuracy DAC output rrnnon
205. blication No 980935 Rev A 4 Untitled 3D Composer i S loj xj File Options Download Design About O cae ES wio Shared Horizontal Controls Amplitude CHT X 100ms 10ms Div Y 2 D 25V Div View Parameters Duration fi 00 ms v Marker 0 3D Memory Map 5e3 points free FRE X 100ms 10ms Div Y SeBHz 1 125e6Hz Div EE line LapsedTime Freq Of X 100ms 10ms Div Y 360Deg 45Deg Diw Clear All Undo Figure 4 64 3D Chirp Design Example 4 82 ArbConnection EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev The Command Editor A 3152B User Manual The Command Editor is a tool for doing low level programming of the 3152B Invoke the Command Editor from the System menu at the top of the screen The Command Editor dialog box as shown in Figure 4 61 will pop up If you press the Download button the function call in the Command field will be sent to the instrument Command Editor x r Command Editor Command Response Add Errors query Iv Remove Line voti 5 freq 10 7e6 has Download History Buffer Clear Import Export Download Logging SCPI Commands EADS North America Test and Services ArbConnection 4 83 Figure 4 65 Command Editor Low level SCPI commands and queries can be sent directly
206. blish an IP address You may need to contact your network Configuration administrator for help in establishing communications with the LAN interface To change LAN configuration you ll need to use some LAN commands that are listed in the programming reference The programmed parameters will be updated with the new setting only after you turn the VXI chassis off and on once Note there are some LAN parameters cannot be accessed or modified These are Physical Address and Host Name These parameters are set in the factory and are unique for this product The only parameters that can be modified are the IP Address the Subnet mask and the Default gateway Correct setting of these parameters is essential for correct interfacing with the LAN network Description of the LAN settings is given in the following Information how to modify the LAN setting is given in the programming section of this manual I Note Configuring your LAN setting does not automatically select the LAN as your active remote interface There are three LAN parameters that can be modified and adjusted specifically to match your network setting These are described below Consult your network administrator for the setting that will best suit your application e IP address The unique computer readable address of a device on your network An IP address typically is represented as four decimal numbers separated by periods for example 192 160 0 233 Refer to the next secti
207. c integer 1 Selects the sequence number that will be deleted only SEQuence DELete ALL HS Syntax 13210 Description This command deletes the entire sequence table OUTPut SYNC TYPE LCOMplete BIT HS Syntax 0108A lt 0 1 gt Description Programs the 3152B SYNC output source for sequenced mode Parameters Name Type Default Description LCOMplete Discrete LCOM The sync output transitions to high at the beginning of the selected sequence step and transitions to low at the end of the sequence minus 16 waveform periods BIT Discrete The sync output generates a pulse at the beginning of the selected segment regardless of how many times the segment appears in the sequence The width of the sync pulse is 16 waveform points Response The 3152B returns LCOM or BIT depending on the current SYNC type 5 70 Programming Reference EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A Modulated Waveform Global 3152B User Manual This group is used to set up the instrument to output modulated waveforms and to access the global modulation parameters Note that modulation can be turned off to create a continuous carrier waveform Control CW The following modulation schemes can be selected and controlled AM FM Sweep FSK ASK PSK Amplitude and Commands Frequency hopping
208. c errors this is the generic syntax error used 101 Invalid Character A syntactic element contains a character which is invalid for that type 102 Syntax error Invalid syntax found in the command string 103 Invalid separator An invalid separator was found in the command string A comma may have been used instead of a colon or a semicolon In some cases where the generator cannot detect a specific separator it may return error 100 instead of this error 104 Data type error The parser recognized a data element different than allowed 108 Parameter not allowed More parameters were received than expected for the header 109 Missing parameter Too few parameters were received for the command One or more parameters that were required for the command were omitted 128 Numeric data not allowed A legal numeric data element was received but the instrument does not accept one in this position 131 Invalid suffix A suffix was incorrectly specified for a numeric parameter The suffix may have been misspelled 148 Character data not allowed A character data element was encountered where prohibited by the instrument 200 Execution error This is the generic syntax error for the instrument when it cannot detect more specific errors Execution error as defined in IEEE 488 2 has occurred 221 Setting conflict Two conflicting parameters were received which cannot be executed without generating an err
209. ce MODern Discrete MOD This is the default position if you ordered the 3100M R 3100 3152B 3152A legacy compatibility is available by models switching to FORM INST LEG Response The 3152B returns LEG or MOD depending on the current compatibility mode setting FORMat BORDer NORMal SWAPped HS Syntax 0101A lt 0 1 gt Description Binary data is sent to the instrument in byte high byte low order For convenience programmers can write their code in reverse order but have to let the instrument know that the data is reversed In case the code stores the data in byte low byte high order use the FORM BORD SWAP command to reverse the byte order Name Type Default Description NORMal Discrete NORM Binary data is sent in byte high byte low order SWAPped Discrete Binary data is sent in byte low byte high order 5 52 Programming Reference EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual Response The 3152B returns NORM or SWAP depending on the current binary data format setting TRACe lt header gt lt binary_block gt HS Syntax 10001 lt string gt Description Downloads waveform data to 3152B waveform memory Waveform data is loaded into the 3152B using a binary transfer A special command is defined by IEEE STD 488 2 for this purpose Binary transfer allows any 8 bit bytes including
210. ce SWEep MODulation HALFcycle COUNter HS Syntax 0610A lt 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 gt Description This command selects the operating mode of the 3152B Parameters Name Type Default Description FlXed Discrete FIX Selects standard waveform mode There is an assortment of standard waveforms that may be selected You can find these waveform shapes in the standard waveforms section 5 36 Programming Reference EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual USER SEQuenced SWEep MODulated HALF cycle COUNter Response Discrete Selects arbitrary waveform mode Arbitrary waveforms must be loaded into 3152B memory before they can be re played Discrete Selects sequenced waveform output To generate a sequence first download waveforms to different memory segments and then build a sequence table to generate a complex waveform using these segments Discrete Selects the sweep generator function Sweep generator functions and parameters are programmable Discrete Selects the modulated waveforms There is an array of built in modulation schemes However you can also build custom modulation schemes using the arbitrary function Discrete Selects the half cycle function Discrete Selects the counter timer auxiliary function Note that when you select this function all wavefor
211. ce links This specifies continuous advance where the generator steps continuously to the end of the sequence table and then repeats the sequence from the beginning For example if a sequence is made of three segments 1 2 and 3 and AUTO mode is used the sequence will proceed 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 with the duration of the loop depending upon the loop counter specified in the sequence table This specifies that the 3152B idles between links until it senses a valid trigger event This mode is available only when the 3152B is in Triggered Run mode An attempt to select this mode when the 3152B is in Continuous Run mode will generate a settings conflict error After a trigger the generator output resumes until it is once again between links Then the output level idles at a DC level equal to the last point of the last generated waveform If loops repeats were programmed the segment is repeated n times automatically before it begins idling After execution of all of the programmed loops the sequencer steps to the next segment in the sequence upon receipt of the next valid trigger event This Stepped Advance mode specifies that the sequence advances to the next link only when a valid trigger event has been received In this mode the 3152B generates the first segment continuously until a trigger signal advances the sequence to the next segment If repeats are specified in the sequence table they are ignored in Stepped Adv
212. chronize multiple instruments and program phase Commands offsets between adjacent channels The output frequency and the reference source are also selected using commands from this group Factory defaults after RST are shown in the Default column Parameter range and low and high limits are listed where applicable The 3152A column shows where 3152B commands are backward compatible with the older 3152A design Table 5 3 Instrument amp Output Control Commands Summary Keyword Parameter Form Default 3152A HS INSTrument MODE NORMal FAST NORM v 0150A SELect 1 2 1 0008A COUPle MODE MASTer SLAVe MAST 0002A DELay 0 to 20 0 0003A PATH ADJacent ECLT LBUS ADJ 0191A SLAVe DELete lt LAN IP address gt 00040 INSert lt 3152B gt lt LAN IP address gt 00051 STATe OFF ON 0 1 0 0006A OUTPut ECLTrg lt n gt lt n gt 0 to 1 STATe OFF ON 0 1 0 0 M 0210B FILTer LPASs FREQuency 25M 50M 60M 120M 25M 0201A STATe OFF ON 0 1 0 v 0202A LOAD 50 to 1e6 50 0012A STATe OFF ON 0 1 0 v 0200A SYNC STATe OFF ON 0 1 0 v 0241A POSition POINt 0 to 1e6 1 0 to 2 4e6 1 with option 1 2 0 vi 0242A SOURce BIT LCOMplete SSYNc HCLock PULSe BIT 0240A ZEROcross WIDTh 4 to n 8 4 0243A TRIGger M SOURce BIT LCOMPlete SSYnc HCLock PULSe BIT 0220A ZE
213. cies and their associated dwell times The 3152B will hop through this list outputting the next frequency each time it hops Note that the carrier waveform is always sinewave and that the last cycle is always completed even if the dwell time is shorter than the period of the waveform For example if you program dwell time of 1ms and the frequency step has frequency of 1Hz 1s period the frequency step will last 1 second although the dwell time is 1ms Sample Frequency Hops Data Array 1e 6 100 2e 6 2000 3e 3 3e4 4e 6 40 5e 5 5e3 6e 2 6000 7e 1 0 7 8e 8e2 6 9e 3 90 10e 51000 In the above example the first number is the frequency value and the second number is its dwell time Therefore only even number of sets can be located in this table Parameters Name Type Description lt var_hop_data gt Double Block of binary data that contains information of frequency hop values and their respective dwell time EADS North America Test and Services Programming Reference 5 89 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A FHOP MARKer lt index gt HS Syntax 0072A lt integer gt Description Programs where on the frequency list the 3152B will generate a pulse designated as Hop marker or index point The marker pulse is generated at the SYNC output connector Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt index gt 1 to 5000
214. cilloscope as follows Waveform Sine wave Period 0 1 ms Phase Every 0 1 ms change 180 degrees Test Results Pass Fail ASK Equipment Oscilloscope Preparation 1 2 3 4 5 EADS North America Test and Services Configure the oscilloscope as follows Time Base 0 2 ms Amplitude 1 V div Connect the 3152B output to the oscilloscope input channel 1 Connect the 3152B SYNC to the oscilloscope input channel 2 Configure model 3152B controls as follows Reset Waveform Modulated Modulation ASK Carrier Freq 10 kHz Base Amplitude 4 V Shift Amplitude 2 V Baud Rate 10 kHz Sync On Output On Using ArbConnection prepare and download 10 step ASK list Performance Checks 6 31 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A with alternating O and 1 Test Procedure 1 Verify ASK operation on the oscilloscope as follows Waveform Sine wave Period 0 1 ms Amplitude Every 0 1 ms alternates between 2 V and 4V Test Results Pass Fail Variable Dwell Time Equipment Oscilloscope Frequency Hopping Preparation 1 Configure the oscilloscope as follows Time Base 0 5 ms Sampling Rate 50 MS s at least Trace A View Jitter Type FREQ CLK Trigger source Channel 2 positive slope Amplitude 1 V div Connect the 3152B output to the oscilloscop
215. cles for each 0 crossing level Test Results Pass Fail This tests the operation of the PLL function The 3152B locks PLL Operation automatically to an external trigger source The frequency and the start phase of the external signals are applied to the 3152B TRIG PLL input After lock as indicated by the LOCK LED the start phase of the 3152B can be modified from 180 to 180 PLL Checks Equipment Counter function generator Frequency Lock Preparation 1 Configure the function generator as follows Waveform Square Amplitude 2V Output On Frequency As required by the tests 2 Connect the function generator output to the 3152B TRIG PLL IN connector Using a T connector connect the same output to the counter input CH A Use a 50 Q feedthrough terminator at the 3152B trigger input 3 Configure the counter as follows Function Freq A B Input 500 4 Connect the 3152B output to the counter input CH B 5 Configure the model 3152B as follows Waveform Sine Frequency 200 kHz Output On EADS North America Test and Services Performance Checks 6 21 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A PLL On Test Procedure 1 Modify the function generator frequency settings and observe that the counter readings match the function generator frequency settin
216. clock generator clocks the standard arbitrary and sequenced waveforms e Direct digital synthesis DDS circuit The DDS circuit generates amplitude and frequency related modulation throughout the entire amplitude and frequency ranges of the 3152B This mode is useful for wideband FM sweep FSK PSK ASK AM and frequency hopping as well as simultaneous sweeping of frequency amplitude and phase 3D modulation The output level is programmable from 20 mVp p to 32 Vp p into an open circuit or 10mVp p to 16 Vp p into a 500 load A programmable offset shifts the output in either the positive or negative direction As with any other VXIbus instrument the 3152B must be used with a host computer All of its functions modes and parameters are fully programmable using one of the following three ways e Low level programming Use SCPI commands to program each individual parameter e ArbConnection Use the ArbConnection virtual front panel on the computer screen which simulates a mechanical front panel It has push buttons displays and dials to simulate the look and feel of a bench top instrument e Instrument drivers Use a high level driver such as VXIplug amp play IVI or LabVIEW with your own program to control the 3152B EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual Carrier Carr
217. commands in the Commands bar are listed and described below The File menu has 4 menu items that control pulse waveform file operations This menu also can be used to print the active waveform or to exit from Pulse Composer Descriptions of the menu selections from the File pull down menu are given below New The New Ctrl N menu item clears the pulse graph Changes made to the pulse graph should be saved before using the New function because it is destructive to the displayed pulse Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual 4 58 ArbConnection Vertical Scale 10V 1 25V Div Horizontal Scale 75 2ms 7 52msa Div Publication No 980935 Rev A Open The Open Ctrl O menu item lets you choose a previously saved pulse file and load it to the Pulse Composer graph The PLS file extension which is a text format is supported by this operation E TETT S kamen gt Qa om om Pulse Train Design Format Time Level Points Tr Append Insert Delete Delete All Undo Section Properties Design Units ms Section Start 40 ms Repeat E Appl Duration xB 35 2 ms a2arwvo own oie WNe Figure 4 43 Pulse Composer Screen Save The Save Ctrl S menu item lets you store your active waveform as a text file with a pls or wav extension If this is the firs
218. connector as the output relay is turned on Use init cont on to return to Continuous mode from any interrupted mode In Triggered mode the output remains at a specific DC level until a trigger event initiates a single output cycle see Selecting the Mode Trigger Source for details about trigger parameters Each time a transition occurs at the trigger input the 3152B generates one complete output cycle At the end of the waveform cycle the output assumes a DC level that is equal to the amplitude of the first point of the waveform If you have not invoked any interrupted modes since applying power to the 3152B you may use the following command to turn off Continuous mode and default to Triggered mode init cont off Turns off Continuous mode changing to an interrupted mode If you have not selected a specific interrupted run mode since power up the generator will default to Triggered mode If you have used other interrupted modes since power up then send the following command sequence to guarantee a change to Triggered mode init cont off Turns Continuous mode off in case this was the most recent run mode trig retr off Turns Retriggered mode off in case this was the most recent interrupted run mode trig gated off Turns Gated mode off in case this was the most recent interrupted run mode trig burs off Turns Burst mode off in case this was the most recent interrupted run mode EADS North America Test and Services Operation 3 7
219. crete Programs an inverted pulse output Response The 3152B returns NORM COMP or INV depending on the current polarity setting DPULse PERiod lt period gt HS Syntax 0149A lt float gt Description Programs the pulse repetition rate period Note that the sum of all parameters including the pulse delay rise high and fall times must not exceed the programmed pulse period and therefore it is recommended that the pulse period be programmed first before all other pulse parameters Note that by selecting the double pulse mode the pulse period remains unchanged Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt period gt 80e 9 to 1e6 Numeric 10e 3 Programs the period of the pulse waveform in units of seconds 5 96 Programming Reference EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual Response The 3152B returns the current pulse period value in units of seconds DPULse TRANsition lt rise gt HS Syntax 0151A lt float gt Description Programs the interval it will take the pulse to transition from its low to high level settings The parameter is programmed in units of seconds Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt rise gt Oto 1e3 Numeric 1e 3 Sets the rise time parameter Note that the sum of all parameters including the rise time must not exceed the prog
220. cription lt rate gt 1 to 10e6 Numeric 10e3 Programs the rate at which the frequency shifts from carrier to the shifted frequency in units of Hz Response The 3152B returns the current baud value ASK FREQuency MARKer lt index gt HS Syntax 0068A lt integer gt Description Programs where in the data stream the 3152B generates a pulse designated as an ASK marker or index point The marker pulse is generated at the SYNC output connector Note that if you intend to program the marker position you must do it before you load the ASK data list Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt index gt 1 to 1000 Numeric 1 Programs a marker pulse at an index bit position integer only Response The 3152B returns the current marker position ASK DATA lt ask_data gt HS Syntax 00671 lt string gt Description Loads the data stream that will cause the 3152B to hop from one amplitude level to a shifted amplitude level and vice versa Data format is a string of 0 and 1 which define when the output generates the base level and when it shifts amplitude to the ASK value A 0 specifies the base level amplitude and a 1 specifies a shifted amplitude level Note that if you intend to program marker position you must do it before you load the ASK data list Below you can see how an ASK data table is constructed The sample below shows a list of 10 shifts The 3152B will step through this list outputting either the base o
221. cription Programs the exponent for the standard gaussian pulse waveform Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt exp gt 1to 200 Numeric 10 Programs the exponent parameter for the Gaussian function Response The 3152B returns the current exponent value for the Gaussian function EXPonential EXPonent lt exp gt HS Syntax 0760A lt integer gt Description Programs the exponent for the standard exponential waveform Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt exp gt 100 to Numeric 10 Programs the exponent parameter 100 Response The 3152B returns the current exponent value for the exponential function DC lt voltage gt HS Syntax 0770A lt float gt Description Programs the voltage level for the DC function The peak to peak amplitude value is programmed in units of percent relative to the programmed peak to peak amplitude level EADS North America Test and Services Programming Reference 5 49 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt voltage gt 100 to 100 Numeric 100 Programs level of the DC function in units of percent Response The 3152B returns the current DC voltage value DC AMPLitude lt amplitude gt HS Syntax 0046A lt float gt Description Programs the amplitude of the DC function in units of Vo
222. cuit is useful for generating long waveforms with repeated sections Although the waveform only needs to be programmed once the sequencer loops on this segment as many times as selected When in sequenced mode there is no time delay between linked or looped segments EADS North America Test and Services Introduction 1 15 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A Figure 1 7 Segment 1 Sin x x Waveform Figure 1 8 Segment 2 Sine Waveform Figure 1 9 Segment 3 Pulse Waveform The following sequence was made of segment 2 repeated twice segment 1 repeated four times and segment 3 repeated two times 1 16 Introduction EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual Modulated Waveforms Sweep FM Figure 1 10 Sequenced Waveforms The use of direct digital synthesis DDS technology makes the 3152B is agile During operations such as sweep FSK FM and other modulation modes the 3152B quickly synthesizes the modulated waveform using the DDS circuit The variety of modulated waveforms are described below The 3152B can sweep the output frequency between minimum and maximum values that
223. cy amplitude offset and other parameters which are associated with the selected function For example the following statement outputs a 2 Vp p square wave at 1 MHz with a 0 V offset and 10 duty cycle APPL SQU 166 2 0 10 It is not necessary to enter every parameter with the APPLy command If only the frequency and offset need to be changed omit the other parameters while keeping the commas The other parameters will be set to the power up default values APPL SQU 1066 1 Alternatively if just the first parameters need to be changed omit the commas The other parameters will be set to the power up default values APPL SQU 4e6 2 Queries can also be made on all parameters associated with a standard function using the appl lt function_shape gt query For example if the instrument was programmed using the above appl squ command query the square wave parameters using the following query APPL SQU Table 5 7 lists the complete set of apply commands followed by a description of each command separately EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual Table 5 7 Apply Control Commands Keyword Parameter Form Default 3152A HS SOURce APPLy FREQ AMPL OFFS vi 0300C SINusoid FREQ AMPL OFFS PHAS POW vi 0301E
224. d automatically to match the selected duration If you check the Force Length box the modulation SCLK will be modified automatically to match the selected duration Finally if you check both the Force Length and the Force Modulation SCLK boxes the duration of the 3D profile will be affected To modify wavelength or modulation SCLK check the appropriate box modify the value and click on the Apply button to force the selected value Any successive changes that you make to the edit fields require that you click on the Apply button to accept the new value The Offset group controls DC offsets of the modulated waveform Changing offset does not affect other parameters except the location of the waveform along the vertical axis The Clear Design button resets the 3D composer and the Reduce button closes the dialog box The Vertical Controls are used for profiling amplitude frequency and phase When you modify the fields in any of the controls the associated graphical screen are automatically updated with the assigned values and display the profile as designed in the vertical control fields The Vertical Controls are shown in Figure 4 58 You can start designing profiles only when one of the control fields is active Control fields become active when you click on a control field Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A Vert
225. d how to download waveforms is given in Chapter 3 in the section titled Generating Arbitrary Waveforms Examples of how sequenced waveforms work are given in figures 1 7 through 1 9 The sequence generator lets you link and loop segments in a user defined order Figure 1 10 shows a sequence of waveforms that were stored in three different memory segments There are a number of tools that you can use to build a sequence table The easiest way is to use the ArbConnection program Information on how to use the ArbConnection program is given in chapter 4 In addition SCPI programming and the driver also allow you to program sequences at a lower level In general sequences can be built one step at a time using the SEQ DEF command This method is slower than the table download method but has the advantage of allowing better control for the sequence novice Advanced users can download a complete sequence table using the binary sequence download option The latter option is much faster for applications requiring large sequence tables Use the information below to understand sequence commands and how to implement them in your application EADS North America Test and Services Programming Reference 5 65 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A Table 5 8 Sequence Control Commands Keyword Pa
226. dard waveform depends upon the programmed frequency Therefore some parameter changes may not have any effect on the waveform because the number of points do not provide enough resolution to show the difference The number of waveform points varies depending upon the output frequency The reason for this variation is that even standard waveforms are in a manner similar to that of arbitrary waveforms except that the 3152B stores standard waveforms in a permanent internal library for immediate use At low frequencies the number of points for each standard waveform is 1 000 Therefore waveform modifications are possible in increments of 1 1 000 of the total waveform For example if you want to modify the duty cycle of a square waveform the resolution for the duty cycle is 0 1 At higher frequencies the number of points used for generating waveforms decreases according to the following relationship Output Frequency Sample Clock Frequency Waveform Points Since the maximum sample clock frequency is 250 MS s the only way to increase frequency is by reducing the number of waveform points when the standard waveform frequency is gt 250 kHz The reduced number of points available at higher frequencies decreases timing resolution for the standard waveforms For example for a 25 MHz square wave only ten points per period are available Therefore duty cycle resolution is decreased to 10 increments EADS North America Test and Service
227. data and or an incorrect number of bytes will cause erroneous sequence partitioning to occur 3 The least significant bit is the only bit used in the advance mode byte This bit affects the operation of the sequence only when Mixed Step Advance mode is active With the LSB bit set to 0 the sequence generator advances to the next step automatically With the LSB bit set to 1 the sequence generator advances to the next step only when a valid trigger signal is sensed at the trigger input 4 The SYNC state bit is valid only when the sync type is BIT 32 19 15 7 0 REPEAT x LONG TRUNCATE cl 15 13 0 SEGMENT NUMBER x INTEGER TRUNCATE 7 o SYNC STATE x BYTE TRUNCATE f 7 0 ADVANCE MODE x BYTE TRUNCATE A Figure 5 5 64 bit Sequence Table Download Format Parameters Name Type Description lt binary_block gt Binary Block of binary data that contains information on the sequence table SEQuence ADVance AUTOmatic STEP SINGIe MIXed HS Syntax 1300A lt 0 1 2 3 gt Description This command selects the sequence advance mode which is the way in which the instrument advances through a sequence Parameters Name Type Default Description AUTOmatic Discrete AUTO Specifies continuous advance where the generator steps continuously to the end of the sequence table and repeats the sequence from the start For example if a sequence is made of three segments 1 2 and 3
228. data array gt 007114 VARiable DATA lt data array gt 007314 MARKer 1 to 5000 1 0072A AHOPping DWELI MODe FlXed VARiable FIX 0061A TIMe 200e 9 to 20 200e 9 0062A FIXed DATA lt data array gt 005914 VARiable DATA lt data array gt 006314 MARKer 1 to 5000 1 0060A 3D DATA lt data array gt 005214 MARKer 1 to 30000 0053A RASTer 1 to 2 5e6 166 0054A EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Programming Reference 5 19 Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A Table 5 2 3152B SCPI Command Summary continued Keyword Parameter Form Default 3152A HS Digital Pulse Commands DPULse DELay 0 to 10 0 0143A DOUBle STATe OFF ON 0 1 0 0144A DELay 0 to 1e3 1e 3 0145A LEVel HIGH 7 992 to 8 5 0147A LOW 8 to 7 992 0 0148A HIGH 0 to 1e3 1e 3 0146A POLarity NORMal COMPlement INVerted NORM 0186A PERiod 80e 9 to 1e6 80e 9 to 2e6 with option 2 10e 3 0149A TRANssition LEADing 0 to 1e3 1e 3 0151A TRAiling 0 to 1e3 1e 3 0152A Half Cycle Commands HALF cycle DELay 200e 9 to 20 1e 6 0139A DCYCle 0 to 99 99 50 0138A FREQuency 10e 3 to 1e6 1e6 0140A PHASe 0 to 360 0 0141A SHAPe SINusoid TRlangle SQUare S
229. de on trig gate lev This option makes the gate level sensitive The gate opens when the gating signal amplitude exceeds the value of the programmed trigger level This is the default for Gated mode trig gate tran This option makes the input transition sensitive The gate opens on the first transition and closes on the next transition lt gate event gt This event controls Gated mode You may select the source of the gate events from a number of inputs including the front panel or VXIbus backplane trigger line The gating sequence continues unless you change the run mode or turn off power Use the following commands to restore Continuous mode trig gate O Turns off the Gated mode The generator reverts to Triggered mode init cont on Places the 3152B into Continuous mode Burst mode is similar to Triggered mode except that only one trigger signal is needed to generate a counted number of output cycles In Burst mode the output remains at a specific DC level until a valid trigger event initiates a burst of output waveforms Any trigger source can initiate a burst If a hardware trigger source is selected the edge sensitivity can be programmed for either the rising or falling edge of the input signal Each time a transition at the trigger input occurs the 3152B generates a counted burst of output waveforms At the end of the burst the output assumes a DC level equal to the amplitude of the first point of the waveform The burs
230. ded Parameters Options x m Wavelength r Modulation SCLK 1e6 Force SCLK IW r Offset Duration Wavelength SCLK Forcing Wavelength modifies SCLK Forcing SCLK modifies Wavelength Forcing both SCLK amp Wavelength modifies Duration CH1 Apply fo y Apply CH2 0 y Apply Figure 4 61 Expanded Parameters Options Dialog Box The Expanded Parameters options dialog box has three sections Wavelength Modulation SCLK and Offset The wavelength and the modulation SCLK control the duration of the entire wave through EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual Vertical Controls EADS North America Test and Services ArbConnection 4 79 the following relationship Duration Modulation SCLK Wavelength Each of the parameters has a finite length and therefore the duration has maximum and minimum intervals The modulation SCLK has a range of 1 Hz to 2 5 MHz and the Wavelength is limited from 2 points to 30 000 points As a result the duration can be programmed from 800 ns to 30 000 s If you do not care to control the wavelength and the SCLK then you can leave the task for the 3D composer In that case you must leave the Force Length and Force SCLK check boxes unmarked If you check the Force SCLK box the wavelength will be modifie
231. down Mechanical relays have a settling time of about 2 ms Therefore when writing software allow enough time for the relay to close EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A Programming the 3152B 3152B User Manual before using the signal at the output connector The 3152B has no front panel control therefore you must use a computer to communicate with the instrument There are a number of ways to do this including the use of an appropriate software driver on the host computer The specifics of communication are discussed in later chapters An alternative to a driver is to use the SCPI Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments language Chapter 5 explains the details of SCPI programming The ArbConnection software application is supplied with the 3152B ArbConnection provides a user interface that allows you to control the 3152B interactively Chapter 4 provides detailed instructions for using ArbConnection EADS North America Test and Services Introduction 1 23 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A This page intentionally left blank 1 24 Introduction EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOUR
232. e 5V Output On CW Frequency As required by the test Test Procedure 1 Perform sine wave spectral purity DDS Waveforms tests using Table 6 15 EADS North America Test and Services Performance Checks 6 9 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A Table 6 15 Sine Wave Spectral Purity DDS Output Tests at 5 V Spectrum Analyzer Settings pp Settings Limits Start Stop Reading SC EE 5 MHz gt 45 dBc 1 MHz 20MHz sd 1 MHz 100MHZ CCCs 50MHz gt 30dBc 10MHz 200MHz II 3 Change amplitude to 10 V and perform sine wave spectral purity DAC waveforms tests using Table 6 16 Table 6 16 Sine Wave Spectral Purity DDS Output Tests at 10 V 3152B Freq Spectrum Analyzer Settings P Settings Limits Start Stop Reading 5MHz gt 35 dBc 1 MHz 20MHz sd iMHz 100MHz f 50MHz gt 25dBe 10MHz 200MHz Sine Wave Flatness Equipment Oscilloscope DAC Output Preparation 1 Configure the Oscilloscope follows Termination 50 20 dB feedthrough attenuator at the oscilloscope input Setup As required for the test 2 Connect 3152B output to the oscilloscope input 3 Configure the 3152B as follows Amplitude 5V Output On Frequency Initially 1 kHz then as required by the test Test Procedure 1 Adjust the vertical controls of the Oscillosc
233. e Square EADS North America Test and Services One may select from a list of a built in library of standard waveforms The waveforms are computed every time a waveform is selected The integrity of the waveform and its upper frequency limit depend on the programmed frequency value and the number of waveform points that are used for computing one cycle interval Sine Triangle Square Pulse Ramp Sinc pulse Gaussian pulse Exponential decay rise pulse DC 100 uHz to 100 MHz 3152B Specifications A 3 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual All other waveforms Frequency Resolution Accuracy amp Stability Sine Start Phase Range Start Phase Resolution Power Range Sine Raised to a power Sine Wave Performance THD Harmonics and Spurious at less than 5 Vp p Harmonics amp Spurious at less than 10 Vp p Flatness at less than 5 Vp p Flatness at less than 10Vp p Triangle Start Phase Range Start Phase Resolution Power Range Triangle Raised to a power Square Duty Cycle Range Pulse Delay Rise Fall Time High Time Ranges Ramp Delay Rise Fall Time High Time Ranges Gaussian Pulse Time Constant Range Sync Pulse Zero Crossings Range Exponential Pulse Time Constant Range DC Output Function Setting options Range A 4 3152B Specifications Publication No 980935 Rev A 100 uHz to 16 MHz 11 digits Same as f
234. e 10 sine waveforms you should multiply p by 10 Try this Amplitude p 8000 sin omg p 10 Equation Examples So far you have learned how to create two simple waveforms straight lines and trigonometric functions Let s see if we can combine these waveforms to something more interesting Take the straight line equation and add it to the sinewave equation Amplitude p 12000 sin omg p 10 8 p 4000 Press Preview Your screen should look like Figure 4 37 Now let s try to modulate two sine waves with different periods and different start phase Type this Amplitude p 12000 sin omg p cos omg p 30 Press Preview Your screen should look like Figure 4 38 Anchor Waveform Amplitude Level Adjuster IDepg elvvw zz ity Start pts 0 Max 82767 Cycles Auto Scaling Preview L Anchor 0 End pts 1023 Min 32768 bh vis o Equation 1 History EE Amplitude p Insert Wave Clear Open Save Cancel OK 12000 sinfomg p10 8 p 4000 E Aliases gt gt Vertical Scale 64kPts 8kPts Div Horizontal Scale 1kPts 100e 3kPts Div Figure 4 37 Equation Editor Example EADS North America Test and Services ArbConnection 4 51 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual WW EPET d I ul dd I Vertical Scale 64kPts 8kPts Div Horizontal Scale 1kPts 100
235. e 3kPts Div Publication No 980935 Rev A 2 x Anchor p Waveform Amplitude Level Adjuster Start pts 0 Mar 32757 Cycles I Auto Scaling Preview End pts 1023 Min 32768 fr ware en PL Equation r History Cancel I Amplitude p Insert Wave Clear Open fer I 12000 sin omg p cos omg p 30 v W Aliases gt gt di UN l UI Illu Wi wi Il wm Wi ii fil Wi il jii iji d Hil 0 Figure 4 38 Using the Equation Editor to Modulate Sine Waveforms 4 52 ArbConnection In the following example 20 second harmonic distortion has been added to a standard sinewave The original waveform had a peak to peak value of 24000 points so 19 second harmonic is equivalent to 4500 points The frequency of the second harmonic is obviously double that of the fundamental so term 4500 sin 2 omg p is added to the original sine wave equation Use the following equation Amplitude p 24000 sin omg p 4500 sine 2 omg p Press Preview Your screen should look like Figure 4 39 EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual r nchor I Waveform Amplitude Level Adjuster DERES 4 we Start pts 0 Max 22767 Cycles Dr Original Sz om om End pts 1023 Min
236. e 6 27 EADS North America Test and Services Performance Checks 6 23 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A Table 6 27 PLL Tests PM Phase Offset DC Source Error Counter Freq Setting Amplitude Limits Phase Reading Pass Fail 10 kHz 2V 320 15 10 kHz 4 5 V 270 15 10 kHz 2V 40 15 10 kHz 4 5 V 90 15 Arbitrary Waveform Memory Operation Waveform Memory This tests the integrity of the waveform memory The waveform memory stores the waveforms that are being generated at the output connector and therefore flaws in the memory can cause distortions and impurities in the output waveform Equipment Distortion Analyzer AroConnection Preparation 1 Connect 3152B output to the distortion analyzer input Configure the 3152B as follows SCLK As required by the test Waveform Arbitrary Amplitude 5V Output On 2 Using ArbConnection prepare and download the following waveform Wavelength 500 k points Waveform Sine wave SCLK 100 MS s Test Procedure 1 Perform Sine wave distortion It should be less than 0 1 Test Results Pass Fail Modulated Waveform Operation 6 24 Performance Checks This tests the operation of the modulation circuits It includes tests for the various modulation f
237. e OUTPUT The main output signal e SYNC OUT A digital signal in sync with the main output e TRIG PLL IN Trigger input also used to lock the 3152B to an external signal e CLOCK IN An ECL level external sample clock input e PM IN Phase control input for use in PLL mode The 3100R 3152B has three BNC and two SMB connectors on its front panel marked as follows e OUT BNC The main output signal e SYNC BNC A digital signal in sync with the main output e TRIG PLL BNC Trigger input also used to lock to an external signal e EXT SCLK An ECL level external sample clock input EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A OUTPUT OUT SYNC OUT SYNC TRIG PLL IN TRG PLL 3152B User Manual e EXT 10MHz A TTL level external 10 MHz reference OR a phase control input for use in PLL mode software selectable The 3100M 3152B has the same pattern as described above for the 3100R 3152B but has the following additional functions e LAN RJ 45 LAN connection for software control e USB 2 0 Type A Memory stick device port for firmware upgrade or for loading external data into memory The OUTPUT connector is the main output and is used for fixed pre defined or modulated waveforms up to 100 MHz and for arbitrary or sequenced waveforms with up to 300 MS s Output impedance is 50
238. e SYNC output connector The SYNC State button must be turned on to generate the PSK marker output To access the required parameter click on the button below parameters sub group until the LED next to the required parameter turns on The value that is associated with the lit LED is displayed on the digital display You can use the dial keyboard or the TI H keys to adjust the readout to the required setting After you modify the reading click on the Modify Execute knob to update the 3152B with the new reading ASK The ASK group contains parameters that control the amplitude shift keying function These are control data non modulated and shifted phases and baud and marker position Control Data The Control Data button in the ASK group provides access to the data string that controls the sequence of base amplitude and shifted amplitude It contains the list of 0 and 1 values that the output will repeatedly follow for its amplitude shift keying sequence advance as programmed 0 1 Amplitude In ASK the carrier waveform CW has two amplitudes an initial amplitude level which is set by the 0 Amplitude parameter and shifted amplitude which is set by the 1 Amplitude The control data table has a list of O and 1 values that flag when the amplitude shifts from base to shifted amplitudes Baud The baud parameter sets the rate at which the generator steps through the sequence of the ASK C
239. e a numeric parameter on the display the 3152B does not respond until you click on the Modify Execute knob to update the instrument Some controls in this panel also appear in other panels When you change a parameter in this panel the other panels are updated 4 6 ArbConnection EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual automatically The functional groups listed above are explained in detail below General Parameters The General Parameters group contains two parameters Amplitude and Offset To access a parameter click on its name The LED next to the parameter then changes to on and the display shows the current value You may use the dial keyboard or 1 and Hl keys to adjust the value After you change the value click on the Modify Execute knob to update the 3152B Wave Mode The Wave Mode group is used for selecting which of the available waveforms will be generated at the output connector The 3152B provides five types of waveforms Standard Arbitrary Sequenced Modulated and Half Cycle Click one of these buttons to select the waveform type The default function type is Standard If you want to change the Standard waveform parameters you may select Standard from the Panels bar Run Mode Using the controls in the Run Mode group you may select Continuous mode or
240. e divided into smaller segments When the instrument is programmed to output arbitrary waveforms the clock samples the data points one at a time from address 0 to the last address The rate at which each sample is replayed is defined by the sample clock rate parameter Unlike the built in standard waveforms arbitrary waveforms must first be loaded into the instrument s memory Correct memory management is required for best utilization of the arbitrary memory 5 50 Programming Reference EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual An explanation of how to manage the arbitrary waveform memory is given in the following paragraphs Arbitrary memory Management The arbitrary memory in comprised of a finite length of words The maximum size arbitrary waveform that can be loaded into memory depends on the option that is installed in your instrument The various options are listed in Chapter 1 of this manual If you purchased the 3152B with in its basic configuration then you have 1 Meg words for the loading of arbitrary waveforms Waveforms are created using small sections of arbitrary memory The memory can be partitioned into smaller segments up to 16k and different waveforms can be loaded into each segment each having a unique length Minimum segment size is 16 points Information on how to
241. e for the PLL function Source options are External signal applied to the front panel PLL IN connector Trigger signals applied through the backplane trigger lines or trigger signal applied through the ECLTO line While the last two options have fixed logic levels the front panel input may accept various levels including such levels that reside on offsets Parameters Name Type Default Description EXTernal Discrete EXT Will select the front panel PLL IN input as the reference signal The input can be programmed for trigger level to adjust the threshold and for slope to define the reference slope TTLTrg lt n gt Discrete Will select one of the backplane trigger lines TTLTrg 0 through 7 as the reference input LBUS lt n gt Discrete Will select the backplane LBUS lt n gt line as the reference input ECLTrg lt n gt Discrete Will select the backplane ECLTrgO line as the reference input Response The 3152B returns EXT TTLT lt n gt or ECLTO depending on the selected PLL reference source setting PHASe2 ADJust lt phase gt HS Syntax 0900A lt float gt Description Programs the phase offset between the reference input and the 3152B output The output start phase is shifted in reference to the external signal Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt phase gt 180 to 180 Numeric 0 Programs the phase offset between the reference and the output waveform The phase is programmed in units of degrees N
242. e frequency of the pulse waveform to 5 kHz 5e3 Hz outp 1 Turns the output on You may use similar command sequences to program other waveforms and their parameters Table 5 1 lists the complete set of commands for setting waveform parameters The Apply command is a shortcut for setting up standard waveforms and their parameters without having to program each parameter individually This also selects the waveform as the active signal at the output connector It does not however eliminate the need for turning on the output You may use the Apply command on a waveform from the built in library or on waveform segments that are pre loaded with arbitrary waveforms Sequenced and modulated waveforms are not supported by the Apply command EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual The following example uses the Apply command to specify a square wave at the end of the programming sequence rst Restores factory defaults appl squ 10 7e6 2 1 30 Selects the standard square wave as the active function and simultaneously sets the frequency to 10 7 MHz 10 7e6 amplitude to 2V offset to 1 V and duty cycle to 30 outp 1 Turns on the output The above is an example of a full utilization of the Apply command including the frequency amplitude offset and duty cycle parameters for a stand
243. e input channel 1 Connect the 3152B SYNC to the oscilloscope input channel 2 Configure model 3152B controls as follows Waveform Modulated Modulation Hop Hop Mode Variable Sync On Output On 5 Using ArbConnection prepare open the Hop Table composer and download the following table both channels FAP Frequency Dwell Time 1 0e6 50e 6 1 2e6 100e 6 1 4e6 150e 6 1 6e6 200e 6 1 8e6 250e 6 2 0e6 300e 6 2 2e6 350e 6 2 4e6 400e 6 2 6e6 450e 6 2 8e6 500e 6 Test Procedure 1 Verify Hop operation on the oscilloscope as follows Waveform Frequency steps increasing dwell time from 50 us to 500 us Max A 2 8 MHz Min A 1 0 MHz Period 2750 us 6 32 Performance Checks EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual Test Results Pass Fail Fix Dwell Time Equipment Oscilloscope Frequency Hopping Preparation 1 Configure the oscilloscope as follows Time Base 0 1 ms Sampling Rate 50 MS s at least Trace A View Jitter Type FREQ CLK Trigger source Channel 2 positive slope Amplitude 1 V div Connect the 3152B output to the oscilloscope input channel 1 Connect the 3152B SYNC to the oscilloscope input channel 2 Configure model 3152B controls as follows Waveform Modulated Modulation Hop Hop Mode Fix Dwell Time
244. e list The dwell time for each amplitude list item is fixed and can be programmed using the HOP DWEL command Note that if you intend to program marker position you must do it first and then load the amplitude hops list Below you can see how a hop table is constructed The file sample below shows a list of 10 amplitudes The 3152B will hop through this list outputting the next amplitude each time it hops Note that the carrier waveform is always sinewave and that the last cycle is always completed even if the dwell time is shorter than the period of the waveform For example if you program dwell time of 1ms and the amplitude step has frequency of 1Hz 1s period the frequency step will last 1 second although the dwell time is 1ms Sample Amplitude Hops Data Array 0 160 2e0 3e0 4e 0 5e 0 100e 3 200e 3 300e 3 400e 3 500e 3 Parameters Name Type Description lt fix_hop_data gt Double Block of binary data that contains information of amplitude values AHOP FIX DATA lt var_hop_data gt HS Syntax 00631 lt string gt Description This command will download the data array that will cause the instrument to hop through the amplitude list The dwell time for each amplitude list item is variable and is supplied in the variable hop table data array Note that the HOP DWEL command has no effect on this sequence Also note that if you intend to program marker position you must do it first and then load the amplitude hops list Below you can
245. e output resides on a DC level and generates modulation when a trigger is accepted The CW is similar except the signal idles on the pre trigger CW frequency setting executes the modulation upon receipt of a legal trigger signal and returns to continuous CW frequency output Note that in sweep modulation the Start parameter replaces the CW value Function The Function buttons select which of the waveforms will be swept The sine wave is the default waveform and it is swept using the DDS circuit The other two waveforms triangle and square are computed and the swept coordinates placed in the arbitrary memory The calculation of the sine and triangle waveforms takes a long time any time between seconds to minutes depending on the complexity of the sweep so should only be used when absolutely necessary in the application Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Start Hz FSK PSK ASK 4 24 ArbConnection Publication No 980935 Rev A Figure 4 16 Sweep Modulation Panel Step Use these keys to select sweep step from two increment options linear or logarithmic Direction Use these keys to program the sweep direction Up selects a sweep from the Start to Stop sample clock setting and Down selects sweep from the Stop to Start sample clock setting Refer to Chapter 3 of this manual to learn more about sweep operation Parameters These al
246. e programmed gate time interval is larger than the period of the measured signal Response The 3152B returns the current gate time value in units of seconds COUNter RESet HS Syntax 01370 lt float gt Description This command will reset the counter timer and arm the instrument for its next reading COUNter READ HS Syntax 0136 Description This command will interrogates the counter timer for a reading Note that the read command must follow a valid gate time interval or the reading will not be available and the interface bus will be held until the measurement cycle has been completed and a result is available to be read Response The 3152B returns the result of the current measurement function reading 5 102 Programming Reference EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual Synchronization Commands The synchronization commands control synchronization aspects to an external source via the PLL input These also control synchronization via the backplane ECLTrg0O line to an adjacent module Although synchronization through the ECLTrg0 line is limited in their upper frequency range 60 MHz maximum this set of synchronization commands was kept for backward compatibility with the legacy 3152A Contrary to the legacy synchronization commands modern synchronization scheme is achiev
247. e the DMM as follows Function ACV Range 100 mV 2 Connect the 3152B output to the DMM input Terminate the 3152B output at the DMM input with the 50 feedthrough termination 3 Configure the 3152B as follows Frequency 1 kHz Output On Amplitude 50 mV Offset 1V Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETUP 17 fora DMM reading of 17 67 mV 0 5 mV Setup 34 1 V Amplitude Amplifier Out Arbitrary Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50 Q feedthrough termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function ACV Range 1V 2 Connect the 3152B output to the DMM input Terminate the 3152B output at the DMM input with the 50 feedthrough termination 3 Configure the 3152B as follows Frequency 1 kHz Output On Amplitude 1V Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETUP 18 for a DMM reading of 353 5 mV 3 mV Setup 35 500 mV Amplitude Amplifier Out Arbitrary Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50 Q feedthrough termination Dual banana to BNC adapter EADS North America Test and Services Adjustments and Firmware Update 7 19 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function ACV Range 1V 2 Connect the 3152B output to the DMM input Terminate the 3152B output at the DMM input with the 50 feedthrough termination 3 Configure the 3152B
248. e you download data to the 31528 it will go to the active segment the 3152B will accept downloaded data only if a segment is designated as active 2 The waveform contained in the active segment will appear at the output the next time you turn on the output 3 The SYNC output is associated with the active segment This is not important in arbitrary mode but in sequenced mode the segments may be arranged in any order Therefore the location of the sync signal is important because it may appear at the middle of the sequence and not with the first segment EADS North America Test and Services Operation 3 21 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Selecting 12 bit or 16 bit Waveform Resolution Selecting Code Compatibility with the Legacy 3152A 3 22 Operation Publication No 980935 Rev A Use the following command to select an active segment trac sel lt n gt Selects the active segment lt n gt Waveform data is downloaded only to this active segment If you plan to partition the entire table with the segm lt array gt command select segment 1 as the active segment The next step transfers waveform data to the active segment Use the following command trac lt data_array gt Downloads waveform sample data to the active segment If you condensed all waveforms to a single waveform then you may use the segm lt array
249. ed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A Use the following commands for programming the frequency hop Frequency parameters Hop control is internal The frequency will hop from Hopping frequency to frequency at a rate determined by the dwell time value and controlled by a sequence of frequencies in the HOP data table Modulation There are two hop modes Fixed Dwell where the rate at which the Programming generator hops from frequency to frequency is constant and Variable Dwell where the rate at which the generator hops from frequency to frequency is programmable for each hop The commands for programming the frequency hopping function are described below Note that the carrier waveform frequency CW setting is common to all modulation schemes FHOP DWELI MODe FIXed VARiable HS Syntax 0069A lt 0 1 gt Description This selects between fixed or variable dwell time for the frequency hops Select the fixed option if you want each frequency to dwell equally on each step The variable option lets you program different dwell times for each frequency hop The 3152B output hops from one frequency to the next according to a sequence given in a hop table The variable dwell time table contains dwell time data for each step however the fixed dwell time table does not contain any dwell time information and therefore if you select the fixed option make sure your dwell time is progr
250. ed in response to the OPC command It indicates that the device has completed all selected and pending operations and is ready for a new command Bit 1 Request Control This bit operation is disabled on the 3152B Bit 2 Query Error This bit indicates that an attempt is being made to read data from the output queue when no output is either present or pending Bit 3 Device Dependent Error This bit is set when an error in a device function occurs For example the following command will cause a DDE error VOLTage 5 VOLTage O0FFSet 2 Both of the above parameters are legal and within the specified limits however the generator is unable to generate such an amplitude and offset combination Bit 4 Execution Error This bit is generated if the parameter following the command is outside of the legal input range of the generator Bit 5 Command Error This bit indicates the generator received a command that was a syntax error or a command that the device does not implement Bit 6 User Request This event bit indicates that one of a set of local controls had been activated This event bit occurs regardless of the remote or local state of the device Bit 7 Power On This bit indicates that the device s power source was cycled since the last time the register was read 5 120 Programming Reference EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www
251. ed using the HOP DWEL command Note that if you intend to program marker position you must do it first and then load the frequency hopping list Below you can see how a hop table is constructed The file sample below shows a list of 10 frequencies The 3152B will hop through this list outputting the next frequency each time it hops Note that the carrier waveform is always sinewave and that the last cycle is always completed even if the dwell time is shorter than the period of the waveform For example if you program dwell time of 1ms and the frequency step has frequency of 1Hz 1s period the frequency step will last 1 second although the dwell time is 1ms Sample Frequency Hops Data Array 1e 6 2e 6 3e 3 4e 6 5e 5 6e 2 7e 1 8e 6 9e 3 10e 5 Parameters Name Type Description lt fix_hop_data gt Double Block of binary data that contains information of frequency values FHOP FIX DATA lt var hop data gt HS Syntax 00731 lt string gt Description This command will download the data array that will cause the instrument to hop through the frequency list The dwell time for each frequency list item is variable and is supplied in the variable hop table data array Note that the HOP DWEL command has no effect on this sequence Also note that if you intend to program marker position you must do it first and then load the frequency hops list Below you can see how a hop table is constructed The file sample below shows a list of 10 frequen
252. ed using the instrument control commands where local bus LBUSO 7 lines are utilized to share high frequency signals between channels and adjacent slots As was mentioned above there are two methods of synchronizing multiple 3152Bs inside one VXIbus chassis The first is through the ECLTO and ECLT1 lines that provide the necessary signal to achieve lock between modules Using this method one instrument is configured as master and the rest of the instruments are configured as slaves When synchronized the slave instruments are initially locked to the start phase on the master module but later can be configured to have phase offsets relative to the master module Phase offset is programmable from 0 to 360 3152Bs modules can be inserted in any slot not necessarily adjacent to be able to phase synchronize between modules Another way to lock the 3152 to an external reference is its PLL input Using the PLL function a reference signal is applied to the trigger input The signal is being detected automatically by the auto detection circuit that in turn sets up the lock in range and prepares the PLL circuits to a final lock After lock the frequency and the start phase of the reference are duplicated by the 3152B A front panel LED illuminates when the reference signal is valid and the instrument locks on the external signal Additional control allows phase shifting of the locked instrument from 180 to 180 in reference to the input sign
253. ed with other instruments in the chassis The example in Figure 4 25 shows how to form two groups in a single chassis where group one synchronizes two channels and group 2 synchronizes three different instruments in a specific master servant configuration Note that slot 9 was moved up and assigned master while slots 7 and 8 became servants Ph Offs Phase Offset defines an offset between the master EADS North America Test and Services ArbConnection 4 33 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A module and its servants Note that the master instrument can also be set with an offset but then the final offset between modules will be the difference between the offset settings of the salves to the master X Instrument Synchronization xj Instruments Pool Model Path Ph Offs 3100 3152B 3152B ADJ 0 0 3100 31528 3152B pg _Move Down State Master 3152B 0 0 3152B VXIQ 6 8 0 0 3100 31528 Val g 0 0 Path LBUS ECLT Apply Clear All Assignments Close Figure 4 23 Adjacent Synchronization between Two Instruments X Instrument Synchronization R xj Instruments Pool Model Move Up 1 Master 3100 3152B 3152B VXID 13 1 3 AD 00 RE 1 Slave 3100 3152B 3152B Vtt 2 3 ADJ 109 Seen 2 Master 31528 VXID 5 1 7 1805 00 2 Slave 31528 VXID 6 1 8 LBUS 1024 2 Slave 3
254. edure 1 Adjust the vertical controls of the Oscilloscope to get 6 division of display 2 Perform Sine flatness DDS waveforms tests using Table 6 19 Table 6 19 Sine Wave Flatness Test DDS Output at 5 V 3152B Sine Frequenc Error Limits Oscilloscope Reading 6 0 2 Divisions __ _ J 10 MHz 6 0 3 Divisions p HE ae od 50 MHz 6 0 6 Divisions 4 Change amplitude to 10 V and adjust the vertical controls of the Oscilloscope to get 6 division of display Perform sine wave flatness DAC waveforms tests using Table 6 20 EADS North America Test and Services Performance Checks 6 11 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A Table 6 20 Sine Wave Flatness Test DDS Output at 10 V 3152B Sine Frequency Error Limits Oscilloscope Reading 6 0 3 Divisions o Z 10 MHz 640 3 Divisions 50 MHz 640 9 Divisions i This tests the operation of the trigger circuit including tests for the Trigger Operational triggered gated and counted burst run modes It also tests the Characteristics operation of the triggered advance options the delayed trigger the re trigger functions as well as the trigger input level and slope sensitivity Trigger Gate and Equipment Oscilloscope function generator counter Burst ZE Preparation Characteristics 1 Configure the Oscilloscope as foll
255. efault Description MASTer Discrete MAST Programs a specific 3152B in a multi instrument system as the master instrument Note that only one instrument can be designated as master while all other instruments must be programmed as slaves SLAVe Discrete Programs a 3152B in a multi instrument system as a slave instrument Note that multiple instruments can be designated as slaves but only one instrument can be EADS North America Test and Services Programming Reference 5 25 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Response Publication No 980935 Rev A designated as master The 3152B returns MAST or SLAV depending on the current instrument coupling mode assignment INSTrument COUPle DELay lt delay gt HS Syntax 0003A lt float gt Description Programs the delay time between the master and slave instruments The waveform start on the slave unit is delayed with respect to the start of the master Parameters Name Range Type lt delay gt 0 to 20 Numeric Response Default 0 Description Sets the waveform start delay between instruments in units of seconds Instrument 1 is always the master and reference channel Instruments 2 to n are delayed with respect to instrument 1 Note that this parameter operates in conjunction with continuous run mode and only when multiple instruments are synchronized The 3152B returns the current
256. eform Ctrl O menu item lets you choose a previously saved waveform file and load it to the waveform graph This function can also import waveform files of various types to the Wave Composer The Open Waveform menu function can import ASCII CSV comma delimited text PRN space delimited text 0 LeCroy binary format and others The Open dialog box in Figure 4 31 shows the various file extensions that can be opened into the Wave Composer environment The file that is opened is automatically converted to the binary wav format Save Waveform The Save Waveform Ctrl S menu item lets you store the active waveform as a binary file with a wav extension If this is the first time you save your waveform the Save Waveform As command will be invoked automatically letting you select the name location and format for the waveform file Save Waveform As Use the Save Waveform As menu item the first time you save EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual Edit Menu EADS North America Test and Services ArbConnection 4 41 lt Look in 03 Example Waves o et Fee inverted Gaus Mixed Waveforms Files of type Binary way your waveform It will let you select a name location and format for your waveform file Print Lets you print the active w
257. ege 4 77 Figure 4 60 Parameters Ta E 4 78 Figure 4 61 Expanded Parameters Options Dialog Bon 4 78 Figure 4 62 3D Vertical TT 4 80 Figure 4 63 3D Waveform RE EE 4 81 Figure 4 64 3D Chirp Design Example ssssesssssrsnsssrrrernrrsssrrrnrrtrnnntsrtrrssttrnnnrrntnnnsrrrnnertnn rennene 4 82 Figure 4 65 Command RE EE 4 83 Figure 4 66 Log File le 4 84 Figure 5 1 Definite Length Arbitrary Block Data Format 5 53 Figure 5 2 3152B 16 bit Waveform Data Point Hepnresentaton 5 54 Figure 5 3 3152A 12 bit Waveform Data Point Hepnresentaton 5 54 Figure 5 4 Segment Address and Size Example AAA 5 57 Figure 5 5 64 bit Sequence Table Download Fomat cesses teense eeneeeeeneeeeeeeeeenaeeeneeene 5 67 Figure 5 7 The SCPI Status WOO Lav snr 5 119 Figure 7 1 Enter Password Dialog Re EE 7 3 Figure 7 2 Calibration Panel E 7 4 Figure 7 3 Firmware Revision Screen Varese 7 31 Figure 7 4 Firmware Updater Opening Gcreen EEN 7 32 Figure 7 5 EuGH 7 33 Figure 7 6 Ready to Click the Update Button AANEREN 7 33 Figure TL Downloadi PORS eege 7 34 Figure 7 8 Successful Firmware Update Lunsgusunjeddnteienteeaanedmnngmbubenssnid 7 34 xiv EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual List of Tables Table 2 1 Valid and Invalid IP Addresses for Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 muvrunnnvvvrarnnvrvrnrnnevernnnnr 2 5 Ta
258. elects the phase shift keying PSK The shift sequence is created in a data table that can hold up to 4 000 shift steps The following Operation 3 29 Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Modulation Parameters 3 30 Operation moa type fhop mod type ahop mod type 3d Publication No 980935 Rev A parameters control PSK modulation shifted phase baud shift data array and marker placement This selects the frequency hop modulation The frequency hop sequence is created in a data table that can hold up to 5 000 frequency hops The following parameters control frequency hop modulation dwell mode dwell time frequency data list and marker placement This selects the amplitude hop modulation The amplitude hop sequence is created in a data table that can hold up to 5 000 amplitude hops The following parameters control amplitude hop modulation dwell mode dwell time amplitude data list and marker placement This selects 3D modulation This is a special mode that modulates frequency amplitude and phase simultaneously You may set the modulation profile externally through applications such as ArbConnection The previous section details the modulation schemes and lists the parameters that control the modulating signals A complete listing of the modulation control parameters is given in the Programming Reference in this manual To program the sweep parameters use the following com
259. els screen If you made changes to your waveform since it was last saved make sure to Save your work before you use this command The Wave menu lets you create waveforms on the waveform graph The Wave menu has a library of 6 waveforms Sine Triangle Square Exponent Pulse and Noise It also lets you create waveforms using an Equation editor Information how to create waveforms using the Wave menu is given below Creating Waveforms From the Built in Library You can create any waveform from the built in library using the Wave menu Clicking on one of the Wave options will open a dialog box An example of the Sine waveform dialog box is shown in Figure 4 54 This dialog box is representative of the rest of the waveforms so other waveforms will not be described EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A Creating Sine Waveforms Use the following procedure to create sine waveforms from the built in library Click on Wave then sine The dialog box shown in Figure 4 54 appears You can now start programming parameters that are available in this box Start Point Anchor Defines the first point where the created wave starts Note that if you change the start point the left anchor automatically adjusts itself to the selected start point The example shows start point set at point 200 End Point A
260. ements 1 Computer Pentium III or better Windows 2000 XP Vista or higher Screen resolution of at least 1024 x 768 pixels Pointing device mouse or trackball St Sr Ze National Instruments VISA version 2 6 or higher or equivalent Installing Before you install ArbConnection make sure that there is at least ArbConnection 10 megabytes of available space on your hard disk Installation of AroConnection requires the visa32 dll runtime engine You may download the latest version of this file from National Instruments web site www ni com After downloading this file move it to your Windows system folder Then run the setup exe file on the ArbConnection installation CD The installation program installs AroConnection on a logical drive of your choice the default is drive C It automatically creates a new EADS North America Test and Services ArbConnection 4 1 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A folder and copies the files that are required to run the program Then it creates a workgroup and icons to start ArbConnection Startup amp Invoke ArbConnection by double clicking the icon on the desktop If z you cannot find the icon on your desktop click on Start gt Programs Communication gt ArbConnection The Startup amp Communication Options dialog Options box displays a
261. emulation disabled note that some of the legacy emulation features will no longer be available until legacy emulation mode FORM INST LEG is restored A CAUTION Due to some differences in waveform resolution and size waveforms can not be shared across the legacy and modern options Therefore using the FORM INST LEG MOD command is not recommended before the consequences to your application are understood In general the legacy 3152B mode modifies modern 3152B performance in the following major areas e Maximum sample clock frequency is reduced to 100 MS s e Waveform interlace is set to 2 e Minimum waveform length is set to 10 and e Vertical resolution of arbitrary waveforms is reduced to 12 bits If you purchase the 3152B you most likely want to use 3152A legacy code and therefore the instrument defaults to legacy 3152A compatible mode with the above limitations built into the code The 3100M 3152B and the 3100R 3152B versions default to a different set of values to allow full performance of the generator The commands needed to use the full performance of the 3152B are summarized in Table 5 2 EADS North America Test and Services Programming Reference 5 7 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual 3152B Legacy Commands Table 5 1 3152B SCPI Command Summary for 3152A Emulation The 3152B is a modern and updated version of the Model 31
262. en If you have not saved your work the table setting will be lost EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual Sequence Table As was explained in the above the waveform memory can be divided into smaller segments and up to 16 k segments can be defined and used as individual arbitrary waveforms Having a limited size of waveform memory can for some applications pose a limitation however if sections of the waveform are repetitive one may use the sequence generator to take these segments and replay them as part of the complete waveform without losing valuable memory space and without scarifying waveform coherence and integrity The tool for combining repetitive and multiple segments in one long waveform is called Sequence Generator and ArbConnection has a special dialog box where sequences are designed This tool is called Sequence Table Using the Sequence table you can use waveforms that you already downloaded to the 3152B from the Segment table link and loop in random order to create one long and complex waveform that combines the individual memory segments Waveform studio R Seg Loops Adv S 1 2 50 0 0 2 S 4 1 1 1200 0 0 _ te File name _Lenath 1 ee CA Awav1 Bbitipulse wav 1024 Mapped CA AwavlBbitisind wav 1024 1024 Mapped CA M
263. ency The start and stop frequencies may be programmed freely throughout the frequency range of the instrument Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt start_freq gt 10e 3to Numeric 10e3 Programs the sweep start frequency Sweep start is 100e6 programmed in units of Hz Response The 3152B returns the current sweep start frequency value EADS North America Test and Services Programming Reference 5 79 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A SWEep FREQuency STOP lt stop freq gt HS Syntax 1611A lt float gt Description This specifies the sweep stop frequency The 3152B normally sweeps from the start to the stop frequency however if the sweep direction is reversed the 3152B will sweep from the stop to the start frequency The start and stop frequencies may be programmed freely throughout the frequency range of the instrument Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt stop freg gt 10e 3 to Numeric 1e6 Programs the sweep stop frequency Sweep stop is SR 100e6 programmed in units of Hz Response The 3152B returns the current sweep stop frequency value SWEep FREQuency RASTer lt scik freq gt HS Syntax 1612A lt float gt Description This programs the sample clock frequency for the swept waveform Program this parameter only if you fully understand the effect on the wavefo
264. ency Discrete FREQ PERiod Discrete 5 100 Programming Reference Description Will select the frequency measurement function Frequency is measured on continuous signal only The result of the frequency measurement has gate dependent resolution The 3152B displays 7 digits of frequency reading in one second of gate time If the gate time is decreased the number of displayed digits decreases proportionally to the gate time interval Reduce the gate time when you want to accelerate the reading process however always make sure that the period of the signal is smaller than the gate time setting Will select the period measurement function Period can be measured on either continuous or non repetitive signals Since the period of the signal is directly proportional to the gating time the number of displayed digits decreases proportionally to the period of the signal If you need to have more resolution and you signal is repetitive use the period averaged measurement function The best resolution in period measurements is 100 ns EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual APERiod Discrete Will select the period averaged measurement function Period averaged can be measured continuous signals only In fact this is the inverse function of frequency and therefore gate time determines the resolut
265. enorrnnnonnnrrnnnnnnnvnnnnrnnnrnnnnrrnnrnnnserrrrnnesernnrrnnesennnn 6 5 Table 6 5 Amplitude Accuracy DDS output ee 6 5 Table 6 6 Offset Accuracy DAC Output at 20 my 6 6 Table 6 7 Offset Accuracy DAC Output at EN 6 6 Table 6 8 Offset Accuracy DAC Output at IN 6 6 Table 6 9 Offset Accuracy DDS Output at DV 6 7 Table 6 10 Offset Accuracy DDS Output at 1 V u u uuuememaimeienmemsmnnemenisiv vee 6 7 Table 6 11 Square Wave Characteristics atpN 6 8 Table 6 12 Sine Wave Distortion DAC Output Tests 6 8 Table 6 13 Sine Wave Spectral Purity DAC Output Test at DN 6 9 Table 6 14 Sine Wave Spectral Purity DAC Output Test at IDN 6 9 Table 6 15 Sine Wave Spectral Purity DDS Output Tests at BN 6 10 Table 6 16 Sine Wave Spectral Purity DDS Output Tests at IDN 6 10 Table 6 17 Sine Wave Flatness DAC Output Test at DN 6 10 Table 6 18 Sine Wave Flatness DAC Output Test at IDN 6 11 Table 6 19 Sine Wave Flatness Test DDS Output at DN 6 11 Table 6 20 Sine Wave Flatness Test DDS Output at IDN 6 12 Table 6 21 Trigger Gate and Burst Characteristics rrrrrrrrnnnrrnnrrrrrrrrrnnnnrrrrennnrrrrrrrrrnnnnnnnnnn 6 12 Table 6 22 Trigger Delay EE 6 13 Table 6 23 Re Trigger Delay Tess nummenhet seer hnnekukerte 6 14 Table 6 24 Trigger Source EE 6 16 Table 6 25 PLL Tests Frequent y E 6 22 Table 6 26 PLL Tests Phase Offset 6 23 Table 6 27 PLL Tests PM Phase O
266. ent instrument couple path assignment INSTrument COUPle SLAVe DELete LAN address gt HS Syntax 00040 lt string gt Description This command will delete a designated slave instrument from a synchronized multi instrument system list This command is associated with LAN operation only Parameters Name Type Default Description lt LAN_address gt String Will remove a designated instrument specified by IP address from a synchronized multi instrument system list Contact your IT department if you are not sure how to connect to a LAN address INSTrument COUPle SLAVe INSert lt 3152B gt lt LAN_ address gt HS Syntax 00051 lt 3152B string gt Description This command will add a designated slave instrument to a synchronized multi instrument system list This command is associated with LAN operation only Parameters Name Type Default Description lt 3152B gt lt LAN_address gt String Specifying the correct model number is crucial for correct assignment of the instrument designator and for selection of the correct instrument number for the INST SEL command INSTrument COUPIe STATe OFF ON 0 1 HS Syntax 0006A lt 0 1 gt Description This command will turn the 3152B coupled state on and off Parameters Range Type Default Description 0 1 Discrete 0 Turns coupled mode on and off Note that this command must be applied to the master instrument only otherwise slave instruments will not couple To select the ma
267. ents Setup 56 Setup 57 3152B User Manual The pulse response adjustments ensure that rise and fall times as well as aberrations are within the specified range Use this procedure if you suspect that the pulse response is an issue Note that setups 56 and 57 are marked as a factory adjustment and therefore they are normally not required during normal calibration cycles unless the pulse response of the output stage has drifted and does not meet the published specification limits or after a repair has been executed on this circuit Pulse Response Amplifier Out Equipment Oscilloscope BNC to BNC cable 20 dB feedthrough attenuator Preparation 1 Configure the 3152B as follows Function Square Amplitude 1V 2 Connect the 3152B output to the oscilloscope input Set oscilloscope input impedance to 50 Q 3 Set oscilloscope vertical sensitivity to 20 mV 4 Set CAL SETUP40 Adjustment 1 Adjust the vertical trace to 6 divisions 2 Adjust RV1 for best pulse response 4 ns typ 5 aberrations Pulse Response Amplifier In Equipment Oscilloscope BNC to BNC cable 20 dB feedthrough attenuator Preparation 1 Configure the 3152B as follows Function Square Amplitude 6V 2 Connect the 3152B output to the oscilloscope input Use 20 dB feedthrough attenuator at the oscilloscope input 3 Set oscilloscope input impedance to 50 Q 4 Set oscilloscope vertical sensitivity to 0 1 V 5 Set CAL SETUP41 Adjustment 1 Ad
268. equence advance in a sequence There are three conditions for the sequence generator to operate in this mode 1 The 3152B is set to operate in continuous mode 2 The MIX sequence advance mode is selected 3 The mixed mode bits for each sequence step in the SEQ DEF command or sequence table used 0 programs normal advance 1 programs triggered advance Steps with a O MIX bit assigned to them advance automatically to the next step after the specified loops are complete Steps with a 1 assigned to them execute the programmed number of loops and then idle at the last point until a valid trigger signal is received at which point the sequencer advances to the next step The 3152B returns the AUTO TRIG STEP or MIX depending on the current sequence advance mode setting SEQuence SELect lt sequence_ gt HS Syntax lt integer gt Description This command selects the active sequence to be generated by the 3152B when in sequenced mode By selecting the active sequence successive SEQ commands will affect the selected sequence only Parameters Name Range Type Default lt sequence_ gt 11010 Numeric 1 integer only Response The 3152B returns the active sequence number 5 68 Programming Reference Description Selects the active sequence number EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com
269. er than the period of the waveform trig sour ttlt lt n 1 gt This selects and activates one or more of the VXIbus backplane triggers TTLTrgO through TTLTrg7 as the active source for trigger events If more than one input is activated the instrument will accept trigger events from all active trigger lines Note that if one of the lines is designated as an output it cannot be used as an active source at the same time trig sour bus This selects the software trigger as the active source for trigger events The Trigger Level command sets the threshold level for the trigger input connector only The trigger level is adjustable from 10 V to 10 V using the following command Trig lev lt value gt This programs the trigger level threshold for signals that are applied to the front panel TRIG IN connector The default value is 1 6 V which is appropriate for TTL signals The Trigger Slope command selects between positive and negative edge triggering The inputs that will be affected by this Trigger Slope command are Front panel TRIG IN connector TTLTrg lines 0 through 7 and ECLTrg line 0 Use the following command to select slope sensitivity for trigger events trig slop pos This sets the 3152B to respond to positive going transitions only Positive transitions must cross the trigger level threshold to trigger a response trig slop neg This sets the 3152B to respond to negative going transitions only Negative transitions must
270. erated from digital data points which are stored in memory Each data point waveform sample has a vertical resolution of 16 bits 65 536 levels Another way to express this is that each sample has an amplitude resolution of one part in 65 536 For legacy emulation 12 bit waveform data is converted into 16 bit data with a four position shift The standard 3152B has a waveform memory capacity of 1M points 4 M is available as an option in some configurations Each point has a unique address The address of the first point is zero and the address of the last point depends upon the waveform memory size If a waveform does not require the entire waveform memory then you may divide the memory into smaller segments each of which may store a separate waveform When the instrument is set to output arbitrary waveforms the clock samples the data points one at a time starting with address 0 and continuing to the last data point of the waveform The rate at which each sample is retrieved is defined as the sample clock rate The 3152B provides programmable sample clock rates from 100 mS s to 250 MS s Unlike waveforms contained in the built in library arbitrary waveforms must first be downloaded into waveform memory One of the easiest ways to calculate the waveform samples is to use ArbConnection It provides an on screen editor called Wave Composer for creating and editing waveforms Figure 3 1 shows a complex waveform from the Wave Composer ed
271. erefore if you are not sure of the direction set the adjustment to 128 and add or subtract from this value If you have reached 1 or 256 and were not able to calibrate the range there is either a problem with the way you measure the parameter or possibly there is a problem with the instrument In either case do not leave any adjustment in its extreme setting but center the adjustment and contact your nearest service center for clarifications and support Note that in the following procedures although configuration of the 3152B is done automatically some of the configurations are shown for reference only There is no requirement to change the configuration of the 3152B during the remote adjustment procedure except in places where specifically noted The VCO controls the accuracy and linearity of the sample clock generator Correct operation of the VCO circuit ensures the accuracy of the frequency path Use this procedure if you suspect that there is a frequency linearity and or accuracy issue The VCO Adjustment is not required for field calibration 160 MHz SCLK Equipment DMM Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function DCV Range 1V 2 Configure the 3152B as follows SCLK 160 MHz 3 Connect the DMM probes between R107 and ground Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETUP 50 for a DMM reading of 0 V 100 mV 180 MHz SCLK Equipment DMM Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows EADS North America Test and Services Adjus
272. error If more than 1 parameter is associated with a command use a comma or commas to separate parameters Once again commas and parameters may not be offset by spaces For example the HS command 0300C1e6 5 0 is valid The HS command 0300C 1e6 5 0 is incorrect and will generate an error As with SCPI multiple HS commands may be sent together if they are separated a semicolon or semicolons Once again 0100A1 0200A1 is valid and 0100A1 0200A1 is incorrect and will generate an error As with SCPI set type HS commands may be terminated with a question mark instead of parameters to query or get a setting from the instrument For example you can query the frequency amplitude and offset settings of the 3152A by sending the query 0300C At the end of an HS command string terminate the string with the a character OxA EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A Legacy vs Modern Command Set 3152B User Manual For users of the 3151B or 3152B models the instrument defaults to legacy 3152A compatible mode The SCPI commands that are shown in Table 5 1 list the legacy 3152A command set and indicate where the 3152B command differs Notice however that the FORM INST MOD command can be used to enable the additional functionality that was built into the new 3152B With
273. escription 0 1 Discrete 1 Toggles the keep alive mode on and off When on the 2572 constantly checks for smooth LAN connection at intervals programmed by the syst keep time command The LAN will be probed as many times as programmed by syst keep prob parameter to check if there is an interruption in the LAN communication When communication fails the 3152B reverts automatically to local front panel operation Response The 3152B returns 0 or 1 depending on the current keep alive setting SYSTem KEEPalive TIMEout lt time out gt HS Syntax 0174A lt float gt Description Programs the keep alive time out The keep alive mode assures that LAN connection remains uninterrupted throughout the duration of the LAN interfacing Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt time out gt 210300 Numeric 45 Programs the keep alive time out in units of seconds EADS North America Test and Services Programming Reference 5 109 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A The time out period is initiated when the LAN is idle for more than the time out period The LAN will be probed as many times as programmed by syst keep prob parameter to check if there is an interruption in the LAN communication When communication fails the 3152B reverts automatically to local front panel operation Response The 3152B returns the c
274. ew an image of your equation or use the OK button to place your waveform on the waveform screen and to leave the dialog box on the screen The Default button restores the parameters in the equation editor to their original factory default values The Cancel button will remove the dialog box from the screen and will discard of any waveforms that you previewed with your Equation Editor EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual Writing Equations Equation Conventions EADS North America Test and Services ArbConnection 4 49 The Equation Editor lets you process mathematical expressions and convert them into waveform coordinates As you probably already know waveforms are made of vertical samples The number of samples on your waveform is determined by the wavelength parameter For example if you have 1024 horizontal points your equation will be computed along 1024 points as a function of the vertical scale Each vertical sample is computed separately and placed along the horizontal axis The points are graphically connected to form a uniform and continuous waveform shape however if you zoom in on a waveform line you ll see that the points are connected like a staircase In reality the 3152B generates its waveforms exactly as shown on the screen but if the waveform has many horizontal points
275. extended ASCII codes to be transmitted in a message As an example the next command will download an arbitrary block of data of 1024 points TRACe 42048 lt binary_block gt This command causes the transfer of 2048 bytes of data 1024 waveform points into the active memory segment The lt header gt is interpreted this way e The ASCII ft 23 designates the start of the binary data block e 4 designates the number of digits that follow 2048 is the even number of bytes to follow The generator accepts binary data as 16 bit integers which are sent in two byte words Therefore the total number of bytes is always twice the number of data points in the waveform For example 20000 bytes are required to download a waveform with 10000 points The IEEE STD 488 2 definition of Definite Length Arbitrary Block Data format is demonstrated in Figure 5 1 oS S AGCH digit ASCII digit Start of Data Block Number of Digits to Follow 2 Bytes per Byte Count Data Point 2 x Number of Points low byte binary high byte binary Figure 5 1 Definite Length Arbitrary Block Data Format Transfer of definite length arbitrary block data must terminate with the EOI bit set This way carriage return CR ODH and line feed LF OAH characters can be used as waveform data points and will not cause unexpected termination of the arbitrary block data e lt binary block gt Waveform data The waveform data is made of 16 b
276. ey would be programmed for the standard waveform generator Use the following commands to select one of the half cycle waveforms half shap sin Selects the sine waveform to be generated using the half cycle function half shap tri Selects the triangular waveform to be generated using the half cycle function half shap squ Selects the square waveform to be generated using the half cycle function After you select the function and waveform you may program other parameters to adjust the waveform specifically for your application You may adjust the start phase for the sine and triangular waveforms or the duty cycle for the square waveform and you may program the amount of delay between the half cycles Chapter 5 contains programming references that will allow you to program all of the half cycle parameters You may use the 3152B as a counter timer instrument When using this function you may select the measurement function gate time and trigger level and then hold the measurement until you require a reading The reading is then taken and passed to the host computer for processing The 3152B cannot perform as a counter timer and generate waveforms at the same time When placed in counter timer mode all waveform patterns are purged from the waveform memory and the 3152B can be used only for measurements The counter timer function provides a means of measuring frequency and timing characteristics of external signals Use the comm
277. f memory usage and slope smoothness Limit Increments Lets you manually control how many waveform points are used in transitions After you complete setting the Pulse Editor options click on OK The prime tool for building pulse patterns on the Pulse Composer screen is the Pulse Editor To invoke the Pulse Editor click on the Pulse Editor icon on the Pulse Composer toolbar and the editor shown in Figure 4 46 appears Refer to this figure for the following descriptions EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual BER Set run man Se Z c om m Section Structure Time Cumulative Level interval Time DC Intervals 1 L T ime Level Points Fr Pulse Train Design Format Aopen risen Delete Delete All Undo Delete Al Undo i Section Properties Design Units V ms Section Start O ms Repeat fi only Duration x R Oms Pulse currently not specified Figure 4 50 Using the Pulse Editor The Pulse Editor has four groups Section Structure Pulse Train Design Format Section Properties and control buttons These groups are described below Pulse Train Design Format There are two methods or formats that can be use for designing the pulse shape DC Intervals and Time Level Points The design format is unique for the current
278. f the period of the sample clock This option is useful for synchronizing two point waveforms on an oscilloscope sine and square waveforms above 10 MHz Generates a pulse each time a segment waveform is generated The pulse width is specified in points using the OUTP SYNC WIDTh command This command is a useful alternative to the BIT sync source especially when the bit pulse is too narrow It is also helpful when using the 3152B to emulate the sync pulse of another instrument that it is replacing in a test system Generates a SYNC signal which remains low when the main output level is below 0 V and shifts to high when the output signal becomes greater than 0 V The SYNC signal must be wide enough for other devices to detect but not so wide that it adversely affects timing in faster SYNC Position applications To accommodate a wide variety of situations the and Width SYNC pulse width is programmable The programmed start point for the SYNC signal is in effect for all of 3 4 Operation EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual the SYNC types except ZERO and HCL The SYNC width parameter is in effect only when the pulse type is selected Use the following procedure to program SYNC position and width outp sync sour puls Selects pulse as the sync source In this mode you
279. ffset cccccccccceceeceeseeseeeeeeeeeeaeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeteseanaeaens 6 24 Table 6 28 Frequency Measurement Accuracy ccccceeeeeee eee eennaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeennennaaaeees 6 36 Table 6 29 Period Measurement ACCUIaCY eecceecccceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeneneeeeeeeeeneaeeeeeeeeneneeseeneaeeees 6 36 EADS North America Test and Services XV Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A Table 6 30 Pulse Width Measurement ACcuracy 6 37 Table 7 1 Recommended Calibration for Adjustments sssssessseeessrrrseernrerernerssrrrnneernnnnsrnrnnsene 7 2 xvi EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A DOCUMENT CHANGE HISTORY 3152B User Manual Revision Date Description of Change A 1 22 09 Document Control Release EADS North America Test and Services xvii Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A This page was intentionally left blank xviii EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No
280. for burst mode Once triggered the 3152B outputs a series of output waveforms that ends when the burst counter reaches the specified count Timer The Timer button lets you set the trigger period of the free running internal trigger generator The internal trigger timer is programmed in units of seconds Note that the internal trigger generator function is available in Pulse mode only Other output functions use the re trigger generator which has a meaning different from that of the internal trigger period Information on the Re trigger mode is given in Chapter 3 Trigger Level Programs the trigger level parameter Depending on the slope setting the 3152B will be triggered to output waveforms when the trigger level threshold has been crossed Manual Trigger The TRIG button operates only in conjunction with the BUS mode Press the TRIG button to trigger the instrument as if an external trigger has been applied The Standard Waveforms Panel Figure 4 7 is accessible after you click on the Standard button in the Panels bar The Standard Waveform Panel groups allow adjustment of channel control parameters 10 MHz reference and waveforms The functional groups in the Standard Waveforms panel are described below General Parameters The General Parameters group has controls for Amplitude and Offset The values you set in this panel may be duplicated on other panels so whenever you change amplitude and offset in the EADS North America
281. for the pulse shape Note that the same level is retained for the second pulse in the double pulse mode Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt high gt 7 992 to 8 Numeric 5 Sets the pulse high level in units of Volts Note that the high level setting must be higher than the low level setting Also note that high to low level value must be equal or larger than 8 mV Response The 3152B returns the current low level value in unit of Volts DPULse LEVel LOW lt low gt HS Syntax 0148A lt float gt Description Programs the low level for the pulse shape Note that the same level is retained for the second pulse in the double pulse mode Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt low gt 8 to 7 992 Numeric 0 Sets the pulse low level in units of Volts Note that the low level setting must be smaller than the high level setting Also note that low to high level value must be equal or larger than 8 mV Response The 3152B returns the current high level value in unit of Volts EADS North America Test and Services Programming Reference 5 95 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A DPULse HIGH lt high gt HS Syntax 0146A lt float gt Description Programs the interval the pulse will dwell on the high level value Although they may sound similar the high time and pulse width are sig
282. form memory differs from downloading arbitrary waveform data Arbitrary waveform data is for the time domain therefore every point programs an amplitude level On the other hand FM modulating waveform data programs frequency domain therefore every point sets different sample clock frequency FM DATA 3100 lt binary_block gt This command causes the transfer of 10 bytes of data to the arbitrary FM waveform memory The lt header gt is interpreted this way e The ASCII 23 designates the start of the binary data block e 3 designates the number of digits that follow e 100 is the number of bytes to follow This number must divide by 4 The generator accepts binary data as 32 bit integers which are sent in five byte words Therefore the total number of bytes is always three times the number of arbitrary FM waveform points For example 100 bytes are required to download 20 arbitrary FM waveform points The IEEE STD 488 2 definition of Definite Length Arbitrary Block Data format is demonstrated in Figure 5 1 refer to the TRACe subsystem The transfer of definite length arbitrary block data must terminate with the EOI bit set This way carriage return CR OdH and line feed LF OaH characters can be used as sequence data and will not cause unexpected termination of the arbitrary block data Downloading data to the arbitrary FM waveform memory is very different than loading arbitrary waveform data Waveform data programs ampli
283. forms e Sine and square waveforms to 100 MHz and other waveforms to over 10 MHz e Frequency hopping and sweeping e Modulated waveforms AM ASK FM FSK and PSK e 14 digit sample clock frequency setting limited by 1 uS s e Extremely low phase noise e PLL function that automatically locks to external signals e Clock stability of 1ppm e 16 bit vertical resolution 10 mVp p to 16Vp p into 50Q 20 mVp p to 16 Vp p into high impedance load e 1 M point memory depth Option for 4 M points in the 3100M 3152B and 3100R 3152B configurations Ultra fast waveform downloading e Trigger delay and period controlled auto re trigger e Built in counter timer Figure 1 1 Racal Instruments 3152B EADS North America Test and Services Introduction 1 3 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual ArbConnection Feature Highlights Publication No 980935 Rev A ArbConnection provided with the 3152B has the following features Virtual control panels Arbitrary waveform composer Complex pulse composer Serial data and FM composers Detailed virtual control panels for all functions and modes Waveform modulation and pulse composers for designing editing and downloading complex waveforms Automatic detection of active instruments Equation editor to generate waveforms from equations SCPI command and response editor simulates ATE operation Transla
284. g 018508 RST v 14200 SRE 1 to 255 1 v 1503A SRE v 15038 STB v 15088 TRG v 11000 TST v 15000 CLS HS Syntax 15000 Description Use this command to clear the Status Byte summary register error register and all event registers This command has no effect on parameter settings EADS North America Test and Services Programming Reference 5 113 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A ESE lt enable_bits gt HS Syntax 1501A lt n gt Description Use this command to enable bits in the Standard Event enable register The selected bits are then reported to the status byte Information on the standard event register is given in the following Parameters Name Range Default Description lt enable bits gt 0 255 0 Programs the event that will cause the register to report a problem Setting of 0 disables this feature ESE HS Syntax 1501A Description Use this command to query the programmed bits in the Standard Event enable register Response The generator returns a decimal value in the range of 0 to 255 which corresponds to the binary weighted sum of all bits set in the register ESR HS Syntax 1504 Description Use this command to query the response of the Standard Event enable register Information on the standard event register is given in the following Response The generator re
285. g lt n gt ECLTrg 0 LBUS lt n gt EXT M 0930A ADJust 180 to 180 0 M 0900A FINe 36 to 36 0 M 0910A PHASe1 LOCK 0FF ONJO 1X HS Syntax 0820A lt 0 1 gt Description This command will turn the backplane synchronization sequence on and off This command requires that another 3152B is plugged in the same chassis The location of the two instruments is not critical for them to synchronize Using this synchronization method the sample clock is placed on the ECLTrg0 line and the synchronization signal is place on ECLTrg0 and therefore if you intend to use this synchronization method make sure that these two backplane lines are not used by other modules Parameters Range Type Default Description 0 1 Discrete 0 Turns the backplane synchronization on and off Response The 3152B returns 0 or 1 depending on the current backplane synchronization setting PHASe1 ADJust lt phase gt HS Syntax 0810A lt float gt Description Programs the phase offset between the master and the slave units where the master is the reference waveform and the phase of the slave instruments are shifted in reference to the master instrument Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt phase gt Oto 360 Numeric 0 Programs the phase offset between the slave and the master instrument The phase is programmed in units of degrees Note however that the phase offset resolution depends on the number of points that create the wavefo
286. g the name Noise wav Step 3 Write and compute the original equation Amplitude p Sine wav sin omg p 5 Noise wav 10 Press Preview and Accept and the waveform graph should look like Figure 4 42 Fle E e Download About r Anchor Waveform Amplitude p Level Adjuster S ah o M 32767 Preview De BS SSM EK sum Gen feel g End pts 1023 Min 3208 C Original Scale br 1023 L Anchor 0 Equation History Cancel Amplitude p Insert Wave Clear Open Se ancel Je sine wav sin omg p 5 c Noise wav 10 Aliases gt gt Up Mu ey Wa A 4 IW Vertical Scale 64kPts SkPis Div Horizontal Scale 1kPts 100e 3kPts Div Figure 4 42 Combining Waveforms into Equations 4 56 ArbConnection EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual The Pulse Composer The Pulse Composer Menu bar File Menu EADS North America Test and Services ArbConnection 4 57 The Pulse Composer is a tool for creating and editing pulses without the need to think about sample clock number of points and complex equations Pulses are created on the screen simply and efficiently in a special dialog box by typing in the width and level or by using the rubber band method to place straight line segments with the exact amplitude a
287. gger delay time value in sample clock cycles TRIGger DELay OFF ON 0 1 HS Syntax 0188A lt 0 1 gt Description Use this command to toggle the delayed trigger feature The trigger delay command affects the generator only after it has been programmed to operate in interrupted run mode Set the 3152B to interrupted run mode using the INIT CONT OFF command Range Type Default Description 0 1 Discrete 0 Toggles delayed trigger mode Response The 3152B returns 0 or 1 depending on the selected option TRIGger DELay Time lt time gt HS Syntax 0156A lt float gt Description The trigger delay time parameter defines the time that elapses between the receipt of a valid trigger signal until the initiation of the first output waveform Trigger delay can be turned off and on using the TRIG DEL lt 0 1 gt command The trigger delay time command affects the generator only after it has been programmed to operate in interrupted run mode Modify the 3152B to interrupted run mode using the INIT CONT OFF command Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt time gt 100e 9 to 20 Numeric 100e 9 Programs the trigger delay time Programming resolution is 20 ns across the range Response The 3152B returns the current trigger delay time value TRIGger GATE MODE LEVel TRANsition HS Syntax 0157A lt 0 1 gt Description Toggles the 3152B between gating on start and stop pulses TRANsition or on threshold crossings L
288. gger level command affects the generator when it is an in interrupted run mode which can be selected using the INIT CONT OFF command Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt level gt 10 to 10 Numeric 0 Programs the trigger threshold The value affects the front panel input only Response The 3152B returns the current trigger threshold value TRIGger SOURce ADVance EXTernal INTernal TTLTrg lt n gt ECLT1 BUS HS Syntax 1140A lt 4 3 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 gt Description This selects the trigger source forthe 3152B The source advance command affects the generator only after it has been programmed to operate in an interrupted run mode which can be selected using the INIT CONT OFF command Parameters Name Type Default Description EXTernal Discrete EXT Selects the front panel TRIG IN input as the trigger source INTernal Discrete Activates the built in internal trigger generator BUS and external triggers are ignored The period of the internal EADS North America Test and Services Programming Reference 5 41 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A trigger is programmable and can be used to replace an external trigger source TTLTrg lt 0 to 7 gt Discrete Selects a backplane trigger line as the source for the trigger input To avoid hardware conflicts make sure that no more than one instru
289. gnal causes the sequence to advance to the next step This parameter is not compatible with legacy 3152A code For 3152B programming only a 1 programs the sync bit present at a specific sequence step This feature is useful for applications requiring multiple sync bits in a single sequence Note that the normal sync output source during sequence mode is LCOM I NOTE Although trigger signals are used to advance mixed mode mixed mode operates in continuous mode only The lt mode gt parameter will be ignored if you use TRIG as advance mode for the sequence table Q TIP Every time you use the SEQ DEF command while the 3152B is in sequenced operating mode the instrument attempts to rebuild the sequence table and restart the sequence Therefore sending this command in sequenced mode slows down execution of test programs Using the SEQ DEF command while in FIX or USER mode decreases execution time EADS North America Test and Services Programming Reference 5 69 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A SEQuence DELete lt sequence_ gt HS Syntax 13201 lt integer gt Description This command deletes a step in the selected sequence table Before using this command be sure that the correct sequence for deleting is selected Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt sequence_ gt 1 to 4096 Numeri
290. gnal is available at the input In hold mode the counter is armed to receive signal at the trigger input When signal is sensed the gate to the counter opens for duration as programmed with the Gate Time parameter processes the result displays and holds the reading until the next Reset Arm command To display and modify the gate time parameter click on the Gate Time LED and modify the gate time per your requirements Gate time rage is from 100 us to 1 s Normal counter timer readings are displayed when the Reading LED is selected The Pulse Generator panel Figure 4 21 contains controls that select the pulse function and adjusts the pulse parameters The pulses are generated digitally suing the arbitrary waveform memory and digital computation and therefore there are some limitations to the minimum to maximum range that must be observed The pulse design limitations are given in Appendix A The various parameters that control the digital pulse generator features are described below EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual Period GG X Instrument Sync EADS North America Test and Services ArbConnection 4 31 Pulse Parameters Figure 4 21 Digital Pulse Generator Panel State The State Group has a control to enable or disable the pulse generator function Note that when the
291. grammed to a secure location in the flash memory and cannot be modified by the user Response The generator will return its model number 3152B SYSTem INFormation SERial HS Syntax 0177A Description EADS North America Test and Services Programming Reference 5 111 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A Query only This query will interrogate the instrument for its serial number The serial number is programmed to a secure location in the flash memory and cannot be modified by the user Response The generator will return its serial number in a format similar to the following 000000451 10 characters maximum SMEMory WRITe READ HS Syntax 1200A lt 1 2 gt Description Programs read and write switches for the 3152B shared memory block Shared memory transfer is the fastest way to get waveforms into the 3152B In shared memory mode the 3152B s CPU disconnects from the waveform memory and passes access to the VXIbus The internal data bus is connected directly to the VXIbus and data is downloaded into the memory in binary blocks using A24 memory space Byte and bit order are the same as with the Arbitrary Block transfers as described in the Arbitrary Waveform Commands section After the data is loaded into the instrument control is returned to the CPU In shared memory mode the 3152B s memory acts similar
292. gs Dea Start View Publication No 980935 Rev A DoK 0 Apply Download Length SH 10000000001 01010101011000000000000000000000000011111111 Apply 1234567 9 123456789 123456789 123456789 123456749 1234 H 10 20 30 40 Ready General Description Output Waveforms 1 6 Introduction INS Figure 1 5 ArbConnection Serial Data Composer Example This section describes the 3152B general features and performance as well as output functions run modes and functions The 3152B is a digital waveform generator that creates virtually any type of waveform Unlike conventional function and pulse generators the 3152B creates waveforms digitally and stores them in memory A clock generator then clocks the data from memory to a digital to analog converter DAC to convert the digital data to an output waveform Since the waveform memory is volatile its data is lost when you turn off the instrument However you may create as many waveforms as desired on the host computer and quickly download them to the 3152B memory as needed The memory size is large enough for most applications However you may maximize the effective memory capacity by downloading specific waveforms only when they are required For example if one part of your ATE sequence requires a complex waveform that consumes nearly all of the waveform memory you may delete this waveform after that portion of your sequence is completed and then quickly download
293. gs as specified in Table 6 25 Table 6 25 PLL Tests Frequency Function Generator Error Counter Frequency Setting Limits Frequency Pass Fail Reading 500 Hz 1 5 kHz 1 50 kHz 1 500 kHz 1 5 MHz 1 10 MHz 1 PLL Checks Phase Equipment Counter function generator Offset Preparation 1 Configure the function generator as follows Waveform Square Amplitude 2V Output On Frequency As required by the tests 2 Connect the function generator output to the 3152B TRIG PLL IN connector Using a T connector connect the same output to the counter input Channel A Use a 50 Q feedthrough terminator at the 3152B trigger input side 3 Configure the counter as follows Function gt A gt B Input 500 4 Connect the 3152B output to the counter input Channel B 5 Configure the model 3152B as follows Function Mode Arbitrary Wavelength 1000 points Output On PLL On Phase Offset As required by the test Test Procedure 1 Verify counter phase readings as specified in Table 6 26 6 22 Performance Checks EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual Table 6 26 PLL Tests Phase Offset Function Generator 3152B Error Counter Frequency Setting Phase Setting Limits Phase Reading
294. gure 4 38 Using the Equation Editor to Modulate Sine Wavetoms 4 52 Figure 4 39 Using Equation Editor to Add Second Harmonic Disiorton 4 53 Figure 4 40 Using the Equation Editor to Generate Exponentially Decaying Sinewave 4 54 Figure 4 41 Using Equation Editor to Build Amplitude Modulated Signal with Sidebands 4 55 Figure 4 42 Combining Waveforms into Equations ssssesssseessserrneerrretsstrrnnernnrrernrrnserrnnrernene 4 56 Figure 4 43 Pulse Composer SCI E 4 58 Figure 444 PUISE BAG E 4 60 Figure 4 45 Pulse Editor ee ae 4 60 Figure 4 46 Pulse Composer Toolbar iisisiscdingeicteen tier eet engen att Eet 4 61 Figure 4 47 Complete Pulse Train Design 4 62 Figure 4 48 Section 5 of the Pulse Train DeSiQn scccesseceeeencceeseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeseeneeeeeneeees 4 62 Figure 4 49 Selecting Pulse Editor Options AAA 4 63 Figure 4 50 Using the Pulse Editor EE 4 65 Figure 4 51 Building Section 1 of the Pulse Example Au 4 67 Figure 4 52 Building Section 2 of the Pulse Example Au 4 68 Figure 4 53 Building Section 3 of the Pulse Example Au 4 69 Figure 4 54 Building Section 4 of the Pulse Example A 4 70 Figure 4 55 Building Section 5 of the Pulse Example Au 4 71 Figure 4 56 Pulse Editor Download Gummanm 4 72 Figure 4 57 FM Composer Opening Gcreen nner nene 4 73 Figure 4 58 Generating Sine Modulation Using the FM Composer 4 75 Figure 4 59 3D Composer Screen icc scence gie geetee een igeeheh e E
295. h gt 0to Numeric 10 Programs the pulse width parameter in units of percent 99 999 Response The 3152B returns the current width value PULSe TRANsition lt rise gt HS Syntax 0732A lt float gt Description Programs pulse transition from low to high of the standard pulse waveform Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt rise gt 0 to Numeric 10 Programs the pulse rise time parameter in units of 99 999 percent Response The 3152B returns the current rise time value PULSe TRANsition TRAiling lt fall gt HS Syntax 0733A lt float gt Description Programs the pulse transition time from high to low for the standard pulse waveform EADS North America Test and Services Programming Reference 5 47 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt fall gt 0 to Numeric 10 Programs the pulse fall time parameter in units of 99 999 percent Response The 3152B returns the current fall time value for the pulse function RAMP DELay lt delay gt HS Syntax 0740A lt float gt Description Programs ramp start delay for the standard ramp waveform Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt delay gt 0 to 99 99 Numeric 10 Programs the ramp delay parameter in units of percent Response The 3152B returns the current ramp delay value
296. he outp sync wid command ZEROcross Discrete Zero crossing is a special mode where the sync signal remains low as long as the output waveform level is negative below 0 V and changes to high when the output level becomes positive above 0 V INTernal Discrete This type selects the internal generator as the source EXTernal Discrete This type selects the external trigger input as the trigger source An external signal must be connected to the TRIG IN connector for this mode to operate correctly 5 32 Programming Reference EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual Response The 3152B returns BIT LCOM SSYN HCL PULS ZERO INT or EXT depending on the current 3152B trigger source setting OUTPut TTLTrg lt n OFF ON 0 1 gt HS Syntax 0230B lt 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 gt Description The TTLTRG lines can be used to transmit and receive trigger signals between the 3152B and other VXIbus modules Use this command to transmit signals on the backplane trigger lines Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt n gt 0 7 0 1 Integer 1 Designates a specific backplane trigger line as an output and enables or disables it Trigger line used is specified using the outp trig sour command Response The 3152B returns n 0 when a specific backplane trigger line is off or n 1 when a spec
297. he 3152B and to create and download waveforms and control tables to the working memory e Chapter 5 lists all of the commands that control the instrument It also has detailed descriptions of the limits and factory default values of the programmable parameters e Chapters 6 and 7 contain service information that allows you to do performance tests and to calibrate the product e Appendix A lists the 3152B product specifications e Appendix B lists the specifications for the 3201A 3202A signal amplifier modules which are optional and factory installed EADS North America Test and Services Introduction 1 1 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual What s in This Chapter Conventions Used in this Manual Introduction 1 2 Introduction Publication No 980935 Rev A This chapter contains a general and functional description of the Racal Instruments 3152B VXIbus Arbitrary Waveform Generator It also explains the front panel connectors operational modes and all available features However some options available for the 3152B may not be installed in your specific module A complete listing of the available options is included later in this chapter This manual uses the following conventions ei NOTE A note contains information relating to the use of this product A CAUTION A caution contains instructions to avoid damage to the instrument o
298. he Section Properties contains a summary of properties that are unique for the current section Design Units Provides information on the units that are used when you draw the pulse segments These units can be changed in the Pulse Editor options Section Start Provides timing information for the start of the current section If this is the first pulse section the value will always be 0 Subsequent sections will show the start mark equal to the end mark of the previous section Repeat Allows multiplication of pulse segments without the need to re design repetitive parts After you enter a repeat value press the Apply button to lock in the repeat multiplier Duration Displays the time that will lapse from the start of the pulse section to the end The duration shows the total time lapse including the repeated sections Control Buttons The control buttons allow you to append insert or delete one or all index lines The Undo button is useful in cases where an error was made and restoration of the last operation is critical EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual Pulse Example Now that we are familiar with the Pulse Composer and its operation we are ready to start building the first section of the pulse as shown Section 1 in Figure 4 47 Point and click on the New ico
299. he signal period The gate must open for an interval that allows enough transitions to pass through the counter gate If the gate time is too short to measure a signal the gate will open but no results can be obtained 3 Auxiliary functions disable waveform generation When the Counter Timer mode is selected all operations of the waveform generator are stopped and the waveform memory is purged 3 36 Operation EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual Chapter 4 ArbConnection What s in This This chapter explains how to install invoke and use the o ArbConnection application It provides instructions for programming Chapter instrument controls and parameters creating waveforms and downloading waveforms to the 3152B What Is ArbConnection is a utility program that aids in controlling the 3152B ArbConnection from a remote computer It provides three types of functions e Front panel control Through a simulated front panel you can control the 3152B in much the same manner as a bench top instrument e Waveform generation and editing Using drawing tools and equations you may define and edit arbitrary waveforms e Downloading After you define a waveform you may download it to the waveform memory on the 3152B System To use ArbConnection you need the following Requir
300. hese are then optional care must be taken to ensure that optional parameters are consistent with the intention of the associated keywords The vertical bar can be read as or and is used to separate alternative parameter options In addition to the SCPI command set there is an alternative command Alternative set which increased the throughput of the 3152A by a typical factor of Command Set 2 or 3 Actual throughput improvements depend on the test program and the controlling device Speed increase is obtained by using a HS Commands system of numerical commands that are decoded by a jump table then immediately executed by the code without going through the SCPI parser thus saving a lot of time The HS High Speed commands are numeric values that each correspond to a specific SCPI command A number is substituted for the SCPI command name and a number is substituted for any text type discrete and Boolean SCPI parameter s Note however that unlike SCPI parsers that are flexible in the way that characters are sent the HS mode rejects additional spaces and characters and issues error codes For example the command to turn off the output of the 3152B is OUTP ON HS command syntax for the same command is 0200A1 0200A is the HS equivalent to the OUTP command and 1 indicates ON Special rules for using HS commands are described in the next section Tables 5 1 and 5 2 provide a complete cross referenced listing of all HS c
301. his error program the actual load impedance and let the 3152B automatically correct its signal amplitude Use the following command outp load lt value gt where lt value gt is the load impedance in ohms The 3152B provides protection for its internal circuitry at the input and output connectors Appendix A specifies the level of protection for each input or output connector At power up or as a result of a software reset the 3152B changes all settings to their default values Chapter 4 lists all settings and their default values as well as their maximum and minimum allowable values It is good practice to reset the instrument between sequence events to make sure that parameters that were programmed for previous tests will not accidently interfere with future tests Use the following common command to reset the instrument to its default state rst EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A Turning the Output On Turning the SYNC Output On Selecting the 3152B User Manual For safety the OUTPUT connector of the 3152B defaults to the Off state when the unit is first powered up or receives a software reset To avoid the production of random signals at the output connector keep the output in the Off state while setting up the instrument The output signal is connected t
302. hnology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A Enable Register the application programmer can select reasons for the generator to SRE issue a service request by altering the contents of the Service Request Enable Register The Service Request Enable Register is read with the SRE common query The response to this query is a number that represents the sum of the binary weighted value of the Service Request Enable Register The value of the unused bit 6 is always zero The Service Request Enable Register is written using the SRE command followed by a decimal value representing the bit values of the Register A bit value of 1 indicates an enabled condition Consequently a bit value of zero indicates a disabled condition The Service Request Enable Register is cleared by sending SREO The generator always ignores the value of bit 6 Summary of SRE commands is given in the following 5 118 Programming Reference EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual quest Command Error Operation Complete Standard Event Status Reqister ESR 4 Power On User Re Execution Error Queue l r I Q Not Empt IG 8 Standard Event matus Hedister d Ce EE Logical OR Di
303. hrough termination 3 Configure the 3152B as follows Amplitude 20 mV Offset 1V Output On Adjustment 1 CAL SETUP 10 for a DMM reading of 1 V 5 mV Note and record the DMM reading Setup 27 1 V Offset Output Amplifier Out Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50 Q feedthrough termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function DCV Range 1V 2 Connect the 3152B output to the DMM input Terminate the 3152B output at the DMM input with the 50 feedthrough termination 3 Configure the 3152B as follows Amplitude 20 mV Offset 1 V Output On Adjustment 7 16 Adjustments and Firmware Update EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual 1 CAL SETUP 11 fora DMM reading of 1 V 5 mV note reading 2 Repeat Setup 26 and Setup 27 until errors are balanced between the steps Amplitude The amplitude adjustments ensure that the AC levels are within the specified range Use this procedure if you suspect that amplitude Adjustments accuracy is an issue Setup 28 10 V Amplitude Amplifier In Arbitrary Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50 Q feedthrough termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function ACV Range 10 V 2 Connect the 3152B output to the DMM input Terminate the 3152
304. hrough termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function ACV Range 1V 2 Connect the 3152B output to the DMM input Terminate the 3152B output at the DMM input with the 50 feedthrough termination 3 Configure the 3152B as follows Frequency 1 kHz Output On Amplitude 500 mV Offset 250 mV Mode Modulation Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETUP 33 for a DMM reading of 176 7 mV 2 mV Setup 50 100 mV Amplitude Amplifier Out Modulation Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50 Q feedthrough termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function ACV Range 100 mV 2 Connect the 3152B output to the DMM input Terminate the 3152B output at the DMM input with the 50 feedthrough termination 3 Configure the 3152B as follows Frequency 1 kHz Output On Amplitude 100 mV Offset 250 mV Mode Modulation Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETUP 34 for a DMM reading of 35 35 mV 0 5 mV 50 mV Amplitude Amplifier Out Modulation Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50 Q feedthrough termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Setup 51 Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function ACV Range 100 mV 2 Connect the 3152B output to the DMM input Terminate the 3152B output at the DMM input with the 50 feedthrough termination 3 Configure the 3152B as follows 7 26 Adjustments and Firmware Update EADS North America Test and
305. i DATA lt data_array gt v 100014 DEFine lt 1 to 10k gt lt 10 to 1 2 4 e6 gt lt segment_ gt lt size gt 1 v 10102 DEFine lt 1 to 10k gt lt 16 to 1 2 4 e6 gt lt segment_ gt lt size gt 1 DELete v NAME 1 to 10k v 09201 ALL v 10210 SELect 1 to 10k 1 v 1030A SEGMent DATA lt data array gt 105014 For Backwards compatibility 3152B defaults to 12BIT 3100M R defaults to 16BIT 3152B defaults to LEG 3100M R defaults to MOD 5 16 Programming Reference EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual Table 5 2 3152B SCPI Command Summary continued Keyword Parameter Form Default 3152A HS Apply Commands SOURce v APPLy FREQ AMPL OFFS v 0300C SINusoid FREQ AMPL OFFS PHAS POW v 03016 TRlangle FREQ AMPL OFFS PHAS POW v 0302E SQUare SQU FREQ AMPL OFFS DCY v 0303D PULSe FREQ AMPL OFFS DEL WID LEE TRE v 0304G RAMP FREQ AMPL OFFS DEL LEE TRE v 0305F SINC FREQ AMPL OFFS CYC v 0310D GAUssian FREQ AMPL OFFS EXP v 0306D EXPonential FREQ AMPL OFFS EXP v 0307D DC DC AMPL v 0308A USER SEG lt n gt SCLK AMPL OFFS v 0309D Sequence Commands SOURce SEQuence DATA lt data array gt 134014 ADVance
306. ical Controls ons Liss ven 1 jet Figure 4 62 3D Vertical Controls Graphical Screens The 3D Waveform Graphs are shown in Figure 4 59 You can not change anything on the screens However anything that you design in the Vertical Controls fields will automatically be updated and displayed on the graphical screens 4 80 ArbConnection EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual X ims 0 1ms Div Y SV 0 625V Div Frequency X 1ms 0 4ms Div X Ims 0 1ms Div Y 360Deg 45Deg Div Figure 4 63 3D Waveform Graphs Designing 3D 3D profiles are designed in the Vertical Controls fields Notice that A there are three separate control fields Amplitude Frequency and profiles Phase Always start the design from the Shared Horizontal Controls group In the View group remove profiles that you do not care to change Click on the Parameters tab and set up the duration of the waveform An example of a 3D profile chirp in this example is shown in Figure 4 60 Profiles were designed for amplitude frequency and phase As you can see the duration of the waveform was selected to be 100 ms EADS North America Test and Services ArbConnection 4 81 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Pu
307. ices the 3152B can use the CLK10 VXIbus signal or the front panel 10MHz REF IN signal which is available only on the 3100M R 3152B versions and on the 3151B By activating the Phase Locked Loop PLL function you may generate any standard or arbitrary waveform while synchronizing with an external signal or even while tracking it as its frequency changes This feature is not available on the 3151B model EADS North America Test and Services Introduction 1 7 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Signal Integrity Frequency Agility Amplitude Remote Control 1 8 Introduction Publication No 980935 Rev A As technology evolves and new devices are developed each day faster and more complex signals are needed to simulate and stimulate these new devices Using the latest technology the 3152B has the highest bandwidth in its class enabling it to accurately duplicate and simulate high frequency test signals With its outstanding sample clock generator range 16 bit vertical resolution and its high output voltage amplifier that has an output bandwidth of over 100 MHz one can create mathematical profiles download the coordinates to the instrument and be assured that the waveforms are generated without compromising signal fidelity or system integrity The 3152B has two separate internal clock sources Sample clock generator The sample
308. id signal that is sensed at the trigger input connector will be counted and measured processed and results placed on the interface port HOLD Discrete Will select the single reading mode In this case the counter input is armed first and the first valid signal that is sensed at the trigger input connector will be counted and measured and its result processed and placed on the interface port Response The 3152B returns NORM INV or COMP depending on the current polarity setting EADS North America Test and Services Programming Reference 5 101 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A COUNter GATe lt time gt HS Syntax 0134A lt float gt Description Programs the gate time interval for frequency period averaged and totalize in gated mode Measurements will be taken only after the input has been armed and valid signal available at the input connector Notice however that the gate time internal must be larger than the period of the measure signal Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt time gt 100e 6 to 1 Numeric 1 Programs the gate time interval in units of seconds In continuous mode the counter is self armed and therefore every valid signal at the counter input will open the gate and initiate a measurement cycle In hold mode the counter must be armed before the gate can open Always make sure th
309. ier configuration specifies how the instrument is mechanically constructed and the model number of the final instrument Figure Configuration 1 6 shows the front panels of the various configurations The Different Model following are available e 3151B Front panel compatible with the legacy 3151 3151A Numbers and 3151A this model is exactly the same as the 3152B with the following exceptions o The Phase Modulation Input BNC is replaced by a 10 MHz Reference Input BNC o The PLL ON LED is not installed o idn response with 3151B in instrument field e 3152B Used to replace or add legacy 3152A type instruments to your system having to modify existing code The 3152B is a message based product that is fully compatible with 3152A legacy behavior e 3100R 3152B Use this version to specify a register based interface This version is highly recommended for new users that seek higher speed of command parsing and execution This version can be expanded to 3100R 3152B 3152B for a dual channel configuration where two instruments can be used either independently or synchronized in a master slave configuration The 3100R carrier can accept other instruments although these are not described here e 3100M 3152B Use this version to specify a message based interface including USB and LAN This version is recommended for users that seek flexibility in communication with the 3152B You may communicate with the instrument thr
310. ific backplane trigger line is enabled The trigger line lt n gt can range from 0 to 7 ROSGillator SOURce INTernal EXTernal CLK10 Description This command selects the reference source for the sample clock generator HS Syntax 0028A lt 0 1 gt Parameters Name Type Default Description INTernal Discrete INT Selects the internal source a 1ppm TCXO EXTernal Discrete Enables the external reference input available on 3151B and 3100 models only An external reference must be connected to REF IN for normal operation CLK10 Discrete Selects the VXI CLK10 reference The CLK10 is routed in parallel to all backplane connectors allowing all of the modules installed in the VXI mainframe to use the same clock source which can be useful for synchronization purposes Response The 3152B returns INT EXT or CLK10 depending on the current 3152B reference clock source setting FREQuency EXTernal HS Syntax 0420 Description This command queries the frequency at the trigger input The same trigger is also used for phase locking to an external signal This command returns the frequency value of the external signal only when the instrument is in PLL mode and locked EADS North America Test and Services Programming Reference 5 33 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A Response The 3152B measures and returns the cu
311. ilar manner you may use the Apply command with other standard waveforms to set some parameters while leaving others at their default values Each standard waveform is built into the 3152B in a lookup table or equation Ten standard function shapes are available Sine Triangle Square Pulse Ramp Sinc Exponential Decaying Pulse Gaussian Pulse Noise DC Every time you select a standard function the 3152B retrieves the data points from a lookup table or calculates them from equations and then places them into waveform memory Use the following commands to select one of the standard EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual waveform shapes func shap sin Selects the sine waveform func shap tri Selects the triangle waveform func shap squ Selects the square waveform func shap puls Selects the pulse waveform func shap ramp Selects the ramp waveform func shap sinc Selects the sinc waveform func shap gaus Selects the Gaussian waveform func shap exp Selects the exponential waveform func shap nois Selects the noise waveform func shap dc Selects the DC waveform After you select a waveform shape you may specify the waveform parameters Chapter5 explains the commands available for specifying parameters of standard waveforms 3 Note The number of points used for defining a stan
312. ility Commands to program the instrument over the GPIB are defined by the SCPI 1993 0 standard The SCPI standard defines a common language protocol It goes one step further than IEEE STD 488 2 and defines a standard set of commands to control every programmable aspect of the instrument It also defines the format of command parameters and the format of values returned by the instrument SCPI is an ASCII based instrument command language designed for test and measurement instruments SCPI commands are based on a hierarchical structure known as a tree system In this system associated commands are grouped together under a common node or root thus forming subsystems Part of the OUTPut subsystem is shown below to illustrate the tree system OUTPut FILTer LPASS NONE 25M 50M ALL STATe OFF ON EADS North America Test and Services Programming Reference 5 1 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A OUTPut is the root keyword of the command FILTer and STATe are second level keywords LPASs is third level keyword A colon separates a command keyword from a lower level keyword Command Format The format used to show commands in this manual is shown below FREQuency lt frequency gt MINimum MAXimum The command syntax shows most commands and some parameters as a mixture of upper and lowerc
313. increments of 4 points 2 mode mode points in legacy mode minimum n designates the length of the segment Response The 3152B returns the current SYNC width value OUTPut TRIGger SOURce BIT LCOM SSYN HCL PULS ZERO INTernal EXTernal Description The TTLTRG signals when enabled and placed on the backplane can be asserted with signals coming from a number of sources Use this command to assign the source for the active TTLTRG line HS Syntax 0220A lt 1 2 3 4 gt Parameters Name Type Default Description BIT Discrete BIT Generates a trigger signal at a designated point on the waveform The trigger position is programmed using the outp sync pos command The same command sets the position of the trigger output and the position of the SYNC output LCOMplete Discrete Generates a single trigger signal in sequenced mode synchronous with the active segment in the sequence SSYNc Discrete Similar to the bit option except that it in triggered or gated modes it eliminates the 1 clock jitter between the trigger and the output signal HCLock Discrete Generates a sync output pulse that has a 50 duty cycle and the same period as the output waveform PULSe Discrete Similar to the bit option except that the width of the sync pulse in 4 point increments from 4 to n 8 points 2 point increments from 2 to n 4 in legacy mode The position of the pulse is programmed using the outp sync pos command and the width is programmed using t
314. ing that generates signals stable enough to satisfy the PLL input requirements When placed in this mode the 3152B measures the profile of the input signal and EADS North America Test and Services Introduction 1 21 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Phase Modulation Filters Output State 1 22 Introduction Publication No 980935 Rev A determine whether or not it is valid Then the built in counter timer circuit measures the frequency of the signal and centers its lock in range on this frequency The 3152B thus locks automatically onto the frequency of the external signal Note that there is no need for manual initiation or operator intervention for the PLL function to find and lock onto an external reference The PLL range is 500 Hz to 10 MHz After phase locking has been established the start phase of the 3152B waveform can be shifted with respect to the start phase of the external reference within the range of 180 to 180 with phase increments as low as 0 01 fine phase control The reference signal is applied to the front panel TRIG PLL connector In this way the same reference can be applied to multiple modules to generate multi phase signal patterns The TRIG PLL input has a programmable trigger level and programmable slope When the 3152B is placed in PLL mode there are two ways to control the phase offset The first wa
315. ion First notice the variety of instruments that are listed in the Instruments Pool Actually they all are the same 3152B units except they are mounted on different platforms for various applications The 3100 3152B is comprised of a single 3152B and the 3100 3152B 3152B has two 3152B embedded in the same module The 3152B is the standard single slot instrument that has the ability to replace a 3152A module in legacy systems Information on the various 3152B configurations is given in Chapter 1 B Note The X Instruments utility does not allow mixing of registered based instruments such as the 3100R 3152B with message based instruments such 3152B and 3100M 3152B Therefore if you want to synchronize modules make sure that they all of the same kind Information how to set up synchronization groups along with a description of the various buttons that control the multi instruments synchronization function is given below X Instrument Synchronization fe x State Model Instruments Pool Address Chan Slot Path PhOffs _ MoveUp 100 10 1 i 310031528 EE wits 2 3 A Move Down 31528 VXID 5 1 7 0 0 3152B Vx10 6 1 8 0 0 3100 31528 Val 1 g 0 0 Path LBUS ECT Apply Activate Close 4 32 ArbConnection Figure 4 22 X Instrument Synchronization Pool List Group is an edit field which is used for grouping one or more instruments into a set of instruments that share synchroniza
316. ion The programming must be performed via the VXI interface 5 108 Programming Reference EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual Parameters Name Range Type Description lt gate_adrs gt 0 to 255 String Programs the gateway address for LAN operation Programming must be performed from the VXI interface Current gateway address can be observed on LAN Properties front panel display Response The 3152B returns the current IP address value similar to the following 0 0 0 0 SYSTem IP HOSTname lt name gt HS Syntax 0170A lt string gt Description Programs the host name address for LAN operation The programming is performed in the factory and it is highly suggested that users do not change the host name without first consulting a EADS North America Test and Serivces customer service personnel Parameters Name Type Description lt name gt String Programs the host name for LAN operation Response The 3152B returns a string containing the host name String length is 16 characters SYSTem KEEPalive STATe OFF ON 0 1 HS Syntax 0173A lt 0 1 gt Description Use this command to toggle the keep alive mode on and off The keep alive mode assures that LAN connection remains uninterrupted throughout the duration of the LAN interfacing Parameters Range Type Default D
317. ion of the reading Reduce the gate time when you want to accelerate the reading process however always make sure that the period of the signal is smaller than the gate time setting PULSe Discrete Will select the pulse width measurement function Pulse width can be measured on either continuous or non repetitive signals Since the width of the signal is directly proportional to the gating time the number of displayed digits decreases proportionally to the pulse width of the signal The best resolution in period measurements is 10 ns ITOTalize Discrete Will select the totalize measurement function In this mode the gate opens when the first valid signal is sensed at the counter input and remains open until programmed otherwise Pulse are counted and displayed continuously until intervened externally The counter can accumulate 8 digits before it will overflow An overflow indication is available Response The 3152B returns FREQ PER APER PULS or ITOT depending on the current measurement function setting COUNter DISPlay MODe NORMal HOLD HS Syntax 0133A lt 0 1 gt Description Programs the display time mode for the counter timer The two modes are normal for continuous display readings and hold for single reading after arming the counter input Parameters Name Type Default Description NORMal Discrete NORM Will select the continuous reading mode In this case the counter input is self armed which means that every val
318. ions requiring a more accurate stable reference than can be attained by the 1 ppm TCXO reference built into the 3152B The reference input is active only after selecting the External 10MHz Reference Source option The 3152B can generate six types of waveforms e Standard Fixed e Arbitrary e Sequenced e Modulated e Digital Pulse e Half cycle The 3152B must pre load its memory before it can generate standard waveforms On power up the waveform memory contains no specific data The sine waveform which is the default is computed and loaded into the waveform memory as part of the reset procedure Later if you select another standard waveform the 3152B computes the waveform points and loads them into the waveform memory Every time the user selects a new waveform there is some delay for the processor to compute the data and download it to memory The delay interval depends on the complexity of the waveform and the number of points the processor has to calculate It is good practice to add sufficient delay to a test program to allow for this delay The delay could range from a few milliseconds to a few seconds and there are no special rules beside trial and error to determine the necessary delay time EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A Arbitrary User Waveforms Sequenced Waveforms
319. isantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A Setup 50MHz 50 MHz Gated Oscillator Adjustment Equipment Counter Function Generator BNC to BNC cables Preparation 1 Configure the counter as follows Termination 50 Q DC Function TIA gt B Slope B Negative 2 Connect the 3152B output to the oscilloscope input 3 Connect an external function generator to the front panel TRG PLL connector 4 Using ArbConnection prepare and download the following waveform Wavelength 100 points Waveform Pulse Delay 0 01 Rise Fall Time 0 High Time 99 99 5 Configure the 3152B as follows Function Mode Arbitrary Run Mode Triggered Retrigger Mode On Retrigger Delay 20 us 6 Using an external function generator manually trigger the 3152B Adjustment 1 Set CAL SETUP 0 2 Adjust C10 for a period of 20 us 5 Setup TCXO 10 MHz TCXO Frequency Equipment Counter BNC to BNC cables Preparation 1 Configure the counter as follows Function Freq A Termination 500 2 Connect the 3152B output to counter channel A 3 Configure the 3152B as follows Frequency 10 MHz Ref Source Internal Output On Amplitude 2V Wave Square Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETUP 1 for a counter reading of 10 MHz 2 Hz 7 10 Adjustments and Firmware Update EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 9
320. it words however programmers may choose to prepare the data in two bytes and arrange to download these two bytes in a sequence Figure 5 2 shows a waveform word that is acceptable for the 3152B There are a number of points you should be aware of before you start preparing the data 1 Waveform data points have 16 bit values 0x0000 to OxFFFF 2 Data point range is 0 to 65 535 decimal for the 3152B and 0 to 4095 decimal for 3152A emulation EADS North America Test and Services Programming Reference 5 53 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A 0x0000 correspond to 8 V and OxFFFF corresponds to 8V OxFFF corresponds to 8 V for 3152A emulation 3 3152B data point data point 65 535 corresponds to full scale amplitude setting Point 32768 point 2048 for the legacy 3152A corresponds to the 0 V amplitude setting Figure 5 2 shows how to initially prepare the 16 bit word for a waveform data point Figure 5 3 shows how legacy 3152A waveform data point was represented MSB high byte lt D15 p14 Jos fore Jor Joro os os 07 os os Te os o2 for oo low byte LSB Figure 5 2 3152B 16 bit Waveform Data Point Representation MSB high byte low byte LSB PD Tx Jen Jose oe oe or os os Tox oo oe Tox oo Figure 5 3 3152A 12 bit Waveform Data Point Representation Parameters Name Type Descripti
321. ith a newer version But before you do that check with the factory if the new firmware supports the hardware revision you currently have EADS North America Test and Services Adjustments and Firmware Update 7 31 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Updating Message Based Firmware updater Publication No 980935 Rev A Before you attempt to update the firmware of your message based card e g Models 3152B and 3100M 3152B first check the revision level of the product Each firmware update was done for a reason and therefore if you want to update the firmware for a problem in your system check the readme file that is associated with the update to see if an update will solve your problem There are a number of ways to check the revision level of your firmware 1 Using a SCPI command from an external utility you can read the firmware version by sending the following query SYST INFO FIRM VERS The response is a string showing the firmware version e g 1 04 2 Using ArbConnection select the General Filters panel from the System tab and click on the Firmware Version button The General Filters panel with the firmware revision indication is shown in Figure 7 3 Use the following procedure to upgrade the firmware once you determine that a firmware upgrade will improve the performance of your instrument 1 Install the firmware updater utility
322. itor Chapter 4 provides instructions for using ArbConnection and its Wave Composer editor You may divide the 3152B waveform memory into segments and use each segment to contain a separate waveform This is useful in applications that require multiple waveforms and can benefit from changing quickly from one waveform to another The memory can be partitioned into as many as 16k segments with up to 16 384 different waveforms but the higher the number of segments the smaller the number of sample points that are available to each EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual DU x wae Ke w it Deg amp NE 3 bf E EI Zb Ki E Wavelength 1024 Active seg 1 fee L Anchor 0 R Anchor 1023 Equati on Edita 2 x Anchor r Waveform Amplitude Level Adjuster Preview Start pts 10 Max 32767 Cycles I Auto_Scaling End pts 1023 Min 32768 1 wol G Ge eae Equation History Cancel Amplitude p Insert Wave Clear Open Save Cancel OK 32000 sinfomg p 10 e p 250 v Aliases gt gt F y i LES Vertical Scale 64kPts 8kPts Div Horizontal Scale 1kPts 100e 3kPts Div Figure 3 1 ArbConnection Example of a Complex Waveform Creating Memory Segments Memory Management Segments are defined using the following comma
323. itude level The high time is measured at the top of the pulse Sets the delay time The delay defines the time the pulse is delayed from its starting point to the first transition The delay time is computed as part of the pulse period Therefore if you do not plan to have a delayed pulse set the delay value to 0 s Sets the rise time defined as the time it takes for the pulse to transition from its low level to its high level This should not be confused with the common measure of rise time from 10 to 90 of amplitude Rise time as set by this command is computed as part of the pulse period and therefore if you do not plan to have linear transitions change its value to 0 s Sets the fall time defined as the time it takes for the pulse to transition from its high level to its low level This should not be confused with the common measure of fall time from 90 to 10 of amplitude Fall time as set by this command is computed as part of the pulse period and therefore if you do not plan to have linear transitions change its value to 0 s Sets the high amplitude level which is the top amplitude level of the pulse The value must be at least 16 mV larger than the low level setting and must not exceed 16 V Sets the low amplitude level which is the bottom amplitude level of the pulse The EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisan
324. ity Instrumentation EADS North America Test and Services Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual Use the following commands for programming the AM parameters AM Programming AM control is internal The commands for programming the amplitude modulation function are described below Note that the carrier waveform frequency CW setting is common to all modulation schemes AM FUNCtion SHAPe SINusoid TRlangle SQUare RAMP HS Syntax 0057A lt 1 2 3 4 gt Description This command selects one of the waveform shapes as the active modulating waveform Parameters Name Type Default Description SINusoid Discrete SIN Selects the sine shape as the modulating waveform TRlangle Discrete Select the triangular shape as the modulating waveform SQUare Discrete Select the square shape as the modulating waveform RAMP Discrete Selects the ramp shape as the modulating waveform Response The 3152B returns SIN TRI SQU or RAMP depending on the selected function shape setting AM INTernal FREQuency lt am freq gt HS Syntax 0781A lt float gt Description This command sets the modulating wave frequency for the built in standard modulating waveform library Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt am freq gt 10e 3 to Numeric 100 Programs the frequency of the modulating waveform in 1e6 units of Hz The frequency of the built in standard modulating wavef
325. just vertical trace to 6 divisions 2 Adjust C25 for best pulse response 4 ns typ 5 aberrations EADS North America Test and Services Adjustments and Firmware Update 7 29 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A Updating the Firmware A WARNING Only qualified persons may perform Firmware updates DO NOT even attempt to perform this operation unless you were trained and certified as you may inflict damage to the operation of the instrument Always verify with customer service that you have the latest firmware file before you start with your update As explained in Chapter 1 the waveform generator comes in three different versions Model 3152B model 3100M 3152B and Model 3100R 3152B where the first two versions are message based and the last is registered based Upgrading the 3100R 3152B firmware is easier because a file is being replaced On the other hand the message based products use flash memory to store the program and therefore the upgrade is a bit more complicated Information on how to detect the firmware version and how to upgrade firmware is given in the following Updatin g Before you attempt to update the firmware of your registered based 8 card e g Model 3100R 3152B first check the revision level that is Registered Based installed on your computer Each firmware update was done for a Firmware reaso
326. l immediately void the warranty agreement EADS North America Test and Services Introduction 1 11 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Options Supplied Accessories Front Panel Connectors 1 12 Introduction Publication No 980935 Rev A The 3100M 3152B and 3100R 3152B are available in two memory configurations Compare the option number printed on the instrument to verify which option was installed at the factory Contact your nearest EADS North America Test and Services representative if the number printed on the case does not reflect the version ordered The list of options is given below 001 3152B basic instrument with 1MB RAM This designates the standard memory size supplied with the 3152B 004 3152B basic instrument with 4MB RAM This designates memory expansion to 4 meg waveform data points The instrument is supplied with a CD containing the instruction manual ArbConnection for Windows 2000 XP NT and VXI plug amp play soft front panel and drivers The 3151B has five BNC connectors on its front panel marked as follows e OUTPUT The main output signal e SYNC OUT A digital signal in sync with the main output e TRIG PLL IN Trigger input e CLOCK IN An ECL level external sample clock input e REF IN TTL level 10 MHz reference input The 3152B has five BNC connectors on its front panel marked as follows
327. lated carrier frequency CW until a valid signal is applied When the second option is selected the instrument generates a DC level signal until stimulated to generate a modulation cycle The modulation options their associated parameters and the various run mode options are described separately for each of the panels below gt Operation i E Y Modulation Sweep ASKIFSKIPSK Perea A req Hop AM Composers Figure 4 13 Modulation Panels The FM panel Figure 4 14 contains parameters for controlling the amplitude modulation function To turn the FM function on and off click on the FM button in the State group The various groups in the FM panel are described below State The State button turns on and off the FM function FM Parameters This group contains parameters that allow complete control over the FM function These are CW Frequency The CW Frequency is the frequency of the pre modulation carrier waveform In case the modulating waveform is one of the built in standard waveforms the modulation will be symmetrical about the CW frequency setting Baseline The Baseline parameter affects the output characteristics in one of the interrupted run modes i e triggered burst In this case this parameter defines where the signal idles between triggers There are two options CW and DC The DC option will set the idle state to a DC level meaning that in between triggers the output resides on a DC level
328. le Preparation 1 Configure the counter as follows Termination 50Q DC Function TI A gt B 2 Connect the 3152B output to the counter input A 3 Connect the external function generator to the counter input B and to TRG PLL input of 3152B 4 Prepare the external function generator waveform as follows Amplitude TTL Waveform Square Frequency 10 kHz 5 Configure the 3152B as follows Function Mode Arbitrary Wavelength 1000 points Waveform Square Run Mode PLL 6 Set CAL SETUP 61 7 Set CAL VAL 120 Adjustment 1 Set CAL SETUP 63 Phase 0 Equipment Counter Function Generator T Connector BNC to BNC cable Setup 10 Preparation 1 Configure the counter as follows Termination 50Q DC Function TI A gt B 2 Connect the 3152B output to counter input A 3 Connect the external function generator to counter input B and to TRG PLL input of the 3152B 4 Prepare the external function generator waveform as follows Amplitude TTL 7 8 Adjustments and Firmware Update EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual Waveform Square Frequency 10 kHz 5 Configure the 3152B as follows Function Mode Arbitrary Wavelength 1000 points Waveform Square Run Mode PLL Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETUP 62 for counter reading of 0 500 ns Setup 11
329. lected Only one LED can be on at a time Y HINT To turn on an LED click on the LED or on the text next to it The selected parameter is then indicated by a darker LED shade Radio Buttons Radio buttons are used for changing operating modes or selecting between mode options One of the radio buttons is always on with a red dot in its center to indicate its state These are referred to as radio buttons because only one can be on at atime as with a radio that has preset buttons Dial The dial is a tool for adjusting a number in the display area To use the dial point to it with the mouse and then press and hold the left mouse button While holding the mouse button down move the mouse in a clockwise circle to increase the displayed number or counterclockwise to decrease the number The dial modifies digits at the cursor position and allows modification within the legal range of the displayed parameter Once you have reached the end of the range further dial movement has no effect on the display You may also change the display reading without the dial by using the 1 or Hl keys or by simply typing the desired number using the computer keyboard I NOTE After you change the displayed number the 3152B will be updated with the new parameter only after you click on the Modify Execute knob Digital Display The digital display is a tool for displaying various 3152B parameters just as on a physical contr
330. length 4000 points Waveform 4 sine wave cycles Deviation 0 5 MHz Test Procedure 1 Verify FM operation on the oscilloscope as follows Waveform Sine Mod Freq 2 5 kHz Max Deviation 1 25 MHz Min Deviation 750 kHz AON Test Results Pass Fail AM Equipment Oscilloscope Preparation 1 Configure the oscilloscope as follows Time Base 0 5 ms Trigger source Channel 2 positive slope Amplitude 1 V div 2 Connect the 3152B output to the oscilloscope input channel 1 EADS North America Test and Services Performance Checks 6 29 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual 3 4 Publication No 980935 Rev A Connect the 3152B SYNC to the oscilloscope input channel 2 Configure model 3152B controls as follows Waveform Modulated Modulation AM Carrier Freq 1 MHz Mod Frequency 1 kHz Mod Depth 50 Mod Wave Sine Sync On Output On Test Procedure 1 Verify AM operation on the oscilloscope as follows Waveform Amplitude modulated sine Mod depth 50 5 Test Results Pass Fail FSK Equipment Oscilloscope Preparation 1 eS Configure the oscilloscope as follows Time Base 0 2 ms Sampling Rate 50 MS s at least Trace A View Jitter Type FREQ CLK Trigger source Channel 2 positive slope Amplitude 1 V div C
331. lete All Undo m Section Properties Design Units V ms Section Start 14 ms Repeat 3 Feen Duration ht m Figure 4 52 Building Section 2 of the Pulse Example EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A Pulse Example Section 3 3152B User Manual The second pulse section is now complete We are ready now to start building the third section of the pulse as shown in Figure 4 49 Use the Edit menu to select the Append Section operation A new section number will appear but its fields will be initially empty to the right of the section identifier Before you start entering values to this section note that there are fast transitions required for this section Therefore select the DC Intervals option in the Pulse Train Design Format You are now ready to start programming values If you try to switch design formats after you have already typed in some values the Pulse Editor will display a warning box alerting you that the design format can only be changed for an empty section In this case the only way to recover is to delete all entries and start from an empty index list Type the section entries as shown in the figure 10 x EADS North America Test and Services Vertical Scale 10 1 25 Div Horizontal Scale 38ms 3 8ms Div Gs ieu Fu
332. ll train gt M cut om i r Pulse Train Design Format Time Cumulative inline E ee n 15 03 0 3 Time Level Points kasaru Append Insert Delete Delete All Undo Section Properties Design Units VM ms Section Start 23 ms Repeat 5 Apply i Duration x R 15 ms 1 2 3 4 Figure 4 53 Building Section 3 of the Pulse Example ArbConnection 4 69 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Pulse Example Section 4 Pulse Example Section 5 4 70 ArbConnection Vertical Scale 10 1 25 Div Horizontal Scale 42 8ms 4 28msi Publication No 980935 Rev A The third pulse section is now complete We are ready now to start building the forth section of the pulse as shown in Figure 4 50 Use the Edit menu to select the Append Section operation A new section number will appear but its fields will be initially empty to the right of the section identifier Before you start entering values into this section note that there is only one linear transition required for this section that will start from the last point of the previous section and will connect to the start point of the next section Therefore select the Time Level Points option in the Pulse Train Design Format You are now ready to start programming values Type the section entries as shown i
333. lly Automatic Sequence Advance or b with a trigger Stepped Sequence Advance 1 to 4096 1 to 1Meg 500 ns 3152B Specifications A 5 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Minimum Segment Size in a Sequence Custom Sequence Creation Software Download Modes Publication No 980935 Rev A 10 points ArbConnection software allows instrument control and creation of custom sequences Sequences are built as tables and downloaded to the instrument Normal using SCPI commands Fast using binary data lt 250 ms 100 steps Modulated Waveform Generator Characteristics General Description Carrier Waveform CW Modulation Source Run Modes Interrupted Modulation Carrier Idle Mode Run Mode Advance Source Trigger Delay Trigger input to modulation output Resolution Error Using this mode of operation one may select froma list of built in modulation schemes Sinewave Internal Off outputs CW Continuous Triggered Delayed Trigger Re trigger Burst and Gated On or Off programmable Front panel TRIG IN TTLTRG 0 7 Internal trigger Software commands 0 lt 100 ns to 20 s system delay 20 ns 6 sample clock cycles 150 ns Re trigger Delay Modulation end to modulation restart lt 100 ns to 20 s Resolution Error Trigger Parameters Marker Output Description Output Level Marker Type Position Sweep
334. lock jitter between the trigger and the output signal by using a special circuit that synchronizes the sync output to the triggered signal Generates a sync output pulse that has a 50 duty cycle regardless of the period of the output waveform Similar to the bit option except that the width of the sync pulse in 4 point increments from 4 to n 8 points 2 point increments from 2 to n 4 in legacy mode The position of the pulse is programmed using the outp sync pos command and the width is programmed using the outp sync wid command Zero crossing is a special mode where the sync signal remains low as long as the output waveform level is negative below 0 V and changes to high when the output level becomes positive above 0 V The 3152B returns BIT LCOM SSYN HCL PULS or ZERO depending on the selected SYNC source OUTPut SYNC WIDTh lt width gt HS Syntax 0243A lt integer gt Description Programs the 3152B SYNC position This command is active in arbitrary USER and standard waveform EADS North America Test and Services Programming Reference 5 31 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A FIX modes only Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt width gt 4 to n 8 2 toNumeric 4 2 inSets the SYNC width in waveform points The sync n 4 in legacy Integer only legacy width can be programmed in
335. low the adjustment of the Sweep Start CW Stop and Sweep Time You can also place a marker at a position programmed by the Marker parameter To access the required parameter click on the parameter s name and observe that the LED next to the required parameter turns on The value that is associated with the lit LED is displayed on the digital display You can use the dial keyboard or the HI keys to adjust the readout to the required setting After you modify the reading click on the Modify Execute knob to update the 3152B with the new setting The FSK PSK ASK panel Figure 4 17 contains parameters for controlling the shift keying modulation functions To turn one of the functions on and off click on the appropriate button in the State group The various groups in this panel are described below State The State buttons enable or disable the shift keying functions General The General group contains parameters that are common to all of the shift keying functions These are CW frequency and baseline CW Frequency The CW Frequency is the frequency of the pre modulation carrier waveform EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual Baseline The Baseline parameter affects the output characteristics in one of the interrupted run modes i e triggered burst In this case this pa
336. lows Function DCV EADS North America Test and Services Adjustments and Firmware Update 7 11 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A Range 100 mV 2 Connect the 3152B output to the DMM input Terminate the 3152B output at the DMM input with the 500 feedthrough termination 3 Configure the 3152B as follows Mode Modulation Output On Amplitude 6V Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETUP 4 for a DMM reading of 0 V 20 mV Setup 15 Base Line Offset Amplifier Out Modulation Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50 Q feedthrough termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function DCV Range 100 mV 2 Connect the 3152B output to the DMM input Terminate the 3152B output at the DMM input with the 50 feedthrough termination 3 Configure the 3152B as follows Mode Modulation Output On Amplitude 1V Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETUP 5 for a DMM reading of 0 V 5 mV Setup 16 Base Line Offset Amplifier In Arbitrary Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50 Q feedthrough termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function DCV Range 100 mV 2 Connect the 3152B output to the DMM input Terminate the 3152B output at the DMM input with the 50 feedthrough termination 3 Configure the 3152B as follows Output On Ampli
337. lts Unlike the previous command you do not have to compute percent value to determine the actual output Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt amplitude gt 8 to 8 Numeric 5 Programs the DC amplitude parameter Response The 3152B returns the current DC amplitude value in units of Volts Arbitrar This group is used to control the arbitrary waveforms and their y respective parameters This will allow you to create segments and Waveforms download waveforms Using these commands you can also define Control segment size and delete some or all unwanted waveforms from your memory Use the commands in this group to turn the digital output on Commands and off and to download data to the digital pattern buffer Factory defaults after RST are shown in the Default column Parameter range and low and high limits are listed where applicable Generating Arbitrary Waveforms Arbitrary waveforms are generated from digital data points which are stored in a dedicated waveform memory Each data point has a vertical resolution of 16 bits 65536 points i e each sample is placed on the vertical axis with a precision of 1 65536 The 3152B has the following waveform memory capacity 1M standard memory configuration 4M optional memory expansion Each horizontal point has a unique address the first being 00000 and the last depends on the memory option In cases where smaller waveform lengths are required the waveform memory can b
338. m generation of the 3152B are purged and the 3152B is transformed to behave as if it was a stand alone counter timer The 3152B returns FIX USER SEQ SWE MOD HALF or COUN depending on the current 3152B operating mode Run Mode Commands The Run Mode Commands group is used to synchronize device actions with external events These commands control the trigger modes of the waveform generator The instrument can be placed in Triggered Gated or Burst mode Trigger source is selectable from external a backplane trigger line an internal trigger generator that has asynchronous free running programmable intervals and a software command The 3152B also has a built in internal re trigger generator that provides accurate and self repeating control from waveform end to waveform start Run Mode command settings affect all waveform shapes equally except when using the modulated waveforms In the case of modulated waveforms the output idles on either the carrier waveform or on a DC level until stimulated to output a modulation cycle or a burst of cycles Additional information on the run mode options and how the generator behaves in the various run mode options is given in Chapter 3 Factory defaults after RST are shown in the default column Parameter low and high limits are given where applicable Table 5 4 Run Mode Commands Keyword Parameter Form Default 3152A HS INITiate IMMediately CONTinuous
339. mV 260 MHz SCLK Setup 6 Equipment DMM Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function DCV Range 1V 2 Configure the 3152B as follows SCLK 260 MHz 3 Connect the DMM probes between R107 and ground Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETUP 55 for a DMM reading of 0 V 100 mV 277 MHz SCLK Setup 7 Equipment DMM Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function DCV Range 1V 2 Configure the 3152B as follows SCLK 277 MHz 3 Connect the DMM probes between R107 and ground Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETUP 56 for a DMM reading of 0 V 100 mV 290 MHz SCLK Setup 8 Equipment DMM Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function DCV Range 1V 2 Configure the 3152B as follows SCLK 290 MHz 3 Connect the DMM probes between R107 and ground Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETUP 57 for a DMM reading of 0 V 100 mV EADS North America Test and Services Adjustments and Firmware Update 7 7 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A PLL Adjustments The PLL operation is basic to the sample clock generator Correct operation of the PLL circuit ensures the accuracy of the frequency path as well as the accuracy of the PLL phase Use this procedure if you suspect that there is a frequency and or PLL accuracy issue Setup9 i itt 9 PLL Preparation Equipment Counter Function Generator T Connector BNC to BNC cab
340. mands swe star lt value gt Set the starting frequency for the sweep swe stop lt value gt Set the ending frequency for the sweep swe time lt value gt Set the amount of time that will elapse from swe dir up swe dir down swe spac lin swe spac log the start to the end of the sweep Set the sweep direction to up from the start frequency to the stop frequency Set the sweep direction to down from the stop frequency to the start frequency Select linear sweep steps where the generator steps the frequency through the sweep range in linear increments Select logarithmic sweep steps where the generator steps the frequency through the sweep range in logarithmic increments swe mark lt value gt Define marker position The marker will generate a pulse at the SYNC output when the marker frequency setting is crossed EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual Controlling the In general when you select a modulation scheme the waveform i being modulated the carrier is always a sine wave When you Carrier Frequency select the modulation function but set the modulation type to Off the output generates an un modulated continuous waveform CW signal The frequency setting of the carrier in modulation mode is not the same as for standard waveform mode and mus
341. may also program the position of the sync pulse outp sync pos lt value gt Sets the position of the sync pulse relative to the active segment The position is programmed in units of waveform points outp sync wid lt value gt Sets the width of the sync pulse The width is in units of waveform points Note that the position in points plus the width in points shall not exceed the number of points in the segment Example This example assumes that you have set up the chassis and run z the Resource Manager Generating a Simple Waveform Connect two cables one from the OUTPUT connector and the other from the SYNC connector to an oscilloscope Set up the oscilloscope to trigger from the SYNC signal Use the following sequence of commands to set up the 3152B rst Restore factory defaults Table 5 1 provides a complete listing of defaults outp 1 Enable output relay to turn output on volt lt value gt Set up the amplitude level volt offs lt value gt Set up the offset level Set up your oscilloscope to observe that the 3152B generates a sine waveform with the following properties e Frequency 1 MHz e Offset 0 V e Amplitude 5 V The output of the 3152B is calibrated for signals applied to a 50 Q load If your amplitude is twice as high as expected then the 3152B output may not be properly terminated In this case either add a 50 Q termination to the cabling or change your oscilloscope settings so that its input uses
342. ment is programmed to output trigger signals on any specific TTLT line ECLTrg1 Discrete Selects the backplane ECL trigger line number 1 as the source for the trigger input BUS Discrete Selects the remote controller as the trigger source Only software commands are accepted backplane and front panel signals are ignored Response The 3152B returns EXT INT TTLT lt n gt or BUS depending on the selected trigger advance source setting TRIGger SLOPe POSitive NEGative HS Syntax 1160A lt 0 1 gt Description The trigger slope command selects the either the positive or negative edge of the trigger signal as the trigger source Positive going transitions trigger the generator when the POS option is selected Negative transitions trigger the generator when the NEG option is selected In Gated mode with TRAN selected as the gating mechanism two transitions in the same direction are required to gate the output on and off The trigger slope command affects the generator when in an interrupted run mode which can be selected using the INIT CONT OFF command Parameters Name Type Default Description POSitive Discrete POS Selects the positive going edge as the trigger source When the LEV option is selected for gated mode a positive level above the trigger level setting opens the gate NEGative Discrete Selects the negative going edge as the trigger source When the LEV option is selected for gated mode a negative level below the
343. menu selections which that control waveform file I O operations Also use this menu to print the waveform or to exit the FM Composer program Description of the various commands under File is given below New Waveform The New Waveform command will remove the waveform from the screen If you made changes to the waveform area and use this command you should save your work before clearing the screen The New Waveform command is destructive to the displayed waveform Open Waveform The Open Waveform menu item lets you browse for previously saved waveform files and to load these waveforms to the waveform graph This command is also very useful for converting waveform files to FM Composer format files wvf Save Waveform The Save Waveform menu item stores your active waveform as a binary file with a wvf extension If this is the first time that you save this FM waveform the Save Waveform As command will be invoked automatically letting you select name path and format for the waveform file Save Waveform As Use the Save Waveform As menu item the first time you save your waveform It will let you select name location and format for your waveform file Print With this command you may print the active Waveform Window The standard printer dialog box will appear and will let you select printer setup or print the waveform page Exit The Exit command ends the current FM Composer session and takes you back to the Pan
344. mmands are summarized in Table 5 11 EADS North America Test and Services Programming Reference 5 93 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A Table 5 11 Digital Pulse Commands Summary Keyword Parameter Form Default 3152A HS DPULse DELay 0 to 10 0 0143A DOUBle STATe OFF ON 0 1 0 0144A DELay 0 to 1e3 1e 3 0145A LE Vel HIGH 7 992 to 8 5 0147A LOW 8 to 7 992 0 0148A HIGH 0 to 1e3 1e 3 0146A POLarity NORMal COMPlement INVerted NORM 0186A PERiod 80e 9 to 1e6 80e 9 to 2 4e6 with option 1 2 10e 3 0149A TRANssition LEADing 0 to 1e3 1e 3 0151A TRAiling 0 to 1e3 1e 3 0152A DPULse DELay lt delay gt HS Syntax 0143A lt float gt Description Programs the delayed interval of which the output idles on the low level amplitude until the first transition to high level amplitude Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt delay gt Oto10 Numeric 0 Sets the delay time interval in units of seconds Note that the sum of all parameters including the pulse delay time must not exceed the programmed pulse period and therefore it is recommended that the pulse period be programmed first and then all other pulse parameters Response The 3152B returns the pulse delay value in units of seconds DPULse DOUBle OFF
345. modulating frequency setting is common to both channels Depth The Depth parameter programs the modulation depth or index in percent of the un modulated CW amplitude The depth is symmetrical about the center of the CW amplitude Each channel can have a unique setting of the modulation depth To access the required parameter click on the parameter name and observe that the LED next to the required parameter turns on The value that is associated with the lit LED is displayed on the digital display You can use the dial keyboard or the 1 V keys to adjust the readout to the required setting After you modify the reading click on the Modify Execute knob to update the 3152B with the new setting The Sweep Modulation panel Figure 4 16 contains parameters for controlling the sweep function To turn the sweep function on and off click on the Sweep button in the State group The various groups in the sweep panel are described below State The State button turns on and off the Sweep function Sweep Parameters This group contains parameters that allow complete control over the sweep function These are Baseline The Baseline parameter affects the output characteristics in one of the interrupted run modes i e triggered burst In this case this parameter defines where the signal idles between triggers There are two options CW and DC The DC option will set the idle state to a DC level meaning that in between triggers th
346. mple Section teren 4 70 Pulse Example Section Buan 4 70 Downloading the Pulse Train arver 4 71 Interpreting the Download Summary iss sciecseiesis cedieesd senses dechansnnsctenentencinesassantereesnsnuriweueeenete 4 72 The FM Composer 4 73 The Men Bean 4 73 Eegeregie 4 74 Wave 0 1610 gh NE EE ee eee er ee NN EE 4 74 The RR le 4 76 Shared Horizontal Eeer eege EE 4 77 Vertical Controls EON ERE 4 79 Graphical STEEN eee 4 80 Designing 3D e 4 81 TE TENNE 4 83 LOGGING SCPI Commandsuasusnsasmsmsmmndarieda man E a R RENE aa ESS 4 83 Chapter 5 Programming Reference rrnnnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnen 5 1 What s in This Chaptal EE re EE ET NE 5 1 Ee 5 1 Command FofMal s eet EE EE 5 2 Command Separator umesamisk d ideene 5 2 The MIN and MAX Parameters ccccccsescessesescessescesseceeceecesseseeccesesvesseesessuseesseeseeseeveneseaness 5 2 Querying Parameter Setting avant 5 3 Query FEE Format sestren ea 5 3 SCPI Command Terminator soise eea Ee 5 3 IEEE STD 488 2 Common Commandes 5 3 SCPI Parameter Type uusnasusmnimemiensnenng ha a antanennasdeceanavnerddeanvacensentatanecapeestnasteds 5 3 Numeric Parameters EE EE varalmedu careteamaceauaceenetecnatss 5 3 Dere PTE eege eren 5 4 Boolean BS un 5 4 Arbitrary Block TE 5 4 Binary Block KEE eege eessen 5 4 SGP SME EE 5 4 Alternative Command Set HS Commande 5 5 Invoking HS Command Mode ccs2ie eerie hth eat caida een nee eee 5 5 Rules for Using HS
347. ms from sources such as the built in library of standard waveforms arbitrary waveforms from user downloaded coordinates modulated waveforms and digital patterns You may also access these features through software utilities such as VXIPIug amp Play drivers and soft front panels 4 2 ArbConnection EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual Main Window The main window includes a standard Windows menu bar at the top Figure 4 2 It provides access to operations such as loading and saving files setting viewing options and configuring the 3152B The Link bar is immediately below the menu bar The Link bar provides direct access to instruments that are active on the interface bus ArbConnection can control a number of instruments such as the Model 3152B simultaneously If you connect an instrument while ArbConnection is running ArbConnection automatically detects the instrument and adds its name and associated address to the drop down list in the Link bar If you run ArbConnection in offline mode the Link bar will show 3152B Offline The Panels toolbar is shown in Figure 4 3 By clicking the buttons on the Panels toolbar you may access the corresponding virtual control panels detailed later in this chapter When you launch ArbConnection the Output panel is initially open
348. ms kk 1 17 Figure 2 1 Switch S1 Set to Logical Address 2 2 1 Figure 3 1 ArbConnection Example of a Complex Waveform rrrrrnnannnrrrnnnannvrnnnnnnnnvnnnrnnnrnnnennr 3 19 Figure 3 2 Sequence Table Created in ArbConnection ssssssiesriessirerrrsrrirerrrserrrserinsrinrsrnnsenns 3 26 Figure 4 1 Startup amp Communication Options Dialog Bos 4 2 Figure 4 2 ArbConnection Menu and Link Bar rrnoonrnnnvononvnnrnnnvnnvnvnnnnnnvnnvnnnnnnnnnnnrnnvnnnnnvnnennenennn 4 3 Figure 4 3 Main Panels Tele eise gege geg gee S ng ae egene Eeer G igend 4 3 Figure 4 4 Operation Panel Selection rsrerrnnvnnrnvnnrnnnvenvnvnnnnnnvnnrnvnnnnnnvnnsnnnnennnvnnrnnnenennvnnsnnneennn 4 5 Figure 4 5 Output lq gt eee eee eee ere seede 4 6 Figure 4 6 Run Mode Control Panel E 4 8 Figure 4 7 Standard Waveforms E 4 10 Figure 4 8 Arbitrary amp Sequence Panel 4 12 Figure 4 9 Memory Partition Table Lasssssrnnetsusenmnlgan EE D geen 4 14 Figure 4 10 Waveform StudiO E 4 16 Figure 4 11 Sequence Table Example ENNEN 4 17 Figure 4 12 Half Cycle Panel EE 4 19 Figure 4 13 Oe EE e 4 20 Figure 4 14 FM Panel EE eee ere ee ee ee ER 4 21 PUI EE 4 22 Figure 4 16 Sweep Modulation Panel rnrnnnarnnnvnnnnnnavennnnnrnnnnnnnnrnnnenennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnneensnnennnnnnennnnne 4 24 Figure 4 17 FSK PSK ASK Modulation Panel wisciessicicdiaensensdceccasesnsachensatandbteralnvineeemonindaannates 4 25 Figure 4 18 Ampi Freq Hop Panel siccesnisssecencczteavenn
349. ms the leading edge transition time of the standard ramp waveform in units of percent lt tre gt 0 to 99 99 Numeric 10 Programs the trailing edge transition time of the standard ramp waveform in units of percent Response The 3152B returns the current frequency amplitude offset delay time pulse width and leading and trailing edges settings similar to the following example 166 5 0 10 10 10 APPLy SINC lt freq gt lt ampl gt lt offs gt lt cycles gt HS Syntax 0310D lt float gt lt float lt float gt lt integer gt Description This command changes the waveform function to standard sinc and programs the frequency amplitude offset and 0 crossing cycles simultaneously This command affects the output regardless of the current output function For example if the 3152B is in FM mode the 3152B will stop generating FM and will revert to the standard sinc waveform with parametric values as specified by this command Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt freq gt 10e 3 to Numeric 1e6 Programs the frequency of the standard sinc waveform 100e6 in units of Hz 5 62 Programming Reference EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual lt ampl gt 10e 3 to Numeric 5 Programs the amplitude of the standard sinc waveform 16 in units of Volts lt offs gt 7 992 to N
350. n 14400 SMEMory MODe READ WRITe WRIT v 1200A STATe OFF ON 0 1 0 v 1210A TEST ALL v 14000 Common Commands CLS v 15000 ESE 1 v 1501A OPC v 15020 RST v 14200 SRE 1 v 15030 TRG v 11000 ESE v 15018 ESR v 150408 IDN vi 1506 OPC v 15028 OPT 0 64k 1 256k 2 512k v 01850 STB v 15088 TST v 150008 As explained in Chapter 1 one or two 3152B s can be installed in a 3100R M 3152B 3100R or a 3100M carrier If you purchased this version then you Commands probably did not intend to use the 3152B as a replacement for a EADS North America Test and Services 3152A legacy program and hence the commands set is much broader and allows access to the entire functionality of the 3152B Table 5 2 lists all of the 3152B SCPI commands and checks the commands which emulate the 3152A design Expect that commands that are incompatible with the 3152A will generate errors SCPI commands that are marked with v emulate the operation of the 3152A All other commands that are not marked offer additional functionality beyond the original operation of the 3152A Programming Reference 5 13 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A Table 5 2 3152B SCPI Command Summary
351. n and open the Pulse Editor Type in the level and time intervals as shown Note that the pulse segments are being created on the screen as you type the Y Tips 1 Use the tab key to navigate Section Structure fields 2 Use Append to add an index line at the end of the list 3 Use Insert to add a segment above the selected line values Before we proceed with the design of the next section observe some values which are displayed on the Pulse Composer screen In the lower left corner of the composer the Vertical Scale is 10 V 1 25 V Div and the Horizontal Scale is 14 ms 1 4 ms Div These two values are critical for the integrity of the design because they will later be used by the program to set pulse timing These values can change as you add more sections to the pulse train ll xi View Section 1 DI DG F A CH2 x W Pulse Editor Section 1 lt DC Interyals gt Pulse Train Design Format DE Intervals Time Level Points Deg Append Insert Delete Delete All Undo r Section Properties Design Units ms Section Start O ms Repeat 2 oly Duration x DI 14 ms r Section Structure Ll Time Cumulative evel Interval Time Index Vertical Scale 10V 1 25V Div Horizontal Scale 14ms D 4ms Div e Figure 4 51 Building Section 1 of the Pulse Example EADS North America Test and Services ArbConnection 4 67 Artisan Technology Group Quality
352. n and therefore if you want to update the firmware for a problem in your system check the readme file that is associated with the update to see if an update will solve your problem There are a number of ways to check the revision level of your firmware 1 Using Explorer open the C WINDOWS SYSTEM82 folder in the Windows directory and locate the file RI3152B dll Right click with your mouse on the file name and select properties Click on the Version tab and note the Product Version information as listed in this tab 2 Using a SCPI command from an external utility you can read the firmware version by sending the following query SYST INFO FIRM VERS The response is a string showing the firmware version e g 1 04 3 Using ArbConnection select the General Filters panel from the System tab and click on the Firmware Version button The General Filters panel with the firmware revision indication is shown in Figure 7 3 7 30 Adjustments and Firmware Update EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual Firrnware Revision General Informa Figure 7 3 Firmware Revision Screen To update the 3152B firmware simply install the latest version of the Plug amp Play driver or the latest version of AroConnection or you may also just replace the RI3152B dll in the C WINDOWS SYSTEM32 folder w
353. n commands are available with the Model LXI System 3100M only Message Based carrier that has the LAN connector Configuration installed on its front panel Use these commands to configure module address and other LAN parameters It is strongly recommended that Commands this be done with a computer specialist because wrong programming may place the instrument in an unknown configuration which may lock the LAN operation completely and only hard reset will be necessary to restore the instrument to its original defaults I NOTE Last LAN configuration settings will remain as long as the instrument is turned on New LXI configuration settings will take effect only after the instrument has been powered off and on Keyword Parameter Form Default 3152A HS SYSTem IP ADDRess lt IP address gt 0167A MASK lt mask gt 0171A GATeway lt gate way gt 0169A BOOTp OFFJON 0 1 0 0168A HOSTname lt host_name gt 0170A KEEPalive STATe OFF ON 0 1 1 0173A TIMEout 2 to 300 45 0174A PROBes 21010 2 0172A EADS North America Test and Services Programming Reference 5 107 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A SYSTem IP mp adrs gt HS Syntax 0176A lt string gt Description Programs the IP address for LAN operation The programming must be performed fr
354. n of the arbitrary waveform and its outputs are disabled Measurement Functions Frequency Period Period Averaged Pulse Width and Totalize Frequency Period Averaged Frequency Range 20 Hz to 100 MHz typically gt 120 MHz Period Averaged Range 10 ns to 50 ms Resolution 7 digits in one second of gate time reduced proportionally with lower gate times Period Pulse Width Range 500 ns to 50 ms Resolution 100 ns Totalize Frequency Range 20 Hz to 100 MHz Accumulation Range 107 4 General Input Front panel TRIG IN BNC connector Trigger Level Range 10 V Sensitivity 500 mVp p Damage Level 12 V Minimum Pulse Width 210ns Slope Positive Negative transitions selectable Gate Time 100 us to 1s Reading Modes EADS North America Test and Services 3152B Specifications A 9 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Repetitive Hold Gated Time Base Type Temperature Stability Long Term Stability Publication No 980935 Rev A Continuous measurements are executed when signal is present at the input Single measurement is executed upon command Active in Gated Totalize mode only TCXO 1 ppm 0 C 40 C 1 ppm 1 year Backplane Multiple Instrument Synchronization Description Initial Skew Synchronized Waveforms Synchronized Run Modes Trigger Delay Trigger Delay Resolution Synchronization Frequency Range Standard Waveforms Arbitra
355. n the figure ell x San Furan z Se amp fon o m Pulse Train Design Format DC Intervals BS Time Level Points see Cumulative Time 0 4 8 Append Insert Delete Delete All Undo r Section Properties Design Units V ms Section Start 38 ms Repeat fi Duration x R 4 8 ms Figure 4 54 Building Section 4 of the Pulse Example The fourth pulse section is complete so we are now ready to start building the fifth and final section of the pulse as shown in Figure 4 51 Use the Edit menu to select the Append Section operation A new section number will appear but its fields will be initially empty to EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual D Ge RM RO Bi Fu Train DI IF Vertical Scale 10 1 25V Div Horizontal Scale 78ms 7 Sms Div the right of the section identifier Note that there are fast transitions required for this section that will start from the last point of the previous section and will connect to the start point of the next section Therefore select the Time Level Points option in the Pulse Train Design Format You are now ready to start programming values Type the section entries as shown in the figure ll x lx ak CH1 Hr m Pulse T
356. n the network Information on how to program the LAN parameters is given below Note that as long as the instrument is powered on the LAN parameters will not change For a new LAN setting to take effect turn the power off and then back on The 3152B is supplied with a CD containing ArbConnection and the VXIplug amp play driver and possibly an IVI compatible driver for use with the Ethernet interface It also includes the user manual You should store the CD in a safe place in case you need to restore damaged files or load the software onto different computers The latest User Manual drivers and firmware are available for download from the EADS North America Test and Services web site www ts eads na com ArbConnection lets you control instrument functions and features from a remote computer It also lets you generate and edit arbitrary waveforms sequence tables and modulated signals and then download these to the 3152B You may use ArbConnection to control the 3152B without writing software However for maximum flexibility you may control the 3152B at a low level using SCPI commands in your own software Note that for register based models SCPI commands need to be directed to a DLL instead of to the VISA library In either case you may use SCPI commands through ArbConnection s command editor without programming Chapter 4 provides installation and operating instructions for ArbConnection The 3100M 3152B has a front panel connec
357. nals having a low slew rate may cause jitter because of noise Therefore make sure that the transition time is fast enough to minimize jitter The TRG PLL IN input is also used in FSK ASK and PSK modes where the output shifts between two frequencies amplitudes or phases The output signal has the nominal frequency amplitude EADS North America Test and Services Introduction 1 13 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual EXT SCLK EXT 10MHz Output Waveforms Standard FIXED Waveforms 1 14 Introduction Publication No 980935 Rev A and phase when the TRG PLL IN level is at logic 0 and a shifted frequency amplitude or phase when the TRG PLL IN level is at logic 1 The EXT SCLK connector accepts sample clock signals from an external source It accommodates frequencies from DC to 300 MHz with a PECL positive ECL amplitude level This signal replaces the internal clock generator either for low noise applications or for synchronization purposes The sample clock input is active only after selecting the External Sample Clock Source option This input accepts a 10MHz reference signal and is labeled as PM IN on the 3152B but can be programmed as either function At the factory this input is configured for TTL logic levels It may be changed to 0 dBm but only by qualified service personnel The EXT 10MHz input is available for applicat
358. nate syntax which allows a table of sequence definitions to be downloaded directly Use the following command to program a complete table from an array seq data lt array gt This will program the entire sequence table without programming individual links The sequence generator steps through the link list in descending order In Continuous Run mode the sequence repeats automatically after the last step has been completed When the generator is in Triggered mode the output stops at the last point of the last waveform in the sequence In Gated mode the sequence always completes after the gate stop signal To remove a link from the sequence table use the following command seq del lt n gt This deletes a link from a sequence table where lt n gt is the step number to be removed To delete the entire sequence table use the following command seq del all This deletes the entire sequence table A CAUTION The seq del all command erases the entire sequence table There is no undo operation available for this command EADS North America Test and Services Operation 3 27 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Controlling the Sequence seq adv auto Advance Modes seq adv trig seq adv step seq adv mix 3 28 Operation Publication No 980935 Rev A Use the following commands to control how the sequence advances through the sequen
359. nchor Defines where the created waveform will end Note that as you change the end point the right anchor will automatically adjust itself to the selected end point The example shows end point set at point 499 alo xi EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Dae amp 2 Ka GE SG VS AR fal bai po a Wavelength 1024 Deviaton 100000 R Anchor 500 Anchor Start pts fm i End pts 500 Defaut r Peak Deviation J Max f1050000 Cancel Mn a OK Wave Properties Cycles 3 Start Phase 0 Power 1 Vertical Scale 100e3Hz 12500Hz Div Horizontal Scale 1kPts 0 1kPts Div Figure 4 58 Generating Sine Modulation Using the FM Composer Max Peak Deviation This parameter defines the forward peak deviation Note that the forward peak deviation cannot exceed the pre defined Deviation parameter as shown on the Toolbar In case you need to exceed the pre defined peak value you must quit this box and modify the Deviation parameter to provide sufficient range for the forward peak deviation range Min Peak Deviation This parameter defines the backwards peak deviation Note that the backwards peak deviation cannot exceed the pre defined Deviation parameter as shown on the Toolbar In case you need to exceed the pre defined peak value you must quit this box and modify the Deviation parameter to
360. nction will be raised to Note that even powers will provide waveforms that are positive all points gt 0 whereas odd powers will provide functions that are positive or negative 50 of the time Response The 3152B returns the current power value for the triangle function SQUare DCYCle lt duty cycle gt HS Syntax 0720A lt float gt Description Programs duty cycle of the standard square waveform Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt duty cycle gt 0 to 99 99 Numeric 50 Programs the square wave duty cycle parameter in units of percent ratio of on time to off time Response The 3152B returns the current duty cycle value for the square wave function 5 46 Programming Reference EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual PULSe DELay lt delay gt HS Syntax 0730A lt float gt Description Programs delay of the standard pulse waveform Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt delay gt 0 to Numeric 10 Programs the pulse delay parameter in units of percent 99 999 Response The 3152B returns the current pulse delay value PULSe WIDth lt pulse width gt HS Syntax 0731A lt float gt Description Programs pulse high portion of the standard pulse waveform Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt pulse widt
361. nd Commands trac def 1 2000 Defines segment 1 as having 2 000 sample points Any waveform downloaded to this segment must have exactly 2 000 data points This command has two variables segment number and segment size Note that numbers not names are assigned to segments Segment numbers range from 1 through 16 384 You may define the segments in any order For example you may define segment 3 then segment 1 and then later define segment 2 You may not change the size of a segment once you have defined it You cannot query the segment definition parameters so make sure you keep track of them if you intend to partition the memory into many segments EADS North America Test and Services Operation 3 19 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Loading Arbitrary 3 20 Operation Publication No 980935 Rev A You may use the above command to create as many segments as required However if you have many segments it is more efficient to combine all segments into a single waveform and then create a memory partition table for the individual waveform segments To do this use the following command segm lt array gt Downloads the entire memory partition table to the instrument in one operation Chapter 5 provides details on the use of this command Deleting Memory Segments To delete a waveform memory segment use the following command
362. nd time duration The Pulse Composer can also multiply pulse sections to create pulse duplication along lengthy time intervals When you finally have your pulse design on the screen the program determines if the pulse design will fit in one memory segment or use multiple segments and employ the sequence generator for repeatable segments In either case bear in mind that if you already have some waveforms stored in memory segments these will be erased to make room for the new pulse design If you insist on keeping arbitrary waveforms and still download complex pulses you can check the Force pulse to one segment option and the 3152B will do some extra muscle flexing to fit the pulse as required To launch the Pulse Composer point and click on the Pulse tab in the Panels bar Figure 4 39 shows an example of the Pulse Composer The Pulse Composer has three main sections Commands bar Toolbar and Waveform screen Refer to Figure 4 43 throughout the descriptions to follow The Pulse Composer menu bar provides access to standard Windows commands such as File and View In addition there are ArbConnection specific commands such as Edit Wave and System In general clicking on one of the menus pulls down a list of commands Clicking on a listed command may then either open a dialog box or generate an immediate action For example clicking on File and then Exit will cause the immediate termination of the Pulse Composer The various
363. nd toggles the 3152B output relay Note that for safety the outputs always defaults to off even if the last instrument setting before power down was on Parameters Range Type Default Description 0 1 Discrete 0 Toggles the output relay between on and off Response The 3152B returns 1 if the output is on or 0 if the output is off OUTPut SYNC OFF ON 0 1 HS Syntax 0241A lt 0 1 gt Description This command toggles the 3152B SYNC output Note that for safety the SYNC output always defaults to off even if the last instrument setting before power down was on EADS North America Test and Services Programming Reference 5 29 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A Parameters Range Type Default Description 0 1 Discrete 0 Toggles the SYNC output between on and off Response The 3152B returns 1 if the SYNC output is on or 0 if the SYNC output is off OUTPut SYNC POSition lt position gt HS Syntax 0242A lt long gt Description Programs the 3152B SYNC position Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt position gt 0 to 1e6 1 Numeric 0 Sets the SYNC position in waveform points The sync Integer only position can be programmed in increments of 4 points minimum effectively 2 points in legacy mode The range is extended to 4e6 1 when the 4M memory option is installed Response The 3152
364. ne parameter affects the output characteristics in one of the interrupted run modes i e triggered burst In this case this parameter defines where the signal idles between triggers There are two options CW and DC The DC option will set the idle state to a DC level meaning that in between triggers the output resides on a DC level and generates modulation when a trigger is accepted The CW is similar except the signal idles on the pre trigger CW frequency setting executes the modulation upon receipt of a legal trigger signal and returns to continuous CW frequency output AM Parameters 4 22 ArbConnection Figure 4 15 AM Panel Modulating Wave Defines the shape of the modulating waveform There are four built in standard wave shapes Sine Triangle Square or Ramp These waveforms can be adjusted for their frequency and deviation range Click on the button next to the required modulating waveform shape to select it The modulating waveform can be selected independently for each channel Freq Programs the frequency of the modulating waveform Note that the frequency setting must be smaller than the CW frequency EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual Sweep EADS North America Test and Services ArbConnection 4 23 for the AM function to operate correctly Note that the
365. ne the function for your application This turns on the FSK function Program the FSK parameters to fine tune the function for your application This turns on the ASK function Program the ASK parameters to fine tune the function for your application This turns on the PSK function Program the PSK parameters to fine tune the function for your application This turns on the frequency hopping function Program Programming Reference 5 71 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A the frequency hopping parameters to fine tune the function for your application AHOPping Discrete This turns on the amplitude hopping function Program the amplitude hopping parameters to fine tune the function for your application 3D Discrete This turns on the 3D function Program the 3D parameters to fine tune the function for your application Response The 3152B returns OFF AM FM SWE FSK ASK PSK FHOP AHOP or 3D depending on the current modulation type setting MODulation CARRier lt frequency gt HS Syntax 0049A lt float gt Description Programs the CW frequency Note that the CW waveform is sine only and its frequency setting is separate from the standard sine waveform The CW frequency setting is valid for all modulation types Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt frequency gt 10e 3to Numeric 1e6 Pr
366. nection is to use Equation Editor Equation Editor let you write equations for the desired waveform and lets ArbConnection calculate the values and display them on the graph Equation Editor detects syntax errors and can auto scale your waveforms so that no dynamic range is lost When you invoke Equation Editor the dialog box shown in Figure 4 36 appears The following paragraphs describe how to use the features of Equation Editor Anchor r Waveform Amplitude m Level Adjuste Start pts jo Max 2047 Cycles J Auto_Scaling End pts fi 023 Min 2048 if C Original Scale _Defaut Equation History Cancel Amplitude p Insert Wave Clear Open Save 1 _Lancel L ok Jampsin 1 O oma p p f 0 1 v Aliases gt gt Figure 4 36 Equation Editor Dialog Box EADS North America Test and Services ArbConnection 4 47 There are four sub group parameters in the equation editor plus control buttons and the equation field These parts are described below Anchor The anchors define start and end point at which the equation will be generated By default the anchors are placed at the start and the end of the horizontal time scale however the equation can be limited to a specific time scale by moving the anchor points from their default locations Start defines the first point where the created wave will start Note that if you change the start point the left anchor will au
367. needed to build the required pulse train Instrument Settings Shows the amplitude offset and sample clock settings that will be changed on the generator The settings in this summary cannot be affected from the Pulse Editor options settings These are computed and modified automatically for the current pulse train pattern and will change from pattern to pattern Accept Reject These buttons are the final checks before you download the pulse train to the instrument If you are unhappy with the instrument setting and want to change some of the options there is still time click on the Reject button and do more changes Click on the Accept button to complete the download process EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual The FM Composer The FM Composer looks and feels almost like the waveform composer except there is a major difference in what it does If you look at the opening screen as shown in Figure 4 53 you ll see that the vertical axis is marked with frequencies You ll see later that as you draw waveforms on the FM composer screen these waveforms represent frequency changes and not amplitude changes as are generated by the waveform composer The FM composer is a great tool for controlling frequency agility by generating the agility curve as an arbitrary waveform For example
368. ng in no time EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual BS Untitled 3D Composer kb 3 loj x File Options Download Design About Su w oes Ae Shared Horizontal Controls di X 1ms 0 1ms Diw Y SV 0 625W Diw View Parameters IV Amplitude I Line Sine IV Frequency IV Phase Vertical Controls X Ims P 1ms Diw RE ency X Ims P 1ms Diw Y 360Deg 45Deg Div Append 1 ert IG te Figure 4 59 3D Composer Screen The 3D composer has three main sections Shared horizontal Controls Vertical Controls and Graphical Screens The panels on the left are used for designing the waveform parameters and the screens on the right side depict the shape of the profile Below find a detailed description of all of these sections Refer to Figure 4 55 throughout the description Shared Horizontal The Shared Horizontal Control has two tabs View and Parameters Controls View The View tab is useful if you are interested in programming 1 or two profiles only and do not care to see other screens Check the boxes for the profiles you wish to program only and these will be shown on the screen For example if you check the Amplitude and the Frequency options the Phase screens will not be visible EADS North America Test and Services ArbConnection 4 77 Artisan Technolog
369. nificantly different The standard terminology of pulse width defines the width of the pulse at the mid point of its peak to peak amplitude level Therefore if you change the rise and fall time the pulse width changes accordingly The digital pulse high time parameter defines how long the pulse will dwell on the high level so even if you change the rise and fall times the high time remains constant The pulse high time is programmed in units of seconds Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt high gt 0 to 1e3 Numeric 1e 3 Sets the width of the high time for the pulse shape in units of seconds Note that the sum of all parameters including the high time must not exceed the programmed pulse period and therefore it is recommended that the pulse period be programmed before all other pulse parameters Response The 3152B returns the current high time value in units of seconds DPULse POLarity NORMal COMPlemented INVerted HS Syntax 0186A lt 0 1 2 gt Description Programs the polarity of the pulse in reference to the base line level The polarity options are Normal where the pulse is generated exactly as programmed Inverted where the pulse is inverted about the 0 level base line and Complemented where the pulse is inverted about its mid amplitude level Parameters Name Type Default Description NORMal Discrete NORM Programs normal pulse output COMPlemeted Discrete Programs complemented pulse output INVerted Dis
370. nmjitdimdnsemnnetenaninit 3 8 SAGN PN MA ee de 3 8 B rst RUM NN re 3 9 Selecting the TEEN 3 10 Selecting the Trigger Level ET 3 11 Selecting the Trigger Slope ANEREN 3 11 Using GL SM EET TE EE EE NE 3 12 Activating the Backplane TTLTrg Lne saLuassmemmissummmsnnbeamemeesnnsisnkdiei e 3 12 Example Generating Standard WaveformS EEN 3 13 Using the Apply COmmManNd sissen e E R tices Ea ENE EE REEN 3 13 Generating Standard Waveforms c ccc ssssscssssssesessssesessssceucsescssesssesecsssssesitavsncacsesesetsesenstanees 3 14 Standard Waveform Parameters rarrnrrnnnnnnnnvonnnnnnnvnnnnrnnnnnnnnvnnrnnnnnnrnrrnnnnnnnnrnnsnnnnnennernnnnennnne 3 16 Using the Apply en 3 16 Generating Arbitrary WaveformS E 3 17 What Are Arbitrary Waveforms Ae e SE AE dE 3 18 Managing Arbitrary Waveform Memory ooo ccescscssessesesseseseeneseeeesesesnesesesesneacecensasaneeeasecens 3 18 Memory Management Commandes uk 3 19 Loading Arbitrary Waveforms ccccsecesssssesssesessssssssescseserscscesassescatsesstitssetseneeisenssitasantenteneens 3 20 Selecting 12 bit or 16 bit Waveform Resolution rrnrrnnvrrnnnnonvrrnnnnrnvrrnnnnnnnrnnnnrnnnrnnnnrnnnrnnnennn 3 22 Selecting Code Compatibility with the Legacy 21728 3 22 Changing the Sample Clock Frequency EEN 3 23 Using the External Sample Clock Input 3 24 Generating Sequenced Waveforms AAA 3 25 Seg nce TA 3 26 Controlling the Sequence Advance Modes AAA 3 28 PTT le e EE REE ge ede ce EN EE 3 29 Ga II
371. nnectors into the backplane receptacle The ejectors will be at right angles to the front panel when the instrument is properly seated into the backplane Use the captive screws above and below the card ejector handles to secure the instrument into the chassis EADS North America Test and Services Inatallation 2 1 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Controlling the Instrument from Remote Installing Software Utilities Connecting to a LAN Network 2 2 Installation Publication No 980935 Rev A In general the 3152B is controlled from a remote device using the VXIbus slot 0 controller In addition when configured in a 3100M carrier there is an additional front panel LAN connector that allows communication with a web page LXI specification and USB port This allows you to transfer data directly to the waveform memory To communicate with the 3152B you may either write your own software or use one of the soft front panel programs that allows access to all instrument modes functions and parameters If you wish to use ArbConnection insert the supplied CD and follow the instructions on the screen to install the program You may also use the soft panels that are supplied with the VXIplug amp play drivers on the same CD 3100M 3152B users that intend to control the instrument from a web page must program the LAN parameters before it can be used o
372. nntoccetddsapeadeseaes ordntasasbat an manhenen Eeer 4 28 Figure 4 19 Auxiliary E 4 29 Figure 4 20 Counter Timer Panel uuussnessamenimaseren nsmuduaninep ae 4 30 Figure 4 21 Digital Pulse Generator Panel errovrnnnnnvvrnnnvnvnnnvnnnnnvnvnnnvnnnnnnvnnnnvnnnvnnennsrnnnnnnnennr 4 31 Figure 4 22 X Instrument Synchronization Pool Uiet 4 32 Figure 4 23 Adjacent Synchronization between Two Instruments ssseeessseessssrnneerrnerssrrrrnee 4 34 Figure 4 24 LBUS Synchronization between Adjacent Slots AAA 4 34 Figure 4 25 ECLT Synchronization Example ssicccscsstsscassscsteteeschncetassaensnatasseecetabadeedtnestetensexnsonnees 4 35 Figure 4 26 SE 4 36 Figure 4 27 General Filters Panel 4 37 Figure 4 28 Calibration Panel E 4 38 Figure 4 29 Composers Aves eee 4 39 Figure 4 30 Wave Composer Opening Gcreen ENEE 4 40 Figure 4 31 Open Waveform Dialog BOX EEN 4 41 Figure 4 32 Zooming In on Waveform Segments Aua 4 43 EADS North America Test and Services xiii Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A Figure 4 33 Generating Distorted Sine Waves from the Built in Library ssrrrnrnrnnnronnrrrrrrnnnnernnr 4 45 Figure 4 34 Toolbar EE mpidmeldngteenn agi ieiteenietdneened 4 45 Figure 4 35 Waveform SC ER Ged adasendemasantncieeiue 4 46 Figure 4 36 Equation Editor Dialog E 4 47 Figure 4 37 Equation Editor ue E 4 51 Fi
373. ns and refer to Figure 4 49 throughout the following description As shown in Figure 4 49 the Pulse Editor option dialog box is divided into four functional groups Mode of operation Design Units Memory Management and Pulse Transition Management These groups are described below Mode of Operation There are three options in the mode of operation group Freely Select Mode of Operation use this mode of operation to let the generator decide for itself how to create pulses in 3152B waveform memory Force Pulse Train to Single Segment recommended if you are using one pulse section only In this case the pulse waveform will occupy one segment only and the generator will automatically be set to operate in arbitrary mode Force Pulse Sections to Multiple Segments places each section of the pulse train into a different memory segment and the generator will automatically be set to operate in sequenced mode Select this option for the example we are going to build later ll xi hy i T a De RH E Ep Sent ku train Ae F on CH2 Pulse Editor Options j Mode of Operation Memory Management C Freely Select Mode of Operation C Do not Override Loaded Segments Force Pulse Train to Single Segment Allow Pulse Design with no Arbitrary Waveform Mode Limitation e Force Pulse Sections to Multiple Segments Sequenced Waveform Mode Pulse Transition Management Allow System Control rm Design Units
374. ns to 20 seconds in increments of 20 ns The 3152B is programmable to drive or receive triggers on the VXIbus backplane trigger lines TTLTrgO through TTLTrg7 It is important to manage the trigger lines so that only one VXI instrument drives any given line The signals through the TTLTrg lines are always TTL Use the following commands to program the backplane trigger lines outp ttlt lt n gt 1 This command defines a specific TTLTrg line as an output The SYNC signal is then applied to the active TTLTrg output and the front panel SYNC OUT connector The argument lt n gt designates the required TTLTrg line and can take values from 0 through 7 outp ttlt lt n gt 0 This command removes the output definition from a specific TTLTrg line and permits re definition of this line as an input EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A Example Generating Standard Waveforms Using the Apply Command 3152B User Manual Previous paragraphs provided sinusoidal waveform examples showing how to set amplitude and offset This section expands on that capability covering all nine standard waveforms in the 3152B internal library sine triangle square pulse ramp Gaussian pulses exponential pulses DC and noise The following command sequence example demonstrates how to select a standard ramp wavefo
375. ntation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A Changing the Sample Clock Frequency 3152B User Manual e Waveform interlace is changed to 2 waveform size must divide by 2 e Vertical resolution of arbitrary waveforms is 12 bits 3152B has 16 bit resolution The 3152B has Legacy Compatibility mode enabled by default For Models 3100M and 3100R Legacy Compatibility mode is disabled by default the full 3152B specifications apply For any of the above products you may enable or disable Legacy Compatibility mode by using the following commands form inst leg Enables Legacy Compatibility mode by downgrading specific specifications to approximate those of Model 3152A form inst mod Disables Legacy Compatibility mode The full 3152B performance specifications apply Users should be careful not to confuse waveform frequency with sample clock frequency For the 3152B the term waveform frequency is valid for standard waveforms only and controls the waveform frequency at the output connector Waveform frequency is measured in units of Hertz Hz On the other hand the term sample clock frequency is associated with arbitrary and sequenced waveforms only and defines the frequency at which the clock generator accesses the waveform sample points Sample clock frequency is measured in units of samples per second S s The following equation computes the frequency of an arbitra
376. o the OUTPUT connector through a mechanical relay When writing software to control the 3152B provide a 2 ms delay to make sure that the signal output is stable before you proceed with the next step of the test Use the following commands to turn the output on and off outp 1 Turns the output on outp 0 Turns the output off The 3152B defaults to a 1 MHz 5 Vp p sine wave when you apply power or reset the unit If you turn the output on before changing any settings the output defaults to a sine wave signal For safety the SYNC OUT connector of the 3152B defaults to the Off state when the unit is first powered up or receives a software reset To avoid the production of random signals at the output connector keep the SYNC output in the Off state while setting up the instrument The SYNC output signal is hard wired to the output connector and therefore the output impedance remains low regardless of whether the output is on or off Use the following command to turn the SYNC output on and off outp 1 Turns the SYNC output on outp 0 Turns the SYNC output off When you apply power or reset the 3152B the SYNC output defaults to a single pulse that has a fixed width of four sample clock periods The main purpose of the SYNC output is to produce a pulse that other devices may synchronize with The width of the SYNC signal SYNC Source might be too narrow for slower devices The pulse width and several other pa
377. oes not download waveforms Use the memory partition table only if you have merged multiple waveforms into one The purpose of the partition table is to divides the memory contents into separate segments each containing a waveform If you download waveforms using Waveform Studio then the memory is already segmented for the waveforms and there is no need to use the memory partition table EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual Using Waveform Studio EADS North America Test and Services ArbConnection 4 15 Waveform Studio Figure 4 10 provides access to waveforms that are already stored as files in the host computer You may download waveforms from such files to various segments in the 3152B waveform memory and later use them as individual waveforms or combine them into complex sequences Waveform Studio has a Segment Table section and a Sequence Table section as described below Segment Table Using the segment table you may list and download waveform files that are stored on the host computer For each waveform the table shows the segment number associated file name length and download status You may also download waveforms to memory segments using Wave Composer or individual function calls but Waveform Studio makes the process easy by combining multiple and complex command
378. ograms the frequency of the carrier waveform in units 100e6 of Hz Note that the CW waveform is a sine only and its frequency setting is independent of the standard sine waveform frequency Response The 3152B returns the current carrier frequency value MODulation CARRier BASeline CARRier DCX HS Syntax 0048A lt 0 1 gt Description Programs the carrier baseline when the modulation is used in triggered mode Parameters Name Type Default Description CARRier Discrete CARR This selects the carrier as the baseline for the modulation function when operating in one of the interrupted run modes The 3152B will generate a continuous unmodulated sinusoidal waveform CW until triggered Upon receipt of a valid trigger it generates the modulated waveform and then resumes generating continuous CW DC Discrete This selects DC level as the baseline for the modulation function for operation in one of the interrupted run modes The 3152B generates continuous DC until triggered Upon receipt of a valid trigger it generates the modulated waveform and then resumes generating a continuous DC level Response The 3152B returns CARR or DC depending on the current carrier baseline setting 5 72 Programming Reference EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual This group is used to control par
379. ol panel 3 Note The normal color of a displayed number is dark blue If EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A The Operation 3152B User Manual you modify the number its color changes to a lighter shade of blue indicating that the 3152B has not been updated yet with the new value Clicking on the Modify Execute knob will update the instrument and restore the color of the digital readout to dark blue indicating that the actual 3152B setting now matches the displayed number Also note that the digital readout has an auto detect mechanism for high and low limits You cannot exceed the limits when using the dial but you may if you use the keypad If you enter a number that exceeds the limits ArbConnection will not let you update the instrument with the setting until you correct it Y Operation Run Mode Standard Arbitran Sequence Half Cycle gt Modufation Figure 4 4 Operation Panel Selection The Operation panels provide control over the basic operation of the 3152B From these panels you may select the output function Panels and run mode turn the output on and off and adjust parameters for various functions There are five panels in this group e Output e Run Mode e Standard e Arbitrary Sequence e Half Cycle The Output panel is always visible because this is the
380. om either USB or GPIB controllers Parameters Name Range Type Description lt ip adrs gt 0 to 255 String Programs the IP address for LAN operation Programming must be performed from USB or GPIB interfaces Current IP address can be observed on LAN Properties front panel display Response The 3152B returns the current IP address value similar to the following 192 168 0 6 SYSTem IP MASK lt mask adrs gt HS Syntax 0171A lt string gt Description Programs the subnet mask address for LAN operation The programming must be performed from either USB or GPIB controllers Parameters Name Range Type Description lt mask adrs gt 0 to 255 String Programs the subnet mask address for LAN operation Programming must be performed from USB or GPIB interfaces Current subnet mask address can be observed on LAN Properties front panel display Response The 3152B returns the current IP address value similar to the following 255 255 255 0 SYSTem IP BOOTp OFF ON 0 1 HS Syntax 0169A lt 0 1 gt Description Use this command to toggle BOOTP mode on and off Parameters Range Type Default Description 0 1 Discrete 0 Toggles BOOTP mode on and off When on the IP address is administrated automatically by the system Response The 3152B returns 0 or 1 depending on the current BOOTP setting SYSTem IP GATeway lt gate adrs gt HS Syntax 0168A lt string gt Description Programs the gateway address for LAN operat
381. ommands and their SCPI counterparts The first step in the process of using the HS command set is to place Invoking HS the instrument in HS mode Do this using the following SCPI Command Mode mmand INSTrument MODE FAST To terminate FAST mode to and resume the usage of standard SCPI commands use the following HS command 0150A0 Note that 015A0 is the only HS command without a corresponding SCPI command The implied SCPI command would be INSTrument MODE NORMal but this command does not exist because it can only have an effect when the instrument is in HS mode Likewise there is no HS command that corresponds to the EADS North America Test and Services Programming Reference 5 5 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Rules for Using HS Command Mode 5 6 Programming Reference Publication No 980935 Rev A command INSTrument MODE FAST In HS mode the instrument accepts HS commands only SCPI commands sent when the 3152A is in HS mode will generate errors Likewise in NORMal SCPI mode HS commands will not be accepted HS commands must be sent to the instrument in accordance with the following usage rules 1 Unlike SCPI command syntax a space or spaces may not be placed between HS commands and their parameters For example the HS command 0100A1 is valid The HS command 0100A 1 is incorrect and will generate an
382. on lt header gt Discrete Contains information on the size of the binary block that contains waveform data lt binary_block gt Binary Block of binary data that contains waveform data points as explained above TRACe DEFine lt segment_ gt lt length gt HS Syntax 10102 lt integer long gt Description Use this command to define the size of a specific memory segment The final size of the arbitrary memory is 1 Meg points 4 Meg optional The memory can be partitioned to smaller segments up to 16k segments This function allows the definition of segment size Total length of memory segments cannot exceed the size of the waveform memory 5 54 Programming Reference EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual ei NOTE The 3152B operates in interlaced mode where four memory cells generate one byte of data Therefore segment size can be programmed in numbers evenly divisible by four only For example 2096 bytes is an acceptable length for a binary block 2002 is not a multiple of 4 therefore the generator will generate an error message if this segment length is used If you use 3152A emulation mode FORM INST LEG use the command FORM WAVE RES 12BIT to allow the 3152B to mimic the by 2 interlace of the 3152A Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt segment_ gt 1to16k
383. on Choosing a Static IP Address EADS North America Test and Services Inatallation 2 3 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Choosing a Static IP Address 2 4 Installation Publication No 980935 Rev A e Subnet mask A code that helps the network device determine whether another device is on the same network or a different network e Gateway IP The IP address of a device that acts as a gateway which is a connection between two networks If your network does not have a gateway set this parameter to 0 0 0 0 For a Network Administered by a Network Administrator If you are adding the Ethernet device to an existing Ethernet network you must choose IP addresses carefully Contact your network administrator to obtain an appropriate static IP address for your Ethernet device Also have the network administrator assign the proper subnet mask and gateway IP For a Network without a Network Administrator If you are assembling your own small Ethernet network you can choose your own IP addresses The format of the IP addresses is determined by the subnet mask You should use the same subnet mask as the computer you are using with your Ethernet device If your subnet mask is 255 255 255 0 the first three numbers in every IP address on the network must be the same If your subnet mask is 255 255 0 0 only the first two numbers in the IP addresses
384. on No 980935 Rev A Waveforms 3152B User Manual download memory segments to the 3152B For maximum flexibility you may download waveforms to the 3152B from your own program The following example shows how to clear the partition table and set up three memory segments of 4 000 1 000 and 64 sample points First clear the entire memory partition table to eliminate any fragmented segments Use the delete command as follows trac del all Removes the entire partition table and allows you to define new segments Next define the waveform memory segments by specifying each segment number and its length trac def 1 4000 Defines the length of segment 1 to be 4 000 sample points Waveforms downloaded to this segment must have exactly 4 000 sample points trac def 2 1000 Defines the length of segment 2 to be 1 000 Waveforms downloaded to this segment must have exactly 1 000 sample points trac def 3 64 Defines the length of segment 3 to be 64 Waveforms downloaded to this segment must have exactly 1 000 sample points This completes the setup for the three memory segments Alternatively you may use the following command to create the entire partition table at once segm lt array gt Downloads the entire memory partition table to the instrument in one operation Once you have defined the waveform memory segments the next step is to specify the active segment This sets up the following conditions 1 The next tim
385. on the network must match For either subnet mask numbers between 1 and 254 are valid choices for the last number of the IP address Numbers between 0 and 255 are valid for the third number of the IP address but this number must be the same as other devices on your network if your subnet mask is 255 255 255 0 Table 2 1 shows examples of valid and invalid IP addresses for a network using subnet mask 255 255 255 0 All valid IP addresses contain the same first three numbers The IP addresses in this table are for example purposes only If you are setting up your own network you probably do not have a gateway so you should set these values to 0 0 0 0 EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual Table 2 1 Valid and Invalid IP Addresses for Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 IP Address Comment 123 234 45 213 Valid The first three numbers match the previous IP address The fourth number must be a unique number in the range of 1 to 254 123 202 45 214 Invalid Second number does not match the previous IP addresses The first three numbers must match on all IP addresses with subnet mask 255 255 255 0 123 234 45 0 Invalid The first three numbers are valid but the fourth number cannot be 0 123 234 45 255 Invalid The first three numbers are valid but the fourth number cannot be 255 ai
386. on the sweep boundaries as it is automatically adjusted by the software to the required interval At the end of the sweep cycle the output waveform maintains the sweep stop frequency setting except if the 3152B is in continuous run mode where the sweep repeats itself continuously Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt time gt 1 4e 6to Numeric 1e 3 Programs the sweep time Sweep time is programmed 40 in units of s Response The 3152B returns the current sweep time SWEep DIRection UP DOWN HS Syntax 1601A lt 0 1 gt Description This specifies if the 3152B sweeps from start to stop UP or from stop to start DOWN frequencies Sweep direction does not affect the sweep time or frequency At the end of the sweep cycle the output waveform normally maintains the sweep stop frequency setting but will maintain the start frequency if the DOWN option is selected except if the 3152B is in continuous run mode where the sweep repeats itself continuously Parameters Name Type Default Description UP Discrete UP Selects the sweep up direction DOWN Discrete Select the sweep down direction Response The 3152B returns UP or DOWN depending on the selected direction setting SWEep SPACing LiNear LOGarithmic HS Syntax 1602A lt 0 1 gt Description This specifies the sweep step type Two options are available logarithmic or linear In linear the incremental steps between the frequencies are uniform throughout the
387. onnect the 3152B output to the oscilloscope input channel 1 Connect the 3152B SYNC to the oscilloscope input channel 2 Configure model 3152B controls as follows Waveform Modulated Modulation FSK Carrier Freq 2MHz Shift Frequency 4 MHz Baud Rate 10 kHz Marker Index 1 Sync On Output On Using ArbConnection prepare and download 10 step FSK list with alternating O and 1 Test Procedure 1 Verify FSK operation on the oscilloscope as follows Waveform Square wave Period 0 2 ms Max Freq 4 MHz Min Freq 2 MHz Test Results Pass Fail 6 30 Performance Checks EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual PSK Equipment Oscilloscope Preparation 1 Configure the oscilloscope as follows Time Base 0 2 ms Amplitude 1 V div 2 Connect the 3152B output to the oscilloscope input channel 1 3 Connect the 3152B SYNC to the oscilloscope input channel 2 4 Configure model 3152B controls as follows Reset Waveform Modulated Modulation PSK Carrier Freq 10 kHz Shift Phase 180 Baud Rate 10 kHz Sync On Output On 5 Using ArbConnection prepare and download 10 step PSK list with alternating O and 1 Test Procedure 1 Verify PSK operation on the os
388. ontrol Data bits Marker Index The marker setting programs a step index in the control data string to output a pulse at the SYNC output connector The SYNC State button must be turned on to generate the ASK EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual Ampl Freq Hop EADS North America Test and Services ArbConnection 4 27 marker output The Ampl Freq Hop panel Figure 4 18 contains parameters for controlling the hop modulation function To turn one of the functions on and off click on the appropriate button in the State group The output has two hop options Fixed and Variable In Fixed mode the output steps through the pre assigned hop values at a constant rate as programmed using the dwell time parameter In Variable mode the output dwells on each step for a period of time that is programmed in the Dwell Time field in the hop data table that is programmed when using the Variable Hold option The various groups in this panel are described below State The State buttons enable or disable the hop functions General The General group contains parameters that are common to all of the hop functions These are CW frequency and baseline CW Frequency The CW Frequency is the frequency of the pre modulation carrier waveform Baseline The Baseline parameter affects the ou
389. ope to get 6 division of display 2 Perform Sine flatness DAC waveforms tests using Table 6 17 Table 6 17 Sine Wave Flatness DAC Output Test at 5 V 3152B Sine Frequenc Error Limits Oscilloscope Reading 1MHz 640 3Divisions _ 10MHz 6 0 3 Divisions 50MHz 6 0 6 Divisions 1 100 MHz 6 0 6 Divisions L 6 10 Performance Checks EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual 3 Change amplitude to 10V and adjust the vertical controls of the Oscilloscope to get 6 division of display Perform sine wave flatness DAC waveforms tests using Table 6 18 Table 6 18 Sine Wave Flatness DAC Output Test at 10 V 3152B Sine Frequency Error Limits Oscilloscope Reading X X 6 0 3 Divisions 0 3 Divisions IT 10MHz 640 3Divisions JJ 50MHz 640 6Divisions pp 100 MHz 640 6Divisions 1 TI Sine Wave Flatness Equipment Oscilloscope DDS Output Preparation 1 Configure the Oscilloscope follows Termination 50 Q 20 dB feedthrough attenuator at the oscilloscope input Setup As required for the test 2 Connect 3152B output to the oscilloscope input 3 Configure the 3152B as follows Waveform Modulated Modulation OFF Amplitude 5V Output On CW Frequency Initially 1 kHz then as required by the test Test Proc
390. or Listed below are events causing setting conflicts 1 Sum of pulse or ramp parameters is more than 100 percent Corrective action Change parameters to correct the problem 2 ampl 2 offset is more than 16 Vp p Corrective action Reduce offset to 0 then change amplitude offset values to correct the problem 3 Activating filters when the 3152B is set to output the built in sine waveform or activating the built in sine waveform when one of the 3152B filters is turned on Corrective action If in sine select another function and activate the filter s 4 Activating burst mode when the 3152B is set to sequence mode 5 122 Programming Reference EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual or activating sequence mode when the 3152B is set to burst mode Corrective action Remove the 3152B from burst or sequence and then selected the desired mode 5 Changing operating mode from triggered to continuous when the 3152B is set to single sequence advance or changing the operating mode from continuous to triggered when the 3152B is set to automatic sequence advance mode Corrective action Observe the 3152B advance mode while setting sequence advance There are other setting conflict errors which are exclusively dedicated for the pulse function These errors are listed and described in
391. or used for manufacture by anyone other than EADS North America Test and Services The information herein has been developed at private expense and may only be used for operation and maintenance reference purposes or for purposes of engineering evaluation and incorporation into technical specifications and other documents which specify procurement of products from EADS North America Test and Services DISCLAIMER Buyer acknowledges and agrees that it is responsible for the operation of the goods purchased and should ensure that they are used properly and in accordance with this handbook and any other instructions provided by Seller EADS North America Test and Services products are not specifically designed manufactured or intended to be used as parts assemblies or components in planning construction maintenance or operation of a nuclear facility or in life support or safety critical applications in which the failure of the EADS North America Test and Services product could create a situation where personal injury or death could occur Should Buyer purchase EADS North America Test and Services product for such unintended application Buyer shall indemnify and hold EADS North America Test and Services its officers employees subsidiaries affiliates and distributors harmless against all claims arising out of a claim for personal injury or death associated with such unintended use Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed
392. orms only is affected Response The 3152B returns the current modulating waveform frequency value The returned value will be in scientific notation for example 100mHz would be returned as 100e 3 AM DEPth lt depth gt HS Syntax 0780A lt float gt Description This command sets the modulating wave frequency for the built in standard modulating waveform library Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt depth gt 0 to 100 Numeric 50 Programs the depth of the modulating waveform in units of percent EADS North America Test and Services Programming Reference 5 75 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A Response The 3152B returns the current modulating depth value AM EXEcute HS Syntax 07820 Description This command computes the AM waveform and starts AM generation Note that this command is available for compatibility with the legacy 3152A For new applications use the MOD TYPE AM command Use the following commands for programming the FM parameters FM Modulation FM modulation is internal There are two types of waveforms that can Programming be used as the modulating waveforms Standard and Arbitrary The standard waveforms are built in a library of waveforms and could be used anytime without external control The arbitrary waveforms must be loaded into a special FM arbitrary waveform memor
393. oscilloscope as follows Time Base 0 2 ms Sampling Rate 50 MS s at least Trace A View Jitter Type FREQ CLK Trigger source Channel 2 positive slope Amplitude 1 V div 2 Connect 3152B output to the oscilloscope input channel 1 3 Connect the 3152B SYNC to the oscilloscope input channel 2 6 26 Performance Checks EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual 4 Confgure the function generator as follows Frequency 1 kHz Run Mode Continuous Waveform Square wave Amplitude 2 V Square 5 Connect the function generator output connector to the 3152B TRIG IN connector 6 Configure model 3152B controls as follows Waveform Modulated Modulation FM Modulation Run Mode Burst Burst 5 Carrier Freq 1 MHz Mod Frequency 10 kHz Deviation 500 kHz Sync On Output On Test Procedure 1 Verify Burst FM standard waveform operation on the oscilloscope as follows Waveform Burst of 5 Sine waveforms Mod Frequency 10 kHz Burst Period 1ms Max Deviation 1 25 MHz Min Deviation 750 kHz Test Results Pass Fail Gated FM Standard Equipment Oscilloscope function generator Waveforms Preparation 1 Configure the oscilloscope as follows Time Base 0 2 ms Sampling Rate 50 MS s at least Trace A View Jitter Type FREQ CLK
394. ote however that the phase offset resolution depends on the number of points that create the waveform For example waveform that is made of 1024 points can be shifted with increments of 0 359 but another waveform that has only 100 points can be shifted with increments of 3 69 Response The 3152B returns the current phase offset value in units of degrees PHASe2 FINE lt fine_phase gt HS Syntax 0910A lt float gt Description Programs the phase offset between the reference input and the 3152B output in smaller increments The 5 106 Programming Reference EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual output start phase is shifted in reference to the external signal Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt phase gt 36 to 36 Numeric 0 Programs the phase offset between the reference and the output waveform in smaller increments The phase is programmed in units of degrees Note however that the phase offset resolution depends on the number of points that create the waveform For example waveform that is made of 1024 points can be shifted with increments of 0 35 but another waveform that has only 100 points can be shifted with increments of 3 6 Response The 3152B returns the current fine phase offset value in units of degrees The LXI system configuratio
395. ough the normal VXI controller but take control via the LAN port to completely bypass the backplane interface and control instrument functions and parameters from a web page using LXI capabilities The USB port is used for memory stick I O where waveform data can be loaded directly to arbitrary waveform memory This feature was specifically designed for security reasons where breach of secret waveform data can endanger national security if it falls to the wrong hands This way the data is erased immediately as soon as the instrument is turned off but can be restored by a person holding a memory stick with data This version can be expanded to a 3100M 3152B 3152B for dual channel configuration where two instruments can be used independently of each other or synchronized for master slave operation The 3100M carrier can accept other instruments as well although these are not described here e 3100M 3152B 3201A This version includes the 3152B waveform generator combined with the 3201A Signal Amplifier module By connecting the output of the 3152B to the input of the 3201A higher drive capability is available at the output of EADS North America Test and Services Introduction 1 9 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A the 3201A e 3100M 3152B 3202A This version includes the 3152B waveform generator combined with the dual ch
396. ove an anchor to a new location drag the anchor to the left or right as required If you move the left anchor to the right and the right anchor to the left the area between the anchors will fill the entire graph when the Zoom In operation is used Figure 4 32 Zooming In on Waveform Segments Wave Menu EADS North America Test and Services ArbConnection 4 43 Looking at the Waveform Map in Figure 4 32 note that the white portion is the zoomed in area Drag the white area with your cursor to peruse a zoomed in view of any portion of the waveform While zoomed in you can invoke Autoline or Sketch mode Zoom Out The zoom out operation restores the graph to display the complete waveform The Wave menu let you draw standard waveform functions on the graph The Wave command has a library of 8 standard waveforms Sine Triangle Square Sinc Gaussian Exponent Pulse Noise and DC It lets you specify a cardiac ECG waveform or a Pulse Width Modulated PWM waveform It also lets you create waveforms using the Equation Editor Information on how to create waveforms using the Wave menu is given below Creating Waveforms From the Built in Library You can create any waveform from the built in library using the Wave menu by clicking on one of the standard wave options to Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual 4 44 ArbConnection Publication No 9
397. ove to the next link immediately or to hold and wait for a trigger event before moving to the next link The various advance modes are discussed in more detail in another section Sync This specifies the link on which you want to place a synchronization bit The SYNC output must be switched to the Bit source option to enable the use of this feature The Normal SYNC output is LCOM where the output goes high at the beginning of the sequence and returns to low at the end of the sequence The following paragraphs describe the commands that create delete update and modify sequence tables EADS North America Test and Services Operation 3 25 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A Waveform Studio x Segment table m Sequence table Fil Length Append File name _Lenat 1 Mapped C 4 Wav 16bit sin3 way inser 2 Mapped Ch AwavlBbitypulse way 1024 3 Mapped Ch MA al 6bit sinc wav 1024 Delte 4 Free Waveform Shape lt segment 1 gt Figure 3 2 Sequence Table Created in ArbConnection The following is an overview of how to define and program a Sequence sequence of arbitrary waveforms Commands A sequence is made of a series of links A link can stand on its own or link to another step It is possible to have only one link in a sequence but the output will be
398. ows Termination 50 Q 20 dB feedthrough attenuator at the oscilloscope input Setup As required for the test 2 Configure the counter as follows Function TOTB Trigger Level 100 mV 3 Connect 3152B output to the oscilloscope input 4 Configure the function generator as follows Frequency 1 MHz Run Mode As required by the test Wave 2 V Square 5 Connect the function generator output to the 3152B TRIG IN connector 6 Configure the 3152B as follows Frequency 25 MHz Waveform Sine wave Burst Count 1e6 counts Amplitude 1V Trigger Source External Output On Test Procedure 1 Perform trigger and gate tests using Table 6 21 Table 6 21 Trigger Gate and Burst Characteristics 3152B Run External Trigger Oscilloscope Counter Mode Pulse Reading 1 MHz Continuous Gated Level 1 MHz Continuous Gated by level Waveform i Gated Transition 1 MHz Continuous Gated by transition Waveform i E Single shot Burst 1e6 waveforms 6 12 Performance Checks EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual Delayed Trigger Equipment Function generator 50 T connector Counter Characteristics ArbConnection Preparation 1 Configure the Function generator as follows Amplitude 1V Frequency 1 MHz Trigger Mode Triggered Wave Square wave 2 Place the
399. panel that controls operating functions run modes and sets the outputs on and off You may hide or show other panels by clicking the appropriate item under Operation Figure 4 4 EADS North America Test and Services ArbConnection 4 5 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A The Operation panels are detailed in the next section Output ArbConnection displays the Output panel shown in Figure 4 5 automatically The buttons and LEDs are arranged in the following groups Digital Display Radio moplitude V Wave Mode General Parameters These controls adjust amplitude and offset Wave Mode This group lets you select the waveform mode Run Mode These controls are for selecting the Continuous mode or one of the interrupted modes Trigger Gated or Burst PLL These controls enable and disable phase locking and select the source signal Sync Output This group enables and disables the sync signals on the VXIbus backplane and front panel selects the sync qualifier and allows you to adjust the sync pulse position and width relative to the waveform Output These controls are for turning the output signal on and off and for selecting the load impedance A General Parameters Pushbuttons Figure 4 5 Output Panel When you click on a button the 3152B responds immediately When you chang
400. partition the memory define segment length and download waveform data to the 3152B is given in the following paragraphs Table 5 6 Arbitrary Waveforms Commands Summary Keyword Parameter Form Default 3152A HS FORMat WAVE NORMal USER Error not supported v 0100A RESolution 16BIT 12BIT 16BIT 0102A INSTrument LEGacy MODern MOD 0189A BORDer NORMal SWAPped NORM v 0101A TRACe DATA lt data array gt vi 10001 DEFine lt 1 to 10k gt lt 16 to 1 2 4 e6 gt lt segment_ gt lt size gt 10102 DELete NAME 1 to 10k v 09201 ALL v 10210 SELect 1 to 10k 1 v 1030A SEGMent DATA lt data array gt 10501 FORMat WAVE NORMal USER HS Syntax 0100A lt 0 1 gt Response This 3152A command is not supported by the 3152B The 3152B returns an error FORMat WAVE RESolution 16BIT 12BIT HS Syntax 0102A lt 0 1 gt Description This selects between 12 bit or 16 bit waveform formats 16 bits is the default resolution for the 3100M and 12 bits is the default resolution for the 3151B and 3152B for compatibility with legacy models Parameters EADS North America Test and Services Programming Reference 5 51 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A Name Type Default Description 16BIT Discrete 16BIT Arbitrary waveforms are
401. pen the Pulse Editor dialog box Other icons select the current view on the screen clear the memory and download the displayed pulse train to the active channel Depp Sua Faran So gt Figure 4 46 Pulse Composer Toolbar Creating Pulses As was mentioned above creating pulses with the Pulse Composer is simple intuitive and can save you time when non trivial pulses are needed The Pulse Composer takes your design and processes the information determines the appropriate instrument settings and converts the pulse into a waveform for download to the instrument There are a number of terms that will be used throughout the following description Make yourself familiar with these terms before attempting to use the Pulse Composer Pulse Editor The Pulse Editor is the prime tool for creating pulses To invoke the Pulse Editor point and click on the Pulse Editor icon on the Pulse Composer toolbar You can also invoke the editor by clicking on the Section Number icon as will be shown later in this description The Pulse Editor dialog box is shown in Figure 4 44 Pulse Train The Pulse Train view exposes the entire pulse design When downloading the waveform to the instrument the entire pulse train is downloaded regardless of the display mode Pulse Section A pulse train is constructed of 1 or more sections If the pulse is simple it can be created using one section only For more complex EADS North America Test and Services Ar
402. play You can use the dial keyboard or the TI Hi keys to adjust the readout to the required setting After you modify the reading click on the Modify Execute knob to update the 3152B with the new setting EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual Auxiliary Panels Counter Timer EADS North America Test and Services ArbConnection 4 29 The Auxiliary tab provides access to a group of panels that control some auxiliary functions Figure 4 19 There are three panels in this group Counter Timer which provides access to the auxiliary Counter Timer function Pulse Generator which provides access to the digital pulse generator function and X Instrument Sync for multi instrument synchronization control b Operation gt Modulation CounterTimer Pulse Generator X Instrument Sync Figure 4 19 Auxiliary Panels The Counter Timer panel Figure 4 20 contains controls that select the measurement function and adjust the counter timer parameters for measuring external signals The counter timer measures signals that are connected to the TRIG IN input The various parameters that control the counter timer features are described below State The State Group has controls to enable or disable the counter And to reset the counter and arm it for the next measurement
403. ple clock input Signal must be generated from another module in the chassis on this line otherwise the 3152B will not operate correctly Observe the input level limitations before connecting an external signal to this line LBUS lt 0 7 gt Discrete Activates a selection from LBUSO to LBUS7 as the source for the sample clock input Signal must be generated from another module in the chassis on this line otherwise the 3152B will not operate correctly Response The 3152B returns INT EXT ECLTO or LBUS lt n gt depending on the current sample clock source setting VOLTage lt ampl gt MINimum MAXimum HS Syntax 0500A lt float gt Description Programs the peak to peak amplitude of the output waveform The amplitude is calibrated when the source impedance is 509 Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt ampl gt 10e 3 to Numeric 5 Sets the amplitude of the output waveform in units of 16e0 Volts Amplitude setting is always peak to peak Offset and amplitude settings are independent providing that the offset amplitude does not exceed 16 lt MINimum gt Discrete Sets the amplitude to the lowest possible level 10mV MAXimum gt Discrete Sets the amplitude to the highest possible level 16V Response The 3152B returns the current amplitude value The returned value will be in scientific notation e g 100 mV EADS North America Test and Services Programming Reference 5 35 Artisan Technology Group Quality
404. provides access to the remote calibration utility Note however that access to the calibration panel is permitted to qualified service personnel and requires a user name and password Information on how to access the calibration panel is given in Chapter 7 gt Operation gt Modulation GeneraliFilters Calibration Figure 4 26 System Panels The General Filters panel Figure 4 27 provides access to some general system common commands allows read back of information stored in the flash and provides a means to add filter s in series with the output path The General Filters panel and the various parameters that control its functions are described below EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual Figure 4 27 General Filters Panel System The System group has three buttons that are normally associated with system control These are Reset generates a soft reset to the instrument controls and dialog boxes and modifies all parameters to factory default A list of factory defaults is given in Chapter 5 Query Error queries the 3152B for programming errors This command is normally not necessary because ArbConnection won t generate settings conflicts or syntax erorrs But when sending SCPI commands to the instrument using the Command Editor errors can be generated
405. r There are also two built in self generating trigger generators One repeats itself at pre programmed intervals from 100 us to 20 seconds The other has a programmable delay time The re trigger delay is measured from the end of the signal to the EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A Modulation Run Modes Synchronization of Multiple 3152B Modules PLL Synchronization 3152B User Manual start of the next signal and programmed from 100 ns to 20 seconds with a resolution of 20 ns As previously mentioned the 3152B has four run modes Continuous Triggered Gated and Burst However the 3152B behaves differently when generating modulated waveforms While the modulated and non modulated run modes are similar the modulated run mode offers two start options for the output signal during idle Idle is the period of time before the output is triggered or gated to generate a modulated waveform The first option is where the 3152B before receiving a trigger event outputs continuous non modulated waveforms When the trigger or gate occurs the 3152B outputs the modulated waveform When that waveform has completed the instrument resumes outputting non modulated waveforms The second option is where the 3152B before receiving a trigger or gate outputs a DC level When triggered or gated the 3152B
406. r shifted amplitudes depending on the data list A Zero will generate the base level and a One will generate the shifted amplitude Note that the waveform is always a sine wave and that the last cycle is always completed Sample ASK Data Array 0111010001 Parameters Name Type Description lt ask_data gt ASCII Block of ASCII data that contains information for the generator when to shift from base to shifted amplitude and vice versa Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A S Use the following commands for programming the PSK parameters PSK Modulation the PSK function can shift from start to shifted phase setting within Programming the range of 0 to 360 at a frequency determined by the rate value and controlled by a sequence of bits in the PSK data table The commands for programming the phase shift keying function are described below Note that the carrier waveform frequency CW setting is common to all modulation schemes PSK PHASe lt start phase gt HS Syntax 0091A lt float gt Description This programs the start phase of the carrier waveform The start phase shifts when the pointer in the data array points to 0 Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt start_phase gt 010360 Numeric 0 Programs the start phase for the carrier waveform in units of degrees Response The 3152B returns
407. r the equipment connected to it A WARNING A warning alerts you to a potential hazard Failure to adhere to the instructions in a warning could result in personal injury The 3152B is a VXIbus Arbitrary Waveform Generator It has a single channel and communicates using the VXI message based protocol This high performance waveform generator combines five powerful instruments in a single C size card e Arbitrary Waveform Generator e Function Generator e Pulse Generator e Modulation Generator e Counter Timer The front panel has connectors and indicator lights but no controls To control the 3152B use instrument drivers or a soft front panel from your computer Supplied with the 3152B is ArbConnection a software application that controls the 3152B ArbConnection allows you to specify design or edit waveforms and download them from your computer to the 3152B The 3152B powers up in Legacy mode but easily converts between Legacy and Modern modes See Chapters 3 and 5 for more information EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual 3152B Feature e ee C size An Dese SE e e Provision to generate six types of waveforms standard Highlig hts arbitrary sequenced pulse modulated and half cycle e 250 MS s sample clock frequency for generating arbitrary and sequenced wave
408. rain Design Format Cumulative m Time Level Points ET Append Insert Delete Delete All Undo m Section Properties Design Units W ms Section Start 42 8 ms Repeat 2 Apply Duration x R 35 2 ms Figure 4 55 Building Section 5 of the Pulse Example Downloading the Pulse Train If you followed the above description to build this pulse example the screen should look as shown in Figure 4 51 The next step is to download what you see on the Pulse Composer graph into the 3152B waveform generator One last step before you download the waveform to the instrument is to check the Pulse Train Download Summary which appears after you click on the Download icon on the Pulse Composer toolbar Refer to Figure 4 52 for the next section on how to interpret the download summary EADS North America Test and Services ArbConnection 4 71 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Download Summary E Publication No 980935 Rev A Mode of Operation Memory Menagement D Populated segment s 1 Waveforms mode Arbitrary EEN usage pts 1600 r Instrument Settings Pl Select from the menu View gt gt Options Amplitude DI 8 000 Check this box if you do not wish to Offset MI 1 000 show it again Reject Sample clock S s 20e3 Figure 4 56 Pulse Editor Download Summary Interpreting the
409. rameter Form Default 3152A HS SOURCce SEQuence DATA lt data array gt 134014 ADVance AUTOmatic TRIGgered STEP MIX AUTO M 1300A SELect 1to10 1 DEFine lt step gt lt seg_ gt lt repeat gt lt adv_mode_x gt lt sync_bit_x gt 13103 DELete NAME 1 to 4096 v 13201 ALL v 13210 SYNC TYPe LCOMplete BIT LCOM 0106A SEQuence lt header gt lt binary_block gt HS Syntax 13401 lt string gt Description This command builds a complete sequence table in one binary download With this method there is no need to define and download individual sequence steps Using this command sequence table data is loaded into the 3152B using binary blocktransfer in a way similar to that of downloading waveform data using the trace command Binary block transfer allows any 8 bit bytes including extended ASCII code to be transmitted in a message This command is particularly useful for long sequences that use a large number of segment and sequence steps As an example the next command will generate a three step sequence with 16 bytes of data that contain segment number repeats loops and mixed mode flags SEQuence 216 lt binary_block gt This command causes the transfer of 16 bytes of data 2 step sequence to the sequence table buffer The lt header gt is interpreted this way e The ASCII 23 designates the start of the binary data block e 2 designates the number of digits that follow e
410. rameter defines where the signal idles between triggers There are two options CW and DC The DC option will set the idle state to a DC level meaning that in between triggers the output resides on a DC level and generates modulation when a trigger is accepted The CW is similar except the signal idles on the pre trigger CW frequency setting executes the modulation upon receipt of a legal trigger signal and returns to continuous CW frequency output FSK The FSK group contains parameters that control the frequency shift keying function These parameters are control data 0 and 1 frequencies baud rate and marker position Control Data The Control Data button in the FSK group provides access to the data string that controls the sequence of base frequency and shifted frequency It contains the list of O and 1 values that the output will repeatedly follow for its frequency shift keying sequence advance as programmed Figure 4 17 FSK PSK ASK Modulation Panel 0 1 Frequency In FSK the carrier waveform CW has two frequencies an initial frequency level which is set by the 0 frequency parameter and shifted frequency which is set by the 1 frequency The control data table has a list of O and 1 values that flag when the frequency shifts from base to shifted frequency Baud The baud parameter sets the rate at which the generator steps through the sequence of the FSK Control Da
411. rameters may be programmed using the following commands outp sync sour bit Provides a signal that is synchronized with an external trigger event when the 3152B is placed in one of its interrupted modes Generates a narrow sync signal every time the segment is generated The sync EADS North America Test and Services Operation 3 3 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual outp sync sour Icom outp sync sour ssyn outp sync sour hcl outp sync sour puls outp sync sour zero Changing the Publication No 980935 Rev A position along the waveform can be programmed using the OUTP SYNC POS command OUTP SYNC POS is used to set both the TRIGger point and the SYNC point The BIT signal is recommended for use in continuous mode Generates a sync signal in SEQuence mode only once when the selected segment appears for the first time in the sequence The identity of the segment can be programmed using the TRAC SEL command The sync position along the selected waveform can be programmed using the OUTP SYNC POS command The LCOM signal is recommended for use in Sequenced mode Generates a sync signal at intervals that are synchronized with the internal clock generator This option is useful to minimize jitter when using an oscilloscope The SSYNc signal is recommended for use in Triggered mode Generates a trigger signal at intervals equal to half o
412. rammed pulse period and therefore it is recommended that the pulse period be programmed before all other pulse parameters Response The 3152B returns the current rise time value in units of seconds DPULse TRANsition TRAiling lt fall gt HS Syntax 0152A lt float gt Description Programs the interval it will take the pulse to transition from its high to low level settings The parameter is programmed in units of seconds Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt fall gt 0 to 1e3 Numeric 1e 3 Sets the fall time parameter Note that the sum of all parameters including the fall time must not exceed the programmed pulse period and therefore it is recommended that the pulse period be programmed before all other pulse parameters Response The 3152B returns the current fall time value in units of seconds EADS North America Test and Services Programming Reference 5 97 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A Use the following commands for programming the half cycle functions Half Cycle Control and their associated parameters There are three half cycle functions Commands Sine Triangle and Square The specifications and limitations of the half cycle functions are specified in Appendix A The half cycle commands are summarized in Table 5 12 Table 5 12 Half Cycle Commands Summary
413. rated at the SYNC output connector Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt index gt 1 to 30000 Numeric 1 Programs a marker pulse at an index 3D position integer only Response The 3152B returns the current marker position 3D RASTer lt 3D freq gt HS Syntax 0054A lt float gt Description This command sets the sample clock frequency for the 3D modulation profiler The 3D waveforms must be created using an external utility and downloaded to the 3D memory before this function can be used Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt 3D freq gt 1 to 2 5e6 Numeric 1e6 Programs the sample clock frequency of the 3D modulating waveform in units of S s Response The 3152B returns the current sample clock of the 3D modulating waveform value at ye Use the following commands for programming pulse parameters The Digital Pulse pulse is created digitally however it closely simulates an analog Programming pulse generator so pulse parameters are programmed just as they would be programmed on a dedicated pulse generator instrument Bear in mind that since this is a digital instrument there are some limitations to the pulse design that evolve from the fact that the best resolution is one sample clock interval and also keep in mind that the pulse is created digitally in the arbitrary memory and therefore its smallest incremental step has a maximum value limitation as specified in Appendix A The digital pulse co
414. requency occurrences during FM operation 4 Data download is terminated with the MSBit of the last byte set to 1 The following sequence should be used for downloading arbitrary FM Waveforms 1 Prepare your FM waveform data points using the following relationship N Frequency Hz x 14 31655765 2 Use an I O routine such as ViMoveAsync from the VISA I O library to transfer binary blocks of data to the generator Parameters Name Type Description lt binary_block gt Binary Block of binary data that contains information on the arbitrary modulating waveform Use the following command for programming the sweep parameters Sweep Sweep control is internal The frequency will sweep from start to stop Programming frequencies at an interval determined by the sweep time value and controlled by a step type determined by the sweep step parameter There are two sweep modes Linear where the step of which the generator increments from start to stop frequency is linear and Logarithmic where the step of which the generator increments from start to stop frequency is logarithmic The commands for programming the frequency sweep function are described below SWEep FREQuency lt start_freq gt HS Syntax 1610A lt float gt Description This specifies the sweep start frequency The 3152B will normally sweep from the start to the stop frequency however if the sweep direction is reversed the 3152B will sweep from the stop to the start frequ
415. requency reference 0 360 0 05 1 9 0 1 to 100 kHz STD and CW 35dBc lt 100 MHz 45dBc lt 10 MHz 30dBc lt 100 MHz 35dBc lt 10 MHz 2 to 1 MHz 5 to 10 MHz 10 to 100 MHz 5 to 10 MHz 15 to 100 MHz 0 360 0 05 1 10 0 to 99 9 0 99 99 of period each independently 0 99 9 of period each independently 1 200 4 100 200 to 200 Percent of maximum amplitude dc levels 0 to 100 of maximum amplitude 16V to 16 V EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual Arbitrary Waveform Generator Characteristics Description Sample Clock Range Continuous Run Mode All Other Run Modes Resolution Accuracy and Stability Native Vertical Resolution Emulation Vertical Resolution Waveform Segmentation Number of Memory Segments Waveform Segments size and resolution Custom Waveform Creation Software Arbitrary Waveforms are created on a remote computer and downloaded to the instrument through one of the available remote interfaces The frequency of the waveform is calculated from its programmed sample clock value and the number of waveform points that were used for creating the waveform 100 mS s to 250 MS s 300 MS s typically at 25 C 100 mS s to 225 MS s 240 MS s typically at 25 C 11 digits Same as reference 16 bits 65 536
416. rm For example waveform that is made of 1024 points can be shifted with increments of 0 35 but another waveform that has only 100 points can be shifted with increments of 3 6 5 104 Programming Reference EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual Response The 3152B returns the current phase offset value in units of degrees PHASe1 NULL HS Syntax 08500 Description This command is not supported by the 3152B Legacy codes that program this command will be prompted with an error PHASe1 LOCK MASTer SLAVe HS Syntax 0800A lt 1 2 gt Description By definition all 3152B units are turned on as masters This does not interfere with normal operation because the electrical circuits are designed to handle shared nodes This means that for synchronization purpose slave units must be programmed to slave state The sequence to synchronize then is first determine who is master and who is slave using this command and then switch synchronization on using the phas lock 1 command Parameters Name Type Default Description MASTer Discrete MAST Will select the master unit in a multi instrument system The master feeds the sample clock and the synchronization signals through the ECLTrg 0 1 lines SLAVe Discrete Will select the slave unit s in a multi instrument system The slave in
417. rm otherwise let the instrument determine the sample clock setting as required to successfully complete the setting of the sweep Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt scik freq gt 10e 3 to Numeric 1e6 Programs the sample clock frequency in units of 7 250e6 samples per second Response The 3152B returns the current sweep sample clock frequency value SWEep FUNCtion SINusoid TRlangle SQUare HS Syntax 1604A lt 1 2 3 gt Description This specifies the swept function There are three functions that can be swept Sine Triangle and Square The sine sweep is generated by the DDS but the triangle and the square are computed and placed into arbitrary waveform memory in segments and re played as a sequenced waveform Parameters Name Type Default Description SINusoid Discrete SIN Selects sine as the swept waveform TRlangle Discrete Selects triangle as the swept waveform SQUare Discrete Selects square as the swept waveform Response The 3152B returns SIN TRI or SQU depending on the selected waveform setting 5 80 Programming Reference EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual SWEep TIMe lt time gt HS Syntax 1600A lt float gt Description This specifies the time that will take the 3152B to sweep from start to stop frequencies The time does not depend
418. rm with an amplitude of 1Vp p an offset of zero a rise time of 10 of the ramp period and a fall time of 10 of the ramp period rst Restores factory defaults outp 1 Activates the hardware connection to the front panel OUTPUT connector and turns the output on func mode fix Selects the built in library of standard waveforms func shap ramp Selects the ramp from the built in library as the active waveform ramp tran 10 Programs the ramp leading edge rise time in units of percent referenced to the ramp period ramp tran tra 10 Programs the ramp trailing edge fall time in units of percent referenced to the ramp period volt 1 Sets the amplitude level to 1Vp p volt offs 0 Sets the offset level to zero Similar sequences could select different standard waveforms and program their parameters See Chapter 5 for programming references for the complete range of standard waveforms The Apply command provides shortcuts for setting up a waveform and its parameters without programming each parameter individually This also selects the waveform as the active signal at the output connector It does not however eliminate the need for turning on the output You may use the Apply command on a waveform from the built in library or on waveform segments that are pre loaded to the waveform memory Sequenced and modulated waveforms do not use the Apply command The following example uses the Apply command to specify a square wave at the
419. rnrnrrnnnennn Phase Modulation EE 1 ee EN EE Outp t State ee a E Programming the 3152B xcccinrdscsatacassdenentivnontesyedenses Preparation for Use enges tee Logical Address Gelecton Installation eines Ze gad e Eed n a AEN Controlling the Instrument from Remote 2 0 n Installing Software Utilities 2 0 eerste Connecting to a LAN Network eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee LAN Configuration RE Choosing a Static IP Address Connecting to the USB Pont Chapter 3 Operation rnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnvvnnnnnnnnnnnnn VEME uer ornate aes Legacy to Modern Mode errrnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnrnrrnnnnnnen Output Termination sssrrernnnnnvvnnrnrnnrrnnnorrrrnnerennnr Input Output E Power On Reset Defaults nssnnnssesenneeeneeesrrrr rene Turning the Output Ol sasaasenaeassupsar uie Turning the SYNC Output On Selecting the SYNC Gource Changing the SYNC Position and Width Example Generating a Simple Waveform Amplitude Offset Interachon eenen Selecting an Output FUNCTION rrrrnrnrrrrrrrrrrrrrnnnnr Selecting Run Mode 4 seemmesrrvmnseisermnnmemenvninn Continuous Run Mode Triggered Run Mode Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Publication No 980935 Rev A EADS North America Test and Services Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual Re Triggered Run Mode Lasmsndanentongausbeiduunsese
420. rrent frequency applied to the trig pll input If no signal is applied to the trigger input the response will be 0 The returned value will be in scientific notation for example 100mHz would be returned as 100e 3 FREQuency lt freq gt MINimum MAXimum HS Syntax 0400A lt float gt Description Modifies the frequency of the standard waveform and is specified in units of Hertz Hz It has no affect on arbitrary waveforms Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt freq gt 100e 6 to Numeric 1e6 Sets the frequency of the standard waveform in units of 100e6 Hz The frequency command can be used with resolutions up to 14 digits lt MINimum gt Discrete Sets the frequency of the standard waveform at the lowest possible frequency 100e 6 lt MAXimum gt Discrete Sets the frequency of the standard waveform to the highest possible frequency 100e6 Response The 3152B returns the current frequency value The returned value will be in scientific notation for example 100mHz would be returned as 100e 3 positive numbers are unsigned FREQuency RASTer lt sclk gt MINimum MAXimum HS Syntax 0410A lt float gt Description Modifies the sample clock frequency of the arbitrary waveform in units of samples per second It has no affect on standard waveforms Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt sclk gt 100e 3 to Numeric 1e6 Sets the sample clock frequency of the arbitrary and 250e6 sequenced
421. rst gt 1toiM Numeric 1 Programs the burst count integer only Response The 3152B returns the current burst count value TRIGger DELay lt sample clock cycles gt HS Syntax 1131A lt long gt Description The trigger delay time parameter defines the time that elapses between the receipt of a valid trigger signal until the initiation of the first output waveform Trigger delay is turned off using the TRIG DEL 0 command The trigger delay time command will affect the generator only after it has been programmed to operate in interrupted run mode Set the 3152B into interrupted run mode using the INIT CONT OFF command Note that this command is left in the commands list for compatibility with the model 3152A The delay time is programmed in sample clock increments For new applications the TRIG DEL TIME command is recommended because it allows you to program delays in time units instead of in sample clock periods Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt time gt 0 10 to 2e6 Numeric 0 0 turns off the delayed trigger function Delay is integer only programmed in sample clock increments so expect the delay time to change if you modify your sample clock setting EADS North America Test and Services Programming Reference 5 39 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A Response The 3152B returns the current tri
422. ry waveform at the output connector Frequency Sample Clock Freq Number of Data Points For example using a sample clock frequency of 80 MS s with a 1 000 point waveform will generate an 80kHz waveform at the output connector The following command sets the sample clock frequency for arbitrary and sequenced waveforms freq rast lt value gt Set sample clock frequency in units of samples per second Sampling clock frequency can be in the range of 100 mS s to 300 MS s The number of points in the waveform must be an integer multiple of four For example you may use a waveform length of 25 804 EADS North America Test and Services Operation 3 23 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Using the External Sample Clock Input 3 24 Operation Publication No 980935 Rev A throughout the entire range but if you increase the number of points by two then the 3152B will generate an error Note that for compatibility with older code that was used with Model 3152A you may select the Legacy Format mode where the limits for the sample clock change to 100 MS s but the waveform size can be an integer multiple of two The internal sample clock generator has a wide dynamic range that allows the creation of an infinite number of waveforms and frequencies With its top frequency reaching frequencies close to 300 MHz it must use dividers to cre
423. ry and Sequenced Waveforms Leading Edge Offset Description Offset Range Resolution and Accuracy Options 4M Arbitrary Memory VXIbus General Information Module Form Protocol VXIbus Revision SCPI Revision SCPI Emulation Logical Address Settings Shared Memory Write only Front Panel LEDs Front Panel Connectors 5 BNC A 10 3152B Specifications Multiple instruments can be daisy chained and synchronized to provide multi channel systems Phase leading edge offset between master and slave units is programmable lt 75 ns 4 sample clock cycle Standard Arbitrary and Sequenced using the automatic sequence advance mode only Continuous Triggered Gated and Counted Burst 100 ns to 20 s separately programmable for each synchronized instrument 20 ns 1 5 kHz to 100 MHz 2 5 MS s to 150 MS s limited by a specific VXI backplane ability to transmit high frequency signals Leading edge offset is programmable for master and slave units Operates in conjunction with the continuous run mode only lt 100 ns to 20s 20 ns Expands the arbitrary memory from the standard 1 M to 4 M Available on the 3100M 3152B and 3100R 3152B models Single slot C size module A16 A24 A32 D16 Slave Message Based 3 0 1993 0 3152A 3152 3151 VX4750 Specials 1 255 configured via DIP switches D16 A24 A32 Fail Red Access Amber PLL On Amber Output On Green Main Output Sync Output Trigger Input S
424. s Binary Block Parameters SCPI Syntax and Styles 5 4 Programming Reference Publication No 980935 Rev A can also be sent If only specific numeric values are accepted the function generator will ignore values which are not allowed and will generate an error message The following command is an example of a command that uses a numeric parameter VOLT AMPL lt amplitude gt Discrete parameters are used to program settings that have a limited number of values e FlXed USER and SEQuence They have short and long form command keywords Upper and lowercase letters can be mixed Query responses always return the short form in all uppercase letters The following command uses discrete parameters SOUR FUNC MODE FIXed USER SEQuence Boolean parameters represent a single binary condition that is either true or false The generator accepts OFF or 0 for a false condition The generator accepts ON or 1 for a true condition The instrument always returns 0 or 1 when a boolean setting is queried The following command uses a boolean parameter OUTP FILT OFF ON The same command can also be written as follows OUTP FILT 0 1 Arbitrary block parameters are used for loading waveforms into the generators memory Depending on which option is installed the 3152B can accept binary blocks up to 1M bytes The following command uses an arbitrary block parameter that is loaded as binary dat
425. s Operation 3 15 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Standard Waveform Parameters Using the Apply Command 3 16 Operation Publication No 980935 Rev A The built in library of standard waveforms provides basic waveform shapes First select the basic shape and then specify the waveform parameters to create the finished waveform to fit your requirements For each standard waveform shape you may adjust the frequency amplitude and offset Some wave shapes have additional parameters available For example you may set the starting phase for a sine wave or the rise and fall time for a ramp waveform The following example demonstrates how to select a standard pulse waveform and set its parameters rst Restores factory defaults func mode fix Sets the output function to the standard built in library of waveforms This is also the default function mode so if you are using the reset command there is no need to re select this function func shap puls Selects the pulse waveform puls del 0 Sets the delay value to 0 s puls wid 20 Sets the pulse width to 10 expressed as a percentage of the waveform period puls tran 3 Sets the rise time leading edge to 3 expressed as a percentage of the waveform period puls tran tra 5 Sets the fall time trailing edge to 5 expressed as a percentage of the waveform period freq 5e3 Sets th
426. s a sine with reduced dynamic range Start Phase The start phase parameter defines the angle at which the sine will start The example shows start phase of 90 Power The example shows sine cubed Sine to the power of 1 will generate a perfect sine Power range is from 1 through 9 EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A Vertical Scale 4kPts 500e 3kPts Div Horizontal Scale 1kPts 100e 3kPts Div 3152B User Manual l0 x ae tht E 6 BB 4 k Wavelength 1024 Activeseg 1 SZ E R Anchor 510 x Anchor Start pts 0 Preview End pts 510 oe Waveform Amplitude Max 2047 Cancel Min 2048 OK r Wave Properlias Properties Cycles 5 Start Phase 9 Power 3 Figure 4 33 Generating Distorted Sine Waves from the Built in Library The Toolbar The Waveform Screen EADS North America Test and Services The toolbar contains icons for editing the waveform screen icons for saving and loading waveforms fields for selecting an active channel and for adjusting segment length and more The Toolbar is shown in Figure 4 34 For the individual icons refer to the descriptions above of the Wave Composer Menus tS SE bi S Wavelength 1024 Activeseg 1 D P Figure 4 34 Toolbar Icons Waveforms are created and edited on the waveform screen Figure
427. s down It may still be not very interesting however pay close attention to the convention that is used in this equation You cannot type Amplitude p 2p 1000 like you would normally do in your notebook You must use the multiply sign otherwise you ll get a syntax error Now we ll try to generate a simple sine waveform Try this Amplitude p sin 10 Press Preview and sorry you still get nothing on the screen The Wave Composer did not make a mistake The sine of 10 in radians is exactly what it shows You are unable to see the result because the line on your screen running across the 0 vertical point Y REMEMBER The equation must be a function of a single variable and that variable must be directly related to the Horizontal axis Scale setting Now try this Amplitude p sin omg p Still no good but now press the Adjust button and here is your EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual sinewave So what s wrong Well if you ll give it a little amplitude it might help so do it now exactly as follows Amplitude p 8000 sin omg p There you go You should now see a perfect sine waveform with a period of 1000 points This is because you have asked the Equation Editor to compute the sine along p points p is the equation variable remember If you want to creat
428. s follows Frequency 1 kHz Output On Amplitude 1V Offset 1V Mode Modulation Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETUP 28 for a DMM reading of 353 5 mV 3 mV Setup 45 500 mV Amplitude Amplifier In Modulation Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50 Q feedthrough termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function ACV Range 1V 2 Connect the 3152B output to the DMM input Terminate the 3152B output at the DMM input with the 50 feedthrough termination 3 Configure the 3152B as follows Frequency 1 kHz Output On Amplitude 500 mV Offset 1V Mode Modulation Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETUP 29 for a DMM reading of 176 7 mV 2 mV Setup 46 100 mV Amplitude Amplifier In Modulation Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50 Q feedthrough termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function ACV Range 100 mV 2 Connect the 3152B output to the DMM input Terminate the 3152B output at the DMM input with the 50 feedthrough termination 3 Configure the 3152B as follows 7 24 Adjustments and Firmware Update EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A Setup 47 Setup 48 Frequency Output Amplitude Offset Mode Adjustment 3152B User Manual 1 kHz On 100 mV 1V Modulation 1 Adj
429. s into one simple dialog box To access the segment table click anywhere in the Segment Table area It will then turn white The Segment Table area is divided into three parts the table area the waveform shape area and control buttons When you click one of the waveforms the Waveform Shape window displays it The Segment Table has four fields The Seg field contains numbers from 1 through 2 048 designating the programmed memory segment Note that memory segments are numbered from 1 to 16 k The State field shows the current status of the memory segment It can be Free if no file has yet been assigned to this segment number or Mapped if file name has been assigned to the segment but the Download button has not been used yet to move the file to the 3152B memory or Loaded if the process has been completed by pressing either the Download button or the All download all button The File field is an edit field that lets you browse and select file names to be applied to a specific memory segment To change or add file name point and click on the File name field and either type your path or browse to the file location and let Windows find the right path The Length field displays the length of the selected memory segment Memory segments size may be programmed from 16 to the maximum size of your installed memory Note that the length field is not accessible and shown for reference purpose only Artisan Technology Group Qu
430. s shown in Figure 4 1 Startup amp Communication Options i x Communications Setup 17 Interface ir Startup Options Specify an Address Val Communicate Only C Previous Session Setup Ge Reset Instrument amp Panels Detect Automatically C Work Offline ModelList ESTER FTSE 31 52B D D Store mode and don t show this EGEDE EEE box at startup Va VXID 2 Add Address Henmo dress Cancel Figure 4 1 Startup amp Communication Options Dialog Box If desired you may check the Store mode and don t show box to prevent this dialog box from displaying every time you invoke ArbConnection The purpose of this dialog box is to configure the program to communicate properly with the 3152B For example if you are using a GPIB device that has address 4 you may click Specify an Address and then enter the required address Then ArbConnection will automatically use the specified address each time it starts up If you choose not to have this dialog box displayed automatically at startup you may still access and change the options from the System command at the top of the ArbConnection window Make your selection and then click Communicate The Startup amp Communication Options dialog box will close and the main window displays Ar nn ion ArbConnection provides complete control over all features of the bConnectio 3152B Using ArbConnection you may set up the 3152B to Features generate wavefor
431. scription Use this command to query the Status Byte for reported errors or events EADS North America Test and Services Programming Reference 5 115 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A Response The generator returns a summary of the Status Byte register The STB command is similar to a serial poll sequence but is processed like any other instrument command The STB command returns the same result as a serial poll except the request service bit bit 6 is not cleared if a serial poll has occurred TRG HS Syntax 11000 Description Use this command from a remote interface as a soft trigger in lieu of an external generator This command affects the generator if it is first placed in the Trigger or Burst mode of operation and the trigger source is set to BUS TST HS Syntax 15008 Description Use this command to test the functionality of the 3152B Bear in mind that this test does not replace the performance checks but comes to provide basic confidence that the instrument operates and responds correctly to basic commands and functions Response The 3152B returns 0 when no error is detected Non zero response implies problems in one or more of the tested circuits that requires further investigation by a qualified test engineer The 3152B uses the Status Byte register group and the Standard The SCPI Status
432. section and cannot be switched in the middle of a pulse section design DC Intervals programs pulse duration using DC levels only Transition times for this format are at the maximum rate that the generator can produce For example if you want to draw a simple square waveform that has a OV to 3 3V amplitude a 50 duty cycle and a ims period you enter the following parameters Index 1 Level 3 3 Time interval 0 5 Cumulative Time 0 5 Index 2 Level 0 Time Interval 0 5 Cumulative Time 1 0 Note that as you build the segments that the pulse is being drawn on the screen as you type in the parameters Also note that the Cumulative Time column is updated automatically with the cumulative time lapse from the start of the pulse Time Level Points programs pulse turning points using level and time markers This format is a bit more complex to use however it allows the design of pulses with linear transition times For example if you want to draw a simple square waveform that has a OV to 3 3V amplitude a 50 duty cycle a 1ms period and a 100ns transition time you enter the following parameters Index 1 Level 0 Time interval 0 Cumulative Time 0 Index 2 Level 3 3 Time Interval 0 1 Cumulative Time 0 1 Index 3 Level 3 3 Time interval 0 4 Cumulative Time 0 5 EADS North America Test and Services ArbConnection 4 65 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed
433. sections are always appended at the end of the pulse train Insert Section The insert Section menu command lets you insert a new section in between sections that were already designed Only one new section can be inserted at the middle of the train If an empty section already exists the insert command will give an error Delete Section The Delete Section menu command lets you remove sections from the pulse train without affecting the rest of the train If you use this command from the Edit menu make sure that the section you want to remove is currently the active section Remove all Sections The Remove all Sections menu command lets you remove the entire pulse design from the pulse screen and start with a fresh page Undo The Undo command reverses the last editing operation This command is extremely useful in cases where you unintentionally delete a section from the pulse train and want to restore it to the pulse graph The View menu lets you view various sections of the pulse graph The View menu include Pulse Editor Full Train Single Sections and Options Descriptions of the view menu items are given below Pulse Editor The view Pulse Editor menu item invokes a dialog box as shown in Figure 4 44 In general the Pulse Editor is used for placing straight line segments on the screen in intervals that define pulse width rise fall time and amplitude Information how to use the Pulse Editor to create pulse trains is given la
434. sed here Here 100 cycles of a sine wave are amplitude modulated with 10 cycles of sine wave with a modulation depth of 20 To achieve this the upper and lower sidebands are defined separately and added to the fundamental or carrier The upper sideband is produced by the expression 100 cos 110 omg p and the lower sideband by the term 100 cos 90 omg p Use the following equation Ampl p 6000 sin 100 omg p 1200 cos 110 omg p 1200 cos 90 omg p Press Preview and Accept and the waveform graph should look like Figure 4 41 4 54 ArbConnection EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual axi del Reo Eae MU MUGG Weel eels Anchor Waveform Amplitude Level Adjuster Deh amp Z Start pts 10 Max 32767 Cycles I Auto Scaling Been 1 aame ggss E ss End pts 11023 Min 32768 Equation History A Amplitude p Insert Wave Clear Open Save Cance OK enge sin 100 0mg p 1200 c0s 110 0mg p 1200 c0s 90 0mg p DI OO II l Hd gd Wi o H WV D Ni j Figure 4 41 Using Equation Editor to Build Amplitude Modulated Signal with Sidebands Vertical Scale 64kPts SkPis Div Horizontal Scale 1kPts 100e 3kPts Div Combining The last feature to be described here allows you to combine Waveforms waveforms which
435. set and exponent settings as in the following example 1e6 5 0 10 APPLy EXPonential lt freq gt lt ampl gt lt offs gt lt exp gt HS Syntax 0307D lt float gt lt float lt float gt lt integer gt Description This command changes the waveform function to standard exponential and programs the frequency amplitude offset and exponent simultaneously This command affects the output regardless of the current output function For example if the 3152B is in FM mode the 3152B will stop generating FM and will revert to the standard exponential waveform with parametric values as specified by this command Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt freq gt 10e 3 to Numeric 1e6 Programs the frequency of the standard exponential 100e6 waveform in units of Hz lt ampl gt 10e 3 to Numeric 5 Programs the amplitude of the standard exponential EADS North America Test and Services Programming Reference 5 63 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A 16 waveform in units of Volts lt offs gt 7 992 to Numeric 0 Programs the offset of the standard exponential 7 992 waveform in units of Volts lt exp gt 100 to Integer 100 Programs the exponent of the standard exponential 100 waveform Response The 3152B returns the current frequency amplitude offset and exponent settings similar to the following example
436. sions and their respective abbreviated commands that can be used with Equation Editor Equation Editor Operands n Raise to the power Multiply Divide Add Subtract Parentheses e Base of natural Logarithm Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Typing Equations 4 50 ArbConnection Publication No 980935 Rev A pi 7 Circumference of unit diameter circle per Horizontal wavelength in points f l per omg o Zi amp Amplitude in units of points or Hertz sin x The sine of x COS X The cosine of x tan x The tangent of x ctn x The cotangent of x log x The base IO logarithm of x In x The natural base e logarithm of x abs x The absolute value of x 1E120 lt gt 1E120 Numerals equation constants substitute your mathematical expression for x After you get familiar with the operands and conventions you can try a few simple equations and see how they create waveforms Recall that a straight line is defined by Y as a function of X as in the equation Y mX b You can use this to generate a straight line using Equation Editor Assuming first that p 0 try this Amplitude p 1000 Press Preview and see what you get Of course you get an uninteresting line that runs parallel to the X axis Now lets give the line some angle by typing Amplitude p 2 p 2000 Press Preview and see that the line slope
437. ster instrument use the INST SEL 1 command Response The 3152B returns 1 if the coupled state is on or 0 if the couple state is off EADS North America Test and Services Programming Reference 5 27 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A OUTPut SHUNt OFF ON 0 1 Response This 3152A legacy command is not supported by the 3152B The 3152B returns an error OUTPut ECLTrg lt n gt OFF ON 0 1 HS Syntax 0210A lt 0 1 gt Description This command converts ECLTRG lines to outputs and places signals on these lines to be used by other instruments in the chassis as synchronization signals Although the original purpose of these lines was to be used as ECL triggers to other instruments the 3152B uses these lines to synchronize clocks and start signals with other instruments in the chassis The ECLTRG lines run in parallel from slot to slot so it is not important where the receiving module is placed inside the chassis as long as the receiving instrument assigns the same lines as inputs Only two of these trigger lines are used ECLTRGO and ECLTRG1 Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt n gt Numeric integer0 Specifies the ECL trigger line that will be affected by only this command Only two lines are available in this case D and 1 0 1 Discrete 0 Specifies the state of the designated ECL trigger line
438. struments receive the sample clock and the synchronization signals from the ECLTrg 0 1 lines Response The 3152B returns MAST or SLAV depending on the current backplane synchronization setting PHASe2 LOCK OFF ON 0 1 HS Syntax 0920A lt 0 1 gt Description This command will turn the PLL phase lock loop function on and off The reference signal is applied to a front panel input PLL IN and the 3152B locks onto it automatically using a smart frequency phase sensing sequence After lock the phase of the 3152B can be shifted in reference to the input signal The PLL operates in standard and arbitrary waveform modes locking to external signals ranging from as low as 100 Hz to over 10 MHz When placed in PLL mode the LED near its input connector blinks until achieving full lock When locked the LED lights constantly as an indication that the signal is locked to an external reference Parameters Range Type Default Description 0 1 Discrete 0 Turns the PLL function on and off Response The 3152B returns 0 or 1 depending on the current PLL function setting EADS North America Test and Services Programming Reference 5 105 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A PHASe2 LOCK SOURce EXTernal TTLTrg lt n gt LBUS lt n gt ECLTrg0 HS Syntax 0930A lt 1 2 gt Description This command will select the sourc
439. sweep range Logarithmic type defines logarithmic spacing throughout the sweep start and stop settings Parameters Name Type Default Description LINear Discrete LIN Selects the linear sweep spacing LOGarithmic Discrete Select the logarithmic sweep spacing Response The 3152B returns LIN or LOG depending on the selected spacing setting EADS North America Test and Services Programming Reference 5 81 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A SWEep STEP lt _steps gt HS Syntax 1603A lt integer gt Description This programs the number of steps for the swept waveform Program this parameter only if you fully understand the effect on the waveform otherwise let the instrument determine the number of steps as required to successfully complete the setting of the sweep Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt _steps gt 10 to Numeric 1e6 Programs the number of steps in a sweep This number m 2000 integer only affects the swept triangle and square only Response The 3152B returns the current number of sweep steps value SWEep MARKer lt frequency gt HS Syntax 1613A lt float gt Description This function programs marker frequency position Sweep marker can be placed in between the start and the stop frequencies The marker pulse is output from the SYNG output connector Parameters Name R
440. sword Figure 7 1 Enter Password Dialog Box EADS North America Test and Services Adjustments and Firmware Update 7 3 Artisan Technology Group 3152B User Manual Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A Amplitude Figure 7 2 Calibration Panel ei NOTE Initial factory adjustments require that the covers be removed from the instrument Field calibration does not require re adjustments of these factory settings unless the unit is being repaired in an authorized service center Factory adjustments are enclosed in parentheses to differentiate from normal field calibration setups bypass these adjustments when performing field calibration 7 4 Adjustments and Firmware Update EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A VCO Adjustments Setup 1 Setup 2 3152B User Manual Calibrations are marked with numbers from 1 to 49 and except for the 50M and TCXO adjustments in the OSC oscillators group should be carried out exactly in the order as numbered on the panel The numbers that are associated with each adjustment are identified by a Setup Number at the title of each of the adjustments in the following procedure Adjustment values have the range of 1 through 256 with the center alignment set to 128 Th
441. t be programmed separately Use the following command to program the carrier frequency mod carr lt value gt Set the CW frequency in units of Hz The same value will be used for all modulation functions Controlling the As explained above the Advanced Trigger mode allows the 3152B Carrier Base Line output to idle when it has finished a waveform segment and is waiting for the next trigger event The output signal during this time is called the baseline The 3152B offers two options for the base line 1 Carrier un modulated CW carrier 2 DC Level Use the following command to control the carrier base line mod carr bas carr Selects continuous wave CW when the modulated function idles between trigger events mod carr bas dc Selects continuous DC level when the modulated function idles between trigger events Sat The digital pulse generator function provides a way to set up pulse Using the Digital trains an pees ie parameters in units of time Pulse Generator The pulse train is built in the same memory that stores arbitrary waveforms Therefore changing from arbitrary to digital pulse mode and vise versa may overwrite arbitrary waveforms that were previously downloaded Use the command below to select the digital pulse function func mod dpul Selects the digital pulse function If you have not changed parameters then the output will generate a single pulse with the following default settings 10ms period
442. t counter is programmable from 1 to 1 M counts The 3152B can also operate in conjunction with Re triggered mode EADS North America Test and Services Operation 3 9 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Selecting the Trigger Source 3 10 Operation Publication No 980935 Rev A creating a continuous sequence of delayed burst cycles Use the following commands to place the instrument in Burst mode and to program the burst counter init cont off Selects the interrupted run mode If you have not selected a specific interrupted run mode since power up the generator will automatically be placed in triggered run mode trig burs 1 Turns the Burst mode on trig burs coun lt value gt Sets the burst counter After a legal trigger event the instrument will generate the counted number of waveforms and then resume idling at a DC level lt burst event gt This starts the burst generator You may select the source of the burst event from a number of inputs including software trigger front panel input or VXIbus backplane trigger line The counted burst sequence will continue as long as legal trigger events are present at the trigger input Use the following commands to restore Continuous mode trig burs 0 This turns off Burst mode The generator reverts to Triggered run mode init cont on This removes the 3152B from an interrupted run mode
443. t float gt lt float lt float gt lt float gt Description This command changes the waveform function to standard pulse and programs the frequency amplitude offset delay time pulse width and leading and trailing edges simultaneously This command affects the output regardless of the current output function For example if you generate arbitrary waveforms the 3152B will stop generating arbitrary waveforms will revert to the standard pulse waveform and will update the pulse parameters as specified by this command Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt freq gt 10e 3 to Numeric 1e6 Programs the frequency of the standard pulse 100e6 waveform in units of Hz lt ampl gt 10e 3 to Numeric 5 Programs the amplitude of the standard pulse waveform 16 in units of Volts lt offs gt 7 992 to Numeric 0 Programs the offset of the standard pulse waveform in 7 992 units of Volts lt del gt 0 to 99 99 Numeric 10 Programs the delay time of the standard pulse waveform in units of percent lt wid gt 0 to 99 99 Numeric 10 Programs the pulse width of the standard pulse waveform in units of percent lt lee gt 0 to 99 99 Numeric 10 Programs the leading edge transition time of the standard pulse waveform in units of percent EADS North America Test and Services Programming Reference 5 61 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev
444. t operate until performance is checked by qualified personnel Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 6002 Zz Menuer Wo eu vZOSSN3 2007 L 9 000 LINI pue 2007 9 000 LOINS JO SJUSWSJINbel y YIM Sel duoo umeJey jJonpold ay ejqeoidde se sjojs pasnun IS JOAO palje sul SeJEId898 YIM 8JNS0OJDUS Doug Salles PUB S9 BOWOWY YON SGV3 ue ul paesu ei JoNpoJd y USYM zaw JE SUONBOYIOSds SAOge SY UONEUILIOJU Je USUIajddns 400z zwy eisen Aun L 9 000L9NI 2007 g Sept ZZOSSN3I 9 000L9NI Gel L OLOL9 Na s suoHeoyiosds JoNpolq Bulmojjoj 84 0 SUUOJUOD XXX O8L80P OCI L807 XXX 99L80P XXX LGL80P N d JoJLIOUGH WUOJOARAA ISO GZSLE y yey Ajjiqisuodse ajos Japun auejoep 81926 VO eu JS JEeS poog p SODIAIOS PUP S9J SOUS YHON SAVI AyWUOJUOD JO UONEJEJD9G 39 SQJDIAJSG pue S8J EBILSUVW YHON SAVI Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com This page was intentionally left blank Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual Table of Contents Ghaplert hr dteloh EE 1 1 Whats in This TEE 1 1 What s in This ge EE 1 2 Conventions Used in this Manual es ndiczsscecensstenecucacsccecansaites degidtedts caw snenmnapteecannaaayacsnesatisanegiivianiens 1
445. t time you save your pulse the Save As command will be invoked automatically letting you select name path and format pls or wav for your pulse file Save As Use the Save As menu item the first time you save your pulse It will let you select name location and format for your pulse file Print With this men u selection you may print the active Pulse Window The standard printer dialog box will appear and will let you select printer setup or print the waveform page Exit The Exit menu item ends the current Pulse Composer session and EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual Edit Menu View Menu EADS North America Test and Services ArbConnection 4 59 takes you back to the Panels screen If you made changes to your pulse since it was last saved the Pulse Composer will prompt you to Save or Abandon changes these changes The Edit menu isused for adding or removing pulse train sections Use these commands to Append Delete Insert or Undo last operation The editing commands are explained in the following paragraphs Append Section The Append Section menu command lets you append a new section at the end of the pulse train Only one new section can be appended at the end of the train If an empty section already exists the append command will give an error New
446. ta bits Marker Index The marker index programs a step in the control data string to output a pulse at the SYNC output connector The SYNC State button must be turned on to generate the FSK marker output EADS North America Test and Services ArbConnection 4 25 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual 4 26 ArbConnection Publication No 980935 Rev A PSK The PSK group contains parameters that control the phase shift keying function These are control data O and 1 frequencies baud rate and marker position Control Data The Control Data button in the PSK group provides access to the data string that controls the sequence of base phase and shifted phase It contains the list of O and 1 values that the output will repeatedly follow for its phase shift keying sequence advance as programmed 0 1 Phase In PSK the carrier waveform CW has two phase settings an initial phase which is set by the 0 Phase parameter and shifted phase which is set by the 1 Phase The control data table has a list of O and 1 values that flag when the phase shifts from base to shifted phase Baud The baud parameter sets the rate at which the generator steps through the sequence of the PSK Control Data bits Marker Index The marker index programs a step in the control data string to output a pulse at th
447. te with SCPI Command a lt new line gt character The IEEE STD 488 EOI message is a lt new H line gt character Command string termination always resets the Terminator current SCPI command path to the root level The IEEE STD 488 2 standard defines a set of common commands IEEE STD 488 2 that perform functions like reset trigger and status operations Common commands begin with an asterisk are four to five Common characters in length and may include one or more parameters The Commands command keyword is separated from the first parameter by a blank space Use a semicolon to separate multiple commands as shown below RST STB IDN ze The SCPI language defines four different data formats to be used in SCPI Parameter program messages and response messages numeric discrete Type Boolean and arbitrary block Commands that require numeric parameters will accept all commonly used decimal representations of numbers including optional signs decimal points and scientific notation Special values for numeric parameters like MINimum and MAXimum are also accepted Numeric Parameters Engineering unit suffixes with numeric parameters e g MHz or kHz EADS North America Test and Services Programming Reference 5 3 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Discrete Parameters Boolean Parameters Arbitrary Block Parameter
448. ted Waveforms Commands SOURce AM INTernal FREQuency 10e 3 to 1e6 100 0781A DEPTh 0 to 100 50 0780A EXEcute 07820 SWEep FREQuency STARt 10 to 100 0e6 10e3 v 1610A STOP 10 to 10066 1e6 v 1611A RASTer 10e 6 to 25066 MINimum MAXimum 1e6 v 1612A FUNCG tion SINusoidal TRlangle SQUare SIN Computed v 1604A TIME 1 4e 6 to 40 0 1e 3 v 1600A DIRection UP DOWN UP v 1601A SPACing LINear LOGarithmic LIN v 1602A STEP 10 to 2000 20 v 1603A MARKer FREQuency 10 to 10066 505e3 v 1613A Synchronization Commands SOURce PHASe LOCK STATe OFF ON 0 1 0 v 0820A ADJust 0 to 360 0 v 0810A NULL Error not supported v 08500 SOURce MASTer SLAVe MAST v 0800A Synchronization Commands continued SOURce PHASe2 PLL LOCK STATe OFF ON 0 1 0 v 0920A SOURce EXTernal TTLTrg lt n gt ECLTrg 0 EXT v 0930A ADJust 180 to 180 0 v 0900A FINe 36 to 36 0 v 0910A 5 12 Programming Reference Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com EADS North America Test and Services Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual Table 5 1 3152B SCPI Command Summary for 3152A Emulation continued Keyword Parameter Form Default 3152A HS System Commands RESet v 14200 SYSTem ERRor 14300 VERSio
449. tep at the end of the sequence list Use the Insert key to insert a step at the cursor location The Delete key is used for deleting a step at the cursor position Click on the Close to discard of the contents of the dialog box without saving your last actions and to remove the sequence Table from the screen but click on the Save key if you want just to save your work before you close the dialog box The Download key has double action it will download the sequence table to the instrument and will save the contents of your table so the next time you open this table it will have the same contents as you saved in your previous session EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual Half Cycle The Half Cycle panel contains controls that select the half cycle functions and adjust the half cycle parameters The half cycle functions are generated with variable and controllable delay between the halves If triggered mode one half at a time is generated as a result of a trigger signal regardless of the programmed delay value The half cycle functions have different limitations compared to the standard functions these are listed in Appendix A The half cycle panel and the various parameters that control these functions are described below Parameters The Modulation Panels EADS North America
450. ter in this chapter Full Train The view Full Train menu item shows on the pulse graph all Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual E Pulse Editor Section2 lt Points gt Section Structure Love Time Cumulative evel interval Time Publication No 980935 Rev A sections of the pulse train Eventually when all pulse sections have been designed the entire pulse train as shown when the Full Train option has been selected will be downloaded to the instrument as a single waveform Pulse Train Design Format DE Intervals Time Level Points Append Insert Delete Delete All Unda Section Properties Design Units W me Section Start 16 ms Repeat 3 Spply Duration x A Sms Figure 4 44 Pulse Editor Single Section The view Single Section menu item shows on the pulse graph one section at a time Eventually when all pulse sections have been designed the entire pulse train as shown when the Full Train option has been selected will be downloaded to the instrument as a single waveform Options The view options menu item opens the dialog box as shown in Figure 4 45 Use this dialog box to fine tune the Pulse Composer to the way it should deal with operational modes and the waveform memory Information on options is given later in this chapter Pulse Editor Options x
451. teristics Table 6 1 Recommended Test Equipment Equipment Model No Manufacturer Oscilloscope with jitter package LC684D LeCroy Distortion Analyzer 6900B Krohn Hite Digital Multimeter 2000 Keithley Freq Counter 2202R Racal Instruments Spectrum Analyzer E4411 HP Pulse Generator with manual trigger PM857 1 Tabor Electronics VXI Backplane trigger generator 3152B Racal Instruments Test Procedures 6 2 Performance Checks Use the following procedures to check the Model 3152B against the specifications A complete set of specifications is listed in Appendix A The following paragraphs show how to set up the instrument for the test what the specifications for the tested function are and what acceptable limits for the test are If the instrument fails to perform within the specified limits the instrument must be calibrated or tested to find the source of the problem EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A Initial Instrument Setting Frequency Accuracy Frequency Accuracy Internal Reference 3152B User Manual To avoid confusion as to what initial setting is to be used for each test it is required that instrument be reset to factory default values prior to each test Frequency accuracy verifies the accuracy of the internal oscillator
452. teristics General Connector BNC channel 1 SMB channel 2 Impedance 50 Q 75 Q or 600 Q can be special ordered with different impedance setting Coupling DC Protection Short circuit 10 seconds Gain x10 fixed can be special ordered with different gain setting Polarity Non inverting Amplitude 0 to 20 Vp p into matching impedance 50 Q 75 Q or 600 Q 0 to 40 Vp p into high impedance Square Wave Characteristics Transition Time lt 22 ns Aberrations lt 7 Sine Wave Characteristics Bandwidth 15 MHz at 20 Vp p 3dB Accuracy 3 of full scale amplitude range 25 mV Square wave at 1 kHz Flatness 10Vp p 5 of amplitude to 1 MHz 10 of amplitude to 7 5 MHz EADS North America Test and Services 3201 3202A Module Specifications B 1 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A 25 of amplitude to 15 MHz THD 0 1 10 Hz to 100 kHz Harmonics lt 47 dBc 100 kHz to 1 MHz 10 Vp p lt 40 dBc 1 MHz to 10 MHz 10 Vp p lt 37 dBc 10 MHz to 15 MHz 10 Vp p General Physical Size 1 2 high C module Power Requirements 24 VDC 350 mA 24 VDC 350 mA 12 VDC 55 mA 12 VDC 55 mA lt 19 W at full power Signal Ground Grounded to case ground EMC Certification CE marked Safety Designed to meet IEC EN61010 1 UL 3111 1 Workmanship Std Conform to IPC A 610D Environmental Operating Temper
453. termines the phase value When the trigger slope is set to positive and the TRIG PLL is false the phase shift is 0 When TRIG PLL is true the phase shift is 180 To reverse the trigger polarity select the negative trigger slope ASK amplitude shift keying shifts the output between two amplitudes The logic level of the TRIG PLL input determines the instantaneous amplitude value When the trigger slope is set to positive and the TRIG PLL is false the output is at the base amplitude When TRIG PLL is true the output amplitude is shifted by an offset To reverse the trigger polarity select the negative trigger slope EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3D Digital Pulse Waveforms Half Cycle Waveforms Counter Timer General Run Modes 3152B User Manual The 3D function allows you to sweep the output in three dimensions at the same time frequency amplitude and phase You may operate the 3D function only from the ArbConnection utility The waveform memory of the 3152B can be programmed as if it were a pulse generator All pulse parameters are adjustable including period pulse width delay rise time and fall time as well as double pulse parameters The pulse structure is limited only by the resolution of the sample clock and the number of waveform points required to create the p
454. ternal make sure an appropriate signal is connected to the external sample clock connector on the rear panel The ECLTO source is a backplane signal that allows ECL level signals to travel to all VXI modules Click on the SCLK button to access the SCLK parameter The value that is associated with the highlighted indicator appears on the EADS North America Test and Services ArbConnection 4 11 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A digital display You can use the dial keyboard or the 7 H keys to adjust the SCLK setting After you modify the setting click on the Modify Execute knob to update the 3152B with the new reading Parameters The Parameters group contains three parameters Amplitude Offset and Segment The amplitude and offset values displayed in this group are the same as in the Main Panel Whenever you change amplitude or offset in the Parameters group the Main panel is updated automatically The Segment parameter provides access to the active segment for each channel To access the required parameter click on the parameter name The indicator next to the required parameter is then highlighted The digital display shows the value associated with the highlighted indicator You may use the dial keyboard or the 1 HI keys to adjust the setting After you modify the setting click on the Modify Execute kno
455. tg com Publication No 980935 Rev A Pulse Design Limitations Generating Half Cycle Waveforms 3152B User Manual value must be at least 16 mV smaller than the low level setting and must not be below 16 V There are other parameters that control double pulses pulse polarity and others Refer to the programming section of this manual for a complete listing of the digital pulse commands Since the 3152B creates pulses digitally there are inherent limitations to these pulses 1 Step size determines resolution and period The 3152B creates pulses digitally using a sample clock generator that clocks memory points The rate of the sample clock defines the incremental resolution For example suppose you wish to generate pulses at a 100 ms pulse rate with 1 ms high time and the rest of the period low In this case you could select a 1 kS s or 10 kS s clock rate because this is fast enough to generate a high signal of 1 ms using just 100 to 1 000 memory points However if you wanted to define much smaller pulse widths at larger pulse rates then the number of required points would increase as a function of the period The limitation is set by the availability of waveform memory 2 Sum of pulse parameters cannot exceed the period The 3152B will automatically check to determine whether the sum of all timing components exceeds the period Always start your pulse design by assigning the correct pulse period and then work your way
456. the trace on the oscilloscope shows synchronization pulses at 1 us intervals Test Results Pass Fail SYNC Output Equipment Oscilloscope LCOM Preparation 1 Configure the oscilloscope as follows Time Base As required by the test Amplitude 2 V div 2 Connect the 3152B output to the oscilloscope input 1 3 Connect the 3152B SYNC to the oscilloscope input 2 4 Configure model 3152B channel as follows Waveform Sine Run Mode Burst Burst Count 10 Re trigger On Re trig period 10 us Output On Sync Output On Test Procedure 1 From ArbConnection click on the Manual Trigger button and verify that the trace on the oscilloscope shows synchronization pulses having 10 us pulse widths Verify that the SYNC pulse is high for the duration of the burst EADS North America Test and Services Performance Checks 6 19 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A Test Results Pass Fail SYNC Output HCL Equipment Oscilloscope Preparation 1 Configure the oscilloscope as follows Time Base As required by the test Amplitude 2 V div 2 Connect the 3152B output to the oscilloscope input 1 3 Connect the 3152B SYNC to the oscilloscope input 2 4 Configure model 3152B channel as follows Waveform Sine Output On Sync Output On
457. therefore if you select the fixed option make sure your dwell time is programmed as required Parameters Name Type Default Description FlXed Discrete FIX Selects the fixed dwell time amplitude hops mode VARiable Discrete Select the variable dwell time amplitude hops mode Response The 3152B returns FIX or VAR depending on the selected dwell setting 5 90 Programming Reference EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual AHOP DWELI lt dwell_time gt HS Syntax 0062A lt float gt Description This selects the dwell time for amplitude hops when the selected mode is Fixed dwell time hops The dwell time table in this case does not contain the dwell time per step parameters and therefore the value which is programmed with this command remains constant for the entire hop sequence Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt dwell time gt 200e 9 to Numeric 200e 9 Programs dwell time for the fixed dwell time amplitude gt hop function The same dwell time will be valid for each 20 amplitude hop Dwell time is programmed in units of s Response The 3152B returns the current dwell time value AHOP FIX DATA lt fix_hop_data gt HS Syntax 00591 lt string gt Description This command will download the data array that will cause the instrument to hop through the amplitud
458. tific notation for example 100mHz would be returned as 100e 3 positive numbers are unsigned FSK FREQuency BAUD lt baud gt HS Syntax 0080A lt float gt Description This allows the user to select the FSK word rate The word rate is the interval of which the bit streams in the FSK data array are clocked causing the output frequency to hop from carrier to shifted frequency values and vice versa Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt baud gt 1 to 10e6 Numeric 10e3 Programs the rate of which the frequency shifts from carrier to shifted frequency in units of Hz Response The 3152B returns the current baud value FSK FREQuency MARKer lt index gt HS Syntax 0083A lt integer gt Description Programs the location on the data stream that the 3152B will generate a marker pulse designated as an FSK marker or index point The marker pulse is generated at the SYNC output connector Note that if you intend to program marker position you must do it before you load the FSK data list Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt index gt 1 to 4000 Numeric 1 Programs a marker pulse at an index bit position integer only Response The 3152B returns the current marker position FSK DATA lt fsk_data gt HS Syntax 0081 1 lt string gt Description Loads the data stream that will cause the 3152B to hop from carrier to shifted frequency and vice versa Data format is a string of 0 and
459. tion properties State identifies the master or servant property of an instrument Note that the first instrument in the group list is always set automatically as the master If you want it as servant you can use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to move the module higher or lower in the synchronization hierarchy EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual Model shows all instruments from the 3152B family that ArbConnection detected in the chassis Leave the group field blank if you do not wish to synchronize a particular module Address shows the logical address associated with the listed module The address is set using a DIP switch which can be accessed when the module is removed from the chassis Chan Channel this field is relevant for the 3100 3152B 3152B model which has two 3152B units installed in a single VXI slot In this case each instrument operates as a stand alone generator but also can be configured as a dual channel instrument The example in Figure 4 22 shows this instrument with address 13 installed in slot 3 Channel 1 is always the top instrument and channel 2 is installed below and if selected as a group by default channel 1 becomes the master module There is no way to exchange channel designation but if you move channel 2 up its state is re configured
460. tion of waveform coordinates from ASCII and other file formats Simplified generation of complex waveform sequences a Fee Modulation FM Auxiliary 1 4 Introduction Trig Level V Measurement Function Figure 1 2 ArbConnection Control Panels EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual B Wave Composer gt C TemSi wad i joj x File Edit View Wave Download About Daeees if evrebiio pee Wavelenath 1024 Activeseg 1 Sv me L Anchor 0 Vertical Scale 64kPts SkPis Div Horizontal Scale 1kPts 100e 3kPts Div Figure 1 3 ArbConnection Wave Composer Example loj x D Ge HR Sica Full Train S F CH1 CH2 Section Structure 1 Pulse Train Design Format Index Level camel DC Intervals Hr Time Level Points is Append Insert Delete Delete All Undo in in Section Properties Design Units Mme Section Start Oms OrororoHron Repet f3 EA Duration x R 4155 ms Vertical Scale Aw 0 5Y Div Horizontal Scale 4155ms 415 5ms Div Figure 1 4 ArbConnection Pulse Composer Example EADS North America Test and Services Introduction 1 5 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Fa SDComposer File View Help Settin
461. tly highlighted Path LBUS ECLT is used for selecting the connection path LBUS specifies a VXI local bus connection and requires that the master is plugged into the leftmost position and all servants are plugged into adjacent slots to the right to the master module ECLT specifies the VXI backplane ECLTrg line synchronization mode For this mode the location of the master and servant units in the chassis is not crucial because the trigger lines run across the backplane through all slots Apply used to prepare the instruments for the synchronization sequence This button must precede the activation of the synchronization process Activate Once this button is pressed the instruments will synchronize in the selected groups and the master will control the timing of the servant modules Close terminates the current session but does not change the synchronization status EADS North America Test and Services ArbConnection 4 35 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual The System Panels General Filters 4 36 ArbConnection Publication No 980935 Rev A The System tab Figure 4 26 provides access to a group of panels that control some general system parameters and provides access to calibration There are two panels in this group General System which provides access to some system commands utilities and filters and Calibration which
462. tments and Firmware Update 7 5 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A Function DCV Range 1V 2 Configure the 3152B as follows SCLK 180 MHz 3 Connect the DMM probes between R107 and ground Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETUP 51 fora DMM reading of 0 V 100 mV Setup 3 200 MHz SCLK Equipment DMM Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function DCV Range 1V 2 Configure the 3152B as follows SCLK 200 MHz 3 Connect the DMM probes between R107 and ground Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETUP 52 for a DMM reading of 0 V 100 mV Setup 4 220 MHz SCLK Equipment DMM Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function DCV Range 1V 2 Configure the 3152B as follows SCLK 220 MHz 3 Connect the DMM probes between R107 and ground Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETUP 53 for a DMM reading of 0 V 100 mV Setup 5 240 MHz SCLK Equipment DMM Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function DCV Range 1V 2 Configure the 3152B as follows SCLK 240 MHz 3 Connect the DMM probes between R107 and ground 7 6 Adjustments and Firmware Update EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETUP 54 for a DMM reading of 0 V 100
463. to Direct Memory Access DMA The instrument has to be told when to receive data send data surrender or gain control The 3152B has an auto increment address counter and therefore the slot 0 controller must define the base address for both write and read cycles Parameters Name Type Default Description WRITe Discrete EXT Will prepare the shared memory to accept data from the backplane data bus Data will not be shared before this function is turned on using smem 1 READ Discrete Will prepare the shared memory to place data on the backplane data bus Data will not be shared before this function is turned on using smem 1 Response The 3152B returns WRIT or READ depending on the selected shared memory setting SMEMory OFF ON 0 1 HS Syntax 1210A lt 0 1 gt Description Use this command to toggle the shared memory function on and off Use smem mode writ to prepare the instrument for DMA data load from the backplane data bus Parameters Range Type Default Description 0 1 Discrete 1 Toggles the shared memory function on and off When place in on position the instrument cannot accept normal data until the data transfer has been completed Programming examples are given in the driver code Response The 3152B returns 0 or 1 depending on the current shared memory setting 5 112 Programming Reference EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE ww
464. tomatically adjust itself to the selected start point End defines where the created waveform will end Note that as you change the end point the right anchor will automatically adjust itself to the selected end point Waveform Amplitude The vertical axis of the Wave Composer represents 16 bits of vertical resolution That means that the equation is computed resolved and generated with 1 65 536 increments and accuracy The Waveform Amplitude fields in the Equation Editor are used in two cases 1 when the amp parameter is used in the equation or 2 if the Level Adjuster is set to Auto Information on these two Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual 4 48 ArbConnection Publication No 980935 Rev A operations is given later Max defines the positive peak of the vertical axis Min defines the negative peak of the vertical axis Cycles The Cycles parameter defines how many waveform cycles will be created within the specified start and end anchor points Level Adjuster The Level Adjuster is a convenient tool that helps you adjust the amplitude and offset without modifying your equation The Level Adjuster mode does not interfere with your calculations and displays the waveform as computed from your equation The only difference is that your final calculations are stretched or shrunk or offset on the vertical scale to fit the new ampli
465. tor Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt index gt 1 to 5000 Numeric 1 Programs a marker pulse at an index amplitude hop integer only position Response The 3152B returns the current marker position Use the following commands for programming the 3D modulation 3D Modulation parameters 3D modulation requires an external utility to download the Programming modulation coordinates into the 3D memory location In case you intend to build your own 3D profiles use the examples as given in the IVI drivers that are supplied with the 3152B The commands for programming the 3D function are described below Note that the carrier waveform frequency CW setting is common to all modulation schemes 3D DATA lt data array gt HS Syntax 00521 lt string gt Parameters Name Type Description lt data array gt Double Block of binary data that contains information on the 3D profile Data contains amplitude sweeps for both channels as well as frequency and phase sweep parameters for the 3D waveform 5 92 Programming Reference EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual 3D MARKer lt index gt HS Syntax 0053A lt integer gt Description Programs where on the 3D profile the 3152B will generate a pulse designated as 3D marker or index point The marker pulse is gene
466. tor that allows connection to a local area network system This LAN port has three purposes e Download waveform data directly from an external computer without using the VXIbus controller e Control the 3152B in a system that does not have a VXIbus slot 0 controller EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual e Use Ethernet to control VXIbus modules adjacent to the 3152B using VXIbus local bus lines for modules designed to interface with the 3152B in this way The programming section of this manual lists the default settings Additional descriptions of LAN settings are given below Direct connection between a single host computer and a single device is also possible but you must use a special cable that has its transmit and receive lines crossed If your site is already wired connect the 3152B via twisted pair Ethernet cable Take care that you use twisted pair wires designed for 10 100 BaseT network use phone cables will not work Refer interconnection issues to your network administrator After you connect the 3152B to the LAN port proceed to the LAN Configuration section in this chapter for instructions how to set up LAN parameters There are several parameters that you may have to set to establish LAN network communications with a LAN interface Primarily you ll need to esta
467. tput characteristics in one of the interrupted run modes i e triggered burst In this case this parameter defines where the signal idles between triggers There are two options CW and DC The DC option will set the idle state to a DC level meaning that in between triggers the output resides on a DC level and generates modulation when a trigger is accepted The CW is similar except the signal idles on the pre trigger CW frequency setting executes the modulation upon receipt of a legal trigger signal and returns to continuous CW frequency output Amplitude Hop The Amplitude Hop group contains parameters that control the amplitude hop function These are hop data dwell control dwell time and marker position Hop Data The Hop Data button in the Ampl Hop group provides access to the data string that controls the sequence of amplitude hops The hop data table contains a list of amplitude levels that the output steps through the amplitude levels of as programmed in the hop data table Fixed Hold The hold parameter determines how long each step of amplitude dwells on this setting before it will step to the next amplitude setting By selecting Fixed Hold the hold time remains constant throughout the entire hop table Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual 4 28 ArbConnection Publication No 980935 Rev A Frequency Hop Figure 4 18 Amp
468. trary and sequenced waveforms that do not conflict in Continuous mode may conflict in Burst mode The 3152B offers five run modes Continuous Triggered Re triggered Gated Burst In Continuous mode the 3152B repeats the selected waveform continuously The other four modes are known as interrupted that is the output does not generate waveforms until an event initiates a single or multiple output cycle Interrupted modes require a single trigger or multiple triggers to initiate output cycles Trigger events come from various inputs such as VXIbus backplane trigger lines or the front panel connector Information on selecting a run mode and trigger source is given in EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A Continuous Run Mode Triggered Run 3152B User Manual the following paragraphs Use the following commands to select run modes init cont on Selects Continuous mode This is the default state of the instrument Use this command to return to Continuous run mode from any other interrupted mode init cont off De selects Continuous mode If you did not previously select a specific interrupted mode the generator will automatically be placed in Triggered mode Upon power up the 3152B defaults to Continuous mode and automatically starts generating waveforms which appear at the output
469. trigger level setting opens the gate Response The 3152B returns POS or NEG depending on the selected trigger slope setting RETRigger OFF ON 0 1 HS Syntax 0187A lt 0 1 gt Description Toggles the state of the re trigger function The re trigger feature causes the 3152B to self trigger at the end of a triggered signal cycle This differs from internally triggered mode in that the internal trigger timer starts the waveform at a periodic interval and the re trigger feature re triggers the waveform after a delay which begins at the end of the waveform cycle The re trigger command affects the generator only when it is programmed to operate in an interrupted run mode which can be selected using the INIT CONT OFF command Parameters 5 42 Programming Reference EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual Name Type Default Description 0 1 Discrete 0 Toggles re trigger mode Response The 3152B returns 0 or 1 depending on the selected option RETRigger TiMe lt time gt HS Syntax 0161A lt float gt Description Specifies the amount of time between the end of a waveform cycle and the beginning of the next waveform cycle The re trigger interval is measured from waveform end to the triggering of a new waveform cycle to start The re trigger command affects the generator when it
470. trument with HS commands Use 0150A0 to restore the instrument to accept normal SCPI commands Name Type Default Description NORMal Discrete NORM Normal mode where the 3152B accepts SCPI commands FAST Discrete Special high speed mode where the instrument accepts codes that bypass the parser and thus improve speed and response of the test program Response This command returns NORM or FAST depending on the speed setting INSTrument 1 2 HS Syntax 0008A lt 1 2 gt Description This command sets the active instrument for future programming sequences Subsequent commands affect the selected instrument only The 3152B carrier can hold two cards however multiple adjacent modules can be slaved to one master and in this case this command prepares slave modules to accept commands Parameters Range Type Default Description 1 2 Discrete 1 Sets the active instrument for programming from remote Instrument 1 and 2 are associated with one 3152B carrier Response The 3152B returns a 1 or 2 depending on the present active channel setting INSTrument COUPIe MODE MASTer SLAVe HS Syntax 0002A lt 0 1 gt Description This command assigns master or slave properties to the instrument If the assignment is slave most of the instrument s operational functions will be controlled from the master instrument however waveforms amplitudes and offsets can be controlled individually for each slave unit Parameters Name Type D
471. tude 6V Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETUP 6 for a DMM reading of 0 V 20 mV 7 12 Adjustments and Firmware Update EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual Setup 17 Base Line Offset Amplifier Out Arbitrary Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50 Q feedthrough termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function DCV Range 100 mV 2 Connect the 3152B output to the DMM input Terminate the 3152B output at the DMM input with the 50 feedthrough termination 3 Configure the 3152B as follows Output On Amplitude 1V Adjustment 1 Adjust CAL SETUP 7 for a DMM reading of 0 V 5 mV Offset The offset adjustments ensure that the DC offsets are within the A specified range Use this procedure if you suspect that offset accuracy Adjustments is an issue Setup 18 1 V Offset Output Amplifier In Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50 Q feedthrough termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function DCV Range 1V 2 Connect the 3152B output to the DMM input Terminate the 3152B output at the DMM input with the 50 feedthrough termination 3 Configure the 3152B as follows Amplitude 20 mV Offset 1V Output On Adjustment 1 CAL SETUP 46 for a DMM reading of 1 V 5 mV Setup 19 3 V
472. tude and offset boundaries If you change the Max and Min setting in the Waveform Amplitude fields and press the Adjust key your waveform will offset immediately without changing the equation The same way you can also change amplitude only or both amplitude and offset If you check the Manual option you ll have to click on the Adjust button for the Waveform Amplitude parameters to take effect The Adjust button name will change to Restore and back to Adjust if you click on it again If you check the Auto option your waveform will be created automatically with the new Amplitude setting Equation The Equation group has four buttons and the equation field You will be using the Equation field for writing your equations Equation syntax and conventions are discussed in the following paragraphs The Remove button clears the equation field so you can start typing a new equation Click on the Store button to store your equation if you intend to use it again The Browse button provides access to waveform pre stored files in your computer for combining them in new equations The Operands button expands the bottom of the dialog box to show the operands you can use with your equation While you type and store equations they are collected in a history file and can be used again by expanding the history log from the equation field Control Buttons There are four control buttons at the right corner of the dialog box Use the Preview button to previ
473. tude domain therefore every point programs an amplitude level On the other hand FM modulating waveform data programs frequency domain therefore every point sets different frequency The FM modulating waveform data is made of 32 bit words However the GPIB link has 8 data bas lines and accepts 8 bit words only Therefore the data has to be prepared as 32 bit words and rearranged as five 8 bit words before it can be used by the 3152B as FM modulating waveform data Figure 5 8 shows how to prepare the 32 bit word for the FM modulating waveform There are a number of points you should be aware of before you start preparing the data 5 78 Programming Reference EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual 1 The number of bytes in a complete FM modulating waveform data must divide by 4 The 3152B has no control over data sent to its FM waveform during data transfer Therefore wrong data and or incorrect number of bytes will cause errors 2 The LSBit on the last byte sets marker position 0 sets no marker and 1 sets marker You can set as many markers as you want 3 The SYNC output serves as marker output when you have the 3152B set to operate in FM mode Normal SYNC level is TTL low The SYNC output is set to TTL high at the position of the marker This way you can use the SYNC output to mark f
474. turns a decimal value in the range of 0 to 255 which corresponds to the binary weighted sum of all bits set in the register IDN HS Syntax 1506 Description Use this command to query the identity of the 3152B Response The generator returns data organized into four fields separated by commas The generator responds with its manufacturer and model number in the first two fields and may also report its serial number and options in fields three and four If the latter information is not available the device must return an ASCII 0 for each For example 3152B response to IDN is EADS 3152B 0 1 0 OPC HS Syntax 15020 Description Use this command to set the operation complete bit bit 0 in the Standard Event register after the previous commands have been executed OPC HS Syntax 1502 5 114 Programming Reference EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual Description Use this command to synchronize between a controller and the instrument using the MAV bit in the Status Byte or a read of the Output Queue The OPC query does not affect the OPC Event bit in the Standard Event Status Register ESR Reading the response to the OPC query has the advantage of removing the complication of dealing with service requests and multiple polls to the instrument However both the s
475. uality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A DAC Output Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Termination 50 feedthrough at the DMM input Function DCV 2 Connect 3152B output to the DMM input 3 Configure the 3152B as follows Frequency 1 MHz Amplitude 20 mV Output On Offset As specified in Table 6 6 Test Procedure 1 Perform Offset Accuracy tests using Table 6 6 Table 6 6 Offset Accuracy DAC Output at 20 mV 3152B Offset Setting Error Limits DMM Reading 4 000 V 4 000 V 45 mV 1 500 V 1 500 V 20 mV 1 500 V 1 500 V 20 mV 4 000 V 4 000 V 45 mV po Ooo S T 0000V Ovaomv T 8 SET eg ee EE ET 1 Modify 3152B Amplitude setting to 6 V and offset setting to 0 V 2 Continue the Offset tests using Table 6 7 Table 6 7 Offset Accuracy DAC Output at 6 V 3152B Offset Setting Error Limits DMM Reading 0000V os6e5mv LI 1 Modify 3152B Amplitude setting to 1 V and offset setting to 0 V 2 Continue the Offset tests using Table 6 8 Table 6 8 Offset Accuracy DAC Output at 1 V 3152B Offset Setting Error Limits DMM Reading 0 000V o 10mv Offset Accuracy Equipment DMM 6 6 Performance Checks EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev
476. uaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual a gt Operation gt Modulation Serial Data Figure 4 29 Composers Panel Because the 3152B is an arbitrary waveform generator it has to be The Wave loaded with waveform data before it can start generating Composer waveforms The waveform generation and editing utility is part of ArbConnection and is called the Wave Composer This program gives you tools for the definition of arbitrary waveforms It can also convert waveform data from other products such as oscilloscopes and use the data directly as waveforms The program is loaded with many features and options so use the following paragraphs to learn how to create edit and download waveforms to the 3152B using the Wave Composer To launch the Wave Composer point and click on the Wave tab in the Composers section of the Panels bar Figure 4 30 shows an example of the wave composer The Wave Composer has three main sections the Menu bar Toolbar and Waveform graph Refer to Figure 4 30 throughout the description of these sections The Wave Composer The Wave Composer menu bar provides access to standard Menu Bar Windows operations such as File Edit and View In addition there are ArbConnection specific operations such as Wave and System In general clicking on one of the menus pulls down a list of commands Clicking on a listed command may then either open a dialog bo
477. ublication No 980935 Rev A Filter The Filter operation is calculated using a moving average This is done by recalculating each point as an average of a number of symmetrical points adjacent to each point You can filter the entire waveform or you may chose to filter a segment of the waveform by placing the anchors as boundaries on the left and right of the segment Smooth The Smooth operation lets you smooth out rough transitions in your waveform This is done mathematically by multiplying the waveform by the nonlinear portion of a cubic curve The Smooth operation is done on segments of the waveform graph that are bounded by anchors Anchor operations are described later in this chapter Place the anchors to the left and right of the waveform segment to be smoothed and select the Smooth operation The waveform will change its shape immediately to follow the mathematical pattern of a cubic curve Note that small segments with fast transitions when combined with cubic functions tend to generate even larger transitions Therefore be sure to omit such sections of the waveform when you use the Smooth operation Invert The Invert operation lets you invert the entire waveform or a selected segment of a waveform The waveform is inverted about the 0 point on the vertical axis Trim Left The trim left command lets you trim waveforms to the left of the anchor point This command is grayed out if the left anchor was not moved from its
478. ulse shape Just as with a bench top pulse generator pulses are limited to one or two per pulse period and amplitude is fixed from one pulse period to another For applications that require pulse sequences with variable amplitude profiles use the Pulse Composer that is available in ArbConnection The 3152B generates three types of half cycle waveforms sine triangle and square The frequency range is 10 mHz to 1 MHz and the delay between half cycles is programmable from 100 ns to 20 seconds in increments of 20 ns You may also program the starting phase of the waveforms from 0 1 to 359 9 The 3152B can operate as a counter timer to measure frequency period averaged period and pulse width and to count events As a counter timer it measures frequency to over 100 MHz with gate times of 100 us to 1 s When using a gate period of one second it provides seven digits of resolution with an initial accuracy of 1 ppm The 3152B may operate in one of four run modes Continuous Triggered Gated and Burst These modes are described below Note that the 3152B behaves differently when it generates modulated waveforms The description below applies to standard arbitrary and sequenced waveforms The Modulation mode is described later The 3152B responds to a variety of trigger sources front panel triggers the TRIG PLL connector VXIbus backplane trigger lines TTLTrg0 7 and software triggers from the computer There are also two built
479. umeric 0 Programs the offset of the standard sinc waveform in 7 992 units of Volts lt cycles gt 410100 Integer 10 Programs the 0 crossing number of cycles of the standard sinc waveform in units of percent Response The 3152B returns the current frequency amplitude offset and number of 0 crossing cycles settings as in the following example 166 5 0 10 APPLy GAUSsian lt freq gt lt ampl gt lt offs gt lt exp gt HS Syntax 0306D lt float gt lt float lt float gt lt integer gt Description This command changes the waveform function to standard gaussian and programs the frequency amplitude offset and exponent simultaneously This command affects the output regardless of the current output function For example if the 3152B is in FM mode the 3152B will stop generating FM and will revert to the standard Gaussian waveform with parametric values as specified by this command Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt freq gt 10e 3 to Numeric 1e6 Programs the frequency of the standard gaussian 100e6 waveform in units of Hz lt ampl gt 10e 3 to Numeric 5 Programs the amplitude of the standard gaussian 16 waveform in units of Volts lt offs gt 7 992 to Numeric 0 Programs the offset of the standard gaussian waveform 7 992 in units of Volts lt exp gt 410100 Integer 10 Programs the exponent of the standard gaussian waveform Response The 3152B returns the current frequency amplitude off
480. unctions FM AM FSK PSK Frequency Hopping Amplitude Hopping and Sweep Since the modulation run modes are common to all modulation functions they are being tested on the FM modulation function only EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual FM Standard Equipment Oscilloscope Waveforms Preparation 1 Configure the oscilloscope as follows Time Base 50 us Sampling Rate 50 MS s at least Trace A View Jitter Type FREQ CLK Trigger source Channel 2 positive slope Amplitude 1 V div 2 Connect the 3152B output to the oscilloscope input channel 1 3 Connect the 3152B SYNC to the oscilloscope input channel 2 4 Configure model 3152B controls as follows Waveform Modulated Modulation FM Carrier Freq 1 MHz Mod Frequency 10 kHz Deviation 500 kHz Sync On Output On Test Procedure 1 Verify FM operation on the oscilloscope as follows Waveform Sine Frequency 10 kHz Max F 1 25 MHz Min F 750 kHz Test Results Pass Fail 2 Modify the 3152B modulating waveform to triangle then square and then ramp to verify all standard FM waveforms Test Results Pass Fail 3 Move the 3152B marker position to 1 25MHz and verify the marker position Test Results Pass Fail
481. unted burst run modes Response The 3152B returns 1 or 0 depending on the selected option TRIGger HS Syntax 11000 Description Use this command to send a software trigger to the 3152B The trg command has the same effect This command will affect the 3152B while it is running in interrupted run mode INIT CONT 0 and only when the selected trigger source is BUS Response The 3152B will respond to a remote trig command if INIT CONT 0 and TRIG SOUR BUS are both true 5 38 Programming Reference EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual TRIGger BURSt OFF ON 0 1 HS Syntax 1120A lt 0 1 gt Description This command toggles counted burst run mode on and off This command affects the 3152B when it is in INIT CONT 0 mode Parameters Range Type Default Description 0 1 Discrete 0 1 enables counted burst run mode 0 turns burst run mode off Burst count is programmable using the TRIG BURS COUN command Response The 3152B returns 0 or 1 depending on the selected option TRIGger BURSt COUNt lt burst gt HS Syntax 1121A lt long gt Description This function sets the number of burst cycles to be output when Burst Mode is enabled Use the INIT CONT OFF TRIG BURS ON commands to select Burst Mode Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt bu
482. urrent keep alive time out value SYSTem KEEPalive PROBes lt probes gt HS Syntax 0172A lt integer gt Description Programs the number of probes that are used by the keep alive sequence The keep alive mode assures that LAN connection remains uninterrupted throughout the duration of the LAN interfacing Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt probes gt 21010 Numeric 2 Programs the number of probes that are used by the keep alive sequence The time out period is initiated when the LAN is idle for more than the time out period and the LAN will be probed as many times as programmed by this parameter to check if there is an interruption in the LAN communication When communication fails the 3152B reverts automatically to local front panel operation Response The 3152B returns the current keep alive number of probes The system related commands are not related directly to waveform System generation but are an important part of operating the generator These Commands commands can reset or test the instrument or query the instrument for system information Table 5 15 System Commands Summary Keyword Parameter Form Default 3152A HS RESet v 14200 SYSTem ERRor v 14300 VERSion v 144007 INFOrmation CALibration 0175A MODel 0176 SERial 0177A SMEMory MODe READ WRITe WRIT v 1200A STATe OFF ON 0 1 0 v 1210A TEST
483. ust CAL SETUP30 for a DMM reading of 35 35 mV 0 5 mV 50 mV Amplitude Amplifier In Modulation Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50 Q feedthrough termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function Range ACV 100 mV 2 Connect the 3152B output to the DMM input Terminate the 3152B output at the DMM input with the 50 feedthrough termination 3 Configure the 3152B as follows Frequency Output Amplitude Offset Mode Adjustment 1 kHz Modulation 1 Adjust CAL SETUP 31 for a DMM reading of 17 67 mV 2 mV 1 V Amplitude Amplifier Out Modulation Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50 Q feedthrough termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Function Range ACV 1V 2 Connect the 3152B output to the DMM input Terminate the 3152B output at the DMM input with the 50 feedthrough termination 3 Configure the 3152B as follows Frequency Output Amplitude Mode Adjustment 1 kHz On 1V Modulation 1 Adjust CAL SETUP 32 for a DMM reading of 353 5 mV 3 mV EADS North America Test and Services Adjustments and Firmware Update 7 25 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A Setup 49 500 mV Amplitude Amplifier Out Modulation Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 50 Q feedt
484. ut 6 8 Performance Checks EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual 2 Configure the 3152B as follows Amplitude 5V Output On Frequency As required by the test Test Procedure 1 Perform sine wave spectral purity DAC waveforms tests using Table 6 13 Table 6 13 Sine Wave Spectral Purity DAC Output Test at 5 V 3152B Freq Spectrum Analyzer Settings Pa Settings Limits Stat Stop Reading 5 MHz gt 45 dBc 1 MHz 20 MHz gt 35 dBc 1 MHz 100 MHz EE SE 50 MHz gt 35 dBc 10 MHz 200 MHz IT 100 MHz gt 35 dBc 10 MHz 250 MHz 2 Change amplitude to 10 V and perform sine wave spectral purity DAC waveforms tests using Table 6 14 Table 6 14 Sine Wave Spectral Purity DAC Output Test at 10 V 3152B Freq Reading Spectrum Analyzer ST Reding Settings Limits Start Stop Reading 1 MHz gt 35 dBc 100 kHz 10 MHz 5 MHz gt 35 dBc 1 MHz 20 MHz gt 30 dBc 1MHz 100 MHz en pe ET 50 MHz gt 30 dBc 200MHz 100 MHz _ gt 30 dBc 250 MHz a Sine Wave Spectral Equipment Spectrum Analyzer Purity DDS Output Preparation 1 Connect 3152B output to the spectrum analyzer input Use a 50 Q and 20 dB feedthrough termination at the spectrum analyzer input 2 Configure the 3152B as follows Waveform Modulated Modulation OFF Amplitud
485. velength 100 points Waveform Pulse Delay 0 1 Rise Fall 0 High Time 99 9 4 Configure the 3152B as follows SCLK 100 MS s Waveform Arbitrary Amplitude 5V Run Mode Triggered Trigger Level OV Re trigger On Re trigger Delay As required by the test Trigger Source Bus Output On Test Procedure 1 Manually trigger the instrument 2 Perform trigger delay tests using Table 6 23 Table 6 23 Re Trigger Delay Tests 3152B Re trigger Setting Error Limits Counter Reading t s Jm JJ i ms ims menu TC TI 48 Lsp0ml Jf 1081 108280m Trigger Slope Equipment Oscilloscope function generator Preparation 1 Configure the Oscilloscope follows Termination 50 Q 20 dB feedthrough attenuator at the oscilloscope input Setup As required for the test Trigger Source External Connect 3152B output to the oscilloscope input Configure the function generator as follows Frequency 10 kHz Run Mode Continue Waveform 2 V Square 4 Connect the function generator TTL output to the 3152B TRIG IN connector 5 Connect the function generator main output to the 2 channel of the oscilloscope 6 Configure the 3152B as follows Frequency 1 MHz Waveform Sine wave Run Mode Triggered Geif ei 6 14 Performance Checks EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User
486. vices Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual Table 6 4 Amplitude Accuracy DAC output 3152B Amplitude Setting Error Limits DMM Reading 1000V 8 584Ve85mV 000V 1 767v267mV 1000Vv 3584mVa23mv 1 500mV 1767mV 22mv 1000mV 35 34mVe5 4mV LI 3000mV 1767mvasemv Amplitude Accuracy Equipment DMM DDS Output Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Termination 50 feedthrough at the DMM input Function ACV 2 Connect 3152B output to the DMM input 3 Configure the 3152B as follows Waveform Modulated Modulation OFF CW Frequency 1 kHz Output On Amplitude As specified in Table 6 5 Test Procedure 1 Perform amplitude Accuracy tests using Table 6 5 Table 6 5 Amplitude Accuracy DDS output 3152B Amplitude Setting Error Limits DMM Reading 10 00V 8 584Ve85mV LC 3000Vv L2ecveml 1000Vv 3534mve23mv TI 500mV 1767mVa22mv J J 1000mV 3534mv254mv J J 3000mV 1767mvis2mm The offset accuracy test checks the accuracy of the offset generator The offset path is checked for both the DAC route arbitrary and standard waveforms and the DDS route CW and modulated Offset Accuracy waveforms Offset Accuracy Equipment DMM EADS North America Test and Services Performance Checks 6 5 Artisan Technology Group Q
487. w Note that the carrier waveform frequency CW setting is common to all modulation schemes ASK lt amplitude gt HS Syntax 0064A lt float gt Description This programs the normal amplitude setting The amplitude shifts when the pointer in the data array points to a 1 Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt amplitude gt 0to 16 Numeric 5 Programs the amplitude setting in units of Volts Response The 3152B returns the current amplitude value ASK SHIFted lt shift ampl gt HS Syntax 0065A lt float gt Description This programs the shifted amplitude The amplitude shifts when the pointer in the data array points to a 1 Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt shift ampl gt Oto 16 Numeric 1 Programs the shifted amplitude setting in units of Volts Response The 3152B returns the current shifted amplitude value 5 84 Programming Reference EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual ASK BAUD lt rate gt HS Syntax 0066A lt float gt Description This allows the user to select ASK word rate The word rate is the interval of which the bit streams in the ASK data array are clocked causing the output amplitude to hop from one level to shifted amplitude level values and vice versa Parameters Name Range Type Default Des
488. w artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual TEST HS Syntax 1400 Description Use this command to test the functionality of the 3152B Bear in mind that this test does not replace the performance checks but comes to provide basic confidence that the instrument operates and responds correctly to basic commands and functions Response The 3152B returns 0 when no error is detected Non zero response implies problems in one or more of the tested circuits that requires further investigation by a qualified test engineer Since most instruments and devices in an ATE system use similar IEEE STD 488 2 commands that perform similar functions the IEEE STD_488 2 Common document specifies a common set of commands and queries that all compatible devices must use This avoids situations where devices Commands and from various manufacturers use different sets of commands to enable Queries functions and report status The IEEE STD 488 2 treats common commands and queries as device dependent commands For example TRG is sent over the bus to trigger the instrument Some common commands and queries are optional but most of them are mandatory Table 5 16 Common Commands Summary Keyword Parameter Form Default 3152A HS CLS v 15000 ESE 1 to 255 1 v 1501A ESE v 15018 ESR v 15048 IDN v 1506 OPC v 15020 OPC v 15028 OPT 0 1Meg 2 4Me
489. was left intentionally blank 5 124 Programming Reference EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual Chapter 6 Performance Checks What s in Thi This chapter provides the performance tests necessary to troubleshoot at s S the 3152B VXIbus Arbitrary Waveform Generator Chapter A ON am WARNING DO NOT OPEN The procedures described in this section are for use only by qualified service personnel Many of the steps covered in this section may expose the individual to potentially lethal voltages that could result in personal injury or death if normal safety precautions are not observed A CAUTION ALWAYS PERFORM PERFORMANCE TESTS IN A STATIC CAUTION SAFE WORKSTATION SENSITIVE ELECTRONIC DEVICES DO NOT SHIP OR STORE NEAR STRONG ELECTROSTATIC ELECTROMAGNETIC MAGNETIC OR RADIOACTIVE FIELDS The following performance checks verify proper operation of the Performance instrument and should normally be used Checks 1 As a part of the incoming inspection of the instrument specifications 2 As part of the troubleshooting procedure 3 After any repair or adjustment before returning the instrument to regular service EADS North America Test and Services Performance Checks 6 1 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com
490. waveform that is being modulated When placed in Modulation Off the sine waveform is continuously generated from the main output In this mode sine waveforms can be generated from 100 uHz to 100MHz Modulation off operates in Continuous Mode only The CW settings do not automatically change when you switch from one modulation function to another This selects amplitude modulation AM The modulating signal is internal and the following parameters control the AM scheme modulation shape modulation frequency and modulation depth This selects frequency modulation FM The modulating signal is internal and the following parameters control the FM scheme modulation shape modulation frequency and marker placement This selects sweep modulation The modulating signal is internal and the following parameters control the sweep start and stop frequency sweep time and direction sweep spacing and marker placement This selects frequency shift keying FSK The shift sequence is created in a data table that can hold up to 4 000 frequency shift steps The following parameters control FSK modulation shifted frequency baud shift data array and marker placement This selects amplitude shift keying ASK modulation The shift sequence is created in a data table that can hold up to 1 000 amplitude shift steps The following parameters control ASK modulation shifted amplitude baud shift data array and marker placement This s
491. waveform in units of samples per second The sample clock can be programmed with a resolution of up to 14 digits lt MINimum gt Discrete Sets the sample clock frequency to the lowest possible frequency 100e 3 lt MAXimum gt Discrete Sets the frequency of the standard waveform to the highest possible frequency 25066 Response 5 34 Programming Reference EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B User Manual The 3152B returns the current sample clock frequency in scientific notation e g 100MHz would be 100e6 FREQuency RASTer SOURce INTernal EXTernal ECLTrg0 LBUS lt n gt HS Syntax 0411A lt 3 4 16 32 gt Description Selects the source for the sample clock This command affects standard arbitrary and sequenced waveforms The ECLTrg0 and the LBUS lt n gt sources are useful for applications requiring synchronization between adjacent modules Parameters Name Type Default Description INTernal Discrete INT Selects an internal source EXTernal Discrete Activates the external sample clock reference input An external reference must be connected to the 3152B in the range of the internal source for it to continue normal operation Observe the input level and limitations before connecting an external signal ECLTrgO Discrete Activates the backplane ECLTrg0 as the source for the sam
492. x 0301E lt float gt lt float lt float gt lt float gt lt integer gt Description This command changes the waveform function to standard sine and programs the frequency amplitude offset start phase and power exponent simultaneously This command affects the output regardless of the currently selected operating mode For example if the 3152B is in FM mode the 3152B will stop generating FM and will revert to the currently selected standard waveform with parametric values as specified by this command EADS North America Test and Services Programming Reference 5 59 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt freq gt 10e 3 to Numeric 1e6 Programs the frequency of the standard sine waveform 100e6 in units of Hz lt ampl gt 10e 3 to Numeric 5 Programs the amplitude of the standard sine waveform 16 in units of Volts lt offs gt 7 992 to Numeric 0 Programs the offset of the standard sine waveform in 7 992 units of Volts lt phas gt Oto 360 Numeric 0 Programs the phase start of the standard sine waveform in units of percent lt power gt 1to9 Numeric integer 0 Programs the power exponent of the standard sine only waveform Response The 3152B returns the current frequency amplitude offset phase and power exponent settings as in the following example 166 5 0
493. x 0701A lt integer gt Description Programs power for the sine waveform This command has no affect on modulated waveforms Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt power gt 1to9 Numeric 1 Programs the power that the sine function will be raised to Note that even powers will provide waveforms that are positive all points gt 0 whereas odd powers will provide functions that are positive or negative 50 of the time Response The 3152B returns the current power value for the sine function EADS North America Test and Services Programming Reference 5 45 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A TRlangle PHASe lt phase gt HS Syntax 0710A lt float gt Description Programs the start phase for the standard triangular waveform This command has no affect on modulated waveforms Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt phase gt 0 to 360 Numeric 0 Programs the start phase parameter in units of degrees Response The 3152B returns the current start phase value for the triangle function TRlangle POWer lt power gt HS Syntax 0711A lt integer gt Description Programs power for the triangle waveform This command has no affect on modulated waveforms Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt power gt 1to9 Numeric 1 Programs the power that the triangle fu
494. x or generate an immediate action For example clicking on File and then Exit will cause the immediate termination of the Wave Composer On the other hand clicking on Wave and then on Sine will open a Sine Wave dialog box that lets you program and edit sine wave parameters The various commands in the menu bar are listed and described below EADS North America Test and Services ArbConnection 4 39 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual Publication No 980935 Rev A ES wave Composer gt C TemS1 wa0 fal x File Edit View Wave Download About LD RM G EE KS ba S d Wwavelengthf 1024 Active seg 1 IE f A L Anchor 0 R Anchor 1023 Vertical Scale 4kPts 500e 3kPts Div Horizontal Scale 1kPts 100e 3kPts Div File Menu 4 40 ArbConnection Figure 4 30 Wave Composer Opening Screen The File menu has four selections that control waveform file operations This menu also can be used to print the active waveform or to exit from Wave Composer Descriptions of the menu selections from the File pull down menu are given below New Waveform The New Waveform Ctrl N menu item removes the current waveform from the graph window Changes made to the waveform graph should be saved before using the New Waveform menu command because this function is destructive to the displayed waveform Open Waveform The Open Wav
495. y Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual 4 78 ArbConnection Publication No 980935 Rev A Parameters The Parameters tab as shown in Figure 4 56 is used for setting up the duration of the signal the position of the marker if required and the amount of memory that is allocated for this purpose Setting up correctly the parameters in this group is the basic and the most important task before you start designing 3D waveforms The duration can be set in units of ns us ms and seconds and can be programmed within the range of 800 ns to 30 000 s The 3D profiler behaves just like an arbitrary waveform The shape of the profiler is generated using waveform points and a dedicated 3D sample clock So just as the basics for an arbitrary waveform design the duration is derived from the following relationship Duration SCLK of waveform points where SCLK is the 3D sample clock and the of waveform points can be programmed from 2 to 30 000 Shared Horizontal Controls View Parameters Duration fi ms v Marker fo 3D Memon Map 2963 points free 8 Figure 4 60 Parameters Tab The recommended method is to let the 3D composer set up the sample clock and the numbers of points automatically for you however in some cases you may want to fine tune your requirement by pressing the Expand button Figure 4 57 shows the Expanded Parameters options dialog box Expan
496. y and only then can be used as a modulating waveform FM DEViation lt deviation gt HS Syntax 0075A lt float gt Description This programs the deviation range around the carrier frequency The deviation range is always symmetrical about the carrier frequency If you need a non symmetrical deviation range then you can use the arbitrary FM composer screen or an external utility to design such a waveform Parameters Name Range Type Default Description lt deviation gt 10e 3to Numeric 100e3 Programs the deviation range around the carrier 100e6 frequency in units of Hz Response The 3152B returns the current frequency deviation value The returned value will be in scientific notation for example 100mHz would be returned as 100e 3 positive numbers are unsigned FM FUNCtion SHAPe SINusoid TRlangle SQUare RAMP ARB HS Syntax 0078A lt 1 2 3 4 5 gt Description This command selects one of the following waveform shapes as the active modulating waveform Parameters Name Type Default Description SINusoid Discrete SIN Selects the sine shape as the modulating waveform TRlangle Discrete Select the triangular shape as the modulating waveform SQUare Discrete Select the square shape as the modulating waveform 5 76 Programming Reference EADS North America Test and Services Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com Publication No 980935 Rev A 3152B
497. y is to modify the phase offset setting using SCPI commands This method is quite accurate and allows phase offset adjustments in increments of 0 01 The second way is to apply a voltage to the EXT 10MHz input or the PM IN port if it is a 3152B with legacy compatible pinout This changes the start phase of the synthesizer proportional to the voltage level at the phase modulation input An input voltage of 1 V modifies the phase by 20 The phase changes between 180 and 180 as the applied voltage goes from 9 V to 9 V The instrument responds to AC changes or the EXT 10MHz port or PM IN port throughout the frequency range of DC to 10 kHz but the time to lock depends on the lock frequency and the number of waveform samples The 3152B has two elliptic filters 60 MHz and 120 MHz and two Bessel filters 25 MHz and 50 MHz You may switch these filters in to reduce harmonics or high frequency spurs Access to the elliptic filters is disabled while the 3152B is generating standard sine waveforms because these filters are used automatically to construct optimal sine waveforms For safety reasons the 3152B powers up with its output turned off In fact the output circuit is disconnected from the output connector using a mechanical relay which eliminates erroneous and uncontrolled transitions that may occur during power up This protects equipment that remains connected to the output when the mains power fails or the system is powered
498. you specify You may sweep up or down using linear or logarithmic increments Sweep frequency is programmable from 10 Hz to 100 MHz and sweep times can range from 1 4us to 40 seconds Sweep mode is compatible with Continuous Triggered and Gated modes Sweep modes with triangle and square waveforms are computed and placed in memory as complete waveforms This adds delay before the initial output is available while the software computes the waveform All sine swaps use the DDS circuit thus no computation time is required The FM function modulates the frequency of the 3152B output waveform You can modulate the output using built in standard or arbitrary waveforms FM is available in Continuous Triggered and Gated modes The 3152B generates two types of frequency modulation standard and arbitrary For standard modulation the modulation waveform is selected from a built in library of four standard waveforms sine triangle square and ramp For arbitrary modulation complex modulation signals are loaded into modulation waveform memory There are 10 000 points allocated specifically for modulation waveform memory EADS North America Test and Services Introduction 1 17 Artisan Technology Group Quality Instrumentation Guaranteed 888 88 SOURCE www artisantg com 3152B User Manual AM Frequency Hopping Amplitude Hopping FSK PSK ASK 1 18 Introduction Publication No 980935 Rev A The AM function modulates
499. ystem bus and the controller handshake are in a temporary hold off state while the controller is waiting to read the OPC query response Response Returns 1 to the output buffer after all the previous commands have been executed OPT HS Syntax 1505 Description Use this command to query the options that are installed in this specific module Response Returns 0 if no option is installed or 2 for the 4 Meg memory option RST HS Syntax 14200 Description Use this command to reset the instrument to its default setting Factory defaults are listed in the Default column in Table 5 1 SRE lt enable bits gt HS Syntax 1503A lt n gt Description Use this command to enable bits in the Service Request Enable register The selected bits are then reported to the status byte Information on the service request register is given in the following Parameters Name Range Default Description lt enable bits gt 0 63 128 191 0 Programs the event that will cause the register to request service Setting of 0 disables this feature SRE HS Syntax 1503A Description Use this command to query the programmed bits in the Service Request Enable register Response The generator returns a decimal value in the range of 0 to 63 or 128 to 191 since bit 6 RSQ cannot be set The binary weighted sum of the number represents the value of the bits of the Service Request enable register STB HS Syntax 1508AQ De

Download Pdf Manuals

image

Related Search

Related Contents

Programmation Journées scolaires  LEON2 Processor User`s Manual  Controlador Programável MPC1600PLUS  - GERENCIA DE LICITAÇÕES 44 rc 1 MUNICÍPIO DE BARBACENA  USER MANUAL  Frigidaire FASE7074NR Washer/Dryer User Manual    Manual de Instruções  平成4年長審第7号 漁船第八十八福宝丸機関損傷事件 言渡年月日  Service Manual  

Copyright © All rights reserved.
Failed to retrieve file